Home

DS7060 User Manual 2

1. Name Auto call Address City Zip Contact Da 4214270 Notes Upload Created 16 21 Wed Aug 14 1996 Modified 16 25 Wed Aug 14 1996 cancer tes Sp ea Revision 300 Modify oper 2 11 53 AM Fri Aug 16 1996 Panel still online Comm 11 48 Fri Aug 16 1996 Image 16 26 Wed Aug 14 1996 Status Account ID BLANKV32 On line manual 00 05 03 Automatic update of program data as required AUTOMATIC UPDATE This command will update all data as needed WDSRP Users Guide CAUTION The automatic update command will make changes based on the most current information in either the Ac count or the control panel When you first contact a con trol panel you should first perform a complete upload or download UPLOAD This command will upload all data from the con trol panel to WDSRP DOWNLOAD This command will download system data user data alpha data or all data to the control panel from WDSRP depending on which command you choose CANCEL This command will return you to the previous screen 4 3 5 Options This command will allow you to perform the following Optional func tions Find Account Acct ID BLANKY32 Type 7400 1 3 Template NONE Rept ID 1 2 3 4 Sort key 1 Sort key 2 Auto service 5 6 7 8 Panel Time Name Auto call Address Reset City Zip Cont
2. AE1 or AE2 Enclosure Threaded j ground stud OVSTSS koLkLLORWI kell Ni ae AE3 or AE4 Enclosure P N 31005B 1 Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc Page 1 of 1 Installation Instructions for the DS7420i Dual Phone Line Bell Supervision Module Table Of Contents 1 0 Description 2 0 Specifications 3 0 Installation 4 0 Operation 5 0 FCC Compliance Notice 6 0 FCC Phone Connection Notice to Users 7 0 Canadian Department of Communications 8 0 Wiring Diagram 1 0 Description The DS7420i is an accessory board designed for use with the DS7400Xi control communicator It allows the control to be used in NFPA 72 installations The DS7420i provides two supervised 12 VDC signaling outputs one Class A Style D input zone and dual phone line transmission and supervision System is Power Limited except for battery terminals All wiring entering this enclosure must be power limited FCC registration number ESVUSA 20294 KX N DOC number 1249 5895 A Specifications Auxiliary Power Requirements Supervisory 12 VDC nominal 20 mA Alarm
3. A bottom row of command buttons will show those commands avail able They are as follows FILTER This command will allow you to view specific histo ry events by categories and time range By choosing this commana the History Filter screen will appear From this screen you can choose the viewing parameters REPORTS This command allows you to print out history re ports DELETE This command allows you to move the history events to the History Archive or to delete them completely CLOSE This command will return you to the previous screen 4 3 8 Insert New Commands Choose the Insert New command from the right hand column com mand buttons This command is used to create a new Account The Select Initial Account Data window will appear Select initial account data Select the source for the initial data for this new account record Select BLANK for no initial data Select ACCOUNT to copy the data from the current account Select TEMPLATE to copy only the data from the current template Select CANCEL to cancel the Insert New command Account Template Cancel It is here where you choose the source from which you will create the new Account The choices are BLANK Choosing this command will allow you to create a new Account using no initial data This Account will be creat ed from scratch This command will call up a blank Edit Account window From here Copyright 1994 96 Detection Systems Inc
4. Status Power Fire lo Armed DDG Of 4 6 6 C DOWO CLO PIR D DS7447 KEYPAD DS7443 KEYPAD DS7445 KEYPAD This chart will help you understand what each Light LED represents LIGHT FLASHING Armed The control panel is disarmed An exit delay is in progress or an alarm The control panel is armed and no alarms have red has occurred occurred Status One or more zones are not ready One or more zones are bypassed All zones are ready to arm green to arm Power The control panel has lost power Control panel problems See Section 5 17 Normal operation green No AC or battery Error Displays There are no fire alarms A fire zone is in alarm A fire trouble condition exists red Perimeter The perimeter is not armed This light will not flash The perimeter is armed yellow Supervisory This light will not be used by the Not used Not used yellow DS7060 Bell Silenced The bells do not need to be or This light will not flash The bells have been silenced To clear enter the yellow have not been silenced Fire Reset command Trouble There are no trouble conditions This light will not flash A trouble condition exists yellow Zone idi l There are no zone alarms A zone 1 6 is in alarm A zone 1 6 is not readv to arm or if a fire zone a red trouble conditio
5. Record created Last modification Operator when modified Cancel Enter up to 6 characters to name this template Once you complete the necessary information from this window and choose O K the Edit Template window for this new Template will appear It is here where you complete all the programming informa tion concerning this Template Template Choosing this command will allow you to create a new Template using initial data from the current Template displayed This command will call up an Edit Template window with the informa tion showing from the current Template From here you can edit the necessary general information for this new Template Be sure to se lect the Template ID from which you would like this Template based Once you complete the necessary information from this window and choose O K another Edit Template window for this new Template will appear It is here where you can edit all the programming information concerning this Template e Cancel Choosing this command will take you back to the previous window Edit Data Choose the Edit Data command from the right hand column com mand buttons This command is used to edit all system data for this Template WDSRP User s Guide Edit Template 7400XI 3 SAMPLE1 Ei General Keypad Output assignments Partitions Phone control Remote access Zone functions Zone programming Reporti
6. Answer Phone on 4 rings Answer Phone on 6 rings Answer Phone on 7 rings Answer Phone on 5 rings Answer Phone on 8 rings Answer Phone on 6 rings i kk z Answer Phone on 9 rings Answer Phone on 7 rings Answer Phone on 10 rings i Answer Phone on 8 rings Answer Phone on 11 rings Answer Phone on 9 rings Answer Phone on 12 rings Answer Phone on 10 rings kul Answer Phone on 13 rings kul FS a DBIEGI Answer Phone on 11 rings X E EEBBOREEREEE Answer Phone on 14 rings Answer Phone on 12 rings I Answer Phone on 15 rings Answer Phone on 13 rings 9 0 5 are Hex values Answer Phone on 14 rings Fa H Th ill display as A F at the keypads B P itis IE Answer Phone on 15 rings Bypass answering machine ip Se iss alee They will display as A F at the keypads N Bypass answering machine DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 12 31 Programmers and Master Code Programming Programming Addresses 0532 0534 Example To program the Programmer s Code to be 3 4 4 3 Programmer rogrammin fin ogrammers nong programming gelines Program Address 0532 Data Digit 1 3 Data Digit 2 4 what the Programmer s Code will be This Data Diqit Data Digit 3 4 Data Digit 4 3 code is used to enter the programming i 5 a kl i Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 mode from the keypads Enter the Progra
7. If in Residential Mode substitute the f key for the PIN NOTE All bypasses are cleared when the system is disarmed unless they are on 24 hour zones To clear a bypass ona 24 hour zone use Clear Individual or Clear All 5 10 Chime Mode Chime Mode causes the keypad sounders to beep each time a Perimeter or Entry Exit zone is violated while the control panel is off disarmed The 7 command is used to both turn Chime Mode off and on This chart explains the procedure for turning ON and turning OFF Chime Mode ACTION DESIRED COMMAND WHAT WILL HAPPEN 21701017 e Turn ON PIN 7 The keypad sounders will beep for 2 seconds each Chime Mode time a perimeter or entry exit zone is violated The DS7447 display will read Chime Mode On for 5 seconds Turn OFF PIN 7 The DS7447 display will read Chime Mode Off for Chime Mode 5 seconds If in Residential Mode substitute the f key for the PIN 5 11 Zone Test The Zone Test is used to confirm that detectors will report alarms Zone Test works on all zones except 24 hour zones and fire zones While the keypad is in Zone Test no control panel alarms will activate an alarm except 24 hour zone alarms and fire alarms These will override the Zone Test function Caution Be sure not to activate 24 hour or fire zones during the zone test or an alarm signal will be sent The Zone Test will initiate communicator reports only if both
8. 1 Timer Programming Bell Cutoff Times Program Addresses 0195 and 0196 must be programmed for not less than 15 minutes e Entry Exit Delay Times Program Addresses 0191 0193 must be programmed for not longer than 60 seconds 13 4 2 Police Station Connection Follow General System Requirements as listed in 13 4 Required Accessories e The control must be the Detection Systems model DS7400XiCC with a cover actuated tamper switch installed e An ARDIS or DataTAC interface module s The ARDIS module and antenna should be mounted within the protected area e The Detection Systems model DS7481 Phone Line Monitor 1 Timer Programming e Entry Exit Delay Times Program Addresses 0191 0193 must be programmed for not longer than 60 seconds DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc B Grade A Installations using Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter with local bell Follow General Svstem Requirements as listed in 13 4 Required Accessories e The control must be the Detection System s model DS7400XiCC with a cover actuated tamper switch installed The Ademco Model AB 12 bell housing see section 13 6 1 Timer Programming Bell Cutoff Times Program Addresses 0195 and 0196 must be programmed for not less than 15 minutes e Entry Exit Delay Times Program Addresses 0191 0193 must be programmed for not longer than 60 seconds 13 4 3 Central Station Burglary Alarm A Grades
9. 1 through 7 Enter Time Sunday Saturday 0100 1259 A rae the Time re AM PM 4 AM 6 PM Note Entering the command sequence Master Code 0 2 will cause the DS7447 keypad to read back the date display will scroll to this 3 Enter the Day The control panel will exit from the Master Code Programming Mode approximately 15 seconds after the last keystroke Page 16 Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc DS7080i Reference Guide 7 4 Personal Identification Numbers 7 4 1 General Information When programing Personal Identification Numbers it is helpful to know the following terms s PIN Personal Identification Number This is the 4 digit code us ers enter at the kevpad to gain access to the svstem A PIN mav be assigned to each User Number 001 015 User Number This is the number that identifies each person us ing the system There are 15 possible User Numbers 001 015 Authority Level This number determines which functions each user will be able to perform see below Your system may have up to 15 PINs each 4 digits long Each User Number can have only one PIN Attempting to assign the same PIN to multiple User Numbers will result in the three beep error tone and the change will not be made User Number 001 is designated as a Master Code It can be used to add delete or change other PINs User Number 001 is shipped from the factory with the sequence of 1234 This code sho
10. e Armed Status Power a er B User Guide for the DS7060 Control Communicator Off Cae OG 4 5 6 Mae Gw GO Om CALI Ge Keypad Quick Reference Guide Turning On arming your System PIN On PIN No Entry Perimeter Only PIN Perimeter Only PIN No Entry On PIN Arming Sequence Bypass PIN Bypass followed by the Zone number On Normal Arming Perimeter Arming no entry delay Perimeter Arming with entry delay Maximum Security Arming Force Arming Zone Bypass Quick Arm Turning Off disarming your System PIN Off Commands for other System Features Chime Mode Zone Test Read Alarm History Battery Test Communicator Test Fire Reset Fire Trouble Remote Program Dial Out Remote Program Answer Local Battery Sounder Test Error Display Error Display Reset Clear Zone Bypass Guest Code Enable PIN 7 PIN 8 1 PIN 8 9 PIN System Reset PIN 8 2 PIN System Reset PIN Off to silence PIN System Reset to clear PIN 8 3 PIN 8 6 PIN 8 5 PIN 8 7 PIN System Reset PIN Bypass to clear PIN 8 4 NOTE Examples are shown in Commercial Mode but are valid for any mode Detection Systems PTY Ltd Unit 21 45 Gilby Road Mount Waverley Victoria 3149 Australia 61 3 9558 808
11. 5 12 Local Battery Sounder Test This test uses the battery to manually activate all the system sounders for two seconds 8 5 only If the battery voltage is low a battery fault will occur TYPE OF TEST COMMAND WHAT WILL WHAT TO DO SEQUENCE HAPPEN Local Batterv Commercial Mode All keypad lights will turn on If test fails the control panel Sounder Test PIN 8 5 NOTE Zone lights on the DS7443 will indicate a control problem and DS7445 will not turn on Residential Mode If power in your building has 8 5 e The keypad sounder and all alarm been off recentiv wait 2 hours sounding devices will operate for 2 for the batterv to recharge seconds and then trv again Batterv Test Commercial Mode The control panel will perform a battery PIN System Reset test Residential Mode lf there is a Low Battery condition the System Reset control panel will report a Low Battery e If the battery is now functional the control panel will report a battery restoral 5 13 Communicator Test This test is only available if your system transmits alarms and system information to a monitoring service and has been programmed by the security installing company to permit communicator tests This test may only be used in the disarm mode Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 Reference Guide A long beep will initially sound to acknowledge the start of the test If the test is successfu
12. Do not secure the base at this time e The keypad should be mounted so that the bottom of the keypad is no higher than shoulder height of the shortest person using the system With the kevpad s door open remove the chassis from the base 4 0 Wiring by inserting a small flathead screwdriver in the two slots in the bottom of the chassis and pressing up pulling the chassis Be sure all wiring is unpowered de energized before routing straight away from the base Keypad wiring can not be shared with multiplex options bus telephone or siren wiring e Route wiring as necessary from the control panel to the area of the DS7443 DS7444 installation Note No more than 1 keypad may be placed along any single run of 1 000 feet 300 m of 22 AWG 0 8 mm cable Detection Systems PTY Ltd Detection Systems PTY Ltd Detection Systems Ltd Detection Systems Ltd Unit 21 45 Gilby Road Unit 2 The Riverside Centre 19 Rue du 19 Mars 78130 Unit 13 18 17 F New Commerce Centre Mount Waverley Victoria 3149 Australia 148 James Ruse Drive Les Mureaux France 19 On Sum Street Shatin N T 61 3 9558 8088 Parramatta NSW 2150 Australia Phone Fax 33 1 34 74 9576 Hong Kong Fax 61 3 9558 8089 61 2 891 4944 852 2635 2815 Fax 61 2 891 5844 Fax 852 2648 7986 Detection Systems Inc 130 Perinton Parkway Fairport New York USA 14450 9199 Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc 716 223 4060 800 289 0096 Fax 716 223 9180 DS7443 DS7444 Ins
13. fejo 9600 Baud ej joj HI 8DataBis jejelejej0j0j0j0 DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 12 25 Report Programming Program Addresses 0256 0304 and 0320 0340 To send the User number along with open close or partial close reports place an F 5 in the extended digit To disable a report meaning nothing will be sent place a O in the reporting digit When using SIA or Contact ID format place a 1 in the reporting digit of each report you wish to enable It is not necessary to program the extended digit For suggested values for 4 2 and BFSK format see section 16 1 16 3 For SIA and Contact ID the values sent are listed in section 15 2 For other formats consult your central station HEX values Some Data Digit values are higher than 9 These values are programmed by pressing the key followed by another number These values will display as HEX characters when entered The HEX character values are as follows 70O A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F See Glossary section 6 12 for further details Default Default Reporting Extended Reporting Extended Digit 1 Digit 2 i igi Address Digit 1 Digit 2 Zone Funct 6 Restoral 0280 CEN aa Zone Funct 7 Restoral 0281 a Address Keypad Fire Alarm 0256 a ae Keypad Fire Restoral 0257 i aa Zone Funct 1 Alarm of es of Ee of Zone Funct 2 Alarm Zone Funct 3 Alarm Zone Funct 4 Alarm Zone Funct
14. gt 105 112 Octal output 8 Cancelalarm gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 113 120 gt 121 128 Disabled gt Bb 7 Current event Close Check to operate the alarm output if checked the alarm output is operated The Status command will call up the Current Panel Status window This window will show you the status of system parameters specific to this Account control panel such as zone status output status trou ble status arming state partition state You may also edit the status of the control panel from this window All panels will have a Current Event text display at the bottom of the window This text block will display any event that occurs at the con trol panel site while you are on line This message is waiting to be delivered to the central station and requires action by you Because you are on line with the control panel this message will not go further than here You must Acknowledge the event and deliver the message manually to the central station operator for dispatch You may continue with your communications session End the session so the control panel can deliver the mes sage to the proper receiver 4 3 4 Program This command will allow you to perform the following Programming functions Find Account 7A00XI V34 Template NONE Rept ID 1 2 4 Acct ID BLANKY32 Sort key 1 Sort key 2 Auto service 4 _ _
15. 0000 General Control 0061 Zone Number 44 0122 Zone Number 105 0001 Zone Function 1 0062 Zone Number 45 0123 Zone Number 106 0002 Zone Function 2 0063 Zone Number 46 0124 Zone Number 107 0003 Zone Function 3 0064 Zone Number 47 0125 Zone Number 108 0004 Zone Function 4 0065 Zone Number 48 0126 Zone Number 109 0005 Zone Function 5 0066 Zone Number 49 0127 Zone Number 110 0006 Zone Function 6 0067 Zone Number 50 0128 Zone Number 111 0007 Zone Function 7 0068 Zone Number 51 0129 Zone Number 112 0008 Zone Function 8 0069 Zone Number 52 0130 Zone Number 113 0009 Zone Function 9 0070 Zone Number 53 0131 Zone Number 114 0010 Zone Function 10 0071 Zone Number 54 0132 Zone Number 115 0011 Zone Function 11 0072 Zone Number 55 0133 Zone Number 116 0012 Zone Function 12 0073 Zone Number 56 0134 Zone Number 117 0013 Zone Function 13 0074 Zone Number 57 0135 Zone Number 118 0014 Zone Function 14 0075 Zone Number 58 0136 Zone Number 119 0015 Zone Function 15 0076 Zone Number 59 0137 Zone Number 120 0016 Zone Bypass 0077 Zone Number 60 0138 Zone Number 121 0017 Zone Bypass 0078 Zone Number 61 0139 Zone Number 122 0018 Zone Number 1 0079 Zone Number 62 0140 Zone Number 123 0019 Zone Number 2 0080 Zone Number 63 0141 Zone Number 124 0020 Zone Number 3 0081 Zone Number 64 0142 Zone Number 125 0021 Zone Number 4 0082 Zone Number 65 0143 Zone Number 126 0022 Zone Number 5 0083 Zone Number 66 0144 Zone Number 127 0023 Zone Number 6 0084 Zone Number 6
16. Household Fire Alarm using Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter with local bell The control must be installed in accordance with NFPA 72 Required Accessories e At least one Detection Systems model DS250 Series 4 wire smoke detector with an MBAW Series 4 wire base or another Listed 4 wire smoke detector One Wheelock 46T G10 12 bell or 34T 12 horn will provide 85dB for UL985 and NFPA 72 requirements other Listed compatible devices with a voltage range of 10 2 to 14 0 V may be used is required for this application and must be in stalled inside the protected area The standard control enclosure can be used At least one DS7443 DS7445 or DS7447 Keypad must be used Four wire detectors must be used with Listed power supervision devices A compatible Listed four wire detector is the Detection Systems Inc DS250 in an MB4W base A compatible Listed EOL relay is the Detection Systems Inc EOL200 All zones must be used with the EOL resistor P N 25899 provided A Report Programming e Fire Zone Report must be programmed e Low Battery Report Program Address 32 must be programmed e AC Failure Report Program Address 32 must be programmed Timer Programming Bell Cutoff Time Program Address 23 must be programmed for not less than 4 minutes Zone Programming e For household fire installations only the output signal may be pulsed or steady For a combination system see the selection below on alarm output programming Fire
17. No Entry Entry Bypass Bypass System System Reset Reset Keypad Quick Reference Guide Turning On arming your System Commands for other System Features Normal Arming PIN On Chime Mode PIN 7 Perimeter Arming no entry delay Zone Test PIN 8 1 PIN No Entry Perimeter Only Read Event History PIN 8 9 Perimeter Arming with entry delay PIN Perimeter Only Battery Test PIN System Reset Maximum Security Arming Communicator Test PIN 8 2 PIN No Entry On Fire Reset PIN System Reset Custom Arming PIN 4 Remote Program Dial out PIN 8 3 Set Delayed Arming PIN 99 and enter number of hours from Remote Program Answer PIN 8 6 current time to the desired arming time Local Batterv Sounder Test PIN 8 5 Extend Automatic Arming during pre arm time PIN OFF Error Display PIN 8 7 Force Arming Error Display Reset PIN System Reset Enter an arming command followed by Bypass To Silence a Fire Trouble PIN Off Zone Bypass PIN Bypass followed by the Zone number s To Clear a Fire Trouble Display PIN System Reset PIN Bypass to clear ALL Bypasses Access Control Turning Off disarming your System Enter your PIN followed by Off Enter your Access Control PIN follow
18. The DS7447 is a 4 wire Alpha Numeric LCD keypad The DS7445 is a 4 wire LED keypad Both keypads may be used with the DS7460 DS7080i and DS7400Xi series of control communicators and both support all system functions including programming The DS7447 is recommended for programming as visual confir mation is given for each programming entry Note When used with the DS7400Xi the DS7445 LEDs 1 8 represent the 8 hard wired zones on the DS7400Xi control panels The keypads may be surface mounted or mounted to standard single or double gang boxes or 4 inch square boxes The following is a chart of general wiring guidelines 22 AWG 0 8 mm minimum no shield 4 wire DS7060 DS7080i 4 Max DS7400 X Xi Ver 1 amp 2 8 Max DS7400Xi Ver 3 15 Max Wire Gauge Wire Type Max number of Keypads allowed per System Max distance allowed between the Control and each Keypad Max distance of Keypad Wiring per System 1 000 feet 6 000 feet DS7400 Series 4 000 feet DS7060 DS7080i Keypad Addresses Note Each keypad must have its address set with its address pins The keypads must also be programmed at the control panel Select the keypad address 1 15 Place the shorting jumpers over the address pins as shown below Emeeeeee keypad 1 1 2 4 8 eooo MTS keypad 4 SOMMSSS6 keypad 2 MAMAS 66 keypad 3 1 2 1418 1 2 1418 moomo keypad 5 SSMS keypad 6 1
19. X Kevpad Base Mounting The kevpad should be mounted no higher than shoulder height of the shortest person using the svstem e Remove the kevpad s cover Insert a small flat head screwdriver in each slot at the bottom of the base Press up and pull the cover off Surface Mounting Use the base as a template and mark the location of the mounting holes use any holes Provide an opening in the mounting surface for the wiring Pre start the mounting screws Do not secure the base at this point Electrical Box Mounting See the diagram above to select the mounting holes Do not secure the base at this point Wiring Caution Be sure all wiring is unpowered before routing Keypad wiring can not be shared with multiplex options bus telephone or siren wiring Route wiring from the control panel to the keypads Note Up to 2 keypads may be placed along any single 1 000 foot run of 22 AWG 8 mm wire Three keypads may be used on any single 1 000 foot run of 18 AWG 1 mm wire Bring the wiring through the Wire Power R Entrance in the keypad s base Power B Data In w G Secure the base Data Out y Connect the wiring to the keypad s terminal strip Place the keypad cover onto the base While feeding the excess wiring out of the rear of the base press the cover straight in until it latches on Detection Systems Ltd Unit 13 18 17 F New Commerce Centr
20. Zip 14450 Data Voice 55 1212 Enter up to 8 characters as the Account s ID number Once you edit the necessary information from this window and choose OK another Edit Account window for this new Account will appear It is here where you complete all the programming information con cerning this Account 4 3 9 Template Choosing this command will allow you to create a new Account using initial data from a template This command will call up an Edit Account window with the default information showing From here you can edit the necessary general information for this new Account Be sure to select the template ID from which you would like this Account based Once you complete the necessary information from this window and choose OK the Edit Account window for this new Account will ap pear Itis here where you can edit all the programming information concerning this Account WDSRP User s Guide 4 3 10 Edit Data Choose the Edit Data command from the right hand column com mand buttons This command is used to edit all system data The Edit Account window will now appear Edit Account BLANKYV32 General Keypad Output assignments Partitions Phone control Remote access Zone functions Zone programming Be porting System parameters PINs Commercial fire Time windows RS 232 interface Ardis Save Cancel Accept this dialog b
21. cl ebeeeo bOOOLOOEOMBM Terminal 5 7 oorcooroo ELL To control Alarm Output Cut this jumper Terminal 6 A 4 Inner Bell Box Lining Outer Bell Box Disconnect the wire jumper from terminal 4 to the inner housing of the Bell Box prevents a ground fault condition Connect wiring between the control and Bell Box as shown above To use the AB 12 Bell Housing cut the jumper wire JP1 on the control The EOL used in the AB 12 Bell Housing must be 27K ohms Program Zone 8 as a 24 hour zone by programming it to follow zone function 7 Program address 0025 07 Do not change the default programming of zone function 7 Program address 0007 should be 22 DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 14 0 Report Programming 14 1 4 2 Format Reports with Restorals Report Restoral Trouble Address Value Address Value Address Value Zone Function 1 Zone Function 2 Zone Function 3 Zone Function 4 Zone Function 5 Zone Function 6 Zone Function 7 Zone Function 8 Zone Function 9 Zone Function 10 Zone Function 11 Zone Function 12 Zone Function 13 Zone Function 14 Zone Function 15 Low Battery AC Fail System Trouble Keypad Fire Keypad Emergency E Keypad Panic Reports without Restorals Report Report Successful Report Unsuc
22. exceptif 3 1 3 1 with Paritv or 4 1 format EXIT ERROR REPORT is used RECENT CLOSING COMM FAILURE REPORT COMM RESTORE REPORT Exit Error This report is sent if an exit error occurs An exit error occurs when an entrv exit zone is still violated at the end of the exit delay If this happens the entry delay will begin If the system is not disarmed before the entry delay expires an alarm report for the effected zone will be sent and the Exit Error Report will be sent Recent Closing This report is sent along with any alarm reports when there is an alarm within the first five minutes after the system has been armed Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 Reference Guide e Comm Failure Report This report is sent after the programmed number of communicator attempts Refer to Address 22 Dial Attempts e Comm Restore Report This report is sent after there has been a communicator failure Retries will occur after 30 minutes then every 24 hours or when a new event occurs When the next successful communicator attempt occurs this report will be included 8 30 Address 36 Test Reports System Test Two Digits 00 through FF DEFAULT AUTOMATIC TEST REPORT COMMUNICATOR TEST REPORT SVSTEM IN TEST REPORT SVSTEM IN TEST RESTORAL REPORT Automatic Test Report This report is sent at fixed intervals determined by programming Address 48 Automatic Test Report Interval By default the panel will send the first auto
23. you will fill in all the necessary general information for this new Ac count Edit Account New Account Account ID Template NONE 7A00XI vaja ReportiD1 3 Sot key 1 Sort key 2 Auto service NONE Auto call JNONE Name Thomas J Brown Address Detection Systems 130 Perinton Parkway City Fairport Contact T J Brown Zip 14450 Data voice 555 1212 Enter up to 8 characters as the Account s ID number Once the necessary information is filled in choose OK The Edit Account window for this new Account will appear It is here where you complete all the programming information concerning this Account ACCOUNT Choosing the command will allow you to create a new Account using initial data from an existing Account Locate the Account you wish to copy from then choose the Insert New command This command will call up the Edit Account window with the general information showing for the Account you selected to copy The cursor will be in the Account ID field waiting for you to enter a new Account ID Edit Account New Account Account ID 7400xI V3 x Report ID 1 3 Template NONE x Sor key 1 Sort key 2 Auto service NONE sl Auto call NONE 7 Name Thomas J Brown Address Detection Systems Inc 130 Perinton Parkway City Fairport Contact T J Brown
24. 0 Trouble Zone Enter the Pound button Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode Data Digit Keypad Control Trouble Zone Mode Select Option DD Select Option Commercial H Disabled Quick Normally Open Residential Mode Normally Closed Page 36 Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc DS7080i Reference Guide 10 17 Report Programing Addresses 174 230 To send the User number along with open close or partial close reports place an F 5 in the extended digit To disable a report place a 0 in the reporting digit Note Pager format reports may use 0 as a reporting digit When using SIA Contact ID or High Speed 4 9 formats place a 1 in the reporting digit of each report you wish to enable It is not necessary to program the extended digit For suggested values for 4 2 and BFSK formats see Section 12 0 For Programmable SIA Report Types see section 13 SIA Contact ID and High Speed 4 9 values are listed in Section 13 0 For other formats consult your central station HEX values Some Data Digit values are higher than 9 These values are programmed by pressing the reset key followed by another number These values will display as HEX characters when entered The HEX character values are as follows 0 A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F See Glossary Section 6 13 for further details Reporting Extended Reporting Extended Digit Digit Digi
25. 0282 Zone Func 8 Restoral Rpt 0522 Account Code 1298 Zone 101 amp 102 Part Assign 0283 Zone Func 9 Restoral Rpt 0524 Account Code 1299 Zone 103 amp 104 Part Assign 0284 Zone Func 10 Restoral Rpt 0526 Account Code 1300 Zone 105 amp 106 Part Assign 0285 Zone Func 11 Restoral Rpt 0528 Phone Number Gen Cntrl 1301 Zone 107 amp 108 Part Assign 0286 Zone Func 12 Restoral Rpt 0529 Phone Number 1 Format 1302 Zone 109 amp 110 Part Assign 0287 Zone Func 13 Restoral Rpt 0530 Phone Number 2 Format 1303 Zone 111 amp 112 Part Assign 0288 Zone Func 14 Restoral Rpt 0531 Phone Answering 1304 Zone 113 amp 114 Part Assign 0289 Zone Func 15 Restoral Rpt 0532 Programmer s Code 1305 Zone 115 8 116 Part Assign 0290 Zone Func 1 Trouble Rpt 0534 Master Code 1306 Zone 117 amp 118 Part Assign 0291 Zone Func 2 Trouble Rpt 1248 Zone 1 amp 2 Part Assign 1307 Zone 119 amp 120 Part Assign 0292 Zone Func 3 Trouble Rpt 1249 Zone 3 amp 4 Part Assign 1308 Zone 121 amp 122 Part Assign 0293 Zone Func 4 Trouble Rpt 1250 Zone 5 amp 6 Part Assign 1309 Zone 123 amp 124 Part Assign 0294 Zone Func 5 Trouble Rpt 1251 Zone 7 amp 8 Part Assign 1310 Zone 125 amp 126 Part Assign 0295 Zone Func 6 Trouble Rpt 1252 Zone 9 amp 10 Part Assign 1311 Zone 127 amp 128 Part Assign 0296 Zone Func 7 Trouble Rpt 1253 Zone 11 amp 12 Part Assign 1456 Octal Module 1 Relay 1 0297 Zone Func 8 Trouble Rpt 1254 Zon
26. 12 12 5 VDC 1 0 A 12 V 7 0 AH 115 mA 75 mA Standby 75 mA Alarm 100 mA Standby 100 mA Alarm Auxiliary regulated power Optional Standby battery P334 Control panel current draw DS7445 keypad current draw DS7447 keypad current draw Note The total current for all auxiliary devices including keypads and smoke detectors 1 5 A standby and alarm 1 4 Outputs e Alarm Output Normally Closed 1 0 Amp contact connected to auxiliary power Can be programmed for steady or pulsed output e Programmable Output 1 Solid state current sink 1A max Can be used for alarm arming state or access control This output is generally programma ble e Programmable Output 2 Solid state voltage source 500 mA max This is the smoke power re set for Zone 1 when it is used as a fire zone for 2 wire smoke detectors Can be used for alarm arming state or access control Current draw should be subtracted from either maximum auxiliary or maximum alarm current draw Not investigated to the requirements of UL294 1 5 Zones 8 zones 1 trouble zone e Zone Response Time 300 milli seconds 1 6 Keypads 1 6 1 DS7443 Keypad s Total number of keypads 4 Keypads e Maximum wire length each run 400 feet 122m e Maximum wire length total 1600 feet 488m in system e Wire type 4 conductor unshielded 22 AWG 0 8mm or 18 AWG 1 0mm Telephone quad Note Only one keypad is allowed per cable
27. 30 minutes Hexadecimal values EN e EOWA a a For example Data Bight Pata Pitesti 00 Send only with next report Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 1 4 30 minute delay Enter the Program Address 0 1 9 7 3 2 60 minute delay Enter Data Digit 1 1 Enter Data Digit 2 4 18 120 minute delay Enter the pound key 5 0 240 minute delay Program the next Address Program a different 5 5 Random delay at least 15 minutes but Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode less than 120 minutes Data Digit 2 0 5 are Hex values They will display as A through F at the keypads See System Overview section 6 1 1 for A C Fail Report Delay further details Address 0197 00 through FF Default 00 DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 21 21 General Code Arm Only Programming Program Address 0198 0201 This allows for a user with a General Authority level to Arm and Bypass zones he is not able to Disarm Example i i i To programi a G n ral Aurthovty level talbi SBc to farm See Svstem Overview section 6 1 3 for further details and Bvpass zones he is not able to Disarm in Partition 1 Data Digit 1 1 Data Digit 2 0 Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Program Address 0 1 9 8 Data Digit 1 Enter Data Digit 1 1 Enter Data Digit 2 0 Enter the pound key Program the next Add
28. Check for noisy environment and check the wiring 89 display System Fault 59 the ARDIS Module is getting corrupted between the DS7400Xi and the ARDIS Module Unable to arm the system a Zone s faulted a Determine the cause of the problem and clear the indicated zone s b If an AC failure exists you must force b Enter an arming sequence then press the By arm pass key during a 5 second beep DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc General Svstem Problems Continued Svmptom Probable Cause Possible Solution 87 displav Batterv Trouble a The batterv failed a batterv test a lfthere has just been a power failure wait at least two hours for the batterv to recharge then per form a Svstem Reset to re test the batterv and clear the error The batterv is defective Replace the batterv The wiring to the batterv is disconnect Check wiring ed 87 display Zone Trouble A zone is not responding to the control Check wiring to the zone panel or If the zone is not to be used remove from pro gramming The zone is programmed for Trouble on Open and the loop is open If using Normally Closed contacts re program There is a power failure and the panel is zone for alarm on open operating on battery backup If there is a or general power failure wait for the power to If using Normally Open contacts and trouble on return If there is not a general power fail open is de
29. Not for use with phone line monitors System Status ready to arm This is an output programmed to follow the Status Light of the keypad It will activate when the system is ready to arm with no zones violated Zone Alarm This is an output programmed to activate when a zone is in an alarm condition It will remain activated until the system is disarmed or the bell cut off time expires This output is intended to activate bells and sirens This will not activate from Silent or Invisible zones Zone Alarm Delayed by 20 seconds This is an output pro grammed to wait 20 seconds after a zone enters an alarm condi tion to activate It will remain activated until the system is dis armed or the bell cut off time expires This output is intended to activate alarm bells and sirens but provides a delay to allow the user to silence the system before it activates Keypad Sounder Output This is an output programmed to fol low the keypad sounder It activates during the entry pre alert chime mode and during any day monitor alarm It does not follow momentary keypad beeps such as keystrokes Access Output This is an output programmed to activate for 10 seconds when an access control PIN Off is entered at the keypad Not ULL Listed for Access Control UL294 DS7080i Reference Guide e Pulsing Fire Zone This is an output programmed to pulse for a fire alarm one second ON one second OFF California March Ti
30. SRP will then be on line with the control panel An incoming call produces a tone through the speaker of your com puter This is your notification that a call is incoming When this tone is heard you must proceed to the Find Accounts window choose the Communicate command then choose the Pickup command It may take a while for the incoming call to come on line Voice Call This command will dial the phone number to reach this Account s sub scriber voice contact This phone number will reach the person listed in the Contact field Data Call This command will dial the phone number to reach this Account s con trol panel This number will call the control panel directly Manual This command allows you to switch from a Voice call to a Data call If you are speaking with your technician subscriber on the same line as the panel s Data line use the Manual command to switch access to the panel As soon as the subscriber hears a high pitched tone he or she must enter the remote programming answer command se quence PIN 86 on the control panel s keypad and both of you should hang up WDSRP will then proceed to go on line with the control panel Cancel This command will return you to the original Find Account window From this window you may choose a different Account control panel to communicate with The following commands will show when WDSRP is dialing a phone number WDSRP User s Guide Find Accoun
31. Won t send open or close reports Not programmed correctly Reports for partitions 2 8 are being sent with partition 1 s reporting ID Not getting AC power fail reports Panel never transmits history to WD SRP The communicator test report is not being sent 17 3 Zone Problems Probable Gause Fire Alarm displays on keypad but no zone numbers are displayed Every other zone displays Not Ready DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide The account codes for 2 8 are not pro grammed or are not programmed correctly a AC power fail messages are sent only with other reports such as low battery Check A C report offset 0197 If 00 A C report will work like above if another number A C report will be delayed Not programmed to send history Time and date not set Report not programmed properly There was acontrol problem at the time the report should have been sent If this is the case the communicator test re port will not be sent Instead the con trol will send the System Off Normal report In Commercial Fire Mode fire alarms must be silenced before the zone number will display Zone Programming is incorrect Check addresses 0320 0321 0323 and 0187 Check addresses 0496 0526 Try forcing another report to send when AC is not present Wait until the delay times out or set to a lower number if desired Check programming Verify that the time in the panel is set Check programm
32. e Place the keypad chassis onto the base and while feeding the excess cable out the rear of the base press the chassis straight in until it latches on 7 0 Emergency Key Labeling Note Do NOT label the emergency keys if they are not pro grammed If labeling the unmarked key in the lower left corner of the keypad MUST be labeled as the FIRE key because of its programming values pre set in the control panel The unmarked center key should be labeled as the Special Emergency key The unmarked right key should be labeled as the Panic key k E Fire Special Panic Emergency Figure F Emergency Key Labels 8 0 Keypad Faults In case of trouble the DS7443 DS7444 keypad will display the following characteristics Possible Causes e The kevpad s address has not been set with its address pins 3 beep error tone at kevpad The keypad has not been programmed properly at the control panel e The yellow wire has been disconnected Keypads locked out Two or more keypads have been set no tones to the same address No keypad LEDs The red black power wires are light up disconnected or broken DS7443 DS7444 In Guide DS7481 Single Phone Line Monitor Installation Instructions 1 0 Description The DS7481 Single Phone Line Monitor is designed for universal use with most 12 V control communicators that accept N O inputs It is specifically designed to monitor a single phone line for fault conditions When a f
33. lelelele use nosam wose ss f l lelelelelele usea00Baudcomm torwosre elelelelelelele 0 5 are Hex values They will display as A F at the keypads A Only applicable when using the ARDIS option A A If this option is selected see address 0494 0495 These selections can only be used with systems that have only one partition This selection must be chosen for U L Certificated installations when using the ARDIS module 12 29 Phone Number Format Programming Program Addresses 0529 0530 Select Option D Phone Number Disabled 0 3 1 no Extended Reporting 3 1E Extended Reporting Enter the DD as a 3 1 with Parity 3 ot ne Mi Note 3E with Parity ra Select Options O 2 3 4 5 H Phone Number 1 Format Address 0529 fi Bi E Bi Phone Number 2 Format Address 0530 an B E E bi E When using the ARDIS communications module ii mw ej e EA Program address 0529 as data digit 1 Pal je e jej je BORO 7 eee ea a oeae par e ee pe Puse par seora PP ee opines per SE PRE a ee 9 data digit 2 1 Program address 0530 as data digit 1 9 data digit 2 1 sanos fe conan fo 0 and 5 are Hex values They will display as A and F at the keypads DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 12 29 1 Compatable Receivers The following table lists those Digital Alarm Communicator Receivers and Formats that
34. 1 Enter Data Digit 2 6 Enter the Pound button Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode PA 279 Data Digit Select Option Zone 1 not Cross zoned Zone 1 Cross zoned with ALL zones Zone 1 Cross zoned with Zone 2 Select Option Zone 1 Cross zoned with Zone 3 Zone 2 not Cross zoned Zone 1 Cross zoned with Zone 4 E Zone 1 Cross zoned with Zone 5 2 Zone 1 Cross zoned with Zone 6 3 Zone 1 Cross zoned with Zone 7 4 Zone 1 Cross zoned with Zone 8 Zone 2 Cross zoned with Zone 5 Zone 2 Cross zoned with Zone 6 Zone 2 Cross zoned with Zone 7 Zone 2 Cross zoned with Zone 8 Data Digit Select Option ie Zone 3 not Cross zoned Zone 3 Cross zoned with Zone 1 Zone 3 Cross zoned with Zone 2 Select Option Zone 3 Cross zoned with ALL zones Zone 4 not Cross zoned 0 Zone 3 Cross zoned with Zone 4 Mm Zone 3 Cross zoned with Zone 5 Zone 3 Cross zoned with Zone 6 fe Te Zone 3 Cross zoned with Zone 7 Zone 4 Cross zoned with ALL zones 4 Zone 3 Cross zoned with Zone 8 Zone 4 Cross zoned with Zone5 5 Zone 4 Cross zoned with Zone 6 Zone 4 Cross zoned with Zone 7 Zone 4 Cross zoned with Zone 8 PA 281 Data Digit Select Option Zone 5 not Cross zoned Zone 5 Cross zoned with Zone 1 Zone 5 Cross zoned with Zone 2 Select Option Zone 5 Cross zoned with Zone 3 Zone 6 not Cross zoned Zone 5 Cross zoned with Zone 4 Zone
35. 3 1 with Paritv 3 3 1E with Parity 4 4 5 4 2 6 BFSK SIA 110 Baud 8 Contact ID 9 SIA 300 Baud ROBOFON Sweden only Customer Sweden only wo o EN 0 3 and 5 are Hex values They will display as A D and F at the keypads Select Options 0 Enter the DD as a a ae CC 2800 Re Datel ea00 HA Apowedss Ne 16 e 10 Pulses per Second PPS G fei eje OE pe Sone E E ei 40 Pulses per Second PPS Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc DS7080i Reference Guide 10 20 Programmer s Code Programming Program Address 239 Example Programmer s Code programming defines what the Programmer s Code To programithe Programmer s Code to Peete will be This code is used to access the programming mode from the Data Digit 1 3 Data Digit 2 4 Data Digit 3 4 Data Digit 4 3 keypads see Section 8 0 Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Program Address 2 3 9 Enter Data Digit 1 3 Enter Data Digit 2 4 Enter Data Digit 3 4 Enter Data Digit 4 3 Enter the Pound button Program Address 239 Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the ini Programmer s Mode Data Digit 2 3 Programmer s Code Enter as 4 digits It can not be the same as any PIN number The Default for the Programmer s Code 9876 10 21 Master Code Programming Program Address 241 Example Master Code pr
36. 34 4 2 34 4 2 Format 52 50 Hz 60 Hz 5 30 A AC Failure Report 37 AC Failure Report Delay 41 AC Failure Restoral Report 37 Alarm Sounds 17 Alpha Label 31 Answering Machine Bypass 33 Arming Force Arming 12 30 Manual Arming and End of Exit Delay 29 Quick Arming 11 30 Turning ON Arming the System 10 Auto Bypass 12 30 Auxiliary Power Voltage Range 5 Auxiliary Regulated Power 5 Cc Callback for Downloading 33 CANADIAN DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS 49 Central Station Burglary Alarm 46 Chime Mode 13 Closing Ringback 30 Communicator 5 Contact ID Format 5 55 Control Panel Current Draw 5 D Default EEPROM 41 Dial Attempts 33 Dial Pulse 33 Dial Tone 33 Dialer Delay 33 Disarming Turning OFF disarming the System Silencing Alarm 11 Duress 28 37 Duress Code 17 29 E Easy Exit 11 30 Emergency Alarm Keys 18 Emergency Keypad Alarms 18 Emergency Procedures 17 Enclosure Housing 5 ENCLOSURE INSTALLATION 6 Error Displays 16 Exit Error 38 F FCC COMPLIANCE NOTICE 48 PHONE CONNECTION NOTICE TO USERS 48 Fire Alarms 18 Reset 15 Safety 19 Trouble 15 First Open After Alarm 37 Fixed Report Formats 34 Follow Burg and Fire Alarm 28 Follow Fire Alarm 28 Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc G General Control 30 Grade A Household Burglary Alarm 43 Grade A Installations using Digital Alarm Communic 45 Grade B Installations using Digital Alarm Communic 46 Grade C Installations using Digital
37. 8 15 Address 21 Phone Number Control Tone Pulse 0 Dial Pulse 1 Tone with Auto Switch to Pulse 2 Tone with No Switch to Pulse Callback for Downloading 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Ring Count 0 Disable Answering 1 9 Number of Rings Odd numbers Bypass Answering Machine Dialer Delay of 15 Seconds on 24 Hour Alarms 0 No Delay 1 Delay 24 Hour Alarms Dialer Delay of 15 Seconds on Non 24 Hour Alarms 0 No Delay 1 Delay Non 24 Hour Alarms Dial Pulse If programmed the panel will dial to phone number 1 2 or 3 using a pulse format Dial Tone If programmed the panel will dial to phone number 1 2 or 3 using a tone format NOTE When dialing through PBX systems program the phone control as tone dial only Tone with Auto Switch to Pulse If programmed the control panel will try to dial the first digit in tone dial and check to see if the dial tone has been broken If it has not been broken it will try to dial again using pulse dial NOTE Do not use this setting for PBX systems Tone with No Switch to Pulse required for PBX This setting will only use Tone dialing Callback for Downloading When enabled if an attempt is made to connect to the panel for a remote programming session the panel will hang up and callback the number programmed for Phone 3 Address 44 and 45 Ring Count The control panel can be programmed to answer the phone after a selected number of rings for remote programming access Answ
38. AC Failure Report Program Address 0327 must be programmed Timer Programming Bell Cutoff Times Program Addresses 0195 and 0196 must be programmed for not less than 4 minutes Entry Delay Timer Program Addresses 0191 and 0192 must be programmed for not longer than 60 seconds Exit Delay Timer Program Address 0193 must be programmed for not longer than 45 seconds General Control Programming Program Address 0000 Data Digit 2 must be programmed for NO Swinger Shunts enter 0 1 or 2 Program Address 0185 must be programmed as Data Digit 1 0 Data Digit 2 0 DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 4 Alarm Output Programming s Program Address 0146 must be programmed as Data Digit 1 6 Data Digit 2 3 e Program Address 0149 must be programmed as Data Digit 1 8 NOTE In a system that includes both fire alarm and burglar alarm devices the system must produce distinct sounds for fire and burglar alarm conditions either by using different indicating appliances or by using distinct cadences for the same appliance 13 4 General System Requirements Applies to the following grades only Local Burglary Alarm Grade A using Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter DACT Police Station Connection Grades AA and A using DACT and ARDIS interface module Grade A using DACT and local Bell Central Station Burglary Alarm Grades AA and Ausing DACT and ARDIS interface module Grade B using DA
39. ATEQV1S7 135S9 3810 255S0 0 Roe Operation of the Audit File feature uses large amounts of hard drive space with continual use Accept this dialog box and changes made Database Path It is here where you determine the path Preferences The Preferences selection will enable you to where the databases are located edit select certain WDSRP preferences History Path It is here where you determine the path where the History and Archive databases are located WDSRP User s Guide Copyright 1994 96 Detection Systems Inc Backup restore Path It is here where you determine the path where each Backup restore databases will be located Times The Times selection will enable you to set time rang es for communicator tests history dumps and or auto calls Set Automatic Time Ranges Panel communicator test Minute 20 spacing 00 istory dump automatic dial ou Minute 2200 spacing 600 a Minute spacing a Start time Stop time _ All day weekdays _ All day Saturday _ All day Sunday Start time Stop time Auto call by WDERP 2200 _ All day weekdays 600 _ All day Saturday _ All day Sunday Start time Stop time YDSRP auto answer incoming calls el All day weekdays el All day Saturd Stop time ig a ee el All day Sunday Cancel Time of day when the communicator tests may begin Start time 2200 ga 8 0 DIRECT CONNECTION WDSRP allows
40. Automatic Test Report Interval 8 37 Address 49 Hours to First Auto Test Report 8 38 Address 50 AC Failure Report Delay INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR U L LISTED SYSTEMS 9 1 DS7060 U L Listings 9 2 Installation Considerations 9 3 Programming the DS7060 Household Fire Alarm using Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter with local bell Grade A Household Burglary Alarm using Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter with local bell Local Burglary Alarm Grade A Installations using Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter with local bell DS7060 Reference Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc Police Station Connection Grades AA and A Installations using the Applied Spectrum PAL200 and the DACT Grade A Installations using Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter with local bell Central Station Burglarv Alarm Grades AA and A Installations using the Applied Spectrum PAL200 and the DACT Grade B Installations using Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter with local bell Grade C Installations using Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter only 9 4 Wiring and Programming Information for Installations Using the Ademco AB 12 Bell Housing 10 0 FCC COMPLIANCE NOTICE 11 0 FCC PHONE CONNECTION NOTICE TO USERS 12 0 CANADIAN DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS 12 1 General Installation Requirements 12 2 Terminal Requirements 12 3 RFI Requirements 13 0 FOR INSTALLATIONS IN NEW ZEALAND 14 0 REPORT PROGRAMMING 14 1 Suggested Values Personal Dialing
41. Communicate Select Direct Connect Acct ID 000MY70801 70801 Template NONE Rept ID 1 2 Sort key 1 Sort key 2 Auto service Name Auto call Address Reset Modem Pick Pa m e Contact Da 4214271 Notes Data Call Direct Connect Cancel Comm 12 48 Wed Sep 11 1996 Image 12 58 Wed Sep 11 1996 Status Created 12 47 Wed Sep 11 1996 Modified 12 58 Wed Sep 11 1996 Revision 106 Modify oper 3 12 56 PM Fri Sep 20 1996 Call panel using the data phone number The WDSRP will establish communications with the control You can now upload and download as you normally would when mote programming over the telephone line Note RS232 programming requires the correct settings in the DS7412 section addresses 0206 and 0207 If you change these settings and download them the panel will disconnect as soon as it burns the new settings into the EEPROM If you need to set the DS7412 differently such as for a printer make sure you finish all other desired commands first 9 0 QUITTING WDSRP There are several ways to quit WDSRP In all cases you must return to the main screen to quit You may then select File from the title bar in Windows and then select quit In Windows 3 1 you may double click the symbol on the upper left corner of the title bar to quit In Windows 95 clicking the X in the upper right corner of the title bar
42. Communicator Error 18 Communicator Test 20 Contact ID Format 57 Cross zoning 9 Cross Zoning Control Programming 44 Cross zoning Trip Window Time Programming 45 Custom Arming 11 Custom Arming Programming 32 D Date Changing the 16 Dav Monitor 10 Default Factorv 21 Delav Dialer 12 Delaved Zone Alarm 10 Dial Pulse 12 Dial Tone 12 DS7080i Reference Guide Dialer Delav 12 Duress 13 Duress PIN 17 E Emergencv Kev Programming 31 enclosure 4 5 Entrv and Exit delav 12 Entrv Exit Delav 9 Error Displavs 18 Escape Plan 15 Event Historv Readback 20 Exit Error 13 F Factorv Default 21 FCC Compliance 13 Fire Kev 11 Fire Safetv 15 Fire Zone 10 Fire Zone with Verification 10 First Open After Alarm 13 Force Arming 12 Force Arming Programming 35 French 11 G General Control Programming 26 33 General PIn 17 Grade A Household Burglarv Alarm 49 Ground Start 10 H HEX values 21 High Speed 4 9 Format 58 Historv Event Control Programming 46 historv events 13 Historv Readback 20 Household Fire Alarm 48 Interior Entrv Exit Follower 9 Interior Home Awav 10 Interior Instant 10 Invisible Alarms 9 K Kev Fire 11 Kev Panic 11 Kev Special Emergencv 11 Kevpad Assignment 11 Kevpad Assignment Programming 26 Kevpad Control Programming 36 kevpad current 4 Kevpad Emergencv Alarm 12 Kevpad Fault 18 Kevpad Fire Alarm 12 Kevpad Fire Restoral 12 Kevpad Language 11 Kevpad Panic 12 Kevpa
43. Control Trouble Enter 8 7 The DS7445 will only flash the green Power Light The Error messages may only be read when the control is disarmed Contact your installing company if the problems persist DS7447 AC Power Failure 5 DS7447 Keypad Fault DS7445 LED 1 turns on steady DS7445 LED 5 turns on steady There is a power failure and the panel is operating on backup One of the keypads is not responding to the control panel battery DS7447 Aux Power Fault DS7447 Battery Trouble DS7445 LED 8 turns on steady DS7445 LED 2 turns on steady The auxiliary power has been shorted If the system has just been through a power failure wait at least two hours for the battery to recharge then enter a PIN Sys DS7447 Zone Trouble tem Reset to perform a battery test DS7445 LED 6 turns on steady One of the zones is not responding to the control panel This DS7447 Communicator Err may also be displayed during power up if so ignore DS7445 LED 3 turns on steady The communicator failed to communicate with the central sta tion Action Desired Command Sequence i 35 Read the Error Displav DS7447 System Fault DS7445 LED 4 turns on steady when the green Power Light PIN 8 7 Internal error in the control circuitry or optional circuitry These lashing faults are displayed as follows Clear Error Display Caution Clear the error displa
44. DS7447 Communicator Err DS7443 or DS7445 LED 3 turns on steady The communicator failed to communicate with the central station DS7447 System Fault DS7443 or DS7445 LED 4 turns on steady Internal error in the control circuitry or optional circuitry These system faults are Ram Fault ROM Fault EEPROM Fault DS7447 Keypad Fault DS7443 or DS7445 LED 5 turns on steady One of the keypads is not responding to the control panel DS7447 Alarm Fuse Fault DS7443 or DS7445 LED 6 turns on steady The auxiliary power has been shorted DS7447 Zone Trouble DS7443 or DS7445 LED of the zone in trouble will light One of the zones is not responding to the control panel This may also be displayed during power up if so ignore 5 18 Duress Code User Code 14 may be used as a duress PIN number When the system is disarmed using this duress code a silent report is sent to the central station Duress codes are intended to be used when a user is forced to disarm the system There are two program addresses that must be programmed to activate this feature Program Address 09 User Control to duress code digit 1 Program Address 31 Open Close Duress Report to a value that is understood as duress by the central station 5 19 Guest Code User Code 15 may be programmed to be a Guest Code After the Guest Code has been programmed it is enabled by depressing PIN 8 4 The Guest Code may now be
45. Enter Year expire at Midnight on the 0 1 through 3 1 XX End with day selected 5 Enter the expiration Year The last two digits of the year Month Day Year followed by the key A long beep signifies acceptance This will only display when in Single Partition Mode Note Entering the command sequence Master Code 0 3 will cause the DS7447 keypad to read back the temporary code expiration date The control panel will exit you from the master code programming mode after about 15 seconds without a keystroke DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 8 5 Changing the Time This chart explains the procedure for changing the time at the kevpad It is recommended that this procedure be performed at a DS7447 keypad No visual cues will be given from a DS7445 keypad Command Sequence Steps to Change the Time If Accepted the Displav Reads Enter the Master Code Programming Mode 6 Change Time displav will scroll to this Enter Dav fe 1 through 7 Enter Time Sunday Saturday 0100 1259 Enter AM PM 4 6 End with Day Time Along beep signifies acceptance Master Code 0 Enter a 6 Enter the day Enter the Time Hour and minute 0 1 0 0 through 1 2 5 9 4 or 6 PM Enter AM or 4 AM 6 PM This will only display when in Single Partition Mode No
46. From here you may edit select information specific to partitioning Edit Partitions SAMPLE Thomas J Brown Partition Pe Pa gt 44 gt 8 PE gt 8 General code may Arm disarm and bypass gt Arm and bypass gt Arm and disarm gt Arm Quick arm allowed _ Keypad exit tone Partitions The data for Partition 1 is displayed Edit Number Of Partitions Partitions Common partitions None gt lie 2 thweveh 3 gt Lie 2 thraugh 4 gt bis 2 threugh gt Lie 2 threugh 8 gt lie 2 thweveh i gt lie 2 threveh 8 Only partition 1 is used Copyright 1994 96 Detection Systems Inc Phone Control Bv choosing this command the edit phone control window will ap pear From here you may identify phone numbers and other parame ters used by the control panel to report alarms to the central station Edit Phone Control SAMPLE Thomas J Brown Phone number 1 ACK Tone Format gt 18 aps gt 1488Hz Disabled gt 28 pps gt zuz gt fii pps Phone number 2 ACK Tone Format gt fh pps gt 1488Hz Disabled FIZ pes gt 2300 gt 48 pps Open f close reports Report routing Open Zone System Dialing control amp None close reports reports gt Partition 1 Alternate 4 4 gt Partitions 1 amp 2 Phone 1 only gt gt ba gt Tone f pulse ii Phone 2 only gt gt gt gt Partition 1 through A Both phone 1 22 g
47. Inc e The yellow and green wires have been disconnected e The keypad has not been programmed properly at the control panel e The control panel has malfunctioned Replace the control panel e Akevpad s address has not been set with its address pins Two or more keypads have the same address e DS7400 Series only DS7430 Mux module not installed on main board correctly Check pin alignment DS7400 Series only Keypad and another device on the option bus have the same address DS7445 47 Installation Instructions Installation Instructions for the AESCC Attack Resistant Enclosure Cover 1 0 General Information The AE3CC is an Attack Resistant Enclosure Accessory intended to be used with Detection Systems control panels Designed to fit over the AE3 or AE4 enclosure it provides additional physical protection from attack 2 0 Equipment Included 1 Attack Resistant Enclosure 21 Enclosure Screws 1 Knock out Cover Kit 3 0 Installation Step 1 Install the control panel and complete all programming and wiring Step 2 If rear entry wiring is used install the Knock out Cover Kit in the upper left hand corner knock out of the control enclosure as shown below If conduit is installed to the upper left knock out the Knock out Cover Kit is not required Step 3 Place the Attack Enclosure over the existing enclosure Step 4 Insert the Enclosure Screws Note You must use all 21 screws Make s
48. Not bypassable Does not restore 24 hour User 1 and 2 bypass I Special area zone No trouble reporting gt Mu woutlle AUS emi delay gt Trouble reporting Keypad zones gt Zone 9 gt Zone 10 gt Zone 11 gt Zone 12 gt Zone 13 gt Zone 14 gt Perimeter instant gt Vrouble BU Eeey Delor gt Interior instant Enirv exit delay gt Interior entry exit follower gt Entrvjexit open Instant short gt Follower open Instant short 600 ms gt 400 ms gt 240 ms gt 120 ms gt Keyswiteh gt Disabled Zone name Cancel Verification Mandatory Restore when sounders silence gt Restore when zone restores The indicated zone s data is being displayed RS 232 Interface DS7400Xi and DS7400Xi Ver 3 only By choosing this command the RS 232 screen will appear This allows you to set the data rate and flow controls for the DS7412 RS 232 Interface module Edit RS 232 Interface SAMPLE Thomas J Brown Print Alanne Houbles and rectorais gt Printer _ AH other events BAUD rate 4 308 gt 1288 gt agi gt gui gt 888 gt 14 46 Parity Noss oles bi gt None 2 sing bis gt Odd i stop bi gt Even i ater BR Select to disable the RS 232 interface Flow control Sa wars gt Hardware Cancel ARDIS DS7400 DS7400X DS7400Xi and DS7400Xi Ver 3 only Choosing this command will allow yo
49. Panel Answers Phone O Armed O Disarmed Equipment Location and Notes AC Voltage VAC Battery Voltage VDC AUX Current Battery Standby AH Bell Current A Control Panel Transformer Telephone Jack Telephone On Same Line as Panel Earth Ground Connection Alarm Sounder s Misc Notes Keypad Location and Notes Example Location Belongs Master to Partition Standard Keypad 1 Kitchen 2 Master Location Belongs Master Location Belongs Master to Partition Standard to Partition Standard Keypad 1 Keypad 9 Keypad 2 Keypad 10 Keypad 3 Keypad 11 Keypad 4 Keypad 12 Keypad 5 Keypad 13 Keypad 6 Keypad 14 Keypad 7 Keypad 15 Keypad 8 DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 5 0 Svstem Worksheet continued Personal Identification Number Information Example PIN Information User Pin Auth Parti Name Level tions PIN Information User Pin Auth Parti Level tions 001 ollo jo lo o O o JO o jo O JA A o N 2 S ni 008 ie og oof onj o2 oa ora l DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide 002 1001 1 2 4 James L PIN Information User Pin Auth Parti Level tions o Q dk o lo llo lo o WO j v W O JA A o N o Jo JW N o Jlo lo o jo o HK KR HR JR JO KR N H oO Jo o X O1 o X op o B N PIN Information U
50. al pull boxes 6 6 Custom Arming Programming Custom Arming PIN 4 If programmed the 4 key may be used to custom arm the system by arming only certain zones For example All Interior zones plus some Perimeter zones may be bypassed while leaving some of the perimeter armed 6 7 Report Control Programming c Open and Close Reports If programmed these reports are sent whenever the system is armed or disarmed Send Trouble at Close for Bypassed Zones If programmed a trouble report will be sent for each zone bypassed when the sys tem is armed Alternate between both Phone Numbers If programmed open and close reports will be sent to phone number one first If phone number one does not pick up the control panel will alternate to phone number two If phone number two does not pick up the control panel will alternate back to phone number one It will alter nate between both phone numbers until successful Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc 6 8 Dav Monitor Report Control Dav monitor zones can be programmed to send a trouble report if thev are activated while the svstem is disarmed Programming the Dav Monitor zone for Trouble on Open and pro gramming the Dav Monitor Report Control to send troubles will cause a report to be sent each time the Dav Monitor zone is activated when the svstem is disarmed The zone will cause an alarm when activated when the svstem is armed 6 9 Phone Number General
51. s Guide 3 2 How to Create an Account The account database is where you keep track of all the accounts that WDSRP is in contact with Each individual account record keeps track of various general and programming information specific to the con trol panel for that account For a detailed description of an account record see Section 4 1 Accounts Start up the WDSRP program by double clicking on the WD SRP Edit icon from the Program Manager window You will be prompted to enter your password Enter the ev eryday password you previously created Choose OK to complete the log in Choose Accounts from the WDSRP Main window The Find Account window will appear Find Account Acct ID Type 7400x Template FACTOR Rept ID 1 3 a Communicate History Insert New Edit Data Zip Delete 4214270 Locate Key Key Select Created 11 52 Wed Jul 24 1996 Reports Modified 12 00 Wed Jul 24 1996 ate Close Revision 110 Modify oper 1 Beginning Previous J Next End of File Locate a specific record in the data base Also changes the database key Sort key 1 Sort key 2 Auto service Name Auto call Address City State Contact ve Notes Factory Default Comm 11 58 Wed Jul 24 1996 Image 12 01 Wed Jul 24 1996 Status Choose the Insert New command from the right hand col
52. this zone will activate an alarm If at the end of an Exit delay an entry exit delay zone is fault ed an exit error condition will activate The Entry delay will begin as above and any outputs pro grammed to follow burglar alarms will activate If the system is not disarmed during this delay period the con trol panel will send an alarm report and an exit error report If the system is disarmed during this delay period the alarm outputs will deactivate and no alarm report will be sent Entry Exit Delay 2 Works in the same manner as the Entry Exit Delay 1 zone except that it uses entry delay time 2 Note If both Entry Exit delays have been activated the control will use the shorter delay e Interior Entrv Exit Follower This is a zone programmed to be ignored during an entry exit delay and then become an interior instant zone Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc If this zone is violated while the system is armed and no entrv exit zones have been violated it will activate an instant alarm If this zone is violated after an entry exit delay zone is violated it will follow that entry exit delay time This zone is bypassed when arming only the perimeter e Interior Home Away This zone becomes an interior instant zone if the system is armed and an entry exit delay zone is violated during the exit delay time Ifthe system is armed and an entry exit delay zone is not vio lated this zone will be
53. to the A C restoral report If another report is sent during this delay period the A C fail report will be sent along with this report If the A C power restores during this delay period the A C loss report will not be sent Programming address 0197 as FF causes the report to be sent at a random interval of at least 15 minutes but no more than 2 hours after the A C failure occurs 6 1 2 Entrv Exit Delay Cancel Zone Functions Entry Exit Delay Cancel 1 and Entry Exit Delay Cancel 2 Zone Func tions cause the exit delay to expire as soon as the premises is va cated If a zone is programmed as an Entrv Exit Delay Cancel zone and it is activated during the exit delay the exit delay will expire as soon as the zone has been restored Entry Exit Delay Cancel 1 follows entry delay 1 Entry Exit Delay Cancel 2 follows entry delay 2 They are programmed at addresses 0001 0015 6 1 3 General Arm Only Authority by Partition A general level 2 authority can be programmed to have arm only authority by partition This is done at addresses 0198 and 0199 Arm only access by partition allows someone with a General Authority to arm and or bypass zones in a partition he can not disarm This level can still be used to arm disarm and bypass zones in the other partitions that it has access to 6 1 4 Input Output Cross Matrixing Input Output Cross Matrixing allows Output Functions to follow the status of specific input zones zones 1 throu
54. umn command buttons The Select Initial Account Data window will appear Select initial account data Select the source for the initial data for this new account record Select BLANK for no initial data Select ACCOUNT to copy the data from the current account Select TEMPLATE to copy only the data from the current template Select CANCEL to cancel the Insert New command Account J Template Cancel Choose the source from which you will create the new Ac count For now select the Blank command This command will call up a blank Edit Account New Account window Edit Account New Account Account ID Template Sort key 1 Sort key 2 Auto service Auto call Name Address City State Contact Yoice Enter up to 8 characters as the Account s ID number Fill in all the necessary general information for this new Ac count Choose OK after completing The Edit Account window for Copyright 1994 96 Detection Systems Inc this new account will appear It is here where you complete all the programming information concerning this account See Section 4 0 for complete details concerning this window 3 3 How to Create a Template The template database is where you keep track of all the templates that you create Each individual template record keeps track of vari ous general and programming information specific to tha
55. 1 Gall the Remote Programmer every day 18 Call the Remote Programmer every 8 days 9 J oe They will display as A C at the keypads DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 12 37 Alpha Description Programming Program Addresses 1526 3701 Alpha Description Programming allows up to 16 characters to be programmed for the description of each partition or zone e g J Hill s Office If a description is less than 16 characters leave the remaining address es blank Once programmed the descriptions will be displayed on the alpha keypads The following chart lists the Program Addresses used to program Alpha Numeric characters for each partition or zone Program Address Program Address Program Address Program Address Partition 1 4596 1541 Partition 5 1599 1605 70ne 1 1654 1669 4 5 1718 1733 ae Program Address ane Program Address Program Address Program Address Partition 2 4542 4557 Partition 6 1606 1621 70 2 1670 1685 40 6 1734 1749 KA Program Address as Program Address Program Address Program Address Partition 3 1558 1573 Partition 7 1622 1637 Zone 3 1686 1701 Zone 7 1750 1765 Program Address Program Address Program Address Program Address Partition 4 1574 1589 Partition 8 1638 1653 Zone 4 1702 1717 Zone 81766 1781 Program Addresses Zones 9 through 128 1782 through 3701 16 addresses per zone See Section 12 37 1 for an Alpha Des
56. 1 1691 2 1692 1 1692 2 1693 1 1693 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 1694 1 1694 2 1695 1 1695 2 1696 1 1696 2 1697 1 1697 2 1698 1 1698 2 1699 1 1699 2 1700 1 1700 2 1701 1 1701 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 1702 1 1702 2 1703 1 1703 2 1704 1 1704 2 1705 1 1705 2 1706 1 1706 2 1707 1 1707 2 1708 1 1708 2 1709 1 1709 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 1710 1 1710 2 1711 1 1711 2 1712 1 1712 2 1713 1 1713 2 1714 1 1714 2 1715 1 1715 2 1716 1 1716 2 1717 1 1717 2 DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 12 37 1 Alpha Description Programming A Worksheet Continued Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 et Il Value 1718 1 1718 2 1719 1 1719 2 1720 1 1720 2 1721 1 1721 2 1722 1 1722 2 1723 1 1723 2 1724 1 1724 2 1725 1 1725 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 1726 1 1726 2 1727 1 1727 2 1728 1 1728 2 1729 1 1729 2 1730 1 1730 2 1731 1 1731 2 1732 1 1732 2 1733 1 1733 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 1734 1 1734 2 1735 1 1735 2 1736 1 1736 2 1737 1 1737 2 1738 1 1738 2 1739 1 1739 2 1740 1 1740 2 1741 1 1741 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 1742 1
57. 1 is the only one assigned Burglary restoral for a zone Fire restoral for a zone 7 Burglary trouble for a zone 5 Fire trouble for a zone Zone 1 is reporting a trouble condition Burglary trouble restoral for a zone 35555555 5 Zone 1 is reporting a restoral for a trouble condition Zone 1 has been restored Zone 1 has been restored Zone 1 is reporting a trouble condition Fire trouble restoral for a zone 35555555 5 Zone 1 is reporting a restoral for a trouble condition Open report 82222222 2 User 8 opened User reported at event location 1 all others equal 2 Close report 84444444 User 8 closed User reported at event location 1 all others equal 4 Duress report 15555555 Event data 1 is the only one assigned This report is initiated First open after alarm cancel report 82222222 Low battery 51555555 Systems Battery Low Channel 2 of the System Reports 1 by opening using a Duress User PIN Low battery restoral 53555555 EN Svstems Batterv Low Channel 2 of the Svstem Reports Same as Open report AC failure 15555555 AC failure restoral 35555555 Automatic test report 55555555 Communicator test report 55555555 DS7060 Reference Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc AC Fail Channel 1 of the System Reports AC Fail Channel 1 of the System Reports Communicator Test with zone alarm information Communicator Test with zone alarm information REPORTS EVENTDATA EVENT NOTE 12345678 TYPE Re
58. 1 with Parity 4 3 1E with Parity DEFAULT 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 4 1 6 4 2 PHONE 1 9 Contact ID Phone Format 0 to F C Personal Dialing Speed 0 1 or 2 D 4 9 Data Acknowledge Tones 0 or 1 F Pager SPEED PHONE 2 0 10 pps Phone Format 0 to F 1 20 pps Speed 0 1 or 2 2 40 pps Data Acknowledge Tones 0 or 1 DATA ACKNOWLEDGE TONES 0 1900 data 1400 ack 1 1800 data 2300 ack 8 33 Address 40 41 Phone 1 Reporting Address 42 43 Phone 2 Reporting Address 44 45 Phone 3 Remote Programming Address 40 Phone 1 digits 1 16 Address 41 Phone 1 digits 17 32 Address 42 Phone 2 digits 1 16 Address 43 Phone 2 digits 17 32 Address 44 Phone 3 digits 1 16 Address 45 Phone 3 digits 17 32 NOTE To dial the character enter 1 The f l character is sent as 1 1 when pulse dialing The letter B will be displayed To dial the character enter 2 The character is only valid when tone dialing The letter C will be displayed To input a three second delay enter 3 The letter D will be displayed To wait for the dial tone enter 4 in the first digit The letter E will be displayed To disable a phone number enter 5 in the first digit The underscore _ will be displayed To delete the phone number from the display window enter 5 in all digits Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 Reference Guide 8 34 Address 46 Programme
59. 121 2 122 1 122 2 123 1 123 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 124 1 124 2 125 1 125 2 126 1 126 2 127 1 127 2 128 1 128 2 129 1 129 2 130 1 130 2 131 1 131 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 132 1 132 2 133 1 133 2 134 1 134 2 135 1 135 2 136 1 136 2 137 1 137 2 138 1 138 2 139 1 139 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 140 1 140 2 141 1 141 2 142 1 142 2 143 1 143 2 144 1 144 2 145 1 145 2 146 1 146 2 147 1 147 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 148 1 148 2 149 1 149 2 150 1 150 2 151 1 151 2 152 1 152 2 153 1 153 2 154 1 154 2 155 1 155 2 Page 30 Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc DS7080i Reference Guide 10 6 Emergencv Kev Programming Program Address 156 Example Fire Kev A Special Emergencv Kev B and Panic Kev C To program the Fire Kev and the Special Emergencv Kev as both Address 157 Data Digit 1 programming disables or activates having a Steady Alarm these keys located on the keypads It also determines a silent Data Digit 1 2 Data Digit 2 2 pulsed or steady alarm Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Program Address 1 5 6 Enter Data Digit 1 2 Enter Data Digit 2 2 Enter the Pound button Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Progra
60. 15 13 Wed Sep 18 1991 Zip Phone Locate key Modified 16 44 Tue Dec 22 1992 Key select Created 16 43 Tue Dec 22 1992 Modify oper 9 Modified Key select Reports Modify oper 7 Reports Close Close Beginning Previous iNext End of file RR r X Select the NEXT record in the current database key order Beginning Previous Next End of file Locate a specific record in the data base Also changes the database key Locate the Master user information by choosing the Next command from the command buttons at the bottom of the window Choose the Edit data command from the right hand column command buttons The Edit User Information window will appear with the password Master highlighted From this window you may edit all necessary Edit User Information information Choose the Edit data command from the right hand column of command buttons The Edit User Information window will appear with the Password lev15 highlighted Password Authority level Operator ID 2 Edit User Information Name Default change this password Password Address Authority level Operator ID Name City State Address Zip Phone City 16 43 Tue Dec 22 1992 Zip Modified eee ee Modify ope
61. 26 Keypad Assignment 17 40 Keypad Fire Alarm 18 Keypad Fire Restoral 18 Keypad Partition 40 Keypad Problems 78 Keypad Sounder Output 16 Keyswitch Input 15 L Latch on Any Zone Alarm 16 Load Number 20 Local Program Successful Report 19 Local Program Unsuccessful Report 19 Low Battery Report 19 Master Code 53 Master Keypad 30 Master Keypad Arming 30 Master Keypad Disarm 31 Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc Master Kevpad Programming 17 Master PIN 21 Maximum Securitv Arming 14 Multiple Kevpad Use 18 Multiple Zone Input 16 Multiplex Zone 77 N Normal Arming 14 0 Octal Relay 53 ON during Entry Pre Alert 16 ON for 10 seconds 16 ON when System is Armed 16 Open Close Report 44 Output Access 16 Output Cross Matrix 55 Output Function programming 55 Output Keypad Sounder 16 Output Panic Duress 17 Output Partition 38 Output Partition Assignment 56 Output Programming 16 Output programming 38 55 P Pager Format 71 Panic Key 41 Panic Duress Output 17 Partition Assignment 36 Partition Control 39 Partition Control Programming 17 Perimeter Arming 14 Perimeter Instant Arming 14 Phone Answering 52 Phone Number Programming 63 PIN 21 PIN Expiration Date 22 Program Addresses 84 Programmer s Code 53 Programming Master Keypad 17 Programming Output 16 Programming Partition Control 17 Programming Zone 16 Pulsing Fire Zone 18 Q Quick Arm Control 39 R Reading a Program Add
62. 26 Wed Aug 14 1996 Status Created 16 21 Wed Aug 14 1996 Modified 16 25 Wed Aug 14 1996 Revision 300 Modify oper 2 11 50 AM Fri Aug 16 1996 Panel still online Abort Account ID BLANKV32 On line manual 00 01 48 Force the end of communications with the panel Suspend This command will only appear when WDSRP is actively engaged with the control panel e g uploading or downloading This com mand will stop all data transfer without making changes to the WD SRP or control panel data Copyright 1994 96 Detection Systems Inc Historv This command will allow vou to perform the following Historv func tions Acct ID 7400XIDEMO 7400XI 3 Template NONE Rept ID 1 Sort key 1 5 Sort key 2 Auto service Auto call Name jDetection Systems Inc Address 130 Perinton Parkway Zip 14450 Da 4214271 City Fairport Contact Dennis Caler Ve 716 223 4060 Notes Demo DS7400Xi 3 by Shannon Case New Events cote Complete Comm 15 01 Thu Sep 19 1996 Image 13 46 Thu Sep 05 1996 Status Created 18 06 Tue Aug 13 1996 Modified 14 39 Fri Aug 23 1996 Revision 300 Modify oper 2 Account ID 7400XIDEMO Dei 03 04 PM Thu Sep 19 1996 On line manual 00 02 42 Panel still online Don t upload any history View This command will allow you to view delete and archive history events tha
63. 2662 2678 2694 2710 2726 2742 2758 2774 2790 2806 2822 2838 2854 2870 2886 2902 2918 2934 2950 2966 2982 2998 3014 3030 Description Alpha for Zone Number 27 Alpha for Zone Number 28 Alpha for Zone Number 29 Alpha for Zone Number 30 Alpha for Zone Number 31 Alpha for Zone Number 32 Alpha for Zone Number 33 Alpha for Zone Number 34 Alpha for Zone Number 35 Alpha for Zone Number 36 Alpha for Zone Number 37 Alpha for Zone Number 38 Alpha for Zone Number 39 Alpha for Zone Number 40 Alpha for Zone Number 41 Alpha for Zone Number 42 Alpha for Zone Number 43 Alpha for Zone Number 44 Alpha for Zone Number 45 Alpha for Zone Number 46 Alpha for Zone Number 47 Alpha for Zone Number 48 Alpha for Zone Number 49 Alpha for Zone Number 50 Alpha for Zone Number 51 Alpha for Zone Number 52 Alpha for Zone Number 53 Alpha for Zone Number 54 Alpha for Zone Number 55 Alpha for Zone Number 56 Alpha for Zone Number 57 Alpha for Zone Number 58 Alpha for Zone Number 59 Alpha for Zone Number 60 Alpha for Zone Number 61 Alpha for Zone Number 62 Alpha for Zone Number 63 Alpha for Zone Number 64 Alpha for Zone Number 65 Alpha for Zone Number 66 Alpha for Zone Number 67 Alpha for Zone Number 68 Alpha for Zone Number 69 Alpha for Zone Number 70 Alpha for Zone Number 71 Alpha for Zone Number 72 Alpha for Zone Number 73 Alpha for Zone Number 74 Alpha for Zone Number 75 Alpha for Zone Number 76 Alpha for Zone Number 77 Alpha for Zo
64. 5 0 System Overview o on onoono aga pHRRFFRPARAA A 6 0 Glossary Zone Programming Output Programming General Control Programming Keypad Assignment Programming Emergency Key Programming Custom Arming Programming Report Control Programming Day Monitor Report Control Phone Number General Control Programming12 Phone Answering Programming System Timers Force Arming Programming Report Programming History Event Control FCC Compliance Notice FCC Phone Connection Notice To Users Canadian Dept of Communications 6 18 For Installations in New Zealand 7 0 Operating Guide 7 1 Fire Safety 7 1 1 If Installed in Family Residences 7 1 2 Having and Practicing an Escape Plan 7 1 3 Installation Considerations Changing the Date Changing the Time Personal Identification Numbers 7 4 1 General Information 7 4 2 Removing a PIN 7 4 3 PIN Authority Levels Error Displays Remote Program Dial out and Answer Zone Test Battery Sounder Test Communicator Test Event History Readback 8 0 Programming the DS7080i Entering the Programmer s Mode Reading back a Program Address Entering a value in a Program Address HEX values Defaults Setting the Control to the Factory Default Exiting the Programmer s Mode 9 0 Understanding the Programming Charts 10 0 Programming the DS7080i 10 1 Zone Programming Programming Addresses 000 007 23 Output Programming Programming Address 008 24 Output Programming Program
65. 5 Alarm Zone Funct 6 Alarm jsej oof cof eof Zone Funct 7 Alarm Zone Funct 8 Alarm Zone Funct 9 Alarm Zone Funct 10 Alarm Zone Funct 11 Alarm 0268 SS Zone Funct 12 Alarm 0269 of Zone Funct 13 Alarm 0270 Zone Funct 14 Alarm 0271 Zone Funct 15 Alarm 0272 aE oee e een fer C a a arora Powe ozeool arn Onova a arn eRe eco arn srw a DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Ec Zone Funct 9 Restoral jozes 00f Zone Funct 10 Restoral 0284 oof Zone Funct 11 Restoral jo2es oof Zone Funct 12 Restoral jo286 00 Zone Funct 13 Restoral foze7 o0 JI Zone Funct 14 Restoral 0288 oof Zone Funct 15 Restoral o2s9 oof Zone Funct 1 Trouble oz30 o0 E f E j e eo a eof Zone Funct 10 Trouble oz39 o0 Zone Funct 11 Trouble osoo oof Zone Funct 12 Trouble osor fof Zone Funct 13 Trouble osoz oof Zone Funct 14 Trouble josos oof Zone Funct 2 Trouble Zone Funct 3 Trouble Zone Funct 4 Trouble Zone Funct 5 Trouble Zone Funct 6 Trouble Zone Funct 7 Trouble Zone Funct 8 Trouble Zone Funct 9 Trouble Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc Report Programming Continued Default Default Reporting Extended Reporting Extended Address Digit 1 Digit 2 Address Digit 1 Digit 2 Zone Funct 15 Trouble oso 00 Remote Program Successful 0330 jopen foszof oof PL Remote Prog Unsuccessful 0331 Close fosaztfoof fe Local Program Successful 033 Duress
66. A double beep will occur 200 ms ON OFF ON when a keyswitch toggle zone disarms the system DS7060 Reference Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc 8 10 Address 10 General Control DEFAULT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Siren on Comm Fail for Silent Zone 0 No 1 Yes Closing Ringback 0 Closing Ringback Disabled 1 Closing Ringback Enbled Swinger Shunt 0 Swinger Shunt Disabled 1 Swinger Shunt Enabled 50 Hz 60 Hz 0 60 Hz 1 50 Hz Keypad Mode 0 Commercial Mode 1 Residential Mode Quick Arm 0 Quick Arm Disabled 1 Quick Arm Enabled Easy Exit 0 Easy Exit Disabled 1 Easy Exit Enabled Force Arming 0 Force Arming Disabled 1 Force Arming Enabled 2 Auto Bypass Enabled Siren on Comm Fail for Silent Zone If programmed a silent zone will sound the alarm outputs if the zone is in an alarm condition and the system fails to communicate with the central station Closing Ringback If programmed the keypad sounders and Output 3 will activate for 2 seconds after the system is armed and the closing report is successfully sent This requires Closing Ringback and Closing Report to be programmed Swinger Shunt If enabled a zone can only alarm or trouble up to three times per armed period After the third alarm or trouble the zone will be bypassed and a trouble report for this zone will be sent Fire zones are never swinger shunted 50 Hz 60 Hz Set to local power type The panel clock is synchronized to th
67. AA and A Installations using an ARDIS Interface Module Follow General System Requirements as listed in 13 4 Required Accessories e The control must be the Detection Systems model DS7400XiCC with a cover actuated tamper switch installed e An ARDIS or DataTAC interface module e The ARDIS module and antenna should be mounted within the protected area e The Detection Systems model DS7481 Phone Line Monitor 1 Timer Programming e Entry Exit Delay Times Program Addresses 0191 0193 must be programmed for not longer than 60 seconds B Grade B Installations using Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter with local bell Follow General System Requirements as listed in 13 4 Required Accessories The control must be the Detection Systems model DS7400XiCC with a cover actuated tamper switch installed e The Ademco Model AB 12 bell housing see section 13 6 1 Timer Programming Bell Cutoff Times Program Addresses 0195 and 0196 must be programmed for not less than 15 minutes e Entry Exit Delay Times Program Addresses 0191 0193 must be programmed for not longer than 60 seconds C Grade C Installations using Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter only Follow General System Requirements as listed in 13 4 Required Accessories e The control must be the Detection System s model DS7400XiCC with a cover actuated tamper switch installed 1 Timer Programming e Entry Exit Delay Times Program Addresses 0191 0193 must
68. Address 009 25 General Control Programming Program Address 010 26 Keypad Assignment Programming Program Address 011 26 Alpha Description Programming Program Addresses 012 155 27 10 5 1 Alpha Description Programming Worksheet 28 10 6 Emergency Key Programming Program Address 156 31 Panic Key and Keypad Language Programming Program Address 157 31 Custom Arming Programming Program Address 158 32 Report Control Programming Program Address 159 32 Report Control Programming Program Addresses 160 161 33 Phone Number General Control Programming Program Address 162 33 Phone Answering Programming Program Address 163 34 Timer Programming Addresses 164 168 35 Arming Warning Control and Force Arming Programming Program Address 169 35 Bypassing Allowed Programming Program Address 170 36 Keypad Control and Trouble Zone Mode Programming Program Address 171 36 Report Programing Addresses 174 230 37 Account Code Programming Program Addresses 233 and 235 42 Phone Number Format Programming Program Addresses 237 and 238 42 Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc DS7080i Reference Guide 10 20 Programmer s Code Programming Program Address 239 43 10 21 Master Code Programming Program Address 241 43 10 22 Cross Zoning Control Programming Program Addresses 279 282 44 10 23 Cross zoning Trip Window Time Programming Program Address 283 45 10 24 Call out Timer Programming Prog
69. Ademco Model AB 12 bell nousing see Section 11 4 1 Report Programming Burglar Zone Reports must be programmed for those zones used Low Battery Report Program Address 215 must be programmed AC Failure Report Program Address 217 must be programmed DS7080i Reference Guide Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc Open Report Program Address 210 must be programmed Close Report Program Address 211 must be programmed 24 Hour Check In Reports Program Addresses 219 and 220 must be programmed Timer Programming Bell Cutoff Times Program Addresses 167 and 168 must be programmed for not less than 15 minutes Entrv Exit Delav Times Program Addresses 164 166 must be programmed for not longer than 60 seconds General Control Programming Must be programmed for no swinger shunts and closing ring back Program Address 010 Data Digit 2 enter 0 1 or 2 Program Address 169 must be programmed as Data Digit 2 0 Program Address 171 must be set for the Commercial mode 4 Zone Programming The Burglar alarm output signal whether pulsed or steady must be different from the Fire alarm signal Alarm Output Programming Program Address 008 must be programmed as Data Digit 1 0 C Grade C Installations using Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter only Required Accessories e The control must be a Detection Systems model DS7080iCC with a cover actuated tamper switch installed Report Programming Burglar Zo
70. Alarm Communic 47 Guest Code 17 29 H HEX character 23 High Speed 4 9 Format 53 Hours to First Auto Test Report 41 Household Fire Alarm 43 Individual users 5 Input Power 5 Input zones 5 Install the Control Communicator 6 Install the Enclosure 6 INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR U L LISTED SYSTEMS 42 K Keypad Assignment 31 Keypad Fire Report 34 Keypad Fire Restoral Report 34 Keypad Help Alarm Report 34 Keypad Mode 30 Keypad Panic Report 34 Keypads 5 Audible During Exit Delay 29 Backlight Control 8 DS7443 5 8 DS7445 5 8 DS7447 5 8 Volume Control 8 Keyswitch Arming Warning 29 L Lightning Protection 5 Line Seizure Notice 5 Local Burglary Alarm 44 Local Program Successful 38 Local Program Unsuccessful 38 Low Battery Report 37 Low Battery Restoral Report 37 M Master Code 9 41 N NEW ZEALAND INSTALLATIONS 49 0 Operating temperature 5 Output Type Armed 28 Follow Burg Alarm 28 Follow Keypad Sounder 28 Ground Start 28 Intrusion 28 Invisible 26 On During Entry Pre Alert 28 On for 8 seconds after System Reset is entered 28 Pulsing 26 Silent 26 Steady 26 System Status Ready to Arm 28 DS7060 Reference Guide P Pager Format 51 Panic kev 18 Partial Close 37 Personal Dialing 5 Personal Dialing Format 50 Personal Identification Numbers 9 Adding a PIN 9 Removing a PIN 9 Phone 1 Reporting 40 Phone 1 Format 40 Phone 2 Reporting 40 Phone 2 Format 40 Phone 3 Remote Programming 4
71. Alarm Keys A B and C may generate Fire Special Emergency and Panic Alarms if programmed by the installer Ask your installing company to explain the function of these keys When using the Emergency Keys they must be pressed for two seconds to generate an alarm If the Emergency Alarm Keys are to be used they should be labeled to signify their functions The A key should be labeled as the Fire key This is the only key that may be designated as the Fire key The B key should be labeled as the Special Emergency key The C key should be labeled as the Panic key Use the Disarming Command Sequence to cancel or silence these alarms 8 12 Fire Safety WARNING No fire detection device or system should be considered 100 foolproof This fire alarm system can provide early warning of a developing fire Such a system however does not ensure protection against property damage or loss of life resulting from a fire Any fire alarm system may fail to warn for any number of reasons e g smoke not reaching a detector that is behind a closed door When considering detectors for residential applications refer to NFPA Standard 72 The National Fire Alarm Code This standard is avail able at a nominal cost from The National Fire Protection Associa tion Batterymarch Park Quincy MA 02269 8 12 1 If Installed in Family Residences Adherence to the NFPA Standard 72 can lead to reasonable fire safety when the following items are
72. Burglary grades B and C n a Not Applicable LB A Local Burglary grade A 1 Standard or attack PSCB D A Police Station Connected Burglary w DACT grade A penali jeg A ueg PSCB DR A Police Station Connected Burglary w Derived Channel Foner ey pac may 2e grades AA and A used at least one keypad L r l is required HF B Household residential Fire and Burglary kl 2 INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS Failure to install and program the control in accordance with the requirements in this section voids the listing mark of Underwriters Laboratories Inc The standby battery capacity is 7 0 AH 12 VDC The total nominal current must not exceed 1 5 A when on standby or in alarm The control must be mounted indoors and within the protected area Enclosure tamper switches if used must be connected to a 24 hour zone Grounding must be in accordance with article 250 of the NEC NFPA 70 At least one U L Listed keypad with zone display must be connected Zones must be connected to U L Listed compatible devices 50 Hz AC input cannot be used in U L Certificated installations The ground wire provided with the enclosure must be connected between the Earth GND connection on the control and the enclosure tab The keypad panic alarm output must follow the corresponding zone s programming e g fire pulsing or steady if not a combination burglary steady In all cases the special emergency keys must be silent The ground start feature
73. Control Programming Enable Remote Programmer Callback If programmed when the remote programmer tries to initiate a session with the panel the panel will hang up and call the remote programmer phone number This ensures the correct remote programmer is initiating the call Dial Pulse on all Phone Numbers If programmed the panel will dial to phone number 1 2 and the remote programmer phone number 3 using the pulse format Dial Tone on all Phone Numbers If programmed the panel will dial to phone number 1 2 and the remote programmer phone number 3 using the tone format Note When dialing through PBX systems program the phone control as tone dial only Switch to Pulse If programmed the control panel will try to dial the first digit in tone dial and check to see if the dial tone has been broken If it has not been broken it will try to dial again using pulse dial Note Do not use this setting for PBX systems e Dialer Delay A Dialer Delay of 15 seconds can be added when reporting burglar alarms 24 hour burglar alarms and fire alarms This delay will help to prevent false alarm reports by giving the user 15 seconds to disarm the system before a report is sent 6 10 Phone Answering Programming e Phone Answering Programming The control panel can be programmed to answer the phone after a selected number of rings for remote programming access It can also be programmed to answer the phone after a different number of ri
74. Data Digit after you enter it The data will be programmed saved when you press the key The control panel will automatically increment to the next program address e If you wish to program that next address enter the necessary information DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc e If you wish to read back the value of that address press the key s If you wish to program a different address press the key two times and enter the program address you wish to program If you make a mistake at any time press the key two times before pressing the key This will clear the display allowing you to enter the program address you wish to work with 10 4 HEX values Some Data Digit values will be higher than 9 These values must be programmed by pressing the key followed by some other number These values will display as HEX characters A F when entered Example entering 0 at the keypad will display an A The HEX character values are as follows Q A l B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 10 5 Defaults The DS7400Xi is shipped from the factory as a working pre programmed control Many of the programming addresses may already be set to the values you need The default values are shown in EBBES If the value you would like is in you don t need to re program this address In the example below a 0 is the default value BT If the default value is not shown in reverse print
75. Digit 2 4 See Glossary Section 6 10 for further details Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Program Address 1 6 3 Enter Data Digit 1 2 Enter Data Digit 2 4 Enter the Pound button Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode Data Digit 1 2 Select Option When Armed Don t Answer Phone Answer Phone on 1 ring Select Option Answer Phone on 2 rings When Disarmed Answer Phone on 3 rings en PANS Wor ROONG Answer Phone on 4 rings Answ r Phone on Iring tr Answer Phone on 5 rings Answer Phone on 2 rings 2 Answer Phone on 6 rings Answer Phone on 3 rings Eg Answer Phone on 7 rings Answer Phone on 4 rings aF Bypass A Ph 8 ri Answer Phone on 5 rings El answering nswer one on 6 rings machine Answer Phone on 9 rings Answer Phone on 6 rings 16 Answer Phone on 10 rings ANSWEr One ON ANNIS Esg Answer Phone on 11 rings Fl answering Answer Phone on 8 rings aH 1 merenn Bb un Haee Perene 8 H Answer Phone on 13 rings 2H e Answer Phone on 14 rings T E reeatne Ti Answer Phone on 15 rings irene Proven Terres Tal 0 5 are Hex values E They will display as A F at the keypads er rer Fel 0 5 are Hex values They will display as A F at the keypads Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc DS7080i Reference Guide 10 13 Timer Programming Addresses 164 168 Example Timer programming defines the length of
76. Disabled Invisible None ENEN EN IL IL ILU KA ER ENEN EN EN EN ENEN Functions group Number of radio receivers Zone restores when l 8 gt 9 15 None gt 1 gt 2 Sounders silence gt Zone restores gt Control is disarmed Multiplex group contains radio zones ted 33 40 65 72 97 104 9 16 41 48 73 80 105 112 I Swinger shunting on 17 24 49 56 81 88 113 120 25 32 57 64 89 96 121 128 OK Cancel Disabled Zone Programming By choosing this command the Edit Zone Assignments window will appear From here you assign zone functions and partitions and edit input output data Edit Zone Programming SAMPLE Thomas J Brown Partition Function 1 0 4 Single input gt Muliigle input gt input f Gutpet Del 1 0 ti Single input 1 0 gt Multiple input gt input f Guiput Single input gt Multiple input gt inpul i Oulput Single input gt Muliple kapui gt lap j Gaiput Celie Bl BIH Select zone group to display 1 8 b IT 24 gt 33 40 gt 49 56 gt 65 72 gt Bl BB gt 97 104 gt 113 120 29 16 gt 25 32 gt 41 48 gt 57 64 gt 7380 gt 89 96 gt 105112 gt 121 128 Onboard zone or a single zone input Reporting By choosing this command the Edit Report Codes window will ap pear From here you may edit the values sent for each report
77. Duress Code User Code 14 may be used as a duress PIN number When the system is disarmed using this duress code a silent report is sent to the central station Duress codes are intended to be used when a user is forced to disarm the system There are two program addresses that must be programmed to activate this feature Program Address 09 User Control to duress code digit 1 Program Address 31 Open Close Duress Report to a value that is understood as duress by the central station 1 19 Guest Code User Code 15 may be programmed to be a Guest Code After the Guest Code has been programmed it is enabled by depressing PIN 8 4 The Guest Code may now be used to arm and disarm the system It remains active until the panel is disarmed with any other valid code Refer to Section 8 9 Address 09 to activate the Guest Code option If PIN 15 is used as a guest code remember to change PIN 15 according to Section 5 2 1 20 Emergency Procedures Identifying Alarm Sounds Your alarm system may be programmed for a steady alarm sound or a pulsed alarm sound It is important to learn the difference between a fire alarm sound and an intrusion alarm sound before you are confronted with an actual emergency Silencing Alarms All alarms can be silenced with any PIN that has disarm privileges Entering your PIN Off will silence the alarm and turn off disarm the control Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 User Guide A Cauti
78. Each DS7443 must have a home run back to the DS7080i Do not daisy chain or place two DS7443 keypads on any cable run 1 6 2 DS7445 DS7447 Keypads s Total number of keypads Maximum wire length each run 1000 feet 305m Maximum wire length total 4000 feet 1220m in system Wire type 4 conductor unshielded 22 AWG 0 8mm or 18 AWG 1 0mm Telephone quad 4 Keypads Note If using 22 AWG 0 8mm wiring there can be no more than two keypads allowed on any 1000 foot 305m run Three keypads are allowed on any 1000 foot 305m run if 18 AWG 1 0mm wire is used Keypad wiring can be dai sv chained or home run but the cables can NOT be shared with other devices e g telephone or siren wiring 1 7 Communicator Will report to two phone numbers with full single double and back up reporting Communicates in SIA 3 1 3 1 Ext 4 1 4 2 BFSK Contact ID High Speed 4 9 and Pager formats The ringer equivalence is 0 1B 1 8 Users The system allows up to 15 individual users Each user will have his own PIN number the 4 digit code entered at the keypads and his own authority level to determine which functions he may perform 1 9 Lightning Protection MOVs and spark gaps provide protection from lightning surges and static discharges 1 10 Burglar Fire Zone Inputs e Number of circuits 8 Circuits e End of line resistor 2 21k ohms 1 11 Fire Signal Initiating Circuit 2 wire mode The Fire cir
79. Force Arming 7 Quick Arming 6 T Turning ON Arming the System 5 Auto Bypass 7 Tests Communicator Test 9 C Local Battery Sounder Test 9 Chime Mode 8 Z D Disarming Turning OFF disarming the System Silencing Alarm 6 Duress Code 12 E Easy Exit 6 Emergency Alarm Keys 13 Emergency Keypad Alarms 13 Emergency Procedures 12 Error Displays 11 F Fire Alarms 13 Reset 10 Safety 14 Trouble 10 G Guest Code 12 H Help key 13 l Identifying Alarm Sounds 12 K Keypads Backlight Control 3 DS7443 3 DS7445 3 DS7447 3 Volume Control 3 M Master Code 4 P Panickey 13 Personal Identification Numbers 4 Addinga PIN 4 Removinga PIN 4 R Read Alarm History 10 Remote Program Dial out and Answer 11 Remote Programming Answer for Remote Programming 11 Call for Remote Programming 11 Copvright O 1996 Detection Svstems Inc DS7060 User Guide Reference Guide for the DS7060 Control Communicator eb a to V Armed Status Power Fire Ed Off Cae DOG 4 6 6 Daa C7 Ca C9 V U Bvpass No Entry GO Ow GQ gt ae OOOD System Reset Keypad Quick Reference Guide Turning On arming your System Normal Arming Perimeter Arming no entry delay Perimeter Arming with entry delay Maximum Security Arming Forc
80. It may take a while for the incoming call to come on line The Pickup command will prompt WDSRP to pickup the incoming call WDSRP will then be on line with the control panel 4 0 OPERATING GUIDE 4 1 Accounts To access accounts choose Accounts from the WDSRP Main win dow The Find Account window will appear It is here where you keep track of the various control panels accounts that you supervise This window lists various general information concerning the accounts Find Account Template FACTOR Acct ID Communicate Rept ID 1 Sort key 1 Sort key 2 History Auto service Insert New Name Auto call Address City Zip Contact Da 4214270 Edit Data Delete Locate Key Notes Factory Default Key Select Comm 11 58 Wed Jul 24 1996 Reports Image 12 01 Wed Jul 24 1996 Status Created 11 52 Wed Jul 24 1996 Modified 12 00 Wed Jul 24 1996 Revision 110 Modify oper 1 Beginning Previous Next End of File Locate a specific record in the data base Also changes the database key You can scroll through the account database by using the command buttons Beginning Previous Next or End of File at the bottom of the window Close 4 2 Account General Information The general information consists of Edit Account SAMPLE Thomas J Brown Account ID
81. LP 14 15 LP 16 ssssssssss O DS7433 Front View Printed Circuit ple off Ears Board PCB ae ie Stand off Be sure that the lilu off is pressed firmiv through the Printed Circuit Board so that the Stand off ears can expand outward CPower Indication LED KON nstall DS7433 Here ninni 1000 min 00000 0000 000 OQCLOJO OJO O O O O O O O an cer Expansion Port ke Stand Offs 4 Fa DS7400 Xi 90900000 CEEE eye ete eevee te Installing the DS7433 on the DS7400 Xi m Remote Points supervised __ LP 10111 LP 13 15 LP 16 2 21KQ 2 21KQ 2 21KQ 2 21KQ 2 21KQ 2 21KQ 2 21KQ 2 21KQ 2 wire fire End of Line resistors are P N 25899 Burglar End of Line resistors are P N 25944 DS7433 Wiring Detection Systems Int l Inc 19 Rue du 19 Mars 78130 Unit 13 18 17 F New Commerce Centre Les Mureaux France 19 On Sum Street Shatin N T Phone Fax 33 1 34 74 9576 Hong Kong 852 2635 2815 Fax 852 2648 7986 Detection Systems Ltd Detection Systems Inc 130 Perinton Parkway Fairport New York USA 14450 9199 716 223 4060 800 289 0096 Fax 716 223 9180 Copyright 1993 96 Detection Systems Inc DS7433 Installation Instructions P N26092D Installation Instructions for the DS7445 and DS7447 Control Stations General Information
82. Line module etc Also for keypads 11 15 For Commercial Fire Mode Option Bus wiring should be in conduit if run ouside the enclosure ZO HAVO OWE KEYPAD BUS Up to 15 keypads may be used Can be home run or daisy chained PHONE LINE T TH RH R PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUTS PO1 shorts to aux power negative when activated PO1 can sink up to 1 0 A PO1 function programmed in address 0147 PO2 supplies 12 V and up to 500 mA when activated PO2 function programmed in address 0148 ZONES 1 8 Zones 1 8 are intended for connection of Normally Open or Normally Closed alarm contacts They may also be used for compatible 2 wire smoke detectors These zones require a 2 21KQ resistor P N 25899 at the end of the loop Power is momentarily removed from L after a PIN System Reset or during a fire verification Zone 1 8 assignments are programmed in address 0018 0025 O0OO00000 Maximum wire length each 1000 ft 305 m L 00000000000000 Maximum wire length total in system 6000 ft 1830 m when using 22 AWG 0 8 mm or 18 AWG 1 0 mm cable Keypads 1 10 connect to the Keypad Bus and keypads 11 15 connect to the Option Bus Note Shared cable is not recommended for keypad multiplex options bus telephone or siren wiring DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 4 0 Hardware Lavout Exampl
83. Loop EOL P N 28010 POWER BUS Input Loops f 1 23V45v6748 To control panel Aux lt Power Terminals 7 and8 _ lt p NC ep To DS7430 MUX ANA NN BUS Terminals 4 47KQ 47KQ 47KQ47KQ 47KQ 47KQ 47KA 47KQ Burg End of Line resistors are Detection Systems Inc P N 26069 a To separate powered detectors Figure E DS7432 Wiring Diagram when using separate powered detectors Copyright 1993 96 Detection Systems Inc DS7432 Installation Instructions Installation Instructions for the DS7433 8 Input Module 1 0 General Information The DS7433 is an 8 input Module for use with the DS7400 Xi Series Control Communicator It connects directiv to the DS7400 Xi and is designed to expand it to 16 hard wired points One DS7433 mav be used per DS7400 Xi svstem e Current Draw 65 mA H Standby 80 mA H with one point in alarm Add 15 mA H per additional point in alarm Maximum Loop Impedance 60 ohms e End Of Line Resistor 2 21 K ohm 2 0 Installation Warning Failure to follow the mounting instructions in this manual may result in damage to the DS7400 Xi Control Panel Caution The DS7433 and DS7400 Xi contain static sensitive components and must be handled with care Follow anti static procedures when handling the boards Install the DS7433 board prior to installing the DS7400 Xi board into the control enclosure If the DS7400 Xi board is already installed in the control
84. Name State City f Address Voice phone Data phone Reporting ID1 Reporting ID 2 Reporting ID 3 WDSRP User s Guide 4 3 14 Reports Choose the Reports command from the right hand column command buttons This command is used to print information on a single Ac count or a group of Accounts Accounts Report Selection Ei Report Account General Information z Destination Printer gt Window gt Fie Setup Print Range All gt Pages Filter Generate Report Select a report Copies _ Chafee Senden Close Note Not all reports are available for all types of control communicators Account General Information This report provides the account general information such as names addresses and contacts for the accounts in the database Mailing Labels This report generates mailing labels for all the accounts in the data base EEPROM Data Available on the DS7080i DS7400 DS7400X DS7400Xi and DS7400Xi Ver 3 only This report provides the programming ad dresses and control communicator programming information as it would be displayed on a keypad in a two digit hexadecimal format Note When using this or any other report you may wish to use a report filter This can save a significate amount of time when generating reports Account Report Filter Account IDs First Cancel Last Enter the first account ID To use the
85. Partition 1 can be programmed as a common area that is common to other partitions This allows it to be used in an installation with one common entry area such as a foyer or vestibule When Partition 1 is programmed as a common area it will only arm when all the partitions it is common to are armed The common area will disarm when any of the partitions it is common to are disarmed only if the user has access to the common area When using a common area a Master keypad should be used and assigned to the common area see keypad assignment programming 7 6 Keypad Assignment Programming e Keypad Assignment The keypad type and the partition it is assigned to must be programmed Each program address 0173 0180 programs the keypad type for two keypads For example data digit 1 of address 0173 is for keypad 1 data digit 2 of address 0173 is for keypad 2 Each program address 0208 0215 programs the partition as signment for two keypads For example data digit 1 of address 0208 is for the partition assignment of keypad 1 data digit 2 of address 0208 is for the partition assignment of keypad 2 Users must have access to the partition the keypad is assigned to in order to use the keypad e Master Keypad Programming A Master keypad can be used to access all the partitions It will display the arm disarm status of all the partitions and can be used to individually control each partition see the operating section for an explana
86. Partition 5 EA Belongs to Partition 8 Follows all Partitions 8 DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 12 8 Partition Control Programming Program Address 0165 Example Partition Control programming defines the number of partitions in use To program the Partition Control as the Svstem will use 3 Partitions and the common area common area can only be partition 1 and Partition 1 is common to Partitions 2 and 3 Data Digit 1 2 Data Digit 2 1 See Glossary section 7 5 for further details Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Program Address 0 1 6 5 Enter Data Digit 1 2 Enter Data Digit 2 1 coat Enter the pound key Data Digit Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the 1 2 Programmer s Mode Select Option DD No Common Area 0 Partition 1 Common to Partition 2 and 3 1 z l Partition 1 Common to Partition 2 5 3 Partition 1 Common to Partition 2 6 Partition 1 Common to Partition2 8 6 Select Option DD Use 1 Partition 12 9 Quick Arm Control Programming Program Address 0169 Example To program so that Partitions 1 and 2 can be quick armed while Parti Quick Arm Control programming defines which partitions can be Honea through 8 cannot be quien armead quick armed armed without requiring a PIN to be entered Data Digit 1 3 Data Digit 2 0 Enter
87. Place the top edge of wall mounted detectors between 4 and 12 inches 10 to 30 cm from the ceiling Dining Kitchen L Bedroom Room Bedroom Rec Room Living Room Smoke Detector Locate smoke detectors between sleeping areas and family living areas Bedroom Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc 7 2 Changing the Date It is recommended that this procedure be performed at a DS7447 Keypad No visual clues will be given from a DS7445 keypad Steps to Change Command If Accepted the Date Sequence the Display Reads 1 Enter the Master Code 2 Change Date Programming Mode Master Godel 110 display will scroll to this 12 3 Enter the Month 0 1 through 1 2 Enter Day January December 01 31 4 Enter the Day 0 1 through 3 1 XX End with The last two digits of the year Month Day Year 5 Enter the Year followed by the button Note Entering the command sequence Master Code 0 2 will cause the DS7447 keypad to read back the date The control panel will exit from the Master Code Programming Mode approximately 15 seconds after the last keystroke 7 3 Changing the Time It is recommended that this procedure be performed at a DS7447 Keypad No visual clues will be given from a DS7445 keypad Steps to Change Command If Accepted the Time Sequence the Display Reads 1 Enter the Master Code Master Code 0 6 Change Time Programming Mode
88. Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Program Address 1 5 2 0 Enter Data Digit 1 2 Enter Data Digit 2 0 Enter the pound key Data Digit Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode Options ejeje l i eje jejejejejejej Da Digt DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 12 35 Call Out Timer Programming Program Addresses 1521 1524 Example This section allows vou to define the Hour and Minute for the Com To program the Remote Programmer Call Out hour and i y minute as 2 30 pm municator Test Report and Remote Programmer Call Out Hour Data Digit 1 1 Data Digit 2 4 The default time for the Communicator Test Report to be sent and Data Digit Minuto Pals Pig T8 Ba Digita 0 for the control to call the Remote Programmer is Midnight 1 2 Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Program Address 1 5 2 3 Enter Data Digit 1 1 Enter Data Digit 2 4 Enter the pound key will go to Address 1524 ere Enter Data Digit 1 3 Data Digit Enter Data Digit 2 0 Enter the pound key 1 2 Program the next Address Program a different Address ji Call Out Hour or Exit the Programmer s Mode Address 1523 Test Report Hour Default 00 Midnight Address 1521 Data Digit Default 00 Midnight Test Report Minute 4 2 Call Out Minute Data Digit A
89. Remote programming successful report Remote programming failure report Local programming successful report Local programming failure report EEPROM checksum failure or keypad supervision failure report EEPROM checksum restoral or keypad supervision restoral Aux power fault report Aux power restoral Exit error report Recent closing report clr System test start report System test end report Unspecified system trouble Unspecified system trouble restoral Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc DS7080i Reference Guide wvjojHiojoi Aju N e 13 2 Contact ID Format For Additional Information see Program Reports ming Addresses 174 230 Burglarv alarm for a zone Fire alarm for a zone Kevpad fire A Kevpad fire restoral A Keypad emergency 1 3 or B Keypad panic or C Burglary restoral for a zone Fire restoral for a zone Burglary trouble for a zone Fire trouble for a zone Burglary trouble restoral for a zone Fire trouble restoral for a zone Open report Close report Duress report Partial close report First open after alarm cancel report Low battery Low battery restoral AC failure AC failure restoral Automatic Comm test report Manual Comm test report Remote programming successful report Remote programming failure report Local programming successful report Local programming failure report EEPROM checksum failure or keypad supervision failure report EEPROM checksum restoral
90. SS A ee REE EEE E O e Send a Test Report every 12 hours Call the Remote Programmer every day 8 0 2 are Hex values They will display as A C at the Call the Remote Programmer every 8 days 9 keypads Call the Remote Programmer every 28 days 0 is a Hex value It will display as an A at the keypads 10 26 History Event Control Programming Program Address 289 Example History Event Control programming determines which events To program to store burglar alarms fire alarms open and close H events and local remote program events are stored in memory Data Digit 1 3 Data Digit 2 0 See Glossary Section 6 14 for further details Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 81 7 6 0 igi Enter the Program Address 2 8 9 Data Digit Enter Data Digit 1 3 Enter Data Digit 2 0 1 2 Enter the Pound button ii i Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode Enter the Data Digit as a Select Options JONKNENENENENENFAERENTIRAZJENZA FStoreburglaralarms Jel je je je je je je je CStoretreaams lele jeje jeje jee Storekeypadalams elelele jejejeje Siow zoreiroubtes anavesoras_ lelelelelelelele 0 5 are Hex values They will display as A F at the keypads Enter the Data Digit as a ET 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Jo forijejsfe Be Sore system toubies andvestoals Je je je je je je je je So
91. Sonone Farosinzon elelelelelelele 50 Hz operation e je jej lo je jo je jo 80 Hz operation e e jo j eo je le fe 0 5 are Hex values They will display as A F at the keypads Enter DD as a Select Options fo 1 2 3 Restore when Sounders Silence e Jel Restore when Zone Restores Tel i EREE lejo 10 4 Keypad Assignment Programming Program Address 011 Data aH FILI Kevpad Assignment programming assigns the kevpad tvpe Enter the Data Digit as a for each of up to 4 keypads Select Options fo 1 2 33 14 15 16 17 T8 Note At least one keypad must be programmed as keypad 1 Disabled e II l I LEDKeypad jej eo je jejel See Glossary Section 6 4 for further details Alpha LCD Keypad je je jojojo a 1 emer IT l Islelejejeje Note For Program Address 011 Data Digit 1 when programmed as a 7 Kevpad 1 is LED and Kevpad 2 is Example Alpha When programmed as an 8 Kevpad 1 is Alpha To assign Kevpad 1 and Kevpad 2 as Alpha LCD kevpads and have Kevpad 2 is LED Kevpads 3 and 4 disabled Enter the Data Digit as a Data Digit 1 6 Data Digit 2 0 Select Options 0 11 213 4 5 6 7 8 Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Disabled je T x 1 Erter Baa DIE El LEDKeypd jej eo e jejel Enter Data Digit 2 l Aipha LCD Keypad Je je jejejej R EPA SSE iora a different Address or E
92. Spectrum PAL200 inputs should be connected to the alarm outputs the active alarm sounder output may be used Report Programming Programming shall be enabled to allow all alarm signals to be transmitted via the DACT and PAL200 Burglar Zone Reports are not required since the alarms are transmitted over the PAL200 Low Battery Report Program Address 215 must be programmed AC Failure Report Program Address 217 must be programmed Open Report Program Address 210 must be programmed Close Report Program Address 211 must be programmed 24 Hour Check In Reports Program Addresses 219 and 220 must be programmed Timer Programming Entry Exit Delay Times Program Addresses 164 166 must be programmed for not longer than 60 seconds General Control Programming Must be programmed for no swinger shunts and closing ring back Program Address 010 Data Digit 2 enter 0 1 or 2 Program Address 169 must be programmed as Data Digit 2 0 Program Address 171 must be programmed for the Commercial mode Zone Programming The Burglar alarm output signal whether pulsed or steady must be different from the Fire alarm signal Alarm Output Programming Program Address 008 must be programmed as Data Digit 1 0 B Grade B Installations using Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter with local bell Required Accessories e The control must be a Detection Systems model DS7080iCC with a cover actuated tamper switch installed e The
93. Standard 72 The National Fire Alarm Code This standard is available at a nominal cost from The National Fire Protection Association Batterymarch Park Quincy MA 02269 If Installed in Family Residences Adherence to the NFPA Standard 72 can lead to reasonable fire safety when the following items are practiced e Minimize hazards Avoid the three traditional fire killers smoking in bed leaving children home alone and cleaning with flammable liquids Provide a fire warning system Most fire deaths occur in the home the majority during sleeping hours The minimum level of protection requires smoke detectors to be installed outside of each separate sleeping area and on each additional story of the dwelling For added early warning protection it is recommended that detectors be installed in all separated areas including the base ment bedrooms dining room utility room furnace room and hallways Having and Practicing an Escape Plan A fire warning may be wasted unless the family has planned in advance for a rapid and safe exit from the building e Draw a floor plan of the entire house showing two exits from each bedroom and two from the house Since stairwells and hallways may be blocked during a fire the plan should provide exits from bedroom windows Make copies of the plan and practice it with all family members Prearrange a meeting place outside and away from the residence Once out of the building all occupants should imme
94. System in Test Report and System in Test Restoral Report are programmed See Section 8 30 Address 36 Test Reports System Test DS7060 Reference Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc WARNING Make sure that the report value programmed at these locations will be clearly understood at the Central Station The System in Test Report will be sent followed by the alarm and restoral reports of the zones being tested providing their corresponding report address is programmed After completion of the Zone Test the System in Test Restoral Report will be sent If these two reports are misunderstood then the zone alarms might be perceived as a real violation TYPE OF TEST COMMAND WHAT WILL WHAT TO DO SEQUENCE HAPPEN Zone Test Commercial Mode DS7443 DS7445 The zone LEDs will Test each detector one PIN 8 1 flash for any zones that have not been at a time as instructed tested by the installing Residential Mode DS7447 Test Zone will display followed company 8 1 by the zone number of any zones that have not been tested To exit the Zone Test mode enter your PIN DS7443 DS7445 The zone LED will turn followed by H or press on steady for the zone that is currently the key being violated tested DS7447 Now Testing will be displayed followed by the zone number of the zone that is currently being voilated tested It returns to Test Zone after the violation
95. Systems Inc Delete This command allows vou to move the historv events to the Historv Archive or delete them completelv e Close This command will return you to the previous screen If vou would like to view the Historv for a specific Account select Ac count from the WDSRP Main window Locate the Account vou wish to access Historv for and choose the Historv command The Historv for that particular control panel will then be displaved 6 0 LOGOUT There are several wavs to Log out of WDSRP 1 Select Log out from the WDSRP Main window By choosing this command you are exiting the WDSRP program as a user The Log in password window will appear indicating that log out has taken place and that you must use your pass word to log in again Please Enter Your Log In Password Mim Ei Selecting Log out from the Windows Title bar will allow you to log out and retain the WDSRP menu on the screen You may also select Log out and Minimize which will log out and re duce WDSRP to an icon in Windows 3 1 or a selection on the Task bar in Windows 95 Remember This is a communications program The user is expect ed only to log out not quit the program Quitting will ter minate operation and communications will not be possi ble 7 0 UTILITIES The Utilities menu can be accessed from the WDSRP Main window Choose Utilities from the pull down menu items at the top of this win dow From here you will be able to access the followi
96. Test report time 0 Enter the entry delay time Copyright 1994 96 Detection Systems Inc WDSRP User s Guide Pin Numbers Bv choosing this command the edit PINNUMBERS user codes win dow will appear From here vou mav program and edit PIN numbers Edit PINS SAMPLE Thomas J Brown PIN 123 45 6 7 8 Aleve el el dl Hd dl Users name lt Authority Master Code Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled PINs 1 15 gt 1630 gt 31 45 gt 4660 gt 6l 75 gt 76 90 Enter the digits of the user s PIN ozezr mi rommobobmiP Commercial Fire DS7400 DS7400X DS7400Xi and DS7400 Xi Ver 3 By choosing this command the edit commercial fire window will appear From here you may edit parameters necessary for the commercial fire mode Edit Commercial Fire SAMPLE Thomas J Brown Waterflow zones verification delay 4 Nene gt Af secende gt 18 seconds gt amp secends gt 28 seconds gt 8 secends gt Local gt Central station Fire output pulsing mode Dual phone line f bell monitor 1 second on and off 4 Outputs follow fire gt California march time gt Outputs follow fire 7 burg alarm
97. Windows 19 Time Zone 27 Troubleshooting 28 U unknown account 11 UPLOAD 15 Upload Panel to WDSRP 26 User PIN Information 21 Users 23 Delete 25 Edit Data 24 Insert New 24 Key Select 25 Locate Key 25 UTILITIES 26 Utilities Organize 26 V Voice Call 12 13 Ww Warranty Limited 4 WDSRP Setup 5 Z Zone Definitions 19 Zone Functions 18 21 Zone Programming 18 WDSRP Users Guide Copvright O 1994 96 Detection Svstems Inc Copvright O 1994 96 Detection Svstems Inc WDSRP User s Guide Installation Instructions forthe biki eami DS7443 and DS7444 ki El siti El Control Stations Kevpads ed e TEST WEEKLY 1 0 General Information DG Off C1 C2 C3 The DS7443 and the DS7444 are 4 wire LED Control Stations 4 5 6 Renmoler 4 5 6 PO keypads intended for use with the DS7400Xi DS7080i and C C C C 2 C C C z DS7060 Control Communicators panels The DS7443 has 6 zone DE ii Da Ci LEDs and the DS7444 has 8 zone LEDs otherwise the two control ONGA a Ce 0 C im stations are identical OOO Ge OOO Ge Mounting variations of the keypads include wall surface mounting mounting to standard single gang switch or outlet boxes and or DS7443 DS7444 direct mounting to the front of the control panel s enclosure Figure A Front view of keypads The recommended wiring
98. Zone 81 Zone 82 Zone 83 Zone 84 Zone 85 Zone 86 Zone 87 Zone 88 Zone 89 Zone 90 Zone 91 Zone 92 Zone 93 Zone 94 5 0 System Worksheet continued Function DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Zone Location and Notes continued Partition amp Location Type Zone Output Zone 95 Zone 96 Zone 97 Zone 98 Zone 99 Zone 100 Zone 101 Zone 102 Zone 103 Zone 104 Zone 105 Zone 106 Zone 107 Zone 108 Zone 109 Zone 110 Zone 111 Zone 112 Zone 113 Zone 114 Zone 115 Zone 116 Zone 117 Zone 118 Zone 119 Zone 120 Zone 121 Zone 122 Zone 123 Zone f 124 Zone f 125 Zone 126 Zone f 127 Zone 128 Function f Copvright O 1995 96 Detection Svstems Inc Partition amp Location 6 0 Svstem Overview 6 1 DS7400Xi Description The DS7400Xi Control Communicator is a fully integrated hardwire multiplex security fire alarm system It can support up to 128 input zones 90 individual users and multiple output options It can be partitioned into as many as eight separate systems thus allowing individual control and reports for each partition Up to 15 keypads may be used to provide user interface with the system as well as programming access for the installer 6 1 1 A C Failure Report Delay The A C power loss report can be programmed to delay for up to 254 minutes see address 0197 The same delay would also apply
99. Zone 8 Alarm Report Keypad Emergency Alarm Report Keypad Panic Report Zone 1 Alarm Restoral Report Zone 2 Alarm Restoral Report Zone 3 Alarm Restoral Report Zone 4 Alarm Restoral Report Zone 5 Alarm Restoral Report Zone 6 Alarm Restoral Report Zone 7 Alarm Restoral Report Zone 8 Alarm Restoral Report Zone 1 Trouble Report Zone 2 Trouble Report Zone 3 Trouble Report Zone 4 Trouble Report Zone 5 Trouble Report Zone 6 Trouble Report Description Zone 7 Trouble Report Zone 8 Trouble Report Zone 1 Trouble Restoral Report Zone 2 Trouble Restoral Report Zone 3 Trouble Restoral Report Zone 4 Trouble Restoral Report Zone 5 Trouble Restoral Report Zone 6 Trouble Restoral Report Zone 7 Trouble Restoral Report Zone 8 Trouble Restoral Report Open Report Close Report Duress Report Partial Close Report First Open After Alarm Report Low Battery Report Low Battery Restoral Report AC Failure Report AC Failure Restoral Report Automatic Comm Test Report Manual Comm Test Report Remote Program Successful Report Remote Program Unsuccessful Report Local Program Successful Report Local Program Unsuccessful Report System Trouble Report System Trouble Restoral Report Exit Error Report Recent Closing Report System Test Report System Test Restoral Report Phone 1 Account Code Phone 2 Account Code Phone Number 1 Format Phone Number 2 Format Programmer s Code Master Code Cross zoning Control Cross zoning Control Cr
100. Zone Restores 11 ringer equivalence 4 S Send Trouble at Close 11 SIA Format 56 SIA Report 37 Silent Alarms 9 Siren on Comm Fail 11 Spanish 11 Special Emergency Key 11 Swinger Shunts 11 Switch to Pulse 12 System Fault 18 System Reset 10 System Status 10 System Test 13 System Trouble 13 System Trouble Restoral 13 System Worksheet 7 T Temporal 11 Temporary PIN 17 Terminal Wiring 6 Test Report Programming 46 Time Changing the 16 Timer Programming 35 Tone Dial 12 Trouble on Open 9 Trouble on Short 9 Trouble Restoral 13 Trouble Zone 9 Trouble Zone Mode Programming 36 U U L Listings 48 Understanding Programming Charts 22 Unlimited PIN 17 User Number 17 User number 37 Z Zone 9 Zone Alarm 10 12 Zone Alarm Restoral 12 Zone Programming 9 23 Zone Test 19 Zone Trouble 13 18 Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc DS7080i Reference Guide DS7080i Reference Guide Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc Page 64 Copvright O 1995 97 Detection Svstems Inc DS7080i Reference Guide Concerns 2 wire Smoke Detector Compatibilitv Affects DS7080i Control Panel K Technical Service Note Detection Systems Inc Fairport New York 14450 Technical Service 800 DSI 7454 Sales 800 289 0096 and 716 223 4060 Fax 716 223 9180 Dated December 13 1995 The following is a list of 2 wire smoke detectors that have proven to be compatible with the DS7080i Co
101. alarms Zone Test works on all zones except 24 hour zones and fire zones While the keypad is in Zone Test no control panel alarms will activate an alarm except 24 hour zone alarms and fire alarms These will override the Zone Test function command What will Happen What to Do Sequence DS7447 Test Zone will display followed by the zone number of any zones that have not been tested DS7445 The zone LEDs will flash for any zones that Test each detector one at a have not been tested time as instructed by the installing company Zone Test PIN FI 8 1 DS7447 Now Testing will be displayed followed l bv the zone number of the zone that is currentiv being To exit the Zone Test mode violated tested It returns to Test Zone after the enter your PIN violation followed by the key DS7445 The zone LED will turn on steady for the zone that is currently being violated tested If in Residential Mode a PIN is not required for this command 7 8 Battery Sounder Test This chart explains the procedure for performing a battery test If a power failure occurs your control panel has a built in battery that will continue to power the control panel for many hours The control panel automatically recharges the battery when power is restored In addition to an automatic battery test performed every 24 hours the battery may also be tested manually This test also uses the battery to manually activate all t
102. and if daylight savings is observed As an example the east coast of the US Eastern time zone is located 5 hours from UTC and the west coast is located 8 hours from UTC Hours from UTC 5 EJ Daylight savings Enter the number of phone lines to be handled by WDSRP Phone lines 1 1 3 5 WDSRP Setup Confirm The WDSRP Setup Confirm window will appear after choosing Continue If the information is correct choose Continue If the information is incorrect choose Back and change the incorrect information WDSRP Setup will install the program on your hard drive after selecting Continue Exit will cancel the installation WDSRP Setup Confirm Please confirm the information below is correct User name Lori Collins Company name Detection Systems Inc Ciwdsrp Phone lines 1 Hours from UTC 5 Dawlight savings Install ta Observed The following window will appear after successful installation Continue Copyright 1994 96 Detection Systems Inc Setup Successfull Please see the readme txt file for important modem and other setup information 2 0 GETTING STARTED Now that you have successfully installed the WDSRP software you are ready to begin the first steps toward successful usage of this software When starting the WDSRP program you have a choice of choosing the WDSRP Edit icon or the WDSRP 1 2 3 or 4 icons Note The number of WDSRP Icons appearing will
103. are compatible with the DS7400Xi Note Contact your central station regarding which format to use and if a special line card is required Extended ojojoj oloaan ejejeje lele sewraw Receiver The Format type the DS7400Xi ADEMCO Model 685 supports and the Digital Alarm F B I Model CP 220 Communicator Receiver accepts je jejejejej ejeje jejejejej Osborne Hoffman Model II Radionics Model 6000 Radionics Model 6500 gg ejejejejejejejox llel jejejomar e ie e LLI 5 e 7 e e e i e e e renmen jejejejeje 12 30 Phone Answering Programming Program Address 0531 Example M 1 Data Digit To program the Control Panel to an See Glossary section 7 15 for further details 1 2 swer the Phone after 2 rings when Armed and after 4 rings when Dis E armed e Select Option Data Digit 1 2 Data Digit 2 4 When Armed Don t Answer Phone Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Program Address Answer Phone on 1 ring 0 5 3 1 Enter Data Digit 1 2 Enter Data Digit 2 4 Answer Phone on 3 rings Enter the pound key Select Option When Disarmed Answer Phone on 2 rings Don t Answer Phone Answer Phone on 1 ring Answer Phone on 4 rings Answer Phone on 2 rings Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Pro Answer Phone on 5 rings grammer s Mode Answer Phone on 3 rings
104. armed 6 0 Testing Disconnect the phone line connection After a 50 second delay the line fault output will fault the zone it is wired to Verify the proper sounder output 7 0 Operation If the DS7481 Monitor detects a phone line fault for more than 50 seconds it will activate the relay output A phone line failure may be caused by e A cut or missing phone line or a mis wired jack To clear a line fault error e Determine the cause of the failure and eliminate the cause e After eliminating the cause of the failure wait at least ten seconds e The error will clear if the problem has been eliminated and the zone output will return to normal 8 0 Wiring to Control Panels DS7481 Terminals Control Panel Terminals Contacts Ground 12 VDC Power Aux Power Line Ring Line Ring House Ring House Tip Control Ring Control Tip Line Tip Line Tip RJ31X Jack Optional Figure B Wiring Connections Detection Systems Inc Fairport New York 14450 Technical Service 800 374 7454 Sales 800 289 0096 and 716 223 4060 Copyright 1994 95 Detection Systems Inc Fax 716 223 9180 DS7481 Installation Instructions P N 27090C DS7481 Installation Instructions 9 0 FCC Compliance Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against ha
105. armed period After the third alarm or trouble the zone will be bypassed and a trouble report for this zone will be sent 6 4 Keypad Assignment Programming e Keypad Assignment The keypad type LED or Alpha and its number 1 4 must be programmed Program address 011 programs the keypads Data digit 1 of program address 011 programs keypads 1 and 2 data digit 2 of program address 011 programs keypads 3 and 4 e Keypad Language The system can be set to display keypad information in English French or Spanish See Program Address 157 Data Digit 2 6 5 Emergency Key Programming e Fire Key The emergency key at the bottom left of the keypad entry area is the Fire Key If programmed the key will activate a fire alarm when pressed for 2 seconds It may be programmed for a steady or pulsed alarm Special Emergency Key The emergency key at the bottom center of the keypad entry area is the Emergency Key If pro grammed the key will activate a supplementary or an auxiliary type alarm when pressed for 2 seconds It may be programmed for a silent steady or pulsed alarm e Panic Key The emergency key at the bottom right of the keypad entry area is the Panic Key If programmed the key will activate a panic alarm when pressed for 2 seconds nothing will display at the keypad to indicate an alarm It may be programmed for a silent steady or pulsed alarm Note These keys are not intended to substitute for Listed manu
106. be cleared by the System Reset command sequence even after the problem has been remedied These displays will not self clear All the other error displays will self clear from the keypads once the problem has been remedied DS7060 User Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7447 AC Power Failure DS7443 or DS7445 LED 1 turns on steady There is a power failure and the panel is operating on backup battery DS7447 Battery Trouble DS7443 or DS7445 LED 2 turns on steady If the system has just been through a power failure wait at least two hours for the battery to recharge then enter a PIN System Reset to perform a battery test DS7447 Communicator Err DS7443 or DS7445 LED 3 turns on steady The communicator failed to communicate with the central station DS7447 System Fault DS7443 or DS7445 LED 4 turns on steady Internal error in the control circuitry or optional circuitry These system faults are Ram Fault ROM Fault EEPROM Fault DS7447 Keypad Fault DS7443 or DS7445 LED 5 turns on steady One of the keypads is not responding to the control panel DS7447 Alarm Fuse Fault DS7443 or DS7445 LED 6 turns on steady The auxiliary power has been shorted DS7447 Zone Trouble DS7443 or DS7445 LED of the zone in trouble will light One of the zones is not responding to the control panel This may also be displayed during power up if so ignore 1 18
107. be programmed for not longer than 60 seconds 13 5 Commercial Fire Alarm A Central Station DACT and Local The control must be installed in accordance with NFPA 72 Required Accessories e DS7420i Dual Phone Line Bell Supervision Module For Local Commercial Fire Alarm A Listed notification appliance such as a Wheelock 46T G10 12 bell or 34T 12 horn e If not using the phone line supervision it must be disabled e AE TR16 Transformer Housing e Atleast one DS7447 must be used and assigned as keypad 1 If only one is used it may be connected to the keypad bus if the keypad is mounted to the front of the box or within the same room as the control equipment and the wire is run in conduit or equivalently protected against mechanical injury within 20 ft 6 1 m of the control equipment If multiple keypads are used one keypad only must be used on the options bus and assigned as keypad 11 14 and meet the same requirements as in single keypad use 50 Hz operation and ground start are automatically forced to the disabled state when central station fire mode is selected DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc Report Programming Burglar Zone Reports must be programmed for those zones used Fire Zone Reports must be programmed for those zones used Low Battery Report Program Address 0325 must be programmed AC Failure Report Program Address 0327 must be programmed Open Report Progra
108. choose it from the How to topics Fora detailed description of a WDSRP dialog box choose it from the Menu Functions For definitions of terms choose this box Glossary How to Administer Accounts Communicate with a Panel Configure Modems Generate Reports Set Up Templates Set Up WDSRP Users Menu Functions File Accounts Templates Users Windows 95 Help The HELP file contains both general and very precise context sensitive information that this User s Guide does not detail Therefore the HELP file will be a significant resource regarding WDSRP and its functionality When in the HELP file some of the text will be underlined green text Clicking on this text with your mouse will result in further information specific to that selection WDSRP User s Guide 3 0 QUICK START GUIDE Now that vou have completed some preliminarv steps vou are readv to begin customizing WDSRP to vour specific needs 3 1 How to Add Users The User database is where vou keep track of all the users of this WDSRP program Each individual record will list various information describing each user for a detailed description of a User record see Section 4 5 Users 1 Start up the WDSRP program by double clicking on a WD SRP icon from the WDSRP window You will be prompted to enter your password Enter the ev eryday password you previously created Choose OK to complete the log in Choose Users from the WDSRP M
109. closing report is not programmed the control will test for a dial tone when the system is armed If the test passes the sys tem will arm normally If the test fails the system will arm but will indicate a trouble condition This can also be used to perform a Bell test upon Arming Siren on Comm Fail for Silent Zone If programmed a silent zone will sound the alarm outputs if the zone is in an alarm condi tion and the system fails to communicate with the central station Restore when Sounders Silence If programmed a zone sends a restoral report and is ready to activate again only after the bur glary bell cut off time expires or the bells are silenced The zone can alarm multiple times per armed period Fire zones always restore when the system is reset regardless of this selection Restore when Zone Restores If programmed a zone sends a restoral report and is ready to activate again as soon as it physi cally restores The zone can alarm multiple times per armed period Fire zones always restore when the system is reset regardless of this selection Restore when System is Disarmed If programmed a zone sends a restoral report when the system is disarmed The zone can only alarm once per armed period DS7080i Reference Guide Fire zones always restore when the system is reset regardless of this selection Allow Swinger Shunts If programmed a zone can only alarm or trouble up to three times per
110. critical factors in a fire alarm system The following are some general considerations Smoke detectors should not be installed in dead air spaces or close to ventilating or air conditioning outlets because smoke may be circulated away from the detector Locations near air inlets should be favored Avoid areas subject to normal smoke concentrations such as kitchens garages or near fireplaces Do not install smoke detectors where normal area temperatures are above 100 degrees F 38 degrees C or below 32 degrees F 0 degrees C Areas of high humidity and dust concentrations should be avoided Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 User Guide e The edge of ceiling mounted detectors should be no closer than 4 inches 10 cm from any wall Place the top edge of wall mounted detectors between 4 and 12 inches 10 to 30 cm from the ceiling Bedroom Bedroom Living Dining Room Room Basement k Smoke Detector Asmoke detector should be located on each story including basements but excluding crawl spaces and unfinished attics Dining Kitchen Bedroom Room Rec Room Bedroom Living Room k Smoke Detector Bedroom Locate smoke detectors between sleeping areas and family living areas For exact mounting information refer to the instructions provided with the smoke detectors DS7060 User Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc A S Arming Silencing Alarms 12
111. depend on the number of phone lines selected during setup WDSRP Edit WDSRP1 WDSRP 2 WDSRFP 3 WDSRP 4 The WDSRP Edit icon is used for editing purposes only It does not communicate with the control panels Use this selection when work needs to be done to any of the WDSRP databases but communication to a control panel is not necessary In order to communicate with a control panel choose one of the WDSRP 1 2 3 or 4 icons This selection will allow you to do all that the WDSRP Edit selection can but also enables you to communicate with a control panel for the transfer of data The 1 2 3 or 4 selections represent the number of the phone line connected to WDSRP 2 1 Changing the Default Password Start up the WDSRP program by double clicking on the WDSRP Edit icon from the WDSRP window You will be prompted to enter your password The software is shipped with the password lev15 Enter lev15 then select OK WDSRP Edit File Edit Utilities Logout Help Accounts Templates Users History Logout Version 1 7714 Feb 20 1996 08 38 59 Serial Number A2141 Lori Collins Detection Systems Inc Please Enter Your Log In Password WDSRP User s Guide Choose Users from the WDSRP Main window 2 2 Changing the Master Password WDSRP Edit B The next task to perform is to change the Master Password Itis a File Edit Utilities Logout Help level 16 pas
112. fesezf of o Local Program Unsuccessful 033 puo e jem First Open After Alarm fos24 oo System Trouble Restoralj0335 Low Battery fos2sfo0f fe Comm Test System off Norm 033 par pees E GA Gc pe e JI jem Comm Testisvstem Normal 0329 00 System Test Restoral 0340 12 26 Phone ARDIS Routing Control Program Addresses 0494 0495 If address 0528 is programmed to Try ARDIS network first the following addresses can be used to control report routing If address 0528 is set to Send alarms via both ARDIS and digital this will force alarms to go to the phone even if the Phone ARDIS report routing for alarms does not specify phone usage c do wo wo wo NI o A Oj N Q Fe Phone ARDIS report routing 0494 Data Digit First digit Open and Close Reports Enter the DD as a 1 2 Select Options 3 jie DI UsePhono je jejejeje UsearDis jejejejeje ENE EDD wes UseEitnter e je mmanrsmpernzen 5 UseBon L fel le usere el elelele ty Prone Fist 111910 oseas jejejejeje Use Either je el Second digit Zone Alarm Zone Restoral UseBoth 10 je and Zone Trouble Reports TryPhoneFirst jeje Phone ARDIS report routing and Phone First count 0495 Data Digit First Digit System Reports Enter the DD as a 1 2 Select Options 3 zh gt UsePhone je jejejeje UsearDis_ jejejejeje LI 1 Li UseEihr le el eax DD Select Option DD Sele
113. filter enter the first and last Account ID numbers of the accounts that you wish to include in the report The default of the filter is the account you are currently using If you wish a report on only one account enter the account number as both the first and last accounts If you set the filter to no value the report generator will search all accounts in the database for information This can have a significant WDSRP User s Guide impact on the time required to generate a report User PIN Information This report generates a listing of the pin numbers and users in a sys tem Zone Functions Available on the DS7400 DS7400X DS7400Xi and DS7400Xi Ver 3 only This report generates a listing of the zone functions for an account Keypad Information Available on the DS7060 DS7080i DS7400 DS7400X DS7400Xi DS7400Xi Ver 3 only This report defines what keypads are used and what addresses are assigned to the keypads Output Programming Available on the DS7060 DS7080i DS7400 DS7400X DS7400Xi and DS7400Xi Ver 3 only This report defines the settings of the alarm programmable and relay outputs Phone Settings This report generates the phone number communication format and dialing method used by the communicator Zone Programming 7400 Style Panels This report generates information on the zone number zone function module type and partition number Zone Programming non 7400 Style Panels This report lis
114. for applications in the state of California s Water Flow Zone This is a zone programmed to operate like a Fire Zone but is specifically intended for water flow switches Anoptional retard timer can be programmed to compensate for changes in water pressure If the timer is used the water flow zone must be activated for the complete time period an alarm will be initiated at the end of the timer period The maximum combined water flow delay of the control panel and the device must not exceed two minutes Note Any zone can be a water flow zone but only zones 1 through 4 may be programmed as delayed water flow zones e Supervisory Zone This is a zone programmed to accommo date shut off valves It will indicate a supervisory condition at the keypads when ac tivated 7 3 Zone Programming e Single Zone Input This is an individual zone such as the on board zones and multiplex contact zones e Multiple Zone Input This is a zone connected to one of the 8 Input Modules or to a Dual Zone Module The inputs are programmed separately see the separate Pro gramming Addresses Worksheet P N 29802 When using the Dual Zone Module loop A is always pro grammed as an odd numbered program address ending in 1 3 5 7 or 9 Loop B is the even numbered program address that follows loop A e DS7465 This is the input zone or the output relay on a DS7465 The odd numbered zone is programmed for the input zone func tion an
115. grated hard wire security and residential fire alarm system It can support up to 8 input zones 15 individual users and multiple output options Upto 4 keypads may be used to provide user interface with the system as well as programming access for the installer Zone Azone is an input to the DS7080i Control Communicator There are 8 hard wired zones on the main circuit board Zone 1 This zone can be programmed as a Fire or Burglar zone It is the only zone capable of supplying power to 2 wire smoke detectors When programmed as a Burglar zone an alarm results on an open or short when the control panel is armed If trouble is programmed a trouble report is generated and the zone is considered Not Ready only when the zone is disarmed For Fire zone operation see the Fire zone description in the Glossary Zones 2 8 These zones can be programmed as Fire or Burglar zones When programmed as a Burglar zone an alarm results on an open or short when the control panel is armed If trouble is programmed a trouble report is generated and the zone is considered Not Ready only when the zone is disarmed For Fire zone operation see the Fire zone description in the Glossary Cross zoning Each zone may be cross zoned to all the other zones or just to one other zone When a pair of zones A and B or B and A are cross zoned an alarm condition is not generated unless 1 Both A and B are in alarm
116. ground start phone systems that require a momentary short to ground to obtain a dial tone Connect a separate 12 VDC DPDT relay Connect both relay contact commons to ground and connect the Normally Open of each contact to terminal positions 13 and 16 one to terminal 13 the other to 16 of the DS7400Xi This output follows all partitions regardless of how data digit 2 of the output programming address is programmed Not intended for U L Listed systems Not for use with phone line monitors e System Status ready to arm This is an output programmed to follow the Status LED of the keypad It will activate when the system is ready to arm with no zones violated Zone Alarm This is an output programmed to activate when a zone is in an alarm condition It will remain activated until the system is disarmed or the bell cut off time expires This output is intended to activate alarm bells and sirens This will not activate from Silent or Invisible Zones s Zone Alarm Delayed by 20 sec This is an output programmed to wait 20 seconds after a zone enters an alarm condition to acti vate It will remain activated until the system is disarmed or the bell cut off time expires This output is intended to activate alarm bells and sirens but provides a delay to allow the user to silence the system before it activates Keypad Sounder Output This is an output programmed to fol low the keypad sounder It activates dur
117. gt Temporal cadence Commercial fire mode disabled Time Windows DS7090TM DS7090TMi DS7100 DS7400Xi ROM version 2 04 or greater and DS7400Xi VER 3 only By choosing this command the Edit Auto Arming Times window will appear From here you may edit the arming times Edit Auto Arming Times 7400XIDEMO Detection Systems Inc Sun Mon Tues Wed Fri Sat i i Partition 1 Partition 2 o o Partition 3 FIL FILI Partition 4 Partition 6 HI o Partition 7 0 0 o 0 0 b 0 0 jo TEN Partition 5 0 0 p HE FILI Partition 8 Accept this dialog box and changes made WDSRP Users Guide Zone Definitions DS7060 DS7080i DS7090 DS7090i DS7090TM DS7090TMi and DS7100 only By choosing this command the Edit Zone Definitions window will appear From here you may define and edit related infor mation concerning zones Edit Zone Definitions D51 DETECTION SYSTEMS Le Zone select gt Fire zone 4 Zonei gt Zone 2 gt Zone 3 gt Zone A gt Zone 5S gt Zone amp gt Zone f gt Zone amp gt Silent gt Steady alarm gt Steady AUX relay amp Steady alarm and AUX relay gt Armed alarm disarmed sounder gt Pulsed alarm gt Pulsed AUX relay gt Pulsed alarm and AUX relay gt Invisible gt Sound communicator failure only Verify this zone Day monitor
118. it will be shown in a separate table 10 6 Setting the Control to the Factorv Default CAUTION Only enter 0 1 in Program Address 4058 when you are completely sure you want to erase all installer program ming Entering 0 1 in Program Address 4058 will immediately reset the control to the factory default Any programming already done by the installer will be erased This action cannot be reversed To set the control s programming values back to the default enter the programming mode then enter 4 0 5 8 0 1 10 7 Exiting the Programmer s Mode To exit the Programmer s Mode press the key for a minimum of 2 seconds If no keypad entries are made for 4 minutes the control will automatically exit you from the Programmer s Mode 11 0 Understanding the Programming Charts The Programming Reference Guide makes use of three types of charts Each is described below Enter the Data Digit as a eco Feature2 j jej je ej e The dots represent which Feature3 jeje jojo iktar T included Feres lolelojo fee Example To select Feature 2 oniv enter the data digit as a 1 To select Feature 2 and Identifies the options features Feature 4 available for this address enter the data digit as a 5 If the chart looks like this a combination of features is available to be programmed for that particular address DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc
119. occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or televi sion reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Re orient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that of the receiver Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help 6 16 FCC Phone Connection Notice To Users This control complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules On the inside of the enclosure is a label that contains among other information the FCC Registration Number and the Ringer Equiva lence Number REN for this equipment You must upon request provide this information to your local telephone company The REN is useful to determine the quantity of devices that you may connect to your telephone line and still have all of those devices Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc ring when vour telephone number is called In most but not all areas the sum of the REN s of all devices connected to one line should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that vou mav connect to vour line vou mav want to contact vour local telephone companv to determine the maximum REN for vour local calling area This equipment mav not be used o
120. of the exit delay If this happens the entry delay will begin If the system is not disarmed before the entry delay expires an alarm report for the effected zone will be sent and the Exit Error report will be sent Recent Closing This report is sent along with any alarm re ports when there is an alarm within the first five minutes after the system has been armed System Test This report is sent when a system test has been started using the 81 key sequence System Test Restoral This report is sent when the system test 81 has been completed or has timed out 6 14 History Event Control The control can store up to 30 history events by time and date The events stored in history are determined at program ad dress 289 You may select to store or not to store burglar fire and keypad alarms zone troubles and restorals system troubles and resto rals opens and closes bypasses and program accesses 6 15 FCC Compliance Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not
121. own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and inter nal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Caution Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate elec tric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate Terminal Requirements The Load Number LN assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be con nected to a telephone loop which is used by the device to prevent overloading The termination on a loop may consist of any combina tion of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100 The Load Number of the DS7400Xi is 2 RFI Requirements This Class A digital apparatus meets all re quirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Reg ulations Cet appareil numerique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Reglement sur le material broilleur du Canada 7 19 For Installations in New Zealand Two wire Connection The operation of this equipment on the same line as telephones or other equipment with audible warning devices or automatic ring detectors will give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may cause false tripping of the ring detector Should such problems occur the user is not to contac
122. panel enclosure remove the 7400 Xi board this time Place the DS7400 Xi board on a flat surface with the component side of the module facing up Install the four plastic standoffs in the holes provided in the DS7400 Xi module Avoid bending or flexing the DS7400 Xi board when inserting the standoffs Be sure the standoff tabs are aligned so that they do not touch any components on the module Be sure that the stand offs are firmly pressed into the board so that the ears can expand out See drawings Install the DS7433 board onto the standoffs noting that the connector pins from the DS7400 Xi are properly aligned to install into the connector on the DS7433 Avoid bending or flexing the boards while pressing them onto the standoffs The DS7400 Xi control board may be installed into the control panel enclosure at this time 3 0 Wiring Points 9 16 are intended for the connection of normally open or normally closed alarm contacts These points may also be used with compatible 2 wire smoke detectors 4 0 Programming Refer to your control panel Installation Guide for programming information Detection Systems PTY Ltd Unit 21 45 Gilby Road Mount Waverley Victoria 3149 Australia 61 3 9558 8088 Fax 61 3 9558 8089 Detection Systems PTY Ltd Unit 2 The Riverside Centre 148 James Ruse Drive Parramatta NSW 2150 Australia 61 2 891 4944 Fax 61 2 891 5844 O DS7433 oooooooooee 9 LP 10 11 LP 12 13
123. period Restore when System Disarms If programmed a zone sends a restoral report when the system is disarmed It can only alarm once per armed period Allow Swinger Shunts If programmed a zone can only alarm or trouble up to three times per armed period After the third alarm or trouble the zone will be bypassed and a trouble report will be sent 7 2 Zone Function Programming e Invisible Alarms This is a zone programmed not to have an alarm output or an alarm display at any keypad when activated An alarm signal will be sent but the DS7447 keypad display will read Not Ready while this zone is violated Invisible Alarm zones are recommended for holdup alarms Silent Alarms This is a zone programmed to activate the visual display at the keypad but not audible signals If this zone is also an entry zone an entry tone will sound when this zone is activated Bypassing Allowed This is a zone programmed to allow by passing shunting This is done using the bypass command or the force arming sequence Alarm on Short This is a zone programmed to activate an alarm when its loop is shorted Alarm on Open This is a zone programmed to activate an alarm when its loop is opened Trouble on Open This is a zone programmed to activate a trou ble when its loop is opened and the system is disarmed If the system is armed this zone will activate an alarm if shorted or opened For 24 hour zones regardless of t
124. point of the last backup WDSRP User s Guide Restore Which File Eq Time Operating mode Hours from UTC B Master gt Slave _ Direct Serial Connect gt Accounts Observe daylight savings il el Update clock for davlight savings gt Users Sounds T r Generate alert tones Sound card present gt Templates Answer on ring gt History gt History archive Set panel times automatically Generate audit trail Directories Cancel Database JCAWDSAF History CAWDSRAP Accept this dialog box and changes made Backup CAWDSRA Merge The Merge selection allows you to merge data from Cancel other WDSRP or DSRP databases into your own database Enter the number of hours that the W DSAP time differs from UTC Greenwich England Merge Database xl The specific selections are as follows Source directory l A A e Time Zone It is here where you can edit your hours from UTC and whether or not daylight savings time is observed and update your clock for daylight savings Include l History l Archive _ Users Set panel times automatically Check this box if you wish to set each control panel s timer to match the WDSRP timer taking into account hours from UTC every time contact is Rename gt Replace gt Ignore made Duplicate Accounts and Templates Processing Sound Alert Tones Check this box if you wish aler
125. practiced e Minimize hazards Avoid the three traditional fire killers smoking in bed leaving children home alone and cleaning with flammable liquids Providing a fire warning system Most fire deaths occur in the home the majority during sleeping hours The minimum level of protection requires smoke detectors to be installed outside of each separate sleeping area and on each additional story of the dwell ing For added early warning protection it is recommended that detec tors be installed in all separated areas including the basement bed rooms dining room utility room furnace room and hallways 8 12 2 Having and Practicing an Escape Plan A fire warning may be wasted unless the family has planned in ad vance for a rapid and safe exit from the building e Draw a floor plan of the entire house showing two exits from each bedroom and two from the house Since stairwells and hallways DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide may be blocked during a fire the plan should provide exits from bedroom windows Make copies of the plan and practice it with all family members e Pre arrange a meeting place outside and away from the resi dence Once out of the building all occupants should immediate ly go to the pre selected location to be accounted for Provide a barricade between family members and fire smoke and toxic gases e g close all bedroom doors before retiring Children should be instructed on opening their bedro
126. program both addresses 009 and 010 For Single Input devices press the button to continue program ming The display asks whether you are programming a sensor ora contact it will show the following Sensor Press 4 Contact Press 6 If you are programming a sensor press the 4 button to program these devices to the control panel If you are programming a con tact press the 6 button to program these devices to the control panel Ifthe device is successfully programmed the keypad will sound a single beep and increment to the next zone if there is one pre programmed as a multiplex zone Important Disconnect the device you just programmed and con nect the next device that belongs to the displayed zone to the multiplex bus of the DS7430 and press the button Continue programming Caution 24 hour zones will alarm when you exit the program mer s mode Alarm reports for these zones will be sent if they have been programmed If you do not want these reports sent disconnect power from the system now by unplugging the transformer and removing the red battery lead Do not reconnect power until all zones have been installed and connected to the multiplex bus If no other zones have been pre programmed the display will show the following Mux Zone Enter Zone You may now exit the Zone Programmer s mode by pressing the Reset button for 2 seconds This brings you back to the Programmer s Mode To exit the Pro
127. remove a PIN enter A Master code followed by 0 0 e User number of the PIN to be cancelled followed by User Number 001 can not be disabled in this manner 8 1 3 Authority Levels 0 Master Can enter all commands add or change PINs in all partitions change time and date bypass arm disarm perform system tests system reset and view history Any or all PINs can behave as a Master code 1 Unlimited Can enter all commands bypass arm disarm sys tem reset and perform system tests Can not change PINs 2 General Can bypass arm and disarm Can not change PINs system reset or enter Command 7 or any of the Command 8 functions Bypass and disarm are programmable by partition 3 Arm Only Can arm the system with On arming only Can not perform any other functions including disarming 4 Temporary Valid only for a specified time PIN will disappear upon expiration date Can arm and disarm the system but can not perform any other functions If this function is performed from a Master Keypad you must be in Single Partition Mode 5 Duress When the system is disarmed using the duress PIN a silent report is sent to the central station The Duress PIN is intended to be used when the user is forced to disarm the sys tem 6 Access When a PIN with an Access code is entered any output programmed for Access Output e g door strikes will pulse on for 10 seconds works when the system is arm
128. result in the three beep error tone and the change will not be made User Number 001 is designated as a Master Code It can be used to add delete read back or change other PINs User Number 001 is shipped from the factorv with the sequence of 1234 This code should be changed to one of vour personal preference PINs should never be programmed with common sequences such as 1111 or 2468 because thev are easilv violated Adding a PIN The following chart will guide you through the steps necessary to add or change a PIN It is recommended that this proce dure be performed at a DS7447 keypad No visual cues will be given from a DS7443 or DS7445 keypad STEPS TO CHANGE COMMAND SEQUENCE IF ACCEPTED A PIN THE DISPLAY READS 1 Enter the Master Code Master Code 0 Enter User No Programming Mode 001 015 2 Enter the User Number 0 0 1 through 0 1 5 Enter PIN 3 Enter the PIN Any 4 digits Each user Enter PIN Again must have a different PIN End with 4 Enter the PIN again followed PIN same 4 digits as above A long beep will sound to by the key then signify acceptance of the new PIN NOTE Users 014 and 015 may be used for Duress and Guest Codes See Sections 5 18 and 5 19 Address 09 User Control for more information NOTE You cannot read back User PIN numbers You should keep a separate list for future reference See Page 22 Removing a PIN To remove a PIN enter a Master Code 0 t
129. shall not be programmed The Pager report format must not be employed Alarm outputs must not be delayed 11 3 PROGRAMMING THE DS7080i When used in U L Certificated installations the control must conform to certain programming requirements The following is a list of the required program entries and required accessories for specific U L Certificated installations 11 3 1 Household Fire Alarm Household Fire Alarm using Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter with local bell The control must be installed in accordance with NFPA 72 Required Accessories e At least one Detection Systems model DS250 Series smoke detector with an MB Series base or another Listed compatible smoke detector Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc DS7080i Reference Guide One Wheelock 46T G10 12 bell or 34T 12 horn will provide 85db for UL985 and NFPA 72 requirements other Listed compatible devices with a voltage range of 10 2 to 14 0 V may be used is required for this application and must be installed inside the protected area The standard control enclosure can be used At least one DS7447 or DS7445 Keypad must be used Four wire detectors must be used with Listed power supervision devices A compatible Listed 4 wire detector is the Detection Systems Inc DS250 in an MB4W base A compatible Listed EOL relay is the Detection Systems Inc EOL200 All zones must be used with the EOL resistor P N 25899 provided A Report Programming e F
130. simultaneously or 2 Bis in alarm within N seconds of the clearing of Aor Ais in alarm within N seconds of the clearing of B where N is the time pro grammed in address 283 This allows for a one way trip pattern If two zones are cross zoned to each other A with B and B with A an alarm condition is not only generated by conditions 1 and 2 above but also if 3 Ais in alarm within N seconds of the clearing of B This allows for a two way trip pattern Note An alarm condition will be generated any time the above criteria is met Zone overlap is allowed e g A may be cross zoned with B and B cross zoned with C etc Entry Exit and Follower zones may not be cross zoned e Trouble Zone TRBL This non supervised requires no End Of Line resistor zone is intended for the use of simple tamper devic es If tripped this zone will generate a Control Trouble Svstem Fault This trouble will clear when the Trouble Zone loop is un faulted Trouble Zone is disabled by default Trouble Zone has two modes of operation Normally Open and Normally Closed DS7080i Reference Guide 6 0 Glossar 6 1 Zone Programming Invisible Alarms This is a zone programmed not to have an alarm output or an alarm display except when arming at any keypad when activated Invisible Alarm zones are recommended for holdup alarms An alarm signal will be sent but the keypad display will not indicate an alarm while this zone is violated Silent
131. the Edit Data command from the right hand column com mand buttons This command is used to edit the information concern ing that User Edit User Information Password Authority level Sperator ID Name Address City zip Created Modified Modify oper Notes Enter this operator s Password WDSRP User s Guide The Edit User Information window will appear It is here where you mav edit anv or all information concerning this User Delete Note You cannot delete a user of equal or greater authority than your own The Delete Button will not appear on user screens that have equal authority to your own You can not view or modify users with greater authority Choose the Delete command from the right hand column command buttons This command is used to delete this User permanently from record A confirmation window will appear asking if you really wish to delete this User aa CAUTION data will be permanently lost Do you want to delete this record The data can t be recovered YES will delete this record NO keeps the record Choose YES to permanently delete this User or NO to keep this User on record Locate Key Choose the Locate Key command from the right hand column com mand buttons This command is used to find a specific User and have his her data displayed The Locate User window will appear with the cursor in the blan
132. the change being made If there is a third line screen it will be the date of the change To exit the Event History Mode press the key or wait 20 seconds and the keypad will exit automatically When performing this from a Master Keypad each partition will display its own history 8 13 5 Remote Program Dial out and Answer Type of Function Command Sequence What will Happen Remote Program PIN 8 3 The panel will call the remote Phone numbers 1 and 3 must be Dial out programmer programmed and an Account Code must be programmed The panel will answer a call from the remote programmer Remote Program PIN 8 6 Answer DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 8 13 6 Error Displavs This chart explains the procedure for reading Error displavs when the green Power Light is flashing on the kevpad Control panel problems are indicated bv a flashing green Power Light The DS7447 displav will also read Control Trouble Enter 87 The DS7445 will only flash the green Power Light The Error displays may only be read when the control is disarmed Contact your installing company if the problems persist DS7447 AC Power Failure DS7445 LED 1 turns 5 DS7447 Keypad Fault DS7445 LED 5 turns on on steady There is a power failure and the panel is steady One of the keypads is not responding to the operating on backup battery control panel DS7
133. the panel is already using the phone line for a report communication it will sound the three beep error tone This command can only be entered when the control is disarmed This chart will help you to call or answer the Remote Programmer TYPE OF FUNCTION COMMAND SEQUENCE WHAT WILL HAPPEN Remote Program Commercial Mode The panel will call the remote Dial out PIN 8 3 programmer Residential Mode 8 3 Remote Program Commercial Mode The panel will answer a call Answer PIN 8 6 from the remote programmer Residential Mode 8 6 Phone numbers 1 and 3 must be programmed Phone 1 Account Code must be programmed 1 17 Error Displays Control panel problems are indicated by a flashing green Power light The DS7447 display will also read Control Trouble Enter 8 7 The DS7443 and DS7445 will only flash the green Power light The error messages may only be read when the control is disarmed Contact your installing company if the problems persist ACTION DESIRED ACTION DESIRED Read the Error Displav when the Green Commercial Mode Power light is flashing PIN 8 7 Residential Mode 8 7 Clear Error Display Commercial Mode Caution Clear the error display only on the PIN System Reset advice of your installing company or if you are Residential Mode certain the problem has been remedied PIN System Reset Battery Trouble and Communicator Err displays must
134. time for 2 entrv delavs an exit To program Entrv Delav Time 1 for 60 seconds delay the fire bell cutoff and the burglary bell cutoff Data Digit 1 1 Data Digit 2 2 pet re nge A Entry and Exit Delay Timers are in 5 second intervals the maximum Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 naai Enter the Program Address 1 6 4 delay time is 250 Aa kat Enter Data Digit 1 1 ata Digit Enter Data Digit 2 2 For example 1 2 Enter the Pound button f Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the 5 sec 01 Programmer s Mode 15 sec 03 20 sec 04 Exit Delay Time 30 sec 06 See Glossary Section 6 11 for further details 45 Sec 09 Address 166 me 0 to 50 0 to 250 sec Default 12 60 sec 60 sec 12 gt 250 sec 50 5 second intervals Data Digit Data Digit 1 2 1 2 Entry Delay Time 1 Fire Bell Cutoff Address 164 Address 167 0 to 50 0 to 250 sec Default 09 45 sec 0 to 99 minutes Default 04 min 5 second intervals 1 minute intervals Data Digit Data Digit 1 2 1 2 Entry Delay Time 2 Burglary Bell Cutoff Address 165 Address 168 0 to 50 0 to 250 sec Default 09 45 sec 0 to 99 minutes Default 04 min 5 second intervals 1 minute intervals 10 14 Arming Warning Control and Force Arming Programming Program Address 169 Example To program the keypad to be audible during the exit delay period and to allow up to 4 zo
135. to be transmitted via the DACT and PAL200 Burglar Zone Reports are not required since the alarms are transmitted over the PAL200 Low Battery Report Program Address 32 must be programmed AC Failure Report Program Address 32 must be programmed Open Report Program Address 31 must be programmed Close Report Program Address 31 must be programmed Automatic Test Reports Program Addresses 36 be programmed Timer Programming e Entry Exit Delay Times Program Address 23 must be programmed for not longer than 60 seconds General Control Programming e Must be programmed for Swinger Shunts disabled Closing Ringback disabled and Force Arming disabled Pro gram Address 10 Zone Programming e The Burglar alarm output signal Address 04 whether pulsed or steady must be different from the Fire alarm signal Alarm Output Programming s Program Address 08 must be programmed as X X 8 Note Grade AA requires central station polls of the protected premise unit once every 5 minutes during armed periods and randomly during disarmed periods A central station poll once every 24 hours is acceptable for Grade A installations Grade B Installations using Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter with local bell Required Accessories The control must be mounted in the Detection Systems model AE7060CC enclosure with a cover actuated tamper switch installed The Ademco Model AB 12 bell housing see Section 9 4 Report P
136. tone will sound when this zone is activated Steady When this zone alarms all programmed outputs prog1 prog2 prog3 will come on steady unless they are already pulsing in which case they will remain pulsing Pulsing The pattern for the pulsing audible output will be 0 5 sec on 0 5 sec off repeated three times with an additional 1 second delay between repeats When zones are tripped which could cause both pulsing and steady outputs the pulsing output will prevail The alarm outputs will continue to be activated until the bell cutoff timer times out or is reset and then they will silence Only programmable output 3 and the keypad sounders will pulse regardless of the programming Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 Reference Guide 8 5 Address 05 Zone Response Time All six zones can be programmed to respond at either 300 ms 100 ms or a programmable time common to all zones that can be configured to be between 10 ms and 2 5 seconds Use the Default ResponseTime 300 ms MA 010101010 Use the Response Time Programmed in Address 06 8 6 Address 06 Programmed Response Time DEFAULT 1 16 to 250 response time number x 0 01 seconds i e 100 1 second 8 7 Address 07 Zone Restoral Options Restore when Sounders Silence Restore with Zone Restore when Disarmed or Reset Restore when Sounders Silence If programmed a zone sends a restoral report and is ready to activate again only after the burgl
137. transformer batterv and phone line A complete functional test is required after anv programming CAUTION Incorrect connections mav result in damage to the unit Svstem is Power Limited except for battery terminals All wiring entering this enclosure must be power limited O A C Power Indication LED EARTH GROUND Must be connected to a good earth ground such as a cold water pipe and also connected to the cabinet cover using the supplied wire jumper A C INPUT Use U L listed 18 VAC 50 VA class 2 transformer Model TR 1850 requires 50 60 Hz unswitched dedicated outlet do not share ALARM OUTPUT Provides 12 VDC special application up to 1 75 A for powering bells siren drivers etc Function programmed in address 0146 AUXILIARV POWER Provides 12 VDC special application up to 1 0 A for powering detectors TVPICAL BURGLAR AND FIRE WIRING Zone Loop Zone Loop Zone Loop Aux Power Input jor PO2 terminal 5 or 7 Typical 2 wire smoke detector wiring Typical burglar alarm loop wiring for a list of compatible 2 wire smoke detectors see Technical Service Note P N 27685 End of Line Supervision Relay e g Detection Systems L200 Typical 4 wire smoke detector wiring For example Detection Systems DS250 in an MB4W base OPTION BUS Used for options such as the ARDIS communications module the DS7420i Dual Phone
138. uA Standby 350 uA Alarm e Occupies 1 zone e DS7452 Surface Mount Single Multiplex Contact Point re quires a DS7430 Multiplex Expansion Module The DS7452 is intended as a replacement for con ventional dry contacts and to report an actual multi plex address to the control panel Current Draw 350 uA Standby 350 uA Alarm e Occupies 1 zone e DS7457 Single Zone Multiplex Input Module requires a DS7430 Multiplex Expansion Module The DS7457 provides a means of monitoring con ventionally Normally Open or Normally Closed con tacts It reports their status to the control panel as multiplex addresses It occupies one multiplex zone on the system and can monitor one loop It also in cludes a tamper loop s Current Draw 350 uA Standby 350 pA Alarm e DS7460 Dual Zone Module up to 60 per system Requires a DS7430 Multiplex Expansion Module The DS7460 provides a means of monitoring con ventional Normally Open or Normally Closed con tacts It reports their status to the control panel as multiplex addresses It occupies two multiplex zones DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide on the system and can monitor up to two separate loops e Current Draw 1 mA Standby 1 mA Alarm e DS7465 Input Output Module up to 20 per system Requires a DS7430 Multiplex Expansion Module The DS7465 provides a Form C relay that may be programmed to activate on system events and an input loop to monitor conventi
139. until the next fire reset This same procedure will be performed when a SYSTEM RESET is entered except that the two minute instant alarm monitoring period is not ob served Since alarm and trouble reporting to the central station for fire zones is the same as for burg zones i e it is based on the state of the zone it is possible for Fire and Fire Trouble restoral signals to be transmitted even though the panel may still be displaying these zone conditions This is because the displays are latched until cleared by an operator action Fire This zone is active and will alarm all 24 hours of the day regardless of the arming state of the control An alarm ona fire zone will be silenced by entering a disarm code whether the control is armed or not If the fire zone restores and alarms again the alarm will sound again An open during the armed or disarmed period will send a trouble report and not an alarm Fire zones are never silent invisible or swinger shunted All fire zones that have alarmed will continue to show on all keypads until a fire reset is performed even if they have physically restored During this time they will prevent arming and they cannot be force bypassed Fire zones may not be bypassed using BYPASS 8 2 Address 02 Zone Bypass This determines whether the user can bypass the zone Zones programmed for bypassing can be bypassed even when in alarm Fire zones will not be bypassable even if programmed as bypass allowed Byp
140. version The setup program will handle all necessary file conversions Start Microsoft Windows Version 3 1 or higher Insert WDSRP Disk 1 Setup into the floppy drive Open Program Manager Explorer in Windows 95 Using any text editor open the README TXT file to review any last minute additions and changes to the document Choose File Quit when finished From the Program Manager menu choose File Run Enter A setup or B setup depending on which drive con tains the WDSRP Installation diskette 7 Choose OK 8 Insert disks as prompted until installation is complete 1 3 1 WDSRP Setup Welcome After the initializing process the WDSRP Setup Welcome window will appear Choose one of the three options at the bottom of the window WDSRP Setup Welcome This program will setup WDSREF and its associated files Welcome to the WDSRP Setup program Please disable any anti virus software you have loaded before running this setup program 1 3 2 WDSRP Setup Destination The WDSRP Setup Destination window will appear after choosing Continue WDSRP Setup Destination Enter the drive and path where you would like WDOSAP to be installed Install to C WwiDSRP Enter the drive path where you would like WDSRP installed Typically the default path will read C WDSRP Exit NOTE When upgrading an existing version of WDSRP install the new version over the old version Do not change th
141. will quit the program 10 0 TROUBLESHOOTING WDSRP This section contains some tips for using WDSRP effectively and of fers some solutions to problems you may encounter when using the program 10 1 The Status Bar The Status Bar is one of the most important troubleshooting tools WDSRP User s Guide available in WDSRP Located in the lower left hand corner of the ac tive window screen it provides programming information when you are setting up accounts templates users and so forth It also pro vides online status information when you are communicating with a panel Find Account 7400x Template FACTOR Rept ID 1 4 Acct ID Communicate Sort key 1 Sort key 2 Auto service History Insert New Name Auto call Address City Zip Contact Da 4214270 Edit Data Delete Locate Key Notes Factory Default Key Select Comm 11 58 Wed Jul 24 1996 Reports Image 12 01 Wed Jul 24 1996 Status Created 11 52 Wed Jul 24 1996 Modified 12 00 Wed Jul 24 1996 Revision 110 Modify oper 1 Beginning Previous Next End of File Locate a specific record in the data base Also changes the database key Na Close Status Bar In the example above the Locate Key is highlighted and the Status Bar explains that the Locate Key will locate a specific record in the database 10 2 Troubleshoo
142. will read Chime Mode Off for Chime Mode 5 seconds If in Residential Mode substitute the f key for the PIN 1 11 Zone Test The Zone Test is used to confirm that detectors will report alarms Zone Test works on all zones except 24 hour zones and fire zones While the keypad is in Zone Test no control panel alarms will activate an alarm except 24 hour zone alarms and fire alarms These will override the Zone Test function Caution Be sure not to activate 24 hour or fire zones during the zone test or an alarm signal will be sent The Zone Test will initiate communicator reports only if both System in Test Report and System in Test Restoral Report are programmed See Section 8 30 Address 36 Test Reports System Test Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 User Guide WARNING Make sure that the report value programmed at these locations will be clearly understood at the Central Station The System in Test Report will be sent followed by the alarm and restoral reports of the zones being tested providing their corresponding report address is programmed After completion of the Zone Test the System in Test Restoral Report will be sent If these two reports are misunderstood then the zone alarms might be perceived as a real violation TYPE OF TEST Zone Test COMMAND SEQUENCE Commercial Mode PIN 8 1 Residential Mode 8 1 1 12 Local Battery Sou
143. window are filled in auto matically by WDSRP They are e Record created This field lists the time and date when this Template was created Last modification This field lists the time and date when this template was last modified Operator when modified This field lists the operator s number who last modified this Template 4 4 2 Find Template Window Commands Insert New Choose the Insert New command from the right hand column com mand buttons This command is used to create new Templates The Select initial template data window will appear It is here where vou choose the source from which vou will create the new Template Copvright O 1994 96 Detection Svstems Inc Select initial template data Select the source for the initial data for this new template record Select BLANK for no initial data Select ACCOUNT to copy the data from the current account Select TEMPLATE to copy the data from the current template Select CANCEL to cancel the Insert New command Account Template Cancel The choices are Blank Choosing this command will allow you to create a new Template using no initial data This Template will be cre ated from scratch This command will call up a blank Edit Template window From here you will fill in all the necessary general information for this new Tem plate Edit Template New Template SAMPLE1 7AQOXI 31 Type Template Notes Sample
144. wish for this partition You do not need to use your PIN again To move on to the next partition you have access to press the key twice To exit the Single Partition Mode hold the key down for 2 seconds The system will automatically drop out of Single Partition Mode after 40 seconds without a keypad entry 10 0 How to Program the Control Panel 10 1 Entering the Programmer s Mode To enter the Programmer s Mode enter the Programmer s Code followed by 0 Shorting the program pads see section 2 0 for location on the control panel will also activate Programmer s Mode The default Programmer s Code is 9 8 7 6 10 2 Reading back a Program Address Once you are in the programmer s mode to read back the value of a Program Address enter that Program Address followed by Each data digit is displayed one data digit at a time To view the second data digit enter the button again The display will look like this Prog Mode 3 00 Adr 0000 D01 2 This is th dd E ki kies This is the value of this This is the data digit number data digit 10 3 Entering a value in a Program Address To enter a value in the Program Address enter the Program Address then enter the value for each Data Digit then enter to save it and move on to the next Program Address Entering data digit 1 will increment you to the next data digit The display will show the Program Address and will display the value of each
145. with at least 8 Meg of hard disk space free and at least 4 Meg of RAM 2 A working version of Microsoft Windows 3 1 3 DOS Version 3 1 or higher 4 A Hayes Smartmodem 300 1200 1200B 2400 or 2400B Open the README TXT file for the latest information on mo dem compatibility 5 An EGA or Hercules monitor 1 2 Existing DOS DSRP The WDSRP Setup program will not effect your existing DOS data files After installing WDSRP you may incorporate your existing DSRP files into WDSRP by using the Merge function See Section 7 0 Util ities CAUTION Only convert your DOS data files to WDSRP data files when you are ready to stop using DOS DSRP The new data file created when you convert your old files can not be converted back to DOS DSRP If you choose to use WDSRP with your existing DOS files on a test basis you should make a copy of your data files and update the copy 1 3 Running the Setup Program Before running the WDSRP Setup Program you should first disable any anti virus software that you may have loaded You can re enable the anti virus software after the WDSRP installation Make a backup copies of the WDSRP disks Keep the backup copy WDSRP User s Guide in a safe and secure area under lock and key It is only to be used in the event of your system having software or hardware problems and a reinstallation is needed NOTE When upgrading an existing version of WDSRP you should install this new version over your old
146. 0 DS7060 Reference Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc 8 27 Address 33 Programming Report Two Digits 00 through FF uses system report DEFAULT 00 00 routing REMOTE PROGRAMMING SUCCESSFUL REPORT REMOTE PROGRAMMING UNSUCCESSFUL REPORT LOCAL PROGRAMMING SUCCESSFUL REPORT LOCAL PROGRAMMING UNSUCCESSFUL REPORT Remote Programming Successful This report is sent after a Remote Programming session if the session was termi nated properly Remote Programming Unsuccessful This report is sent after a Remote Programming session if some error has occurred or the session did not terminate properly Local Programming Successful This report is sent when local programmer s mode is exited and there has been no error associated with the programming Local Programming Unsuccessful This report is sent when local programmer s mode is exited and there has been some error associated with the programming 8 28 Address 34 System Report Two Digits 00 through FF uses system report DEFAULT a routing FUSE FAULT REPORT FUSE RESTORAL REPORT SVSTEM TROUBLE REPORT SVSTEM TROUBLE RESTORAL REPORT e System Trouble This report is sent when a control trouble condition occurs c System Trouble Restoral This report is sent when all system trouble conditions restore 8 29 Address 35 Exit Error Recent Closing Comm Failure Report Two digits 00 through FF if second digit is F the user code is substituted DEFAULT 00
147. 0 Optional LF Local Fire n a Not Applicable CSB A Central Station Burglary grades AA and A 1 Standard or attack enclosure may be 3 used CSB B C Central Station Burglary grades B and C 2 Either enclosure may be used Devic LB A Local Burglary grade A must be mounted to the enclosure cover PSCB D A Police Station Connected Burglary w DACT grade A or within 20 ft w wiring in conduit PSCB RF A Police Station Connected Burglary w Radio AAGARD System DS7416 3 Either enclosure may be used grades AA and A 4 Either the DS7420i or the DS7481 HF B Household residential Fire and Burglary Shae ae ha bl the phone line input to the control unit DS7400Xi 13 2 INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS e Failure to install and program the control in accordance with the requirements in this section voids the listing mark of Underwriters Laboratories Inc The standby battery capacity is 35 AH 12 VDC The total nominal standby current must not exceed 1 5 A nor 2 5 A when in alarm The control must be mounted indoors and within the protected area Enclosure tamper switches if used must be connected to a 24 hour zone Grounding must be in accordance with article 250 of the NEC NFPA 70 At least one U L Listed keypad with zone display must be connected DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc Zones must be connected to U L Listed compatible devices 50 Hz AC input cannot be
148. 0 Phone Number Control 33 Police Station Connection 45 PROGRAM ADDRESSES QUICK REFERENCE 57 Programmable Output 1 5 Programmable Output 2 5 Programmable Output 3 5 Programmed Response Time 27 Programmer amp Master Codes 41 Programming HOW TO PROGRAM THE DS7060 23 PROGRAMMING THE DS7060 23 Pulsed Formats 34 R Read Alarm History 15 Recent Closing 38 Remote Program Dial out and Answer 16 Remote Program Successful 38 Remote Program Unsuccessful 38 Remote Programming Answer for Remote Programming 16 Call for Remote Programming 16 Report Control 32 REPORT PROGRAMMING 50 REPORTS 34 Reports Account Codes 39 Automatic Test Report 39 Battery AC Report 37 Comm Failure Report 39 Comm Restore Report 39 Communicator Test Report 39 Exit Error Recent Closing Comm Failure Report 38 Keypad Report 34 Open Close Duress Report 37 Programming Report 38 System Report 38 Zone Alarm Report 35 Zone Alarm Restoral Report 35 Zone Bypass Report 36 Zone Bypass Restoral Report 36 Zone Trouble Report 35 Zone Trouble Restoral Report 36 Restore when Disarmed or Reset 27 Restore when Sounders Silence 27 Restore with Zone 27 Ring Count 33 DS7060 Reference Guide S Silencing Alarms 17 Special Formats 34 Special Keys 32 Disabled 32 Fire Key A 32 Help Key B 32 Invisible 32 Panic Key C 32 Pulsing Audible 32 Steady Audible 32 SPECIFICATIONS 5 Storage temperature 5 Swinger Shunt 30 SYSTEM OVERVIEW 5 System Test 39 System Te
149. 0 1 1530 2 1531 1 1531 2 1532 1 1532 2 1533 1 1533 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 o a Ji T o ALI Value Partition 1 1534 1 1534 2 1535 1 1535 2 1536 1 1536 2 1537 1 1537 2 1538 1 1538 2 1539 1 1539 2 1540 1 1540 2 1541 1 1541 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 1542 1 1542 2 1543 1 1543 2 1544 1 1544 2 1545 1 1545 2 1546 1 1546 2 1547 1 1547 2 1548 1 1548 2 1549 1 1549 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 1550 1 1550 2 1551 1 1551 2 1552 1 1552 2 1553 1 1553 2 1554 1 1554 2 1555 1 1555 2 1556 1 1556 2 1557 1 1557 2 Partition 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 1558 1 1558 2 1559 1 1559 2 1560 1 1560 2 1561 1 1561 2 1562 1 1562 2 1563 1 1563 2 1564 1 1564 2 1565 1 1565 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 1566 1 1566 2 1567 1 1567 2 1568 1 1568 2 1569 1 1569 2 1570 1 1570 2 1571 1 1571 2 1572 1 1572 2 1573 1 1573 2 Partition 3 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 1574 1 1574 2 1575 1 1575 2 1576 1 1576 2 1577 1 1577 2 1578 1 1578 2 1579 1 1579 2 1580 1 1580 2 1581 1 1581 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 1582 1 1582 2 1583 1 1583 2 1584 1 1584 2 1585 1 1585 2 1586 1 1586 2 1587 1 1587 2
150. 01 015 2 Enter the User Number 0 0 1 through 0 1 5 Enter PIN 3 Enter the PIN Any 4 digits Each user Enter PIN Again must have a different PIN End with 4 Enter the PIN again followed PIN same 4 digits as above A long beep will sound to by the key then signify acceptance of the new PIN NOTE Users 014 and 015 may be used for Duress and Guest Codes See Sections 5 18 and 5 19 Address 09 User Control for more information NOTE You cannot read back User PIN numbers You should keep a separate list for future reference See Page 22 Removing a PIN To remove a PIN enter a Master Code 0 the User Number of the PIN to be canceled and then again User Number 001 can not be canceled See Section 8 9 for special uses for User Number 14 and 15 PINs Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 User Guide 1 3 Turning ON arming the Svstem The green Status light must be on steadv and no zone lights are displaved on the DS7443 or DS7445 kevpad The DS7447 display must read Ready To Arm in order to arm the system with one of these commands If the green Status light is not on or zone lights are displayed on the DS7443 or DS7445 keypad or if the DS7447 s display is reading Not Ready then see Section 5 7 Force Arming or Section 5 9 Zone Bypass for other ways to arm the system This chart explains the five normal wavs of arming the svstem TVPE OF ARMING DESIRED Normal
151. 1 4 4 7 Enter Data Digit i mol pee ON for 10 sec after pressing System Reset Enter Data Digit 2 1 Z Enter the pound key ON when System is Armed Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode Ground Start oO O EEEMOEEBEE Svstem Status Readv to Arm Octal DS7488 1 Zone Alarm Relay Addresses Zone Alarm delayed by 20 seconds Keypad Sounder Output Access Output 10 sec pulse Panic Duress Output Follow System Wide Events Follow Output Functions See next page for programming options 2 and 3 Ab jidfnu This includes invisible zones See glossary for further details M See section 7 4 for description of this option o NOJA ON These two charts are for programming Data Digit the Octal Relav Module to follow events Follow 1 2 by partition ONOWS aa 3 Disabled e Octal Relay partition assignments are Burglar Alarm e je d dd 3725 2732 See Section 12 321 Fire Alam l l ele Continued on next page DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 12 32 Octal Relav Module Output Programming Program Addresses 1456 1471 Continued Select Option DD Data Digit Disabled Ke 2 Follow 1 2 AC Power Fail Bi Svstem wide 7 wsm de Events 7 Poormunenorrale fof System Fault Any 0 3 are Hex values l They will display as A D at the keypads Data Digit Keypad Supervision Fault El 1 2 Multiplex Bu
152. 1 User 012 User 013 User 014 User 015 DEVICE LOCATION TYPE Example PIB KITCHEN Invisible alarm alarm on short alarm on open 24 hour Zone 1 Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 Reference Guide 7 0 HOW TO PROGRAM THE DS7060 To enter the programming mode the panel must be disarmed When in the programming mode the control is disabled and no alarms will be processed including 24 hour zones and fire zones To enter the Programmer s Mode enter the Programmer s Code followed by 0 The default Programmer s Code is 9876 Enter the Program Address i e 0 2 Press the to change the values After all values have been changed press the to accept the changes and return to the Program Address Repeat the above until all addresses are programmed NOTE Some data digit values are higher than 9 These values are programmed by pressing the reset key followed by another number These values will display as HEX characters when entered The HEX character values are 0 A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F Program Address Values Description Armed 02 ZONE BYPASS Status Power 000000 Fire Don t accept Hold for Accept Value 2 seconds to exit Move cursor left Move cursor right To exit the Programmer s Mode press the key for 2 seconds Also if no keypad entries are made for 4 minutes the control will automatically exit from the Programmer s Mode 8 0 PRO
153. 140 mA Indicating Appliance Circuit Bell Output 12 VDC special application supervised output supplies up to 1 75 A for vibrating bells Auxiliary Output Circuit 12 VDC special application supervised output latches on alarm and resets upon system reset It is intended for strobes indicating appliances and supplies up to 1 0A Initiating Device Circuit terminals 13 16 The Class A loop is intended for connection of Normally Open closed on alarm dry contact initiating devices such as waterflow switches The Class A loop will not support loop powered devices such as two wire smoke detectors Detection Systems PTY Ltd Unit 21 45 Gilby Road Mount Waverley Victoria 3149 Australia 61 3 9558 8088 Fax 61 3 9558 8089 Detection Systems PTY Ltd Unit 2 The Riverside Centre 148 James Ruse Drive Parramatta NSW 2150 Australia 61 2 891 4944 Fax 61 2 891 5844 Maximum Loop Resistance Class A loop tolerates a maximum loop resistance of 150 ohms total Operating Temperature 32 to 120 F 0 to 49 C Ringer Equivalence Number REN 0 1B 3 0 Installation The DS7420i should be mounted within a DS7400Xi enclosure For programming information see the DS7400Xi Reference Guide NOTE The DS7400Xi control must be installed in accordance with NFPA 72 guidelines 3 1 Hardware Installation e Disconnect power from the control Unplug the transformer and remove the red batterv lead NOTE For
154. 15 1 When Central Station Commercial Fire Mode is chosen address 1520 DS7420i Dual Phone Line Bell Supervision Module Output Programming will be forced to a value of 5 12 15 2 When Local Commercial Fire Mode is chosen address 1520 DS7420i Dual Phone Line Bell Supervision Module Output Programming will be forced to a value of 3 4 or 5 Turns the Bell Monitor feature ON and the Alarm Output on Line Fault feature OFF 12 15 3 Regardless of which Commercial Fire Mode is chosen the following parameters will be forced when exiting local programmer s mode e Zone Function 12 address 0012 will be a 7 0 Zone Function 13 address 0013 will be a 7 71 Zone Function 14 address 0014 will be a 7 2 Zone Function 15 address 0015 will be a 7 3 Zone Bypass address 0017 will not allow zone functions 12 15 to be bypassed Emergency Key address 0181 data digit 1 will become a 3 if programmed previously as a 2 Data digit 2 will become a 2 if programmed previously as a 3 Panic Key address 0182 data digit 1 will become a 2 if programmed previously as a 3 Fire Bell Cutoff If less than 5 set to 5 otherwise untouched 12 15 4 In Central Station Commercial Fire Mode the following communication parameters will be forced Report Codes If 0 the following defaults will be set otherwise they will be unchanged Address Default _ Address Default _ Address Default Address Default Address Default e Phone Control If 0 set to 6 1
155. 1588 1 1588 2 1589 1 1589 2 Partition 4 DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 12 37 1 Alpha Description Programming A Worksheet Continued Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 1590 1 1590 2 1591 1 1591 2 1592 1 1592 2 1593 1 1593 2 1594 1 1594 2 1595 1 1595 2 1596 1 1596 2 1597 1 1597 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 1598 1 1598 2 1599 1 1599 2 1600 1 1600 2 1601 1 1601 2 1602 1 1602 2 1603 1 1603 2 1604 1 1604 2 1605 1 1605 2 Partition 5 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character EO EEA l l 1606 1 1606 2 1607 1 1607 2 1608 1 1608 2 1609 1 1609 2 1610 1 1610 2 1611 1 1611 2 1612 1 1612 2 1613 1 1613 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 1614 1 1614 2 1615 1 1615 2 1616 1 1616 2 1617 1 1617 2 1618 1 1618 2 1619 1 1619 2 1620 1 1620 2 1621 1 1621 2 Partition 6 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 1622 1 1622 2 1623 1 1623 2 1624 1 1624 2 1625 1 1625 2 1626 1 1626 2 1627 1 1627 2 1628 1 1628 2 1629 1 1629 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 1630 1 1630 2 1631 1 1631 2 1632 1 1632 2 1633 1 1633 2 1634 1 1634 2 1635 1 1635 2 1636 1 1636 2 1637 1 1637 2 Partition 7 Character Character Character Character Character Character Chara
156. 1742 2 1743 1 1743 2 1744 1 1744 2 1745 1 1745 2 1746 1 1746 2 1747 1 1747 2 1748 1 1748 2 1749 1 1749 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 1750 1 1750 2 1751 1 1751 2 1752 1 1752 2 1753 1 1753 2 1754 1 1754 2 1755 1 1755 2 1756 1 1756 2 1757 1 1757 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 1758 1 1758 2 1759 1 1759 2 1760 1 1760 2 1761 1 1761 2 1762 1 1762 2 1763 1 1763 2 1764 1 1764 2 1765 1 1765 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 1766 1 1766 2 1767 1 1767 2 1768 1 1768 2 1769 1 1769 2 1770 1 1770 2 1771 1 1771 2 1772 1 1772 2 1773 1 1773 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 1774 1 1774 2 1775 1 1775 2 1776 1 1776 2 1777 1 1777 2 1778 1 1778 2 1779 1 1779 2 1780 1 1780 2 1781 1 1781 2 DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 12 38 Phone Number Programming Program Addresses 4028 4038 4048 Example To program Phone Number 1 as 555 1212 Data Digit 1 5 Data Digit 2 5 Data Digit 3 5 Data Digit 4 1 Data Digit 5 2 Data Digit 6 1 Data Digit 7 2 Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Program Address 4 0 2 8 Enter Data Digit 1 5 Data Digit 2 5 Data Digit 3 5 Data Digit 4 1 Data Digit 5 2 Data Digit 6 1 Data Digit 7 2 Enter the poun
157. 2 8 3 Enter Data Digit 1 4 Enter Data Digit 2 5 Enter the Pound button Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode Cross zoning Trip Window Time programming defines the number of seconds for the Cross zone Window Data Digit 1 2 Address 283 0 to 99 seconds Default 00 sec Cross zone Window 10 24 Call out Timer Programming Program Addresses 284 287 Example To program the Communicator Test Report to be sent at 9 30 pm Hour Data Digit 1 2 Data Digit 2 1 Minute Data Digit 1 3 Data Digit 2 0 Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Program Address 2 8 4 Enter Data Digit 1 2 Enter Data Digit 2 1 Enter the Pound button will go to Address 285 Enter Data Digit 1 3 Enter Data Digit 2 0 Enter the Pound button Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode Automatic Communicator Test Report Hour Address 284 Default 00 Midnight Remote Programmer Call Out Hour Address 286 Default 00 Midnight DS7080i Reference Guide Call Out Timer programming defines the hour and minute for the Communicator Test Report and the Remote Programmer Call Out The default time for the Communicator Test Report to be sent and for the control to call the Remote Programmer is Midnight Data Digit 1 2 Data Digit Automatic Communicator Tes
158. 21 1418 1 2 418 ilajajs SS keypad 7 BGGGGCooMma keypad 8 Mmeeeomm 1 2 4 8 YP 1 2 1418 yp 1121 ATE keypad 9 eomdoeoMa keypad 10 Me OM keypad 11 000 OMIM keypad 12 TP 2 4 8 TT 2 4 8 coo me OOH keypad 13 0 emm keypad 14 GOON keypad 15 1 2 1418 1 2 1418 1 2 1418 Each kevpad must have a different address Location Ideallv one kevpad should be located close to the primarv entrv exit door of the premises and must be within 1 000 feet of the control panel Do not mount outdoors see page 2 for Commercial Fire restrictions Detection Svstems PTV Ltd Unit 21 45 Gilbv Road Mount Waverlev Victoria 3149 Australia 61 3 9558 8088 Fax 61 3 9558 8089 Detection Systems PTY Ltd Unit 2 The Riverside Centre 148 James Ruse Drive Parramatta NSW 2150 Australia 61 2 891 4944 Fax 61 2 891 5844 7 DS7447 a jt M V l oouo gang mounting slots 4 Do not use as a wire entrance Address Pins Single gang mounting slots 4 square box _ BoA mounting holes 2 Wire L a entrance 4 bo Pp po DS7447 Only Terminal Strip Access Relay output gt I Do not use For DS7400Xi Rev 3 Only TT this pin Rear View of PCB E
159. 25 Low Battery Report 1265 Zone 35 amp 36 Part Assign 0210 Keypad Partition Assign 0326 Battery Restoral Report 1266 Zone 37 amp 38 Part Assign 0211 Keypad Partition Assign 0327 AG Fail Report 1267 Zone 39 amp 40 Part Assign 0212 Keypad Partition Assign 0328 AC Restoral Report 1268 Zone 41 amp 42 Part Assign 0213 Keypad Partition Assign 0329 Communicator Test System Nor 1269 Zone 43 amp 44 Part Assign 0214 Keypad Partition Assign mal Report 1270 Zone 45 amp 46 Part Assign 0215 Keypad Partition Assign 0330 Remote Prog Successful Report 1271 Zone 47 amp 48 Part Assign 0256 Keypad Fire Alarm Report 0331 Remote Prog Unsuccessful Report 1272 Zone 49 amp 50 Part Assign 0257 Keypad Fire Restoral Report 0332 Local Prog Successful Rprt 1273 Zone 51 8 52 Part Assign 0258 Zone Func 1 Alarm Report 0333 Local Prog Unsuccessful Report 1274 Zone 53 amp 54 Part Assign 0259 Zone Func 2 Alarm Report 0334 System Trouble Report 1275 Zone 55 amp 56 Part Assign 0260 Zone Func 3 Alarm Report 0335 Svs Trouble Restoral Rprt 1276 Zone 57 amp 58 Part Assign 0261 Zone Func 4 Alarm Report 0336 Communicator Test System Off 1277 Zone 59 amp 60 Part Assign 0262 Zone Func 5 Alarm Report Normal Report 1278 Zone 61 amp 62 Part Assign 0263 Zone Func 6 Alarm Report 0337 Exit Error Report 1279 Zone 63 amp 64 Part Assign 0264 Zone Func 7 Alarm Report 0338 Recent Closing Report 1280 Zone 65 amp 66 Part Assign 0265 Zon
160. 3 1 DS7400Xi U L Listings Household Fire Alarm U L Standard UL985 Commercial Fire Alarm Tvpe Service Local Central Station Remote Station Tvpe Initiating Automatic Manual Sprinkler Superviso rv and Waterflow U L Standard UL864 Household Burglarv Alarm U L Standard UL1023 Police Station Connection Grades AA and A U L Standard UL365 Central Station Burglary Alarm Grades AA A B and C U L Standard UL1610 The control panel should be installed in accordance with U L Standard UL681 Installation and Classification of Mercantile and Bank Burglar Alarm Svstems or U L Standard UL1641 Installation and Classification of Residential Burglar Alarm Svstems lt should also be installed in accordance with NFPA 72 for Household and Commercial Fire installations 13 1 1 U L Svstem Configurations The following table shows the DS7400Xi svstem configuration for the various tvpes of fire and burglar alarm service for which the product is U L Listed U L Application Product CSF D CSF D RF LF CSB A CSB B C LB A PSCB D A PSCB RF A HF B i A a emm ee lee lm se w o jua fu ww om for E IA n a 4 oS7432 Era MC ce DS7433 D ee ee een od or woe f or me NE a ee KOE A E VES ee A a Key to Application Codes Configuration Codes CSF D Central Station Fire w DACT Digital Alarm Communications Transmitter dialer R Required CSF D RF Central Station Fire w DACT and Radio ARDIS System
161. 32 or DS7460 a single zone input for contacts and sensors or program as a DS7465 g Multiplex module not programmed Program the module Invisible or silent zone activates alarm The T is programmed as latch on Program the output to follow zone alarms 6 output alarm 0 Keypad displays Fire Trouble but A ground fault condition exists See system trouble Ground fault does not indicate any zones Keypad displays Not Ready but no An invisible zone is not ready Press PIN OFF to display the zone number of zone number is displayed the invisible zone that is not ready 17 4 General System Problems Symptom Probable Cause Possible Solution How to set the programming values Enter a value of 01 in address 4058 Caution Only enter a value of 01 in address to the factory default 4058 when you are sure you want to default the programming Doing so will immediately erase all programming Power LED is flashing keypad dis A control trouble exists Press 87 to determine the trouble condition plays Control Trouble Press 87 87 display Oct Relay Fault a The octal relay module DS7488 is de a Check the wiring to the module 89 display System Fault 20 fective or the wiring to the module is defective b There is no DS7488 or a DS7488 has b Enter then exit programming mode This will re been removed from the system scan the options bus and clear the problem 87 display Multiplex Bus Fault T
162. 35 These characters could cause unpredictable results when sent to a pager system that only expects numeric characters between 0 9 This is the reason that this format will not allow an associated user number with an open and close report If using a remote programming program such as WDSRP do not use 0 as a reporting or account code digit as the remote programmer programs 0 as 0 A Note The Pager format is an open loop format which has no acknowledge tone There is no indication at the control panel that the signal has been sent Therefore the Pager format is not recommended as the primary communication method For Additional Information see Programming Addresses 174 230 and 233 235 The following are recommended programming values for addresses 174 through 230 when using the Pager format Warning If sending reports to both a pager and to a central station Do Not use a 0 as the reporting digit as it will disable the report to the central station Reports with Restorals Report Restoral Trouble Zone 1 Open Zone 2 Close Zone 3 Partial Close Zone 4 First Open after Alarm Automatic Comm Test Zone 5 Manual Comm Test Zone 6 Exit Error Zone 7 ore Recent Closing Zone 8 Report Report Successful Unsuccessful Low Battery AC Failure Remote Program gE System Trouble Local Program System Test Keypad Fire Keypad Panic Duress DS7080i Reference Guide Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc 13 0 Repor
163. 4 2 18 23 10pps otherwise untouched e Test Report Set to 8 call out every day DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 12 16 Open Close Report Control Programming Program Address 0187 Example To program to send Open Close Reports from Partition 1 and to send See Glossary section 7 12 for further details Trouble Reports on Closings for all Bypassed Zones Data Digit 1 1 Data Digit 2 1 Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Program Address 0 1 8 7 Enter Data Digit 1 1 Enter Data Digit 2 1 Enter the pound key Asn Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Data Digit fa ese Enter the Data Digit as a Select Options fo 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ercon Tet S 11 O OOOO COOR Fonic Jelelelelelele msr Feness jejejejejejel o Froen jejejeje re Feon ns TT fotoje Sos pat nsara anions Rona oar ard coses Parton om a S S S e Report first Partition to open and last When using this option all parti Partition to close tions should have the same ac count code 12 17 Open Close amp Zone Report Control Programming Program Address 0189 This section allows you to decide which phone number will send open and close reports zone alarm zone restoral and zone trouble ts TS Data Digit Example Select Option To program to send Open and Close Reports to Phone Number 1 and Zon
164. 4 74 9576 Detection Systems Ltd Unit 13 18 17 F New Commerce Centre 19 On Sum Street Shatin N T Hong Kong 852 2635 2815 Fax 852 2648 7986 Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 Reference Guide P N 30658 B TABLE OF CONTENTS SVSTEM OVERVIEW SPECIFICATIONS Enclosure Housing Temperature Outputs Keypads Communicator Lightning Protection Burglar Fire Zone Inputs Line Seizure Notice ENCLOSURE INSTALLATION 3 1 Install the Enclosure 3 2 Install the Control Communicator CONTROL TERMINAL WIRING OPERATING GUIDE 5 1 Understanding the DS7443 DS7445 and DS7447 Keypads Personal Identification Numbers Adding a PIN Removing a PIN Turning ON arming the System Quick Arming the System Easy Exit Turning OFF disarming the System Silencing Alarms Turning Off disarming the System under Duress Force Arming Auto Bypass Zone Bypass Chime Mode Zone Test Local Battery Sounder Test Communicator Test Read Alarm History Fire Reset Fire Trouble Fire Reset Fire Trouble Remote Program Dial out and Answer Call for Remote Programming Answer for Remote Programming Error Displays Duress Code Guest Code Emergency Procedures Identifying Alarm Sounds Silencing Alarms A Cautionary Note Above All Else Common Sense Should Prevail Caution When Entering A Building Fire Alarms Emergency Keypad Alarms Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 Reference Guide 5 22 Fire Safety If Installed in Famil
165. 4450 Da 555 1212 City Fairport Contact T J Brown Ve 555 1212 Locate Key Notes Sample layout Key Select Reports Comm Created 11 17 Fri Aug 16 1996 Modified Revision Modify oper 1 Beginning J Previous Next End of File Select the NEXT record in the current database key order Image 4 Close Status Download required The Communicate buttons will appear The right hand column com mand buttons will only show those commands necessary for commu nication WDSRP User s Guide Find Account Type 7AD0XI V34 Template NONE Acct ID SAMPLE Rept ID 1 Sort key 1 5 Sort key 2 Auto service Name Thomas J Brown Auto call Reset Modem Pickup Zip 14450 Voice Call Data Call Created 11 17 Fri Aug 16 1996 Manual Modified ku iu i Cancel Revision Modify oper 1 11 35 AM Fri Aug 16 1996 Address Detection Systems 130 Perinton Parkway City Fairport Contact T J Brown Ve 555 1212 Da 555 1212 Notes Sample layout Comm Image Status Call panel using the data phone number Reset Modem This command will reset the modem After resetting the modem wait for the Status field bottom left of window to display Modem Reset Successful before attempting a call Pickup This command will prompt WDSRP to pickup an incoming call WD
166. 447 Battery Trouble DS7445 LED 2 turns on DS7447 Multiplex Bus DS7445 LED 7 turns on steady If the system has just been through a power steady The multiplex bus is defective or has been failure wait at least two hours for the battery to recharge shorted then enter a PIN System Reset to perform a battery test _ DS7447 Aux Power Fault DS7445 LED 8 turns on DS7447 Communicator Err DS7445 LED 3 turns steady The auxiliary power has been shorted p ae jal jed te communicate DS7447 Zone Trouble One of the zones is not i responding to the control panel This may also be DS7447 System Fault DS7445 LED 4 turns on displayed during power up if so ignore steady Internal error in the control circuitry or optional circuitry These faults are designated as follows 87 will display 89 will display RAM Fault System fault 01 ROM Fault System fault 02 EEPROM Fault System fault 03 Ground Fault System fault 04 2Ph Bell Fault loss of communication to DS7420i System fault 10 Line 1 Fault DS7420i phone line 1 fault System fault 11 Note System Faults may be Line 2 Fault DS7420i phone line 2 fault System fault 12 read from any keypad because Bell Fault DS7420i bell circuit fault System fault 13 they are system wide Aux Relay Fault DS7420i aux relay fault System fault 14 All other Error Displays are limit Oct Relay Fault loss of communication to DS7488 System f
167. 50 pA 350 HA DS7460 Dual Zone 1mA 1mA DS7465 Input Output 1mA 1mA DS7450 amp DS7452 Contact Points 350 uA 350 uA DS7420i Dual Line Bell Supervision 20 mA 140 mA DS7480 Bell Supervision 20 mA 20 mA DS7481 Single Line Monitor 20 mA 20 mA Smoke Detectors Bells Horns etc Other sensors Other Grand Total Grand Total When calculating Standby and Alarm Current for the Octal Relay Module use 10 mA plus 40 mA for each activated relay 1 17 Standby Current Load e Battery AH 20 Storage 0 375 AH s Alarm e The following table is the derated battery divided by hours minus the control standby 175 mA Rechargeable Battery Size Max Standby for 4 hours Max Standby Max Standby for 8 hours for 24 hours Max Standby for 48 hours Max Standby for 60 hours Max Standby for 72 hours Max Standby for 80 hours 7 AH 1 0A 470 mA xX 8 AH 1 2A 580 mA X 14 AH 1 5A 1 1A 15 AH 1 5A 1 2A 17 2 AH 1 5A 1 5A 21 AH 1 5A 1 5A 28 AH 1 5A 1 5A 30 AH 1 5A 1 5A 35 AH 1 5A 1 5A 1 18 Options e DS7412 RS232 Serial Interface module The DS7412 module allows the panel to send event information in an ASCII format directly to a serial printer or computer In addition the interface allows the direct connection of a computer to the panel for
168. 6 Cross zoned with Zone 1 1 Zone 5 Cross zoned with ALL zones Zone 6 Cross zoned with Zone 2 2 Zone 5 Cross zoned with Zone 6 Zone 6 Cross zoned with Zone 3 3 Zone 5 Cross zoned with Zone 7 Zone 6 Cross zoned with Zone 4 4 Zone 5 Cross zoned with Zone 8 Zone 6 Cross zoned with Zone 5 ag Zone 6 Cross zoned with ALL zones 6 Zone 6 Cross zoned with Zone 7 7 Zone 6 Cross zoned with Zone 8 8 Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc DS7080i Reference Guide 10 22 Cross zoning Control Programming continued Select Option Zone 7 not Cross zoned Zone 7 Gresszonea win Zonet TTH Zone 7 Gresszonea win one TE Zone 7 Cross zoned wih are 3 H one 7 rss zones wi Zane 4 H Zone cross zored wih Zones 5 H Zone 7 Cross zoned wih Zane 6 l Zore 7 Cross zoned win ALL zones 7 H Zone 7 Crosszonedwin Zones 8 PA 282 Data Digit DD 0 Select Option Zone 8 not Cross zoned 0 2 EB 4 Zone 8 Cross zoned with Zone 5 Zone 8 Cross zoned with Zone 1 Zone 8 Cross zoned with Zone 2 Zone 8 Cross zoned with Zone 3 Zone 8 Cross zoned with Zone 4 Zone 8 Cross zoned with Zone 6 6 Zone 8 Cross zoned with Zone 7 Zone 8 Cross zoned with ALL zones 10 23 Cross zoning Trip Window Time Programming Program Address 283 Example To program the Cross zone Window for 45 seconds Data Digit 1 4 Data Digit 2 5 Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Program Address
169. 7 0145 Zone Number 128 0024 Zone Number 7 0085 Zone Number 68 0146 Alarm Output 0025 Zone Number 8 0086 Zone Number 69 0147 Programmable Output 1 0026 Zone Number 9 0087 Zone Number 70 0148 Programmable Output 2 0027 Zone Number 10 0088 Zone Number 71 0149 Output Partition Assignment 0028 Zone Number 11 0089 Zone Number 72 0150 Output Partition Assignment 0029 Zone Number 12 0090 Zone Number 73 0165 Partition Control 0030 Zone Number 13 0091 Zone Number 74 0169 Quick Arm Control 0031 Zone Number 14 0092 Zone Number 75 0173 Keypad Assignment 0032 Zone Number 15 0093 Zone Number 76 0174 Keypad Assignment 0033 Zone Number 16 0094 Zone Number 77 0175 Keypad Assignment 0034 Zone Number 17 0095 Zone Number 78 0176 Keypad Assignment 0035 Zone Number 18 0096 Zone Number 79 0177 Keypad Assignment 0036 Zone Number 19 0097 Zone Number 80 0178 Keypad Assignment 0037 Zone Number 20 0098 Zone Number 81 0179 Keypad Assignment 0038 Zone Number 21 0099 Zone Number 82 0180 Keypad Assignment 0039 Zone Number 22 0100 Zone Number 83 0181 Emergency Key 0040 Zone Number 23 0101 Zone Number 84 0182 Panic Key 0041 Zone Number 24 0102 Zone Number 85 0183 Custom Arming 0042 Zone Number 25 0103 Zone Number 86 0184 Custom Arming 0043 Zone Number 26 0104 Zone Number 87 0185 Force Arming amp Ground Fault 0044 Zone Number 27 0105 Zone Number 88 0186 Commercial Fire Mode 0045 Zone Number 28 0106 Zone Number 89 0187 Open Close Report Control 0046 Zone Number 29 0107 Zone Numbe
170. 8 Fax 61 3 9558 8089 Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Detection Systems PTY Ltd Unit 2 The Riverside Centre 148 James Ruse Drive Parramatta NSW 2150 Australia 61 2 891 4944 Fax 61 2 891 5844 Detection Systems Ltd Unit 13 18 17 F New Commerce Centre 19 On Sum Street Shatin N T Hong Kong Detection Systems Ltd 19 Rue du 19 Mars 78130 Les Mureaux France Phone Fax 33 1 34 74 9576 852 2635 2815 Fax 852 2648 7986 Detection Systems Inc 130 Perinton Parkway Fairport New York USA 14450 9199 ne 716 223 4060 800 289 0096 Fax 716 223 9180 DS7060 User Guide P N 29955 B TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 0 OPERATING GUIDE Understanding the DS7443 DS7445 and DS7447 Keypads Personal Identification Numbers Adding a PIN Removing a PIN Turning ON arming the System Quick Arming the System Easy Exit Turning OFF disarming the System Silencing Alarms Turning Off disarming the System under Duress Force Arming Auto Bypass Zone Bypass Chime Mode Zone Test Local Battery Sounder Test Communicator Test Read Alarm History Fire Reset Fire Trouble Fire Reset Fire Trouble Remote Program Dial out and Answer Call for Remote Programming Answer for Remote Programming Error Displays Duress Code Guest Code Emergency Procedures Identifying Alarm Sounds Silencing Alarms A Cautionary Note Above All Else Common Sense Should Prevail Caution When Entering A Building Fire Alarms Emergency Keypad Alarms Fire S
171. 8 Enter Data Digit 2 0 Enter the pound key Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode See Glossary section 7 4 for further details Data Digit Select Option B D Programmable Output 1 will Latch on ANY Zone Alarm o be ON for 10 seconds after ON during Entry Pre Alert pressing System Reset ON for 10 sec after pressing System Reset Programmable Output 2 will be OFF for 10 seconds after ON when system is Armed 3 pressing System Reset Ground Start 4 System Status ready to arm 5 Options D D Zone Nar Disabled 0 3 Zone Alarm delayed by 20 sec Keypad Sounder Output Seale Access Output 10 sec pulse 9 Burg and Fire Alarm kul Panic Duress Output This includes invisible zones See glossary for further details See section 7 4 for description of this option Address Default Alarm 0146 63 Programmable Output 1 0147 33 Programmable Output 2 0148 23 12 7 Output Partition Assignment Program Addresses 0149 0150 In Output Partition Assignment each On board output is assigned to PA 01 49 PAO1 50 a partition Bv default outputs are assigned to all partitions Data Digit Data Digit Select Option JDD 1 2 1 2 Address Default Belongs to Partition 1 Alarm 0149 DD1 Belongs to Partition 2 11 Must Be 0 Programmable Output 1 0149 DD2 Belongs to Partition 3 Programmable Output 2 0150 DD1 Belongs to Partition 4 3 Belongs to
172. 89 0096 Fax 716 223 9180 Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc DS7420i In Guide P N 30340C 4 0 Operation 4 1 Normal Condition Under normal conditions the kevpad Power and Status Lights will be on steady 4 2 Fire Alarm During a fire alarm the alarm sounding devices and the keypad sounders will be activated The keypad display will read Fire Alarm To silence the fire alarm sounders Enter a valid PIN followed by the Off key Fire Alarm and Sounder Silenced will then be displayed To reset the system Determine the cause of the alarm Then enter a valid PIN followed by System Reset This command clears the Fire Alarm and Sounder Silenced displays NOTE The control must be reset after a fire alarm or future alarms will not be detected 4 3 Fire Trouble During a fire trouble e g open on a Class A loop open on any fire loop the keypad sounders will pulse once every 10 seconds The keypad display will read Fire Trouble with a zone number A fire trouble with no zone number indicates a ground fault To silence the sounders Enter a valid PIN followed by the Off key If the cause for the Trouble condition has been eliminated the sounders will silence and the Fire Trouble display will be cleared If the cause for the Trouble condition has not been elimi nated the sounders will silence but the Fire Trouble display will not be cleared The keypad wi
173. 9576 Detection Svstems Ltd Unit 13 18 17 F New Commerce Centre 19 On Sum Street Shatin N T Hong Kong 852 2635 2815 Fax 852 2648 7986 Detection Svstems Inc 130 Perinton Parkwav Fairport New Vork USA 14450 9199 716 223 4060 800 289 0096 Fax 716 223 9180 Copyright 1993 96 Detection Systems Inc DS7488 Installation Instructions P N27338D WDSRP User s Guide Detection Systems Remote Programmer for Microsoft Windows For use with all Detection Systems security fire control panels Detection Systems PTY Ltd Unit 21 45 Gilby Road Mount Waverley Victoria 3149 Australia 61 3 9558 8088 Fax 61 3 9558 8089 Copyright 1994 96 Detection Systems Inc Detection Systems PTY Ltd Detection Systems Int l Inc Unit 2 The Riverside Centre 19 Rue du 19 Mars 78130 148 James Ruse Drive Les Mureaux France Parramatta NSW 2150 Australia Phone Fax 33 1 34 74 9576 61 2 891 4944 Fax 61 2 891 5844 Detection Systems Inc 130 Perinton Parkway Fairport New York USA 14450 9199 716 223 4060 800 289 0096 Fax 716 223 9180 Detection Systems Ltd Unit 13 18 17 F New Commerce Centre 19 On Sum Street Shatin N T Hong Kong 852 2635 2815 Fax 852 2648 7986 WDSRP User s Guide P N 27596C TABLE OF CONTENTS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT INTRODUCTION 1 0 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE 1 1 Equipment Needs 1 1 1 Recommended Equipment 1 1 2 Minimum Equipment Requirements 1 2 Existing DOS
174. 995 97 Detection Svstems Inc 3 0 Control Terminal Wiring WARNING Before servicing this equipment remove all power including the transformer and batterv Also remove the phone line connection CAUTION Incorrect connections mav NOTE result in damage to the unit Shared cable is not allowed for kevpad telephone or siren wiring CAUTION An approprate two pole disconnect device must be installed bv qualified service personnel as part of the building installation EARTH GROUND Must be connected to a good earth ground such as a cold water pipe and also connected to the cabinet cover using the supplied wire jumper LMA Tvpical burglar alarm loop wiring TVPICAL BURGLAR AND FIRE WIRING Smoke Detector J EOL Resistor EOL Relay Detector OI Resistor Zones 2 8 Only Li Typical 2 wire smoke detector wiring for a list of compatible 2 wire smoke detectors see Technical Service Note P N 26568 Smoke Detector EOL Resistor EOL Relay Typical 4 wire smoke detector wiring For example Detection System s DS250 in an MB4W base A A C INPUT Use a listed Class 2 18 VAC 50 VA transformer such as a Basler Electric C BE116350CAA Transformer must be dedicated to the DS7080i and connected to an unswitched output ALARM OUTPUT Provides 12 VDC special application up to 1 A for powering bells siren omen etc Function programmed in address CAUTION Danger of explosion if batte
175. Alarm U L Standard UL1023 e Police Station Connection Grades AA and A U L Standard UL365 e Central Station Burglary Alarm Grades AA A B and C U L Standard UL1610 The control panel has not been investigated to the requirements of UL294 The control panel should be installed in accordance with U L Standard UL681 Installation and Classification of Mercantile and Bank Burglar Alarm Systems or U L Standard UL1641 Installation and Classification of Residential Burglar Alarm Systems It should also be installed in accordance with NFPA 72 for Household installations The following table shows the DS7060 system configuration for the various types of fire and burglar alarm service for which the products are U L Listed U L APPLICATION PRODUCT CSB A CSB B C LB A PSCB D A PSCB RF A HF B Spectrum PAL200 AB 12 Bell Housing Key to Application Codes Key to Application Codes CSB A Central Station Burglary grades AA and A Required CSB B C Central Station Burglary grades B and C Not Applicable LB A Local Burglary grade A Standard or attack enclosure may be PSCB D A Police Station Connected Burglary w DACT grade A used PSCB RF A_ Police Station Connected Burglary w Radio grades AA and A Any keypad may be used at least one HF B Household residential Fire and Burglary keypad is required 9 2 Installation Considerations Failure to install and program the control in accordance with the requirements in this section voids the l
176. Alarms This is a zone programmed to activate the visual display at the keypad but not audible signals If this zone is also an entry zone an entry tone will sound when this zone is activated Bypassing Allowed This zone can be bypassed shunted This is done using the bypass command or the force arming sequence Alarm on Short This zone will activate an alarm when its loop is shorted Alarm on Open This zone will activate an alarm when its loop is opened Trouble on Open This is a zone programmed to activate a trou ble when its loop is opened and the system is disarmed If the system is armed this zone will activate an alarm if shorted or opened For 24 hour zones regardless of the arming state of the panel this always remains as a Trouble on Open Trouble on Short Works like Trouble on Open but activates a trouble when shorted and disarmed Perimeter Instant This is a zone programmed to activate an alarm even during the entry exit delay period 24 Hour This is a zone programmed to activate when its loop is faulted even if the system is disarmed Entry Exit Delay 1 This zone is ignored during the entry exit delay period If it is violated while the system is armed it will activate a delay for the amount of time programmed in entry delay time 1 The keypad pre alert sounders will activate and the system may be disarmed during this delay period If the system is not disarmed during the entry period
177. Arming No one left on the premises An entry exit delay is in effect COMMAND SEQUENCE Commercial Mode PIN On Residential Mode On WHAT WILL HAPPEN The red Armed Light will begin to flash The green Status light will turn off Armed will be displayed DS7447 Exit Now will display DS7447 during the exit delay interval Asingle beep will sound The red Armed light will turn on steady after the exit delay interval WHAT TO DO Exit during the exit delay interval Perimeter Instant Arming Someone still on the premises There is NO entry delay in effect Commercial Mode PIN No Entry Perimeter Only Residential Mode No Entry Perimeter Only The red Armed Light will begin to flash Perimeter Inst will be displayed DS7447 Exit Now will display DS7447 during the exit delay interval Asingle beep will sound The red Armed light will turn on steady after the exit delay interval The yellow Perimeter light DS7445 will turn on steady Only exterior protection zones will be armed Move freely around the interior Perimeter Arming Someone still on the premises An entry exit delay is in effect Commercial Mode PIN Perimeter Only Residential Mode Perimeter Only The red Armed Light will begin to flash Perimeter On will be displayed DS7447 Exit Now will display DS7447 during the exit delay i
178. BACKLUND Mon 4 15 1996 1 43 PM Open by user 4 BACKLUND Mon 4 15 1996 1 45 PM Close by user 4 at level 1 BACKLUND Mon 4 15 1996 1 46 PM Open by user 4 BACKLUND Mon 4 15 1996 BACKLUND Mon 4 15 1996 BACKLUND Mon 4 15 1996 BACKLUND Mon 4 15 1996 BACKLUND Mon 4 15 1996 BACKLUND Mon 4 15 1996 BACKLUND Mon 4 15 1996 BACKLUND Mon 4 15 1996 BACKLUND Mon 4 15 1996 BACKLUND Mon 4 15 1996 BACKLUND Mon 4 15 1996 BACKLUND Mon 4 15 1996 al Reports Delete Control the first history event displayed 4 33 PM 4 33 PM 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 Close by user 4 at level 1 1 AAB PM 1 1 2 2 2 1 4 2 2 2 Open by user 4 Close by user 4 at level 1 Open by user 4 Close by user 11 at level 1 Open by user 4 Close by user 24 at level 1 Close by user 4 at level 1 Close by user 4 at level 1 Open by user 24 Close by user 24 at level 1 Open by user 24 4 48 PM 5 25 PM 5 42 PM 5 48 PM 5 50 PM 5 53 PM 6 17 PM 6 53 PM 8 53 PM It is here where the historv events for all Accounts will be displaved A bottom row of command buttons will show those commands avail able Thev are as follows Filter This command will allow vou to view specific historv events bv select categories and time range Bv choosing this command the Historv Filter screen will appear From here you can select the viewing parameters Reports This command allows you to print out history re ports Copyright 1994 96 Detection
179. CT and local bell Grade C using using Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter only The controls must be installed in accordance with U L Standards UL681 and UL609 for all grades of service Report Programming Burglar Zone Reports must be programmed for those zones used Low Battery Report Program Address 0325 must be programmed AC Failure Report Program Address 0327 must be programmed Open Report Program Address 0320 must be programmed Close Report Program Address 0321 must be programmed 24 Hour Check In Reports Program Addresses 0329 and 0336 must be programmed General Control Programming Must be programmed for no swinger shunts and closing ringback Program Address 0000 data digit 2 enter 0 1 or 2 Program Address 0185 must be programmed as Data Digit 1 0 Data Digit 2 0 Zone Function Programming The Burglar alarm signal whether pulsed or steady must be different from the Fire alarm signal Alarm Output Programming Program Address 0146 must be programmed as Data Digit 1 6 Data Digit 2 3 Program Address 0149 must be programmed as Data Digit 1 8 13 4 1 Local Burglary Alarm A Grade A Installations using Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter with local bell Follow General System Requirements as listed in 13 4 Required Accessories e The control must be the Detection System s model DS7400XiCC with a cover actuated tamper switch installed e An Ademco Model AB 12 bell housing see section 13 6
180. Caler Edit data Address 3980 Dean Road Delete City Marion Zip 14505 kt Phone 555 555 1212 Locate key Created 12 17 Tue Aug 13 1996 Modified 14 12 Fri Aug 23 1996 Modify oper 3 Key select Short password for quick login inta WDSRAP Reports Close Beginning Previous Next End of file Locate a specific record in the data base Also changes the database key This window lists various general information concerning the users You can scroll through the Find User database by using the command buttons at the bottom of the window Beginning Previous Next and End of File 4 5 1 User General Information The general information consists of Password This is the code given to each User that allows them access to WDSRP This password will be asked for upon Log in Authority Level This is the level of authority that each User will have The authoritv level vou give each user is critical The authoritv level given to each user will allow that user certain access privileges through out the WDSRP program Each field within WDSRP anv place a user may interact with has its own authority levels Authority levels affect the user in two ways The fields have a minimum authority level that a user must meet just to view that field They also have a minimal au thority level that each user must meet in order to edit that field You can not add a user with an autho
181. Check keypad addresses 11 15 System will only ured see keypads on the options bus The keypad is programmed as a Master Master keypads can only be used on multi partition keypad systems Program the keypad as a standard key pad a Keypad wiring error a Check wiring b Keypad s assigned to wrong or non ex b Assign the keypad s to correct partition If none istent partition of the keypads are correctly assigned re enable keypad 1 by shorting the program contacts in the lower right corner of the main panel board This will force program mode and assign keypad 1 as alpha non master to partition 1 c The microprocessor isn t running Disconnect battery and any aux power load If the microprocessor has shut down aux power will read approx 11 5 VDC If the EEProm chip has been field replaced power down AC and bat tery and check for bent or mis inserted pins Oth erwise replace the panel The keypad is enabled but as an LED key Enter the program mode at the keypad and input the pad correct sequence to re enable it as an alpha key pad Care must be taken since there will be no visu al feedback to verify programming until the keypad is properly enabled a Entering from Master keypad a First enter Single Partition Mode b Not using a PIN with test authority b Use a PIN with test authority Formats display information regarding the Discrepancy exists in the definition of these keys in B and C keys di
182. Commercial Fire applications the TR1850 trans former Basler Electric BE116250CAA must be enclosed in the AE TR16 Transformer Enclosure The wiring from the AE TR16 to the control and the wiring to the outlet box in conduit must also be enclosed in the Detection Svstem s AE TR16 Mount the DS7420i Module in the enclosure as shown on page 4 Use the supplied mounting clips and screws Internal Wiring Connect internal wiring as shown on page 4 Connect the options bus of the DS7420i terminals 1 4 to the options bus of the control Connect the battery input terminals 5 and 6 to the control battery using the dual battery clips provided Connect the control line phone input terminals 21 24 to the phone line output 13 16 of the DS7400Xi If using the Class A zone connect the zone input termi nals 11 and 12 to the zone 1 input 19 and 20 of the control The DS7420i is fixed as address 15 on the control options bus If you are using a DS7400Xi Rev 3 control communicator keypad 15 will not be avail able for system use See your DS7400Xi Reference Guide Note Detection Systems Int l Inc 19 Rue du 19 Mars 78130 Les Mureaux France Phone Fax 33 1 34 74 9576 Detection Systems Ltd Unit 13 18 17 F New Commerce Centre 19 On Sum Street Shatin N T Hong Kong 852 2635 2815 Fax 852 2648 7986 Detection Systems Inc 130 Perinton Parkway Fairport New York USA 14450 9199 716 223 4060 800 2
183. DSRP 1 3 Running the Setup Program 1 3 1 WDSRP Setup Welcome 1 3 2 WDSRP Setup Destination 1 3 3 WDSRP Setup Names 1 3 4 WDSRP Setup Time Zone Phone Lines 1 3 5 WDSRP Setup Confirm 2 0 GETTING STARTED 2 1 Changing the Default Password 2 2 Changing the Master Password 2 3 Authority Levels 2 4 The HELP File 3 0 QUICK START GUIDE How to Add Users How to Create an Account How to Create a Template How to Call a Control Panel How to Answer a Call from a Control Panel 4 0 OPERATING GUIDE 4 1 Accounts 4 2 Account General Information 4 2 1 Account ID 4 2 3 Template 4 2 4 Report ID 4 3 Find Account Window Commands 4 3 1 Communicate 4 3 2 Edit Data 4 3 3 Status 4 3 4 Program 4 3 5 Options 4 3 6 End Session 4 3 7 History Commands 4 3 8 Insert New Commands 4 3 9 Template 4 3 10 Edit Data General Information Output Assignments Partitions Phone Control Remote Access Zone Functions Zone Programming Reporting System Parameters Pin Numbers Commercial Fire Time Windows Zone Definitions Copyright 1994 96 Detection Systems Inc WDSRP User s Guide 4 3 12 Locate Kev 4 3 13 Kev Select 4 3 14 Reports Account General Information Mailing Labels EEPROM Data User PIN Information Zone Functions Kevpad Information Output Programming Phone Settings Zone Programming 7400 Stvle Panels Zone Programming non 7400 Stvle Panels Cross Matrix Programming Reporting Codes 4 4 Templates 4 4 1 Template Genera
184. Disabled 0 5 are Hex values They will display as A F at the keypads Note If using smoke detectors address 009 Data Digit 1 must be programmed as 2 and PO2 must be used to power the smoke detectors See Wiring Diagram Includes Silent and Invisible zones Select Option Pulsing Fire Alarms are 1 sec On 1 sec Off Pulsing Fire Alarms use Temporal Cadence 1 Pulsing Fire Alarms use California March Time 2 DS7080i Reference Guide Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc 10 3 General Control Programming Program Address 010 Example General Control programming defines To program the svstem wide General Operating parameters as allow h m wide general operatin arameters ing Normal and Custom Arming Operating at 60 Hz and to Restore the syste g p gp when a Zone Restores l See Glossarv Section 6 3 for further details Data Digit 1 2 Data Digit 2 1 Data Digit Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 1 2 Enter the Program Address 0 1 0 Enter Data Digit 1 2 Enter Data Digit 2 1 Enter the Pound button Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode wise Enter the Data Digit as a 1 2 s 4 5 Je 7 8 9 fto ft t2 3 f4 f5 Select Options Allow Normal and Custom Arming 0 g Aow PermeterinsantAmina 10 AlowPermeteraming 10 Allow Maximum Securitv Arming c jeje jejo Cosroe lelelelel
185. ENA Type 7400xi va Template NONE Report ID 1 1234 2 5678 a 4 Sort key 1 Sort key 2 6 8 Auto service JNONE Auto call JNONE Name Thomas J Brown Address Detection Systems 130 Perinton Parkway City Fairport Contact T J Brown Zip 14450 555 1212 Voice 555 1212 Notes Sample layout Enter up to 8 characters as the Account s ID number Copvright O 1994 96 Detection Svstems Inc 4 2 1 Account ID This is the number code vou assign each account for identification purposes This number is used by WDSRP only it will not be pro grammed into the control panel 4 2 2 Type This is the type of control panel used on this account 4 2 3 Template This is the Template that this account uses may be none 4 2 4 Report ID These are the Central Station Account Codes of the control panel The Account may have no Report ID in the case of a local non re porting system Reporting systems require as few as one reporting ID in the case of one reporting phone number on a non partitioned system to as many as 16 Account ID numbers in the case of an eight partition system with each partition reporting to two phone numbers They are the numbers transmitted to the Central Station receiver that identify this particular control panel These numbers uniquely identify this control panel to the Central Station Note The number of Account Codes will diffe
186. EOL resistor Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc DS7080i Reference Guide 4 0 Svstem Worksheet AccountNumber Information Name WW Contact Person Address _W VoicePhoneNumber Panel Phone Number City State Zip AJ Panel Answers Phone __ Armed __ Disarmed Equipment Location and Notes AC Voltage c VAC Battery Voltage L VDC AUX Current Control Panel Transformer __ nt Telephone Jack __ Telephone On Same Line as Panel Earth Ground Connection Alarm Sounder s Misc Notes DS7080i Reference Guide Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc 4 0 Svstem Worksheet continued Personal Identification Number Information Example PIN Number Authoritv Level Name User 002 1001 6 Henrv M Jones PIN Number Authoritv Level Name User 001 User 002 User 003 User 004 User 005 User 006 User 007 User 008 User 009 User 010 User 011 User 012 User 013 User 014 User 015 Keypad Location Location Keypad 1 Keypad 2 Keypad f 3 Keypad 4 Zone Location and Notes Example Device Location Type PIR Kitchen Invisible Alarm Alarm on Short Alarm on Open 24 Hour Device Location Type Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc DS7080i Reference Guide 5 0 Svstem Overview Description The DS7080i Control Communicator is a fully inte
187. Edit Report Codes MIKE Report Restoral Trouble Report Restoral Function 1 Keypad fire Function 2 Low battery Function 3 AC failure Function 4 Remote programming Function 5 Local programming Function 6 System trouble Function Miscellaneous Function 8 Keypad emergency Keypad panic Function 9 Duress Function 10 Open Close Function 11 First open after alarm Partial close Function 12 Exit error Recent closing Function 13 Function 14 Tests Function 15 Communicator Normal Off normal Cancel Enter 1 or 2 digits as the central station reporting code System Restoral System Parameters By choosing this command the Edit System Parameters window will appear From here you may edit the system wide general operating parameters Edit System Parameters SAMPLE Thomas J Brown _ 50 Hz _ Closing ringback Entry delay timer 1 Seconds multiple of 5 Entry delay timer 2 Seconds multiple of 5 l Sound communicator failure Exit delay timer Seconds multiple of 5 No perimeterfinstant arming Burg bell cutoff Minutes l Ground fault I Dialer delay 24 hour fire Fire bell cutoff Minutes l Dialer delay non 24 hour AC loss reporting delay 0 Minutes Call out test report No dialout 4 Panel time zone Hours from remote programmer Force arming limit Zones el Daylight savings
188. Entar he pound Key Bypass Zone Function je je jej jej e je je je e e ta eioos Bypass Zone Function2 ejej jele jejej jejej Bypass Zone Function3 Jejejeje jejejejej Bypass Zone Function 4 lejejejelejejejej 0 5 are Hex values They will display as A F at the keypads Enter the Data Digit as a Mc 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 19 0 1 2 3 4 5 Bypass Zone Function jej jej jej jel je jej Jo Bypass Zone Functions jeje jele jeje ele Bypass Zone Function7 Jejejeje Jejejeje Bypass Zone Functions elelelelelelele 0 5 are Hex values They will display as A F at the keypads DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 12 13 Custom Arming Programming Program Addresses 0183 0184 Continued PA 0184 Data Digit FILI Enter the Data Digit as a SRC zi 5 6 7 jejofojiforspafs Bypass Zone Function 9 e jejjejje je je je jo Bypass Zone Function 10 jeje jeje jeje jejo Bypass Zone Function 11 j l jele lelelele Bypass Zone Function 12 l ejejeje ojo jojo 0 5 are Hex values They will display as A F at the keypads Enter the Data Digit as a Select Options 0 1 2 3 4 5 Je 7 Bypass Zone Function 13 Je Je e je Bypass Zone Function 14 Jele Jeje Bypass Zone Function 15 ele lele 12 14 Force Arming and
189. Enter the Data Digit as a Se 2 3 45 6 7 sfoportfotstals Zone Funcion Can Be bwassed Je je je je je je el lol zone Funcion 10 Gan Bo Byrassed le ole Jole Jojo T zone Funcion Can BeBassed lelelel lelelelel TT zone Funcion 2 Gan Bo Byrassed lelelelelelele 111111 0 5 are Hex values They will display as A F at the keypads Enter the Data Digit as a Select Options U 1213 4 5 6 7 8 9 fol f2 f3 4 5 zone Function 13 Can setwrassedjel fel el je je lel lel el zone Foncion 14 Cen Bebwassjeje ole lejo folo zone Funcion 15 Cen beByeassedelelelel lelelele 111 0 5 are Hex values They will display as A F at the keypads DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc Page 37 12 6 Output Programming Program Addresses 0146 0148 Example Output programming defines the event partition and tvpe of alarm burg jk Nile eee Output 1 as following a Burglar Zone or fire that will trigger each of the three physical outputs on the control panel PA 0147 Data Digit 1 6 Data Digit 2 1 Ee Diss Data Digit e Data Digit S10 See section 3 0 for the location of the physical outputs on the control Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 1 0 panel Enter the Program Address 0 1 4 7 Enter Data Digit 1 6 Enter Data Digit 2 1 Enter the pound key Enter the Program Address 0 1 4 9 Enter Data Digit 1
190. Entry Exit Delay Cancel Zone Functions 6 1 3 General Arm Only Authority by Partition 6 1 4 Input Output Cross Matrixing 6 1 5 Multiplex Bus Outputs 6 1 6 Octal Relay Modules DS7488 6 1 7 Output Functions 6 2 Zone 6 3 Zone Function 7 0 Glossary General Control Programming Zone Function Programming Zone Programming Output Programming Partition Control Programming Keypad Assignment Programming Emergency Key Programming 8 Custom Arming Programming 7 9 Force Arming 7 10 Ground Fault Detect Programming 7 11 Commercial Fire Mode Programming 7 12 Open Close Report Control Programming 7 13 Report Programming mi 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 7 7 7 8 9 7 14 Phone Number General Control Programming 19 7 15 Phone Answering Programming 7 16 FCC Compliance Notice 7 17 FCC Phone Connection Notice To Users 7 18 Canadian Dept of Communications 7 19 For Installations in New Zealand 8 0 Operating Guide 8 1 Personal Identification Numbers 8 1 1 General Information 8 1 2 Removing a PIN 8 1 3 Authority Levels Arming Disarming Commands Changing the Date Changing the Tempoary PIN Expiration Date Changing the Time Delayed Arming Automatic Arming Turning OFF the System under Duress Emergency Procedures 8 9 1 Identifying Alarm Sounds 8 9 2 Silencing Alarms 8 9 3 A Cautionary Note 8 9 4 Use Common Sense 8 9 5 Caution When Entering A Building 8 9 6 Fire Alarms 8 10 Fire Reset Fire Trouble 8 10 1 Fi
191. Equipment Type template ID Report IDs Sort 1 and 2 Name of the residential or business subscriber Address City State Status Voice phone number and Data phone number By entering one of the above fields a number of Accounts will move to the front of the Account database that have values for that field For example if you enter an Equipment Type in the Locate Account win dow all those Accounts with that Equipment Type e g 7400 will move to the front of the Account database Only those Accounts that have values for the Search Key field will be displayed To find the specific Account you are looking for scroll through the Account database by using the command buttons at the bottom of the window Beginning Previous Next and End of File 4 3 13 Key Select Choose the Key Select command from the right hand column com mand buttons This command is used to organize the Account data base The Select Search Key window will appear The Account database may be organized according to the following Select Search Key IX Reporting ID 4 RptID 1 Phn 2 Rpt ID 2 Phn 2 Rpt ID 3 Phn 2 Rpt ID 4 Phn 2 Status Sort key 1 Sort key 2 Cancel Account ID Equipment Type template ID Name State City Address Voice phone Data phone Reporting ID 1 2 3 or 4 Account Status Sort Key 1 or Sort Key 2 Only those Accounts that have values for the Search Key field will be displayed Account ID Type Template ID
192. Failure Report Program Address 217 must be programmed Open Report Program Address 210 must be programmed Close Report Program Address 211 must be programmed 24 Hour Check In Reports Program Addresses 219 and 220 must be programmed Timer Programming Bell Cutoff Times Program Addresses 167 and 168 must be programmed for not less than 15 minutes Entrv Exit Delav Times Program Addresses 164 166 must be programmed for not longer than 60 seconds General Control Programming Must be programmed for no swinger shunts and closing ring back Program Address 010 Data Digit 2 enter 0 1 or 2 Program Address 169 must be programmed as Data Digit 2 0 Program Address 171 must be programmed for the Commercial mode Zone Programming The Burglar alarm output signal whether pulsed or steadv must be different from the Fire alarm signal Alarm Output Programming Program Address 008 must be programmed as Data Digit 1 0 11 3 5 Central Station Burglary Alarm The control must be installed in accordance with U L Standards UL611 and UL681 for all grades of service A Grades AA and A Installations using the Applied Spectrum PAL200 and the DACT Required Accessories The control must be a Detection Systems model DS7080iCC with a cover actuated tamper switch installed The Applied Spectrum PAL200 The Spectrum PAL200 must be installed within 3 feet of the control and the wiring to the control must be in conduit The Applied
193. Format Pager Format 4 2 Format Suggested values 14 2 Values Sent High Speed 4 9 Format Contact ID Format 15 0 PROGRAM ADDRESSES QUICK REFERENCE Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 Reference Guide 1 0 SYSTEM OVERVIEW The DS7060 Control Communicator is a fully integrated hard wire security and residential fire alarm system It can support up to 6 input zones and 15 individual users Up to 4 keypads may be used to provide user interface with the system as well as programming access for the installer 2 0 SPECIFICATIONS 2 1 Enclosure Housing The enclosure is manufactured from 22 Ga 0 65 mm cold rolled steel and measures 9 25 Wide by 10 25 High by 3 Deep 23 5 cm Wide by 26 cm High by 7 6 cm Deep The door has a knockout for a standard DS lock optional The enclosure has a slot in the back and also has an optional tamper switch mounting bracket with a plunger switch 2 2 Temperature 32 F to 120 F 0 C to 49 C 20 F to 150 F 28 C to 66 C e Operating temperature e Storage temperature 2 3 Power Input Power 16 5 VAC U S 16 VAC Aust 20 VA 50 or 60 Hz Auxiliary Regulated Power 12 12 5 VDC 0 8A Auxiliary Power Voltage Range 10 to 13 8 VDC Optional Standby battery P334 12 V 7 0 AH Control Panel Current Draw 65 mA DS7443 Keypad Current Draw 45 mA Standby 45 mA Alarm 75 mA Standby 75 mA Alarm 100 mA Standby 100 mA Alarm 1A 250 V DS7445 Ke
194. GRAMMING THE DS7060 Most control panel functions are controlled using a single program address Some functions are grouped into one address For example The keypad emergency keys are programmed in Address 19 The first data digit of this address is for the Fire Key the second is for the Help Key and the third is for the Panic Key Other addresses are configured this way also with the address representing a group of functions and each data digit controlling a specific function Example To program the Fire Key as Pulsing Audible the Help Key as Steady Audible and the Panic Key as Invisible Use the following chart for each Address to record your selections before programming 2 DEFAULT 0 Disabled FIRE KEY A Invisible Steady Audible HELE REY IE Pulsing Audible PANIC KEY C Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Program Address 1 9 Enter to change the values Enter 3 in the first data field to change the Fire Key to Pulsing Audible Enter 2 in the second data field to change the Help Key to Steady Audible Enter 1 in the third data field to change the Panic Key to Invisible Enter the Pound button Program the next Address a different Address or exit the Programmer s Mode DS7060 Reference Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc 8 1 Address 01 Zone Programming A zone is an input to the DS7060 Control Communicator There are 6 hard wired zones on the main circu
195. General Control Programming Program Address 162 aaa l Beale p Phone Number General Control programming allows you to enable the o program the parameters to enable the Remote Programmer Callback feature to dial Pulse on all Phone Numbers and to have a Remote Programmer Callback feature determine whether to dial Pulse Dialer Delay of 15 seconds on 24 hour Burglar and Fire Alarms or Tone on all Phone Numbers and decide if there should be a Dialer Data Digit 1 1 Data Digit 2 2 Delay Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 i i Enter the Program Address til 61 E See Glossary Section 6 9 for further details Enter Data Digit 1 1 Enter Data Digit 2 2 Enter the Pound button QX a Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Data Digit Programmer s Mode Enter the DD as a 1 2 Required on PBX systems Enter DD as Select Options 0 Dialer Delay of 18 sec onNonzenourBualarAams Tel je Dialer Delay of T5 sec on A kaw Burger and Fro Ners ole Movar qe CL DS7080i Reference Guide Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc 10 12 Phone Answering Programming Program Address 163 Example Phone Answering programming defines the number of times the phone To program the Control Panel to answer the phone after 2 rings when will ring before the armed or disarmed Control Panel will answer it Armed and after 4 rings when Disarmed Data Digit 1 2 Data
196. Ground Fault Detect Programming Program Address 0185 Example Force Arming programming defines how many zones may be Force Armed using an Arm idi ka eku UD S ZONES ana ing sequence followed by the Bypass key With this entry all violated zones up the pro __ grammed limit will automatically be Force Armed bypassed Ground Fault Detect pro Data Digit 1 5 Data Digit 2 0 gramming determines whether or not the control will detect a ground fault condition eel ele ol TS See Glossary section 7 9 for further details Enter the Program Address 0 1 8 5 Enter Data Digit 1 5 Enter Data Digit 2 0 Select Option pp Enter the pound key Program the next Address Program a different e Data Digit Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode 1 2 perm oe 2 e korriet i morn anion owe mm 4p Ponpes rores obe Focene SP kem AT orrea aenea T7 H norma mara l rr oe Foe nes o f Select Option DD Ground Fault Detect Off 0 Ground Fault Detect On iy DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 12 15 Commercial Fire Mode Programming Program Address 0186 Example l To program the Commercial Fire Mode parameters as Central Station This section describes how to define the parameters for Commercial Fire Mode enabled with a 10 second delav on Waterflow A A Zones having the Bell and Aux activate on Fire Alarms and using the Commercial Fire Mode California March
197. IB Queue Full The message queue in the RF modem is Check RF coverage of the unit and check for RF noisy 89 display System Fault 51 full and no messages can get out to the ra environment dio network 87 display AR Host Down The central station receiver has ceased to Contract the central station and notify of status 89 display System Fault 52 be available to the network 87 display AR Unreg Modem The modem is not registered through all Contact the network administrators or technical ser 89 display System Fault 53 parts of the network vice 87 display AR Power Fail There is a possible problem with the AR Return for service 89 display System Fault 54 DIS Module unit 87 display AR Network Lost The ARDIS Module has lost contact with Check the location and coverage of the unit 89 display System Fault 55 the radio network 87 display AR Modem HW Err There is a possible problem with the radio Replace the unit 89 display System Fault 56 modem 87 display AR Modem SW Err The ARDIS Module is having some trouble Check for noisy environment and replace the unit if 89 display System Fault 57 communicating with the radio modem the problem continues 87 display AR Opt Bus Err The panel can no longer communicate with Check the wiring between the DS7400Xi and the 89 display System Fault 58 the ARDIS Module ARDIS Module 87 display AR Corrupt MSG The communication between the panel and
198. If the chart looks like this onlv a single feature is available to be programmed for that particular address Select Option D D Disabled Oi Represents the option feature available for this address Perimeter Instant pie To select Disabled Entry Et pea enter the data digit as a 0 Entry Exit Delay 2 To select Entry Exit Delay 2 enter the data digit as a 4 A Enter one of these numbers for the appropriate data digit Some pages may also include a Default chart that looks like this Zone Function Address Default 0001 23 0002 24 0003 21 DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 12 0 Programming 12 1 General Control Programmong Program Address 0000 Example General Control programming defines the To program the svstem wide General Operating parameters as allow wi i ing Normal and Custom Arming Operating at 60 Hz and to Restore system wide general operating parameters when a Zone Restores See Glossary section 7 1 for further details Data Digit 1 2 Data Digit 2 1 Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Program Address 0 0 0 0 Enter Data Digit 1 2 Enter Data Digit 2 1 Enter the pound key Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode Data Digit Enter the Data Digit as a 1 2 SRM 2 15 6 7 fe fo folifets ists of Allow Normal and Custom Arming QOQQOQOQOQOOOQO
199. Inc 9 0 The Master Kevpad Your system may include a Master keypad A Master keypad is a DS7447 keypad programmed to give a user access to all the partitions he has access to not just the partition the Master keypad is in This is different from a Standard keypad in that Standard keypads only give access to the single partition they are in Commands entered at the Master keypad will affect all the partitions the user has access to If this is not desirable the Master keypad can be used to control partitions individually this is called Single Partition Mode Single Partition Mode allows a user to control the partitions he has access to on an individual one by one basis see section 11 4 for more information on Single Partition Mode 9 1 Master Keypad Displays Master keypad displays will differ slightly from Standard keypads The Master keypad display will scroll the Status of each partition followed by the partition number For example if all partitions are armed the Master keypad will scroll through the following displays Armed Armed Armed Armed Armed Armed area 2 area 3 area 4 area 5 area 6 area 7 If only partitions 1 2 3 4 6 and 8 are armed the Master keypad will scroll through the following displays Armed Armed Armed Ready toArm Armed Ready to Arm Armed area 2 area 3 area 4 area 5 area 6 area 7 area 8 Displays for partitions that are Not Ready will display in the same manner Flashing One or more partitions All part
200. MMABLE OUTPUT 1 Ground Start PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT 2 Ready to Arm Follow Burg Alarm PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT 3 Follow Fire Alarm Follow Burg and Fire Alarm Follow Keypad Sounder Duress Trouble WroaoamonooukWNDd Oo Intrusion This is an output programmed to latch with any Burg zone alarm including invisible and silent zones It will remain latched until the system is disarmed regardless of the restore setting for the zone On During Entry Pre Alert This is an output programmed to activate when a perimeter delayed type zone is violated while the system is armed It will remain activated until the system is disarmed or until the entry delay time has expired System Reset This is an output programmed to activate only for 10 seconds after a PIN System Reset is entered at a keypad or if a fire zone with verification activates Output 1 turns on for 10 seconds outputs 2 and 3 turn off for 10 sec onds Outputs 2 and 3 are intended to be used to power 4 wire smoke detectors or any other device that requires a power interruption to reset an alarm condition Armed This is an output programmed to activate when the system is armed It will remain activated until the system is disarmed Ground Start This is an output programmed to activate for 3 seconds when the phone line is seized It is intended for use with ground start phone systems that require a momentary short to ground to obtain a dial tone Connect a separate 12 VDC DPDT relay Conn
201. N during Entrv Pre alert ON when svstem is armed 0 5 are Hex values They will display as A F at the keypads Ce meae dB Fire Zone delayed by 20 sec Burglar Zone amp Fire Zone Burglar Zone amp Fire Zone delayed by 20 sec Keypad Sounder Output Access Output 10 sec pulse Pulse for 2 sec during Battery Test 0 5 are Hex values They will display as A F at the keypads Page 24 Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc DS7080i Reference Guide 10 2 Output Programming Program Address 009 Example To program Programmed Output 2 as On during Entrv Pre alert with the Pulsing Fire Alarms using Temporal Cadence Data Digit 1 1 Data Digit 2 1 Output Address Default Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Program Address 0 0 9 Enter Data Digit 1 1 Programmed Output 2 009 1 2 Enter Data Digit 2 1 Enter the Pound button Address Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode 009 Data Digit 1 2 Select Option DD l tach ON for any burgar armi O OFF for 8 sec after entering System Reset 2 4 Svstem Status readv to arm Burglar Zone Burglar Zone delaved bv 20 sec Fire Zone Burglar Zone amp Fire Zone Burglar Zone amp Fire Zone delayed by 20 sec Keypad Sounder Output Access Output 10 sec pulse 6 7 Fire Zone delaved bv 20 sec 9 3 Pulse for 2 sec during Battery Test
202. NG Bypassing or Force Arming removes some of your building s protection because it excludes the faulted zones from arming Therefore an intrusion may not be detected or the detection may be delayed Always attempt to correct any zone problems close doors and windows etc before using these features If the problem can not be corrected contact your installing company NOTE See Section 5 9 Zone Bypass for an alternate method of arming the system when faults exist Force arming is not available in U L Listed systems TYPE OF ARMING WHAT WILL HAPPEN WHAT TO DO WHAT WILL HAPPEN WHAT TO DO Force e A5 second beep occurs Press Bypass The red Armed light will flash Exit during the Arming indicating there are faulted during the during the exit delay interval exit delay zones and that the control 5 second beep The control panel will arm with interval if Enter any panel needs to be Force the faulted zones bypassed or leaving arming sequence Armed a three beep error tone will occur indicating Force Arming has not been accepted or allowed 5 8 Auto Bypass The system can be armed and will automatically bypass faulted zones See Section 8 10 to enable Auto Bypass TYPE OF ARMING WHAT WILL HAPPEN WHAT WILL HAPPEN WHAT TO DO Auto Bypass A single beep occurs The red Armed light will flash Exit during the indicating that the panel during the exit delay interval exit delay has armed e The control panel will arm with inter
203. OSE This command will return vou to the previous screen NEW EVENTS This command will upload only new History events since the last History upload RESET This command will upload the History buffer without saving it COMPLETE This command will upload all History events Copyright 1994 96 Detection Systems Inc This command should only be used if there is no history in the open account as it may duplicate items in the account database Under normal circumstances use the NEW EVENTS command CANCEL This command will return you to the previous screen Mode This command will allow you to perform the following Mode functions Find Account Acct ID BLANK 32 TADDXI 3 Template NONE Rept ID 1 Sort key 1 5 Sort key 2 Auto service Name Auto call Address City Zip Contact Da 4214270 Notes Onine manual 00 05 46 Comm 11 48 Fri Aug 16 1396 Image 16 26 Wed Aug 14 1996 Status Created 16 21 Wed Aug 14 1996 Modified 16 25 Wed Aug 14 1996 Revision 300 Modify oper 2 Account ID BLANKY32 11 54 AM Fri Aug 16 1996 Panel still online Automatically get history update program set time and disconnect AUTOMATIC This command will automatically upload histo ry update the programming information set the clock and then disconnect from the control panel MANUAL This command will allow you to manually con
204. PIN No Entry Perimeter Only Residential Mode No Entry Perimeter Only The red Armed Light will begin to flash Perimeter Inst will be displayed DS7447 Exit Now will display DS7447 during the exit delay interval Asingle beep will sound The red Armed light will turn on steady after the exit delay interval The yellow Perimeter light DS7445 will turn on steady Only exterior protection zones will be armed Move freely around the interior Perimeter Arming Someone still on the premises An entry exit delay is in effect Commercial Mode PIN Perimeter Only Residential Mode Perimeter Only The red Armed Light will begin to flash Perimeter On will be displayed DS7447 Exit Now will display DS7447 during the exit delay interval Asingle beep will sound The red Armed light will turn on steady after the exit delay interval The yellow Perimeter light DS7445 will turn on steady Only exterior protection zones will be armed Move freely around the interior Maximum Security Arming No one left on the premises There is NO entry delay in effect An alarm WILL occur upon entry Commercial Mode PIN No Entry On Residential Mode No Entry On The red Armed Light will begin to flash The green Status light will turn off Armed Instant will be displayed DS7447 Exit Now will display DS7447 durin
205. Program Address then enter the value for both Data Digits then enter to save it and move on to the next Program Address Entering data digit 1 will increment you to the next data digit The display will show the Program Address and will display the value of each Data Digit after you enter them The data will be programmed saved when you press the key The control panel will automatically increment to the next program address If you wish to program that next address enter the necessary information If you wish to read back the value of that address press the key If you wish to program a different address press the f l key two times and enter the program address you wish to program If you make a mistake at any time press the key two times before pressing the key This will clear the display allowing you to enter the program address you wish to work with 8 4 HEX values Some Data Digit values will be higher than 9 These values must be programmed by pressing the key followed by some other number These values will display as HEX characters Athrough F when entered Example entering 0 at the keypad will display anA The HEX character values are as follows Q A l B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F DS7080i Reference Guide 8 5 Defaults The DS7080i is shipped from the factory as a working pre pro grammed control Many of the programming addresses may already be set to the values you need
206. Program Address 36 must be programmed Timer Programming e Bell Cutoff Times Program Address 23 must be programmed for not less than 15 minutes e Entry Exit Delay Times Program Address 23 must be programmed for not longer than 60 seconds General Control Programming e Must be programmed for Swinger Shunts disabled Closing Ring Back disabled and Force Arming disabled Pro gram Address 10 DS7060 Reference Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc 4 Zone Programming e The Burglar alarm output signal Address 04 whether pulsed or steady must be different from the Fire alarm signal 5 Alarm Output Programming e Program Address 08 must be programmed as X X 8 Central Station Burglarv Alarm The control must be installed in accordance with U L Standards UL611 and UL681 for all grades of service Grades AA and A Installations using the Applied Spectrum PAL200 and the DACT Required Accessories The control must be mounted in the Detection Systems model AE7060CC enclosure with a cover actuated tamper switch installed The Applied Spectrum PAL200 The Applied Spectrum PAL200 must be installed in the same room as the control and the wiring from the Applied Spectrum PAL200 to the control must be in conduit The Applied Spectrum PAL200 inputs should be connected to the alarm outputs the active alarm sounder output may be used Report Programming Programming shall be enabled to allow all alarm signals
207. Programming Program Address 0528 Example To program the parameters to enable the Remote Pro grammer Call back feature to dial Pulse on all Phone Numbers to send Alarm Reports via either ARDIS or Digi See Glossarv section 7 14 for further details tal and to use 110 Baud comm for WDSRP Data Digit 1 1 Data Digit 2 0 Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Program Address 0 5 2 8 Enter Data Digit 1 1 Enter Data Digit 2 0 Enter the pound key Data Digit Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode Enter the Data Digit as a 1 2 Select Options oft fslefsjerzisieporil1i ILI Enable remote programmer call back je je je je je je ojoj Dial pulse on all phone numbers leje Dial tone on all phone numbers eje eje Dial tone switch topulseifrequired je eje Aa Try ARDIS network first jejejejejejej 0 1 are Hex values They will display as A B at the keypads AA If this option is selected see address 0494 0495 Required on PBX systems Enter the Data Digit as a Select Options 2 5 4 5 6 7 8 9 foti 2 3 4 5 Dier delay of 18 see onnonatibustaraarms ony fel je je je je je el fo pana sem mamma mann ele ele jeje Jofo SendalamsviactherARDSoragiaa jejejejej jelelele faa Send alarms viabothARDSandasia ejeje
208. QQOQOOQUO Allow Perimeter Instant Arming eje jeje lee jele Allow Perimeter Arming eje jeje ee jeje Allow Maximum Security Arming eje jeje jele jele Closing Ring Back jelelele Jejejeje Siren on Comm Fail for Silent Zone l elelelelelelele 50 Hz operationA je jej jejje je e e 60 Hz operation ei je je je je je je je A For installations in North America select 60 Hz operation 0 5 are Hex values They will display as A F at the keypads Enter DD as a Select Options KAENEJ 3 4 5 Allow Swinger Shunts Normal Arming PIN On If programmed Normal Arming arms the entire system while allowing entry delays for entry exit zones Perimeter Instant Arming PIN No Entry Perimeter Only If programmed Perimeter Instant Arming arms only the perimeter of the system and does not allow entry delays for entry exit zones Perimeter Arming PIN Perimeter Only If programmed Perimeter Arming arms only the perimeter of the system while allowing entry delays for entry exit zones Custom Arming PIN 4 If programmed Custom Arming allows custom arming of the system and bypasses the zone functions specified in data address 0183 Maximum Security Arming PIN No Entry On If programmed Maximum Security Arming arms the entire system and does not allow entry delays for entry exit zones DS7400Xi Ver 3 Refer
209. Telco jack to the inside of the Control cabinet The operation of this Control may also be affected if events such as accidents or acts of God cause an interruption in telephone service 7 18 Canadian Dept of Communications General Installation Requirements Notice The Canadian De partment of Communications label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommuni cations network protective operational and safety requirements The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is per missible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommuni cations company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any re pairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equip ment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their
210. The default values are shown in If the value you would like is in Reverse Print you don t need to re program this address In the example below a O is the default value ee ee ee Feature1 e je Feature 2 e lej lej sen Tote He Feature 3 e e e If the default value is not shown in reverse print it will be shown in parenthesis and designated as the default value or displayed in a separate table 8 6 Setting the Control to the Factory Default To set the control s programming values back to the default en ter O 1 for Program Address 326 Note Entering 0 1 in Program Address 326 will immediately reset the control to the factory default Any programming already done by the installer will be erased CAUTION Only enter O 1 in Program Address 326 when you are completely sure you want to erase all installer pro gramming 8 7 Exiting the Programmer s Mode To exit the Programmer s Mode press the key for 2 seconds Also if no keypad entries are made for 4 minutes the control will automatically exit you from the Programmer s Mode Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc 9 0 Understanding the Programming Charts The Programming Reference Guide makes use of three tvpes of charts Each is described below Note It is recommended that the DS7447 Keypad be used for programming as other keypads will not allow reading back of programming infor
211. Time Data Digit 1 8 Data Digit 2 1 See Glossary section 7 10 for further details Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Program Address 0 1 8 6 Enter Data Digit 1 8 Enter Data Digit 2 1 Enter the pound key eee Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Data Digit Programmer s Mode Enter the Data Digit as a 1 2 Select Options M ENEMEMEMENCHCACHEN ic 0 Commercial Fire Mode disabled Je Local Comm Fire Mode enabled le leleleie Central Station Comm Fire mode enad lejejejejeje 10sec delay onwatertlow zone e jel 20sec delay onwaterflow zone e lel 30sec delay on watertow zone Jel ol T 40 sec delay onwaterflow zone te Je 50 see delay on wateriowzone Jel lel 0 2 are Hex values They will display as A C at the keypads Zones 1 4 may only have waterflow delays Enter the DD as a Select Options IN 213 4 5 Bell and Aux acivateonFie jejejejejeje Bell and Aux activate on Burg jojojo Pulsing Fire Alarms are 1 sec On 1 sec Off Pulsing Fire Alarms use California March Time el Pulsing Fire Alarms use Temporal Cadence el o When programming Fire zones it is recommended that they be zone functions 12 and 13 see sections 12 2 and 12 15 3 12
212. UOIJEJS JOJIUOD GvvLSG 10 Zvv Sa sbezsa 666262 62 4 iXOOPZSC doo y sselo 10zv Sq su Buisn ji pojinbal Ajuo Buum sty L Od uolsuedxy nininaananmi TITTITITTITI sng ped y Q37UOJIEJJPUJ amod ON w 6 0 Ye yua wnwixey JINPLO9 u 8Q snw lt JOWJOJSUEJJ woy BULLI 79ANSOJAUR 9 LH L IV ue UI pajunow q JsNUW JOWJOJSUBI 9JON 4amod payoyimsun ZH 09 VA 0S OVA 81 JOWJOJSUBIL qmi lt 0 vvoose9 1134 3142813 JaJSeg 6Loocbecbbbtbo lt L ssouppe JO p9 JJ9 9S 8Q SNW 9U0 juo snq ped y y 0 01 1 spedA y 19440 JO9UUOD JINPUOJ UI aq snw ULJIM OY PUL ULd JO JUOQ 9U1 JO 199 oz UIUHM aq snu pedA y suL vL LL SSOJppE ye snq suondo y 0 pa p uuo q ISNUW Ajuo ped y uo asn pedAay jdy nu 104 UNPLOD UI aq snu ULJIM ay pue JSUB4 JOJJUOQ y 40 199 Og UIUJIM 8Q Jsnwu ped ox y SS9JppE se J99 9S pue snq ped ox au o ped ox y JJBSUUOD pediox aj6uls B UJIM suopeaddy OJI4 eww 104 9JON o z O a ob D G o gt z 5 gt 2 Cc o D oO c o G wn Cc 2 O w Cc E Q O 2 gt Q 8 o e c G bi p a
213. Wide by 52 7 cm High by 10 8 cm Deep e DS7400XiFCP DS7400XFi package DS7420i DS7447 AE TR16 DS7400XiCC DS7400Xi in an Attack Enclosure When installing a U L Listed system refer to the Installation Guide for U L Listed Systems See Section 14 0 Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 2 0 Enclosure Installation The DS7400Xi control communicator and the enclosure are shipped together The control however still needs to be installed into the enclosure Hardware for mounting the enclosure to a wall and the control to the enclosure is located in its own hardware pack 2 1 Install the Enclosure e Use the enclosure as a template and mark the top mounting holes on the mounting surface Pre start the mounting screws for these two holes Slide the en closure onto these mounting screws so that the screws move up into the thinner section of the holes Tighten the screws Screw in the remaining two screws in either set of bottom mount ing holes Knock out the desired wire entrances on the enclosure Enclosure Circuit board Support Post Assembly Flip up view to show retainer tabs Ground Wire coag 2 2 Install the Control Communicator CAUTION The control is static sensitive Make sure you touch earth ground before handling the control This will dis charge any static electricity in your body Example Run the ground wire to the enclosure before handling the control Then
214. a re stricted access area and should be wall Insert the two support posts into the control retainer holes mounted as shown below in the Support Post Assembly diagram CAUTION The control panel should only be installed by Slide the top of the control PCB into the two retainer tabs authorized service personnel Once in the retainer tabs the control will rest on the two e Use the enclosure as a template and mark the mounting support posts holes on the mounting surface Secure the bottom of the enclosure by screwing the bottom e Pre start the mounting screws for these holes Mount the two holes through the support posts and through to the enclosure control retainer holes e Knock out the desired wire entrances on the enclosure CAUTION Once the control is installed be sure to connect its ground wire to the top hinge of the enclosure Retainer Tabs E Mounting Holes Ground Tab eklekloeetetje Control Retainer Holes jee ten oelekelkelelekeeldekeke 220 CONTROL COMMUNICATOR Enclosure Wire Mounting Entrances 4 Hole Hol Circuit board gt ENCLOSURE SUPPORT POST ASSEMBLY Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 Reference Guide 4 0 CONTROL TERMINAL WIRING WARNING Befo
215. act fel 4214270 Notes Time set Error Clear Comm 11 48 Fri Aug 16 1996 Factory Image 16 26 Wed Aug 14 1996 Status Created 16 21 Wed Aug 14 1996 Modified 16 25 Wed Aug 14 1996 ei EN ati Revision 300 Modify oper 2 11 52 AM Fri Aug 16 1996 On line manual 00 04 06 Requesting current control state Account ID BLANKY32 Perform no control options PANEL TIME This command will display the control panel s time in the lower text block of the Find Account window RESET This command will reset the control panel after this communication session is complete This will erase history and time Use this command only if the control panel is locked up TIME SET This command will set the control panel s clock ERROR CLEAR This command will clear all troubles that do not self clear as well as perform a battery test FACTORY This command will reset the control panel to the factory set defaults CANCEL This command will return you to the previous screen 4 3 6 End Session This command will end this communications session with the control panel and will take you off line with the control panel It will also call up a verification window asking you if you wish the connection to be dropped After this session is complete you will still be in the Find Account window with the communications commands Choose the Cancel command to return to the original Find Account
216. afety If Installed in Family Residences Having and Practicing an Escape Plan Installation Considerations Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 User Guide 1 0 OPERATING GUIDE 1 1 Understanding the DS7443 DS7445 and DS7447 Kevpads The DS7443 is a 6 zone LED kevpad its LEDs represent the zones of the svstem The DS7445 is an 8 zone LED kevpad its LEDs represent the zones of the svstem LEDs for zones 7 and 8 are not used The DS7447 is an alpha numeric LCD kevpad All three keypads display information on various control panel functions A built in sounder is used to annunciate keystroke entries and as an interior warning device Volume Control DS7445 and DS7447 only The keypad sounder volume can be adjusted using the 1 and 4 keys along with the key Hold the key while pressing the 1 key to increase the volume or the 4 key to decrease the volume The volume adjustment does not affect the volume during an alarm Backlight Control DS7447 only The display backlight intensity can be adjusted using the 3 and 6 keys along with the key Hold the key while pressing the 3 key to increase the brightness or the 6 key to decrease the brightness NOTE After the backlight and volume are adjusted you must arm then disarm the system once to store this information in the control panel If power is disconnected before the panel is armed the backlight and volume levels will return to the default settings
217. ager format 8 18 Address 24 Keypad Report Two Digits 00 through FF es 00 00 00 Keypad Fire Report Keypad Fire Restoral Report Keypad Help Alarm Report Keypad Panic Alarm Report e Keypad Fire Report This report is sent when a fire alarm has been activated using the A emergency key Keypad Fire Restoral Report This report is sent when a keypad fire alarm has been restored using the System Reset command Keypad Help Alarm Report This report is sent when an help alarm has been activated using the B emergency key Keypad Panic Report This report is sent when an emergency alarm has been activated using the C emergency key Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 Reference Guide 8 19 Address 25 Zone Alarm Report Two Digits 00 through FF e Zone Alarm An alarm report is sent when a zone alarm occurs Program this report for any zones you wish to send an alarm report for For local zones no reports replace default with 00 8 20 Address 26 Zone Alarm Restoral Report Two Digits 00 through FF e Zone Alarm Restoral This report is sent when the zone alarm is cleared Refer to Address 07 for exact point at which report will be sent 8 21 Address 27 Zone Trouble Report Two Digits 00 through FF e Zone Trouble This report is sent when a zone trouble condition occurs DS7060 Reference Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc 8 22 Address 28 Zone Trouble Restoral Repo
218. ain window The Find User window will appear Find User Password Insert new Authority level 15 Operator ID 2 Edit data Name Default change this password ae Address City Zip Phone Lo cate key i Created 16 43 Tue Dec 22 1992 Modified Modify oper 7 Key select Reports Close Beginning Previous Next End of file Locate a specific record in the data base Also changes the database key Choose the Insert New command from the right hand col umn command buttons The Edit User Information window will appear with the cur sor in the Password field Edit User Information Password Authority level Operator ID 2 Name Address City State Zip Phone Created 16 43 Tue Dec 22 1992 Modified Modify oper 7 Notes Default change this password Enter this operator s Password From this window you may enter and edit all necessary infor mation Some fields are filled in automatically by WDSRP the Operator ID field Created Field Modified field and the Modify Operator field Choose OK to include this record in the User database This will return you to the Find User window Choose Close to return to the Find User window and delete the record you were working on WDSRP User
219. al at your fingertips It can be accessed anywhere within WDSRP There are three ways to access the HELP File 1 The HELP Files are context sensitive You can highlight any item in the open window and press the F1 key and the HELP information about that item will appear In Windows 3 1 only placing the mouse cursor over the item in the open window and pressing the right mouse but ton will display the HELP information about that item Do not attempt this in Windows 95 as it may cause a protection fault From the MAIN screen the HELP File can be opened by se lecting the HELP file menu with the mouse and pressing the left mouse button The style of the files will be different in Windows 3 1 and Windows 95 as shown in the following ex amples Copyright 1994 96 Detection Systems Inc How to Use Help Ele Edit Bookmark Help to view information not visible in the Help window To choose a Help topic Or press TAB to select the topic and then press ENTER Introduction Help Basics How To Annotate a Help Topic Choose a Jump Copy a Help Topic onto the Clipboard Define and Use Bookmarks Get Help from Your Application keen Heln an Tan of Other Wind Windows 3 1 Help WDSRP Help File Edit Bookmark Options Help Eonens Seach c Ein Remote Programmer Help Contents Welcome to the Windows Detection Systems Remote Programmer WDSRF For help on a specific task
220. al phone line bell supervision a Check the wiring to the module display System Fault 10 module DS7420i is defective or the wiring to the module is defective b There is no DS7420i or a DS7420i has b Enter then exit programming mode This will re been removed from the system scan the options bus and clear the problem 87 display Line 1 Fault 89 There is a phone line fault on line 1 Check phone line 1 for proper operation display System Fault 11 87 display Line 2 Fault 89 There is a phone line fault on line 2 Check phone line 2 for proper operation If you wish display System Fault 12 to monitor only one phone line reprogram address 1520 87 display Bell Fault The bell circuit on the DS7420i is open or Check the bell circuit wiring Be sure that the end of 89 display System Fault 13 shorted line resistor is in place If you don t wish to use the bell circuit place an end of line resistor across the bell terminals 87 display Aux Output Fault The auxiliary circuit on the DS7420i is open Check the auxiliary circuit wiring Be sure that the 89 display System Fault 14 or shorted end of line resistor is in place If you don t wish to use the auxiliary circuit place an end of line resistor across the auxiliary terminals If you wish to use the auxiliary circuit but do not wish to supervise it cut the auxiliary supervision jumper on the DS7420i 87 display Aux Power Fault The auxiliary p
221. and may not be completely free of errors you are advised to verify your work In no event will DS be liable for direct indirect incidental or consequential damages arising out of the use of or inability to use the program or documentation even if advised of the possibility of such damages Specifically DS is not responsible for any costs including but not limited to those incurred as a result of lost profits or revenue loss of use of the computer programs or data the cost of any substitute program claims by third parties or for other similar costs DS does not represent that the licensed programs may not be compromised or circumvented In no case shall DS s liability exceed the amount of the license Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of implied warranties or limitation of liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you Copyright 1994 96 Detection Systems Inc DS retains all rights not expressly granted Nothing in this license constitutes a waiver of DS s rights under the U S Copyright laws or any other Federal or state law Should you have any questions concerning this license write to Detection Systems Inc 130 Perinton Parkway Fairport New York 14450 INTRODUCTION Welcome to Detection Systems WDSRP Detection Systems Remote Programming Software for Microsoft Windows The WDSRP program will allow you access to all Detect
222. and or the red Armed light is flashing with the DS7447 display reading Zone Alarm or the DS7443 or DS7445 having its zone LEDs flashing then the keypad is signaling that an alarm has occurred The keypad will also issue a pulsed tone during the entry delay instead of the usual steady tone If the alarm has not been previously investigated do not enter the building unless accompanied by the appropriate Emergency Services personnel Fire Alarms Fire Alarms are silenced by using the same procedure as intrusion alarms a PIN with disarm privileges the Off key The Fire Alarm system is not reset until alarms at smoke detectors are cleared by using the System Reset command The Fire Alarm system will not be functional until this procedure has been followed See the Fire Reset section 5 21 Emergency Keypad Alarms DS7447 DS7443 DS7445 MOG Off 4 6 6 Cai OGU G OO C 4 GDC est Prt W Help 8 W Help CC e t iUoejb ZI NI The Emergency Alarm Keys A B and C may generate Fire Special Emergency and Panic Alarms if programmed by the installer Ask your installing company to explain the function of these keys When using the Emergency Alarm Keys they must be pressed for two seconds to generate an alarm NOTE If the Emergency Alarm keys are to be used they s
223. and will perform a fire reset will perform a battery test and will clear all system troubles Note If the System Reset command has not been performed after 24 hours of the Fire Alarm the keypad will sound and it will display Fire Alarm Not Reset If the sounders have been silenced and the system has been reset properly this warning will not occur 8 10 2 Fire Trouble A Fire Trouble message with a zone number signifies a problem with the fire system such as a break in the wiring that monitors smoke detectors A Fire Trouble message with no zone number in dicates a ground fault if the unit is in the commercial fire mode A Fire Trouble will be indicated by a short beep from the keypad sounders every 10 seconds The DS7447 will display Fire Trouble followed by the zones in a trouble condition The DS7445 will turn the Fire and Trouble Lights on steady and will light the correspond ing zone LEDs Notify your installing company immediately if the Fire Trouble mes sage is displayed The Fire Trouble beep can be silenced with any PIN followed by the Off key After problems have been remedied a PIN followed by the Off key should again be entered to clear the Fire Trouble display Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 8 11 Emergencv Kevpad Alarms K G The Emergency
224. ary bell cutoff time expires or the bells are silenced The zone can alarm multiple times per armed period Restore with Zone If programmed a zone sends a restoral report and is ready to activate again as soon as it physically restores The zone can alarm multiple times per armed period Restore when Disarmed or Reset If the zone returns to normal before the bell timer elapses the alarm display will continue and no restoral will be reported When the bell timer then elapses whether or not the zone has restored the bell will shut down if selected but the alarm display will continue and no restoral will be reported When the system is dis armed or reset the bell will silence the displays will clear and restoral will be reported along with the open reset event if programmed If the zone is a 24 hour zone and has not restored to normal will not report zone restoral until the zone restores Unrestored 24 hour zones will show as not ready and will prevent the system from arming In this case the system will reinitiate the sounders and displays for those zones but will not send any fire alarm transmission to the central station for those zones unless a previous restoral has been sent Fire zones always restore when the system is reset regardless of this selection DS7060 Reference Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc 8 8 Address 08 Outputs Intrusion On During Entry Pre Alert DEFAULT System Reset Armed PROGRA
225. as a Select Options jejsiejsjejzjejspojijajsja Bypassing AlowedZonet jejjejjejjejje e le JO Bypassing Allowed Zone2 jeje eje jeje jeje Bypassing Allowed Zones jejejejej jejejeje Bypassing Allowed Zone4 jejelejejlejejeje 0 5 are Hex values They will display as A F at the keypads Enter the Data Digit as a Select Options o 21314516171819 ot 2 fs f4 i sypassing towed zones je je je je je el fol Jol Bypassing Atowedzmes eje ejo lelo Tojo japasronbneizowzj Jojojeje jejejeje Bypassing Allowed zones ejejejejojojojo 0 5 are Hex values They will display as A F at the keypads 10 16 Keypad Control and Trouble Zone Mode Programming Program Address 171 Example Keypad Control programming defines the mode of keypad operation To program the keypad for Residential Mode with the Trouble Normal a valid code is required for all keypad operations Quick Arm a Zone disabled valid code is required for all keypad operations except arming the Data Digit 1 2 Data Digit 2 0 system and Residential Mode a valid code is only required for disarm ing the system silencing alarms resetting fire alarms and troubles Sti be a tobias fa al 7 6 0 programming and changing PINs Trouble Zone Mode programming Enter Data Digit 1 2 determines the mode of operation for any tamper device connected to the Enter Data Digit 2
226. as lost power Control panel problems See Section 5 17 Normal operation green No AC or battery Error Displays There are no fire alarms A fire zone is in alarm A fire trouble condition exists red Perimeter The perimeter is not armed This light will not flash The perimeter is armed yellow Supervisory This light will not be used by the Not used Not used yellow DS7060 Bell Silenced The bells do not need to be or This light will not flash The bells have been silenced To clear enter the yellow have not been silenced Fire Reset command Trouble There are no trouble conditions This light will not flash A trouble condition exists yellow Zone idi l There are no zone alarms A zone 1 6 is in alarm A zone 1 6 is not readv to arm or if a fire zone a red trouble condition exists This light is present on the DS7445 only This light is present on the DS7443 and DS7445 Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 Reference Guide 5 2 Personal Identification Numbers The Personal Identification Number PIN is the 4 digit code users enter at the kevpad to gain access to the svstem A PIN may be assigned to each User Number 001 015 The User Number identifies each person using the system There are 15 possible User Numbers 001 015 Vour svstem mav have up to 15 different PINs each 4 digits long Each User Number can have oniv one PIN Attempting to assign the same PIN to multiple User Numbers will
227. ass Not Allowed Bypass Allowed ZONE 1 DS7060 Reference Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc 8 3 Address 03 Zone Action Alarm on Short Alarm on Open Alarm on Short Trouble on Open Alarm on Open Trouble on Short Alarm on Short This zone will alarm when the loop is shorted and the system is armed It will generate a Not Ready while unarmed and prevent arming unless the problem is cleared Forced Armed or Bypassed Alarm on Open Works like Alarm on Short but alarms when loop is opened Trouble on Short This zone will alarm when the loop is shorted and the system is armed It will generate a Trouble while unarmed and prevent arming unless the problem is cleared Forced Armed or Bypassed Trouble on Open Works like Trouble on Short but alarms when loop is opened NOTE Fire zones will always be trouble on open even if programmed otherwise 8 4 Address 04 Output Type Invisible not valid for fire zone Silent not valid for fire zone Steady Pulsing POS only Invisible This is a zone programmed not to have an alarm output or an alarm display at any keypad when activated An alarm signal will be sent but the keypad display will not indicate an alarm while this zone is violated Invisible alarm zones are recommended for holdup alarms Silent This is a zone programmed to activate the visual display at the keypad but not audible signals If this zone is also an entry zone an entry
228. aster Programming Mode Enter a 1 to enter the Automatic Arm Setup programming If programming is done from a Master Keypad that is not in single partition mode the user will be prompted to enter the partition they wish to de program Enter the partition number i The user will only be allowed to program the Press to exit partitions to which they are assigned If pro gramming from a standard keypad or from a Master Keypad in single partition mode this step will be skipped The display will start with Sunday It will read Sunday nn nn Enter the time in 24 hour format then press the l key If you make a mistake press the key Enter a time for each day twice to move back to your last entry Enter in 0 1 0 0 HI format Samples of times 12 noon 1200 12 midnight 2400 12 01am 0001 12 01pm 1201 1 00am 0100 1 00pm 1300 Disabled 0000 DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 8 8 Turning OFF the System under Duress This chart explains the proper procedure for disarming under Duress Ask your installer if the Duress feature has been activated A Duress code is used when someone demands by threatening your life or well being that the system be turned off When used the code will both turn off the system and report a silent Duress alarm if connected to a monitoring service Extreme care should be used when entering your PIN to turn off t
229. at the screws move up into the thinner section of the holes Tighten the screws Screw in the remaining two screws in either set of bottom mount ing holes Knock out the desired wire entrances on the enclosure Use knock out bushings if conduit is not used Enclosure t Circuit board gt Max Standby for 72 hours 2 2 Install the Control Communicator CAUTION The control is static sensitive Make sure you touch earth ground before handling the control This will dis charge any static electricity in your body Example Run the ground wire to the enclosure before handling the control Then keep holding the ground wire while installing the control Insert the three support posts into the control retainer holes as shown in the diagram Slide the top of the control into the retainer tabs the slots under the top frame Once in the retainer tabs the control will rest on the three support posts Secure the bottom of the enclosure by screwing the bottom three holes through the support posts and through to the control retain er holes CAUTION Once the control is installed be sure to connect its ground wire to the top hinge of the enclosure the un painted tab Support Post Assembly side view Flip up view to show retainer tabs Ground Tab Retainer Tabs Control Retainer Holes 3 sets EU Po a oat at IM O O ad Wire Entrances 6 DN L VU E NI Enclosure DS7080i Reference Guide Copvright O 1
230. ault 20 ed to the partition the Standard Reserved for older panels System fault 50 keypad is in If you are on a Mas AR IB Queue Full modem buffer full System fault 51 ter keypad you may read Error AR Host Down network data switch down System fault 52 Displays one partition at a time AR Unreg Modem modem not registered System fault 53 AR Power Fail power source below defined threshold System fault 54 AR Network Lost loss of network System fault 55 AR Modem HW Err modem hardware error System fault 56 AR Modem SW Err modem software error System fault 57 AR Opt Bus Err loss of communication to ARDIS module System fault 58 AR Corrupt MSG message error System fault 59 Action Desired Command Sequence Read Error display when green Power light is flashing PIN 8 7 Clear Error Display Caution Clear the error display only on the advice of your installing PIN System Reset company or if you are certain the problem has been remedied Battery Trouble display will only clear by the System Reset command or another automatic battery test even after the problem has been remedied Comm Error display willonly clear by the System Reset command or the next successful automatic system off normal report even after the problem has been remedied All the other error displays will self clear from the keypads once the problem has been remedied DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems
231. ault is detected the DS7481 automaticallv closes its N O relav contacts to provide a means of signaling the fault 2 0 Specifications e Power Required 20 mA 12 VDC e Phone Fault Output A N O dry contact rated 0 5 A 12 VDC Wire to a 24 hour input with a supervised end of line resistor Ringer Equivalence Number 0 0B Operating Temperature 32 to 120 F 0 to 49 C Lightning Protection MOVs and spark gaps provide protection from lightning surges and static discharges FCC Registration Number ESVUSA 20057 KX N DOC Certificate Number 11454 DOC Certification Number 1249 5790 A CAUTION Handle this circuit board with care Rough handling and static discharge can damage this and other circuits Ground vourself before handling anv circuit board 3 0 Installation Screws are the preferred method of mounting and are required on U L Certificated installations If mounting to a DS7080i or a DS7400Xi enclosure and only one battery is being used in the svstem the preferred mounting position will be in the lower left corner of the enclosure 4 0 Terminal Functions Phone Line Connection Figure A Terminal Functions supervised 5 0 Programming The zone you connect to at the control panel should be programmed to provide an alarm sounder output to indicate the phone line has been lost or cut For intrusion systems the recommended sound is a constant keypad output when disarmed and the normal alarm sounders when
232. b Zones 9 16 L I P3 00 Zones 17 24 DIP switch Zones 25 32 Tamper Switch Zones 33 40 Zones 41 48 P2 5 Zones 49 56 Zones 57 64 Zones 65 72 Zones 73 80 DIMIPAIDIDIIDVIDDIDIDIDIDADADAMA k AAAAAAARAAAAAAAL Zea ter ina a VA Oa A Zones 97 104 POWER BUS is s G Rear Wire Entrance Zones 105 112 ku Surface Wire Entrance Zones 113 120 Zones 121 128 Figure C Loop Zone number relationship A Sz D o 00 NI m cn AY A oo po NI 0d ci NI oO Oo a N oo NI al al A oo po BS ro ES 6 O NIA oloo olol NI m ca ca A co ro BB Go i N co Ga NI co ojoj al A 09 po po N KL DIAS OS po ojoj ojal A co po po co co NI co Hm NI 00 o I NK om a A co co ro K alol MS KA D co O no A olol NI NI gt cn A ca co ro Oi Ni CO 4 Go Ga Ni J 4 co Qo SI D gt co A A oo PO Ps ro NIRIO O MO A om K en e o Figure B DS7432 Front view with cover off POWER BUS Input Loops 1 23v 45v67v8 To DS7430 Mux Power Terminals 7 and 8 _ To DS7430 MUX BUS Terminals 47KQ 47KQ 47KQ 47KQ 47KQ 47KQ 47KQ 47KQ Burg End of Line resistors are Detection Systems Inc P N 26069 Figure D DS7432 Wiring Diagram For fire installations order Multiplex Fire
233. be programmed Open Report Program Address 31 must be programmed Close Report Program Address 31 must be programmed Automatic Test Report Program Address 36 must be programmed Timer Programming e Entry Exit Delay Times Program Address 23 must be programmed for not longer than 60 seconds General Control Programming e Must be programmed for Swinger Shunts disabled Closing Ringback disabled and Force Arming disabled Pro gram Address 10 Zone Programming e The Burglar alarm output signal Address 04 whether pulsed or steady must be different from the Fire alarm signal Alarm Output Programming Program Address 08 must be programmed as X X 8 DS7060 Reference Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc 9 4 Wiring and Programming Information for Installations Using the Ademco AB 12 Bell Housing ADEMCO AB 12 BELL HOUSING CONTROL COMMUNICATOR To control Earth Ground Terminal 1 To control Zone l Terminal 21 To control Zone 6 Input ekeeke INNER BELL BOX LINING l j OUTER BELL BOX Disconnect the wire jumper from terminal 4 to the inner housing of the Bell Box Connect wiring between the control and Bell Box as shown above Program Zone 6 as a 24 ho
234. bel will display when the system is Pea re Ready To Arm Status Ready to Arm and when it is Armed oe MOONEE Fire Private Label Address 13 Zone 1 Alpha Label SPACE Address 14 Zone 2 Alpha Label aial 2ABC 3DEF 4p Z e 4GHI 5 JKL 6MNO Address 15 Zone 3 Alpha Label we m G 7PRS 8TUV 9WXY Address 16 Zone 4 Alpha Label CB B Q oS g Address 17 Zone 5 Alpha Label US Reset Ci ase toggle Address 18 Zone 6 Alpha Label Don t accept Hold for Accept Value 2 seconds to exit Move cursor left Move cursor right Example To program ABC Alarm as the Private Label Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Program Address 1 2 followed by Enter 2 for the letter A then press the right arrow key to continue with the next letter Enter 2 twice for the letter B then press the right arrow key for the next letter Enter 2 three times for the letter C then press the right arrow key for the next letter Enter 1 until you have a blank space Note Moving the cursor to the left does not create a space Spaces must be programmed into the Alpha using the 1 key Enter 2 for the letter A then press the right arrow key for the next letter Enter System Reset The System Reset key is the UPPER lower case toggle Enter 5 three times for the letter I then press the right arrow key for the ne
235. below the Brown Out level The Power Light will continue to flash until AC power has been restored If AC power restores while the Trouble condition has been silenced the sounders will begin to pulse again Low Battery The battery voltage has dropped below 12 VDC or the battery is missing The Low Battery condition may be cleared but will return if the battery fails the next battery test After clearing a Low Battery condition the battery should immediately be tested as described in the Testing Proce dure section below If the battery restores while the Trouble condition has been silenced the sounders will begin to pulse again Bell Trouble The bell circuit wiring is open or shorted The keypad sounders will pulse once every 10 seconds if in Commercial Fire Mode The keypad display will read 2Ph Bell Fault To silence the sounders enter a valid PIN followed by the Off key If the cause for the Trouble condition has been eliminated the sounders will silence and the 2Ph Bell Fault display will be cleared If the cause for the Trouble condition has not been elimi nated the sounders will silence but the 2Ph Bell Fault display will not be cleared To clear a Control Trouble Eliminate the cause of the Trouble condition Then enter a valid PIN followed by System Reset 4 6 Testing Procedure The sounders should be tested at least weekly using the keypad activated Sounder Test The Sou
236. bypassed This zone is bypassed when arming only the perimeter e Interior Instant This is an instant zone that does not use entry delays This zone is bypassed when arming only the perimeter Day Monitor This is a perimeter instant zone that activates alarm outputs when the system is armed but only activates the keypad sounders when the system is disarmed When the system is disarmed any violation of this zone will activate the keypad sounders which will sound continuously until a disarming command is entered The alarm outputs will not operate A trouble report if programmed will be sent to the central station Aday monitor violation will be recorded in the alarm history Keyswitch Input This zone allows the system to be armed or disarmed using a Normally Open momentary keyswitch toggle mode or an on off switch wired across the keyswitch zone In toggle mode each time the keyswitch input is shorted the arming state of the control panel will toggle In the on off mode the control panel will arm when the zone is shorted and will disarm when the zone is supervised May be programmed to allow force arming In the on off mode may be bypassed for keypad arming Keyswitch zones should be programmed for trouble on open No alarms will be generated on this zone An output should be used for an LED to indicate armed dis armed status and for a sounder to indicate entry exit delays se Fire Zone This zone causes a fire alarm wh
237. ces DS7080i Reference Guide 7 0 Operating Guide 7 1 Fire Safetv This fire alarm system can provide early warning of a developing fire Such a system however does not ensure protection against property damage or loss of life resulting from a fire Any fire alarm system may fail to warn for any number of reasons e g smoke not reaching a detector that is behind a closed door When considering detectors for residential applications refer to NFPA Standard 72 The National Fire Alarm Code This standard is avail able at a nominal cost from The National Fire Protection Associa tion Batterymarch Park Quincy MA 02269 7 1 1 If Installed in Family Residences Adherence to the NFPA Standard 72 can lead to reasonable fire safety when the following items are practiced Minimize hazards Avoid the three traditional fire killers smok ing in bed leaving children home alone and cleaning with flam mable liquids Providing a fire warning system Most fire deaths occur in the home the majority during sleeping hours The minimum level of protection requires smoke detectors to be installed outside of each separate sleeping area and on each additional story of the dwell ing For added early warning protection it is recommended that detec tors be installed in all separated areas including the basement bed rooms dining room utility room furnace room and hallways 7 1 2 Having and Practicing an Escape Plan A f
238. cessful Address Value Address Value Address Value oF Remote Program Lo 0 olo a Local Program Lolo AEJ Partial Close Report Address Value First Open after Alarm p Duress 0322 Comm Test System Normal DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 14 2 BFSK Format Reports with Restorals Report Restoral Trouble Address Value Address Value Address Value Zone Function 1 Zone Function 2 Zone Function 3 Zone Function 4 Zone Function 5 Zone Function 6 Zone Function 7 Zone Function 8 Zone Function 9 Zone Function 10 Zone Function 11 Zone Function 12 Zone Function 13 Zone Function 14 Zone Function 15 Low Battery AC Fail System Trouble Keypad Fire Keypad Emergency Keypad Panic Reports without Restorals Report Address Value Report Successful Report Unsuccessful Address Value Address Value Open Remote Program Close Local Program Partial Close Report First Open after Alarm Address Value Comm Test Svstem Normal DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 14 3 Pager Format The Pager format allows the control panel to dial a digital pager and leave a numeric message which includes an account ID and report tvpe The telephone number is dialed when a report is available At the completion of the telephone dialing a fixed time delav equal to 10 seconds occurs This delav allows time to connect with the pager service while skipp
239. count s control communica tor This number will call the control panel directly Notes This field may be used for any additional notes you may have con cerning this Account The rest of the fields in the Find Account window are filled in auto matically by WDSRP They are Comm This field lists the time and date of the last communication between the control panel and WDSRP Image This field lists the time and date of the last upload or download Status This field will list such things as data transfer information history up load download information and communication status Created This field lists the time and date when this Account was created Modified This field lists the last time this Account was modified by an operator Revision This field lists the control panel s ROM version Modify Oper This field lists the Operator s ID who last modified this Account 4 3 Find Account Window Commands 4 3 1 Communicate Choose the Communicate command from the right hand column of command buttons This command is used to communicate with con trol panels Find Account Acct ID 7A00XI 3 Template NONE ReptID 1 4 ear Sh ile wa fh Sort key 1 5 6 7 8 Sort key 2 Auto service Name Thomas J Brown Auto call Communicate History Insert New Address Detection Systems Edit Data 130 Perinton Parkway aici Delete Zip 1
240. counts Copyright 1994 96 Detection Systems Inc If data in the accounts has been changed back to match the Tem plate that field will then be updated whenever the Template is edited To access the Template database select Templates from the WDSRP Main window The Find Template window will appear It is here where vou keep track of the various Templates Find Template x Insert new Type 7080 Template 00007 Notes Edit data Delete Locate key Reports Record created Last modification 11 31 Fri Feb 02 1990 Export Operator when modified 3 Beginning Previous Next End of file Insert a new record into the database Import Close This window lists various general information concerning the Tem plates You can scroll through the Templates by using the command buttons at the bottom of the window Beginning Previous Next and End of File 4 4 1 Template General Information The general information consists of c Equipment Type This is the type of control panel that this Template is for DS7060 DS7080i DS7090 DS7090i DS7090TM DS7090TMi DS7100 DS7400 DS7400X DS7400Xi DS7400Xi Ver 3 Template ID This is the number code you assign each Tem plate for identification purposes Notes This field may be used for any additional notes you may have concerning this template The rest of the fields in the Find Template
241. cription Programming worksheet for Partitions 1 through 8 and Zones 1 through 8 See the Programming Addresses Worksheet P N 29802 for a complete Alpha Programming Worksheet covering addresses 1526 through 3701 Words are created one character at a time Each character uses two data digits The data digit values for these characters are shown below ValueCharacter ValueCharacter ValueCharacter ValueCharacter 02 blank space 83 8 05 P 86 h 12 93 9 15 Q 96 22 03 25 06 32 13 35 16 42 23 45 26 52 33 55 36 62 43 65 46 72 53 75 56 82 04 85 07 92 14 95 17 02 24 05 27 12 34 I5 37 22 44 25 47 32 54 35 57 42 64 45 67 52 74 55 77 03 84 06 87 13 94 16 97 23 04 26 07 33 14 36 17 43 24 46 27 53 34 56 37 63 44 66 47 73 54 76 Example Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 tet c LH JE Lm it lchalLi Value 1526 1 1526 2 1527 1 1527 2 1528 1 1528 2 1529 1 1529 2 1530 1 1530 2 1531 1 1531 2 1532 1 1532 2 1533 1 1533 2 PSK NS x SSE Sw TIN KEK CTFHNODOD ZT KT OZEZ AC TOMMIODFEr Y lA NOoORODNM O DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 12 37 1 Alpha Description Programming A Worksheet Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 wa oOo F Value 1526 1 1526 2 1527 1 1527 2 1528 1 1528 2 1529 1 1529 2 153
242. ct Option DD Select Option DD a ele Ms stompis 4 eatempts 8 T Atenpis 2 Try Phone First efe Attempt 1 5 Attempts 5 9 Attempts_ 9 13 Attempts 3 2 Attempts _ 2 6 Attempts _ 6 10 Attempts 0 14 Attempts 4 Second digit Phone First count Number of attempts before trying ARDIS This value is used to control the number of attempts made on the phone line before switching to the ARDIS network This value is only referenced if the Use Phone Use ARDIS and Try Phone First options are all selected If the value is less than or equal to 2 or more than 5 two attempts will be made on the phone before trying ARDIS if the Phone First option is selected DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 12 27 Account Code Programming Program Addresses 0496 0526 Example l To program Partition 1 Phone 1 Account Code to be 2332 Account Code programming defines the number transmitted to the central station that identifies this panel It also identifies Data Digit 1 2 Data Digit 2 3 Data Digit 3 3 Data Digit 4 2 which partition is reporting from this panel Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Program Address 0 4 9 6 Enter Data Digit 1 2 Enter Data Digit 2 3 Enter Data Digit 1 3 Enter Data Digit 2 2 Enter the pound key Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit t
243. ct the manufacturer for information on obtaining service or repairs The telephone company may ask that you disconnect this equipment from the network until the problem has been corrected or until you are sure that the equipment is not malfunctioning The repairs to this equipment must be made by the manufac turer and not by the user To guard against accidental disconnection there is ample room to mount the Telco jack to the inside of the Control cabinet The operation of this Control may also be affected if events such as accidents or acts of God cause an interruption in tele phone service 12 0 CANADIAN DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS 12 1 General Installation Requirements Notice The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local tele communications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connec tor assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the abo
244. cter Character 1638 1 1638 2 1639 1 1639 2 1640 1 1640 2 1641 1 1641 2 1642 1 1642 2 1643 1 1643 2 1644 1 1644 2 1645 1 1645 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 1646 1 1646 2 1647 1 1647 2 1648 1 1648 2 1649 1 1649 2 1650 1 1650 2 1651 1 1651 2 1652 1 1652 2 1653 1 1653 2 Partition 8 DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 12 37 1 Alpha Description Programming A Worksheet Continued Text Value Text Value Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character IMI KA FI FI FI FI 1654 1 1654 2 1655 1 1655 2 1656 1 1656 2 1657 1 1657 2 1658 1 1658 2 1659 1 1659 2 1660 1 1660 2 1661 1 1661 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 1662 1 1662 2 1663 1 1663 2 1664 1 16640 1665 1 1665 2 1666 1 1666 2 1667 1 1667 2 1668 1 1668 2 1669 1 1669 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 4 i ETA Ea l 1670 1 1670 2 1671 1 1671 2 1672 1 1672 2 1673 1 1673 2 1674 1 1674 2 1675 1 1675 2 1676 1 1676 2 1677 1 1677 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 1678 1 1678 2 1679 1 1679 2 1680 1 1680 2 1681 1 1681 2 1682 1 1682 2 1683 1 1683 2 1684 1 1684 2 1685 1 1685 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 1686 1 1686 2 1687 1 1687 2 1688 1 1688 2 1689 1 1689 2 1690 1 1690 2 1691
245. cuit zone 1 will work with 2 or 4 wire detectors It has an optional alarm verification Number of 2 wire circuits Type of circuit End of Line resistor Supervisory current Maximum current for alarm Maximum short circuit current Maximum line resistance Circuit voltage range Maximum detectors per zone Total detector standby current Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc 1 circuit Class B latching 2 21k ohms 5 mA 13 mA 25 mA 60 ohms 8 5 to 14 0 VDC 20 detectors 2 wire 2 5 mA DS7080i Reference Guide 1 12 Standbv Current Load e Battery AH 20 Storage 0 375 AH s Alarm e The following table is the derated battery divided by hours minus the control standby 115 mA Rechargeable Derated Max Standby Max Standby Max Standby Max Standby Max Standby Battery Size for 4 hours for 8 hours for 24 hours for 48 hours for 60 hours 21 AH requires three 7 AH batteries in parallel 2 0 Enclosure Installation The DS7080i control communicator and the enclosure are shipped together The control however still needs to be installed into the enclosure Hardware for mounting the enclosure to a wall and the control to the enclosure is located in its own hardware pack 2 1 Install the Enclosure e Use the enclosure as a template and mark the top mounting holes on the mounting surface Pre start the mounting screws for these two holes Slide the en closure onto these mounting screws so th
246. d 4 wire cable One DS7430 Mux Module is required in the system to use the DS7432 Remote Module e Current Draw 10 mA Standby 10 mA Alarm e Multiplex bus wiring requirements 22 AWG 0 8 mm up to 2000 ft 600m per system 18 AWG 1 0 mm up to 5000 ft 1500m per system 2 0 Mounting Wiring e P23 of the DS7432 is for European application only Do not put a jumper here e P2 of the DS7432 allows the tamper switch to be bypassed with a jumper when testing or servicing NOTE Remove jumper P2 when testing or servicing is completed Use the mounting holes upper left and lower right corners to mount It can be mounted inside or outside of the control enclosure Route wiring as necessary from the DS7430 in the control enclosure and from the remote devices to the DS7432 Note Be sure all wiring is unpowered before routing If the wiring is to enter through the rear of the enclosure open the DS7432 s rear wire entrance OR if the wiring is to run along the surface of the enclosure open the DS7432 s surface wire entrance See Figure B Connect wiring as shown in figure D page 2 NOTE If using separate powered detectors the DS7432 can be powered from the control panel Aux power terminals 7 and 8 The detector power can be connected to the DS7432 see figure E This eliminates the need for home run power wiring from each detector to the control when the DS7432 is mounted outside of the enclosure Detection S
247. d Address 40 and then 24 hours thereafter 41 Phone 1 to be programmed 1 14 Read Alarm History This feature will display which zones were in alarm during the last armed period The alarm memory will remain from one armed cycle to the next if no new alarms occur Alarm memory will clear when entering programmers mode TYPE OF TEST COMMAND WHAT WILL HAPPEN WHAT TO DO SEQUENCE Read Alarm Commercial Mode DS7447 The last alarm to take Historv PIN 8 9 place will be displayed To exit from the Alarm History Mode press the Residential Mode key 8 9 DS7443 DS7445 The zone LEDs will flash for any zones that have alarmed To exit the Alarm History Mode press the key or wait 5 seconds and the keypad will exit automatically 1 15 Fire Reset Fire Trouble Fire Reset During a fire alarm exit the premises immediately When you have determined there is no fire you may silence the bells sirens before you can initiate the System Reset command PIN Off will silence the sounders This will allow a determination of which smoke detector has alarmed so the monitoring company may verify its operation A PIN followed by the System Reset key will reset any smoke detectors after a fire alarm has occurred See Section 8 8 Address 08 Outputs The System Reset command will perform a fire reset will perform a battery test and will clear all system troubles Fire Trouble A Fire Trouble display sign
248. d Sounder Output 10 Kevswitch Input 10 L Language Kevpad 11 Language Programming 31 Latch ON Anv Burglar Alarm 10 Level 6 Arming 11 Local Burglarv Alarm 49 Local Program Successful 13 Copvright O 1995 97 Detection Svstems Inc Manual Comm Test 13 Master Code Programming 43 Master PIN 17 Maximum Securitv Arming 11 N NFPA Standard 15 Normal Arming 11 0 ON during Entry Pre Alert 10 On for 8 seconds 10 ON when System is Armed 10 Open 13 Open and Close Reports 11 Operating Temperature 4 Output Programming 24 25 P Pager Format 55 Panic Key 11 31 Panic Keypad 12 Partial Close 13 Perimeter Arming 11 Perimeter Instant 9 Perimeter Instant Arming 11 Personal Identification Numbers 17 Phone Answering Programming 12 34 Phone Number General Control Programming 33 Phone Number Programming 47 PIN 17 PIN Master 17 PIN Removing a 17 Police Station Connection 50 power 4 Program Address 21 Programmable SIA Report 37 Programmer s Code Programming 43 Programming Addresses List 60 Pulse Dial 12 Pulsing Fire Zone 11 R Recent Closing 13 Remote Program Dial out 18 Remote Program Successful 13 Remote Programmer Call out Programming 46 Remote Programmer Callback 12 Removing a PIN 17 Report Control Programming 32 33 Report Programing Addresses 37 Report Programming 38 39 40 41 Restoral Keypad Fire 12 Restore when Sounders Silence 11 Restore when System is Disarmed 11 Restore when
249. d key Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode 14 34 1 Phone Number 1 Programming Program Address 4028 4 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 JUUUUUULLLULUOUUL 34 2 Phone Number 2 Programming Program Address 4038 5 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 JULLLIDLULLULIIDOLLIU 6 3 Remote Programmer Programming Program Address 4048 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 JUUUULLLLUUOUUL Notes To dial the character enter 1 The character is sent as 1 1 when pulse dialing To dial the character enter 2 The character is only valid when tone dialing To input a three second delay enter 3 To wait for the dial tone enter 4 in the first digit To disable a Phone Number enter 5 in the first digit 1 5 are Hex values They will display as B E at the keypads Recommendation The phone line that the control panel is connected to should not have a Call Waiting feature If it must have call waiting program the code to disable call waiting and add a three second delay before the phone number This will prevent incoming calls from interrupting a communication For example call waiting can be disabled in many areas by dialing 70 before the phone number for tone dial and 1170 for pulse dial DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 13 0 Installation Guide for U L Listed Svstems 1
250. d the even numbered zone is programmed for the output function 7 4 Output Programming s Latch on Any Zone Alarm This is an output programmed to ac tivate upon any zone alarm including invisible zones and will latch until the system has been disarmed If this output responds to a fire zone it will remain latched until the fire reset command is performed DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide ON during Entry Pre Alert This is an output programmed to activate when an entry exit zone is violated while the system is armed It will remain activated until the system is disarmed or until the entry delay time has expired e ON for 10 seconds after PIN System Reset is entered This is an output programmed to activate for 10 seconds after the fire reset command is entered at the keypad or if a Fire Zone with Verification activates This output is intended to be used to power 4 wire smoke de tectors or any other device that requires a power interruption to reset an alarm condition Note When Programmable Output 2 is programmed this way it will normally supply auxiliary power and will turn OFF for 10 seconds when the fire reset command is entered ON when System is Armed This is an output programmed to activate when the system is armed It will remain activated until the system is disarmed Ground Start This is an output programmed to activate for 3 seconds when the phone line is seized It is intended for use with
251. data address 0183 Maximum Security Arming PIN No Entry On If pro grammed arms the entire system and does not allow an entry delay for entry exit zones Closing Ring Back If programmed the keypad sounders and Bell will activate for 2 seconds after the system is armed and the closing report is successfully sent This requires Closing Ring Back and Closing Report to be programmed If a closing report is not programmed the control will test for a dial tone when the system is armed If the test passes the sys Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc tem will arm normally If the test fails the system will arm but will indicate a trouble condition The DS7447 keypad will display Communication Err after 8 7 is entered This can also be used to perform a bell test on arming Siren on Comm Fail for Silent Zone If programmed a silent zone will sound the alarm outputs if the zone is in an alarm condi tion and the system fails to communicate with the central station Restore when Sounders Silence If programmed a zone sends a restoral report and is ready to activate again only after the bur glary bell cut off time expires or the bells are silenced The zone can alarm multiple times per armed period Restore when Zone Restores If programmed a zone sends a restoral report and is ready to activate again as soon as it physi cally restores This zone can alarm multiple times per armed
252. ddress 1522 TAddrace JEDA Address 1524 1 2 Default 00 ei Default 00 DI 12 36 Test Report and Remote Programmer Call Out Programming Program Address 1525 This section allows vou to define the Dav and Frequencv Example for the Communicator Test Report and the Remote Pro To send Test Reports on Sundays and to call the grammer Call Out Remote Programmer on Saturdavs Data Digit 1 1 Data Digit 2 7 igi If this address is not programmed the Communicator aaam Data Digit Test Report will not be sent and the control will not call Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 i 6 0 1 2 Enter the Program Address 1 5 2 5 the Remote Programmer Enter Data Digit 1 1 Enter Data Digit 2 7 Enter the pound key Program the next Address Program a different Select Option DD Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode Do not send a Test Report 0 j Send a Test Report on Sunday _ 1 f l Send a Test Report on Monday 12 f Select Option pp Send a Test Report on Tuesday 18 f 0 Send a Test Report on Wednesday 4 f Send a Test Report on Thursday 15 Call the Remote Programmer on Monday 12 Send a Test Report on Friday 6 Call the Remote Programmer on Tuesday 131 Send a Test Report every day _ 8 Gall the Remote Programmer on Thursday 15 f Send a Test Report every 8 days 9 Call the Remote Programmer on Friday l Call the Remote Programmer on Saturday 7 f Senda Test Report every hour __
253. ddress 23 must be programmed for not less than 15 minutes e Entry Exit Delay Times Program Addresses 23 must be programmed for not longer than 60 seconds General Control Programming e Must be programmed for Swinger Shunts disabled Closing Ringback disabled and Force Arming disabled Pro gram Address 10 Zone Programming The Burglar alarm output signal Address 04 whether pulsed or steady must be different from the Fire alarm signal Alarm Output Programming Program Address 08 must be programmed as X X 8 Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 Reference Guide Police Station Connection The control must be installed in accordance with U L Standards UL611 and UL681 for all grades of service Grades AA and A Installations using the Applied Spectrum PAL200 and the DACT Required Accessories The control must be mounted in the Detection Systems model AE7060CC enclosure with a cover actuated tamper switch installed The Applied Spectrum PAL200 The Applied Spectrum PAL200 must be installed in the same room as the control and the wiring from the Applied Spectrum PAL200 to the control must be in conduit The Applied Spectrum PAL200 inputs should be connected to the alarm outputs the active alarm sounder output may be used Report Programming Programming shall be enabled to allow all alarm signals to be transmitted via the DACT and PAL200 e Burglar Zone Reports are not required since the a
254. ddresses 167 and 168 must be programmed for not less than 4 minutes e Entry Delay Timer Program Addresses 164 and 165 must be programmed for not longer than 60 seconds e Exit Delay Timer Program Address 166 must be programmed for not longer than 45 seconds C General Control Programming e Program Address 010 Data Digit 2 must be programmed for no swinger shunts enter 0 1 or 2 e Program Address 169 must be programmed as Data Digit 2 0 Cross zoning time programming Program Address 283 must be set to 00 e Program Address 171 must be programmed for the Commercial mode D Alarm Output Programming e Program Address 008 must be programmed as Data Digit 1 0 11 3 3 Local Burglary Alarm The control must be installed in accordance with U L Standards UL681 and UL609 for all grades of service A Grade A Installations using Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter with local bell Required Accessories e The control must be a Detection Systems model DS7080iCC with a cover actuated tamper switch installed e The Ademco Model AB 12 bell nousing see Section 11 4 DS7080i Reference Guide Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc Report Programming Burglar Zone Reports must be programmed for those zones used Low Battery Report Program Address 215 must be programmed AC Failure Report Program Address 217 must be programmed Open Report Program Address 210 must be programmed Close Report Program Address 211
255. de Wire type AWG are recommended on any 1000 foot 305 m run NOTE Shared cable is not recommended for keypad multiplex options bus telephone or siren wiring 1 7 Communicator Will report to two phone numbers with full single double and back up reporting Communicates in SIA 110 or 300 baud 3 1 3 1 Ext 3 1 with Parity 3 1 Ext with Parity 4 1 4 2 BFSK Contact ID and Pager formats FCC Registration Number is ESVUSA 75333 AL E The ringer equivalence is 0 1B Commercial Fire CSFM Listing Number is 7165 1062 111 Residential Fire CSFM Listing Number is 7167 1062 111 1 8 Partitions The system has the capacity for 8 independant partitions 1 9 Users The DS7400Xi system allows up to 90 individual users Each user will have his own PIN number the 4 digit code entered at the key pads and his own authority level to determine which functions he may perform 1 10 Lightning Protection MOVs and spark gaps provide protection from lightning surges and static discharges 1 11 Burglar Fire Zone Inputs e Number of circuits 8 Circuits on board e End of line resistor 2 2 KQ P N 25944 provided e Loop resistance tolerance 60 ohms 1 12 Fire Signal Initiating Circuit 2 wire mode Fire circuit will work with 2 or 4 wire detectors and has optional alarm verification s Number of circuits e Type of circuit e End of line resistor e Supervisory current e Maximum short circuit current e Maximum line resista
256. di ately go to the pre selected location to be accounted for Provide a barricade between family members and fire smoke and toxic gases e g close all bedroom doors before retiring Children should be instructed on opening their bedroom windows and exiting safely from the building If exiting is not possible they should be taught to stay at the open window and shout for help until it arrives In the event of a fire alarm after retiring wake the children by shouting to them from behind your closed door Tell them to keep their bedroom doors closed If the top of your bedroom door is uncomfortably hot do not open it There is most likely fire intolerable heat or smoke on the other side Shout to all family members to keep their bedroom doors closed and to exit the building via alternate routes If the top of the door is not uncomfortably hot brace the bottom of the door with your foot and the top with one hand then open the door about one inch Be prepared to slam the door shut if there is any pressure against the door or if any hot air rushes in If there is no evidence of excessive heat or pressure leave the room and close the door behind you Shout appropriate instructions to all family members and immediately leave the building via the pre planned routes If heavy smoke is present drop to your hands and knees or crawl to remain below the smoke level Installation Considerations Proper location of detection devices is one of the most
257. dress Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode Phone 1 Account Code Address 233 Phone 2 Account Code Address 235 Account Code programming defines the number transmit ted to the central station that identifies this panel Addresses 233 and 235 Data Digits AEG bir The Default for both Account Codes 0000 Note Account Codes are programmed from left to right If programming a 3 digit Account Code the fourth digit of this address must be 0 For example If the Account Code is 121 program 1210 in the programming address 10 19 Phone Number Format Programming Program Addresses 237 and 238 Example To program Phone Number 1 to receive reports via Contact ID sent at 10 Pulses per Second and at 1800 Hz Data and 2300 Hz Acknowledge Data Digit 1 9 Data Digit 2 1 Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Program Address 2 3 7 Enter Data Digit 1 9 Enter Data Digit 2 1 Enter the Pound button Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode Phone Number Format programming defines the type of format being used for each phone number Note Phone Number 1 Format Address 237 Phone Number 2 Format Address 238 o High Speed 4 9 4 checksum Pager see Section 12 4 Data Digit FILI Select Option DD Phone Number Disabled 0 3 1 no Extended Reporting 3 1E Extended Reporting
258. ds have a minimum authority level that a user must meet just to view that field They also have a minimum authority level that each user must meet in order to edit that field Most fields are preset at authority level 5 for viewing and authority level 10 for editing Authority level 15 should be reserved for the one or two individuals that are trusted with all account information Authority level 15 can change the authority levels of other operators NOTE In order to edit information concerning report codes control panel users and codes report phone numbers and remote communication parameters etc you must have an authority level of 15 To change the authority levels for any field or menu in WDSRP highlight the item and press the F5 key The Set Authority Levels window for that particular item will appear You must have at least a level 15 authority to use the F5 command After changing select OK Set Authority Levels Minimum authority level that may view this item Minimum authority level that may select or change this item 5 10 Selected item s display text Locate a specific record in the data base Also changes the database key To change the Menu Item Authority Levels select highlight the menu item and press the F5 key After changing select OK 2 4 The HELP File WDSRP has an extensive and easily accessible HELP file The HELP file is a user s manu
259. e ARDIS Interface Module Keypads 11 15 must be connected to L 1 g ri mg the Options Bus Keypads 1 10 must be connected to the Keypad Bus g Bn a Pe We na HO BB TEE n DS7400XI oreooroocoo e Q a IN DS7432 8 Input TAL FE Remote Modules A 47KQ Dry contact inputs DS7488 Octal Line Bell Supervision Relay Board Module oO lt lt D DS7450 52 Series Contacts DS7460 Input Modules and Note Ensure at least 1 4 separation between DS7465 Input Output Modules battery wires and all other cabling DS7447 and DS7445 Keypads e Up to 15 keypads may be used Keypads 1 10 connect to the Keypad Bus and keypads 11 15 connect to the Option Bus One keypad must be designated as keypad 1 and connected to the Keypad Bus See the DS7447 and DS7445 Installation Instructions for further details e ADS7420i Dual Phone Line Bell Supervision Module may be connected to the control panel a
260. e Install to path The setup program will handle all necessary file conversions 1 3 3 WDSRP Setup Names The WDSRP Setup Names window will appear after choosing Continue Enter your name and company name Copyright 1994 96 Detection Systems Inc a WDSHAP Setup Names Enter your full name and the name of your company The names you type will be used by the Setup program for installation of the product You may use as many as 52 characters for each name Name Thomas J Brown Company Detection Systems NOTE These names will appear on all copies of WDSRP installed from this diskette This window will appear during the initial installation only 1 3 4 WDSRP Setup Time Zone Phone Lines The WDSRP Setup Time Zone window will appear after choosing Continue Enter the number of hours away from UTC Greenwich England you are located and if daylight savings is observed Enter a positive number if you are West of UTC e g United States and a negative number if vou are Eastof UTC For example the East Coast of the United States Eastern Time Zone is located 5 hours from UTC and the West Coast is located 8 hours from UTC Vou will also be prompted to enter the number of phone lines that will be connected to WDSRP via modems If you will be using only one line with one modem no changes are necessary WDSRP Setup Time Zone Enter the number of hours away from UTC Grenwich England you are located
261. e 19 On Sum Street Shatin N T Hong Kong 852 2635 2815 Fax 852 2648 7986 Detection Systems Int l Inc 19 Rue du 19 Mars 78130 Les Mureaux France Phone Fax 33 1 34 74 9576 Detection Systems Inc 130 Perinton Parkway Fairport New York USA 14450 9199 716 223 4060 800 289 0096 Fax 716 223 9180 Copyright 1994 96 Detection Systems Inc DS7445 47 Installation Instructions P N22235F Access Relav Option DS7400Xi Rev 3 Oniv K938 Relay Note The K938 Access Relay does not fit inside the keypad case It is recommended that a non metallic electrical box be mounted behind Violet White the keypad for the relay ireto Run the two wires from the K938 en ninast through the rear cover wiring opening pamer on the keypad Wire as shown idii Normally Open Contacts Black Wire to Terminal Re Rear View of PCB Note The Access Relay Option pin on the keypad can current sink 12 volts at 6 mA for other types of relays Volume Control The keypad sounder volume can be adjusted using the 1 and 4 keys along with the key e Hold the key while pressing the 1 key to increase the volume Hold the key while pressing the 4 key to decrease the volume Note This only affects the keypad sounder It will NOT affect the alarm sounders bells LCD Backlight Control DS7447 only Hold the key while pressing the 3 key to increase the brightness H
262. e Zone 1 as a Single Zone Input PIR and follows Input single or multiple zone input ora DS7465 Zone Function 1 e Zone Function or Output function 1 15 Data Digit 1 0 Data Digit 2 1 The DS7465 s relay is the only device that will follow the output functions Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 its input loop will follow a zone function All single and multiple zone inputs Ener We Program coe 0 0 1 8 will follow a zone function nter Data Digi g Enter Data Digit 2 1 See section 6 2 and 7 3 for further details Enter the pound key are Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Data Digit Programmer s Mode Select Option Single Zone Input zones 1 8 on the control multiplex contacts A sensors or a DS7457 Select Option TIRET Disabled rH on a DS7492 DS74 oron ore ne H Follow Zone or Output Function 2 taa DS7465 Connections Follow Z Functi 3 lr eos fens l Follow Zone or Output Function 5 5 tai Zone Number Address Default ee Ea ae Follow Zone or Output Function 6 FI 1 0018 Follow Zone or Output Function 7 Big 2 0019 Follow Zone or Output Function 8 cig 0020 Follow Zone or Output Function 9 o 0021 Follow Zone or Output Function 10 0022 Function 11 0023 Function 12 0024 Function 13 Follow Zone or Output Follow Zone or Output Follow Zone or Output Pane 45 Follow Zone or Output Function 14 Ea Follo
263. e 13 amp 14 Part Assign 1457 Octal Module 1 Relay 2 0298 Zone Func 9 Trouble Rpt 1255 Zone 15 amp 16 Part Assign 1458 Octal Module 1 Relay 3 0299 Zone Func 10 Trouble Rpt 1256 Zone 17 amp 18 Part Assign 1459 Octal Module 1 Relay 4 0300 Zone Func 11 Trouble Rpt 1257 Zone 19 amp 20 Part Assign 1460 Octal Module 1 Relay 5 0301 Zone Func 12 Trouble Rpt 1258 Zone 21 8 22 Part Assign 1461 Octal Module 1 Relay 6 0302 Zone Func 13 Trouble Rpt 1259 Zone 23 amp 24 Part Assign 1462 Octal Module 1 Relay 7 0303 Zone Func 14 Trouble Rpt 1260 Zone 25 amp 26 Part Assign 1463 Octal Module 1 Relay 8 0304 Zone Func 15 Trouble Rpt 1464 Octal Module 2 Relay 9 0320 Open Report 1465 Octal Module 2 Relay 10 DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc Address 1466 1467 1468 1469 1470 1471 1472 1475 1478 1481 1484 1487 1490 1493 1496 1499 1502 1505 1508 1511 1514 1520 1521 1523 1525 1526 1542 1558 1574 1590 1606 1622 1638 1654 1670 1686 1702 1718 1734 1750 1766 1782 1798 1814 1830 1846 1862 1878 1894 1910 1926 1942 1958 1974 1990 2006 2022 2038 2054 Description Octal Module 2 Relay 11 Octal Module 2 Relay 12 Octal Module 2 Relay 13 Octal Module 2 Relay 14 Octal Module 2 Relay 15 Octal Module 2 Relay 16 Output Function 1 Output Function 2 Output Function 3 Output Function 4 Output Func
264. e Alarm Zone 0 Restoral and Zone Trouble Reports to Phone Nor i Repor to Phone Number tT JA pataigiris A Databigiz Data Dit 1 0 Data Det 2 1 Cees Ile aa Data Digit 1 1 Data Digit 2 2 Close Reports Zone Restoral Enter the Programmer s Mode Alternate between both Phone Numbers Reports 9 8 7 6 0 eports Enter the Program Address 0 1 8 9 Enter Data Digit 1 1 Enter Data Digit 2 2 Enter the pound key Program the next Address Program a differ ent Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode 12 18 Report Control Programming Program Address 0190 This section allows you to decide which phone number will send reports other than open close reports and zone reports Example To program all other Reports to Phone Num Data Digit ber 2 A Select Option 1 2 Data Digit 1 2 Data Digit 2 0 l Alternate between both Phone Numbers Ri Enter the Programmer s Mode o 9 8 7 61 1 0 Report to Phone Number 1 mg Note Data Digit Enter the Program Address 0 1 9 0 Report to Phone Number 2 1 does not Tana a a include open and eko Report to Phone Number 1 and 2 close reports or MM pala Dich 2 ata Digi zone reports see Program the next Address Program a differ sections 12 16 ent Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode and 12 17 must be 0 DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 12 19 Timer Programming Pr
265. e Arming Zone Bypass Quick Arm PIN On PIN No Entry Perimeter Only PIN Perimeter Only PIN No Entry On PIN Arming Sequence Bypass PIN Bypass followed by the Zone number On Turning Off disarming your System PIN Off Commands for other System Features Chime Mode Zone Test Read Alarm History Battery Test Communicator Test Fire Reset Fire Trouble Remote Program Dial Out Remote Program Answer Local Battery Sounder Test Error Display Error Display Reset Clear Zone Bypass Guest Code Enable PIN 7 PIN 8 1 PIN 8 9 PIN System Reset PIN 8 2 PIN System Reset PIN Off to silence PIN System Reset to clear PIN 8 3 PIN 8 6 PIN 8 5 PIN 8 7 PIN System Reset PIN Bypass to clear PIN 8 4 NOTE Examples are shown in Commercial Mode but are valid for any mode Detection Systems PTY Ltd Unit 21 45 Gilby Road Mount Waverley Victoria 3149 Australia 61 3 9558 8088 Fax 61 3 9558 8089 Detection Systems PTY Ltd Unit 2 The Riverside Centre 148 James Ruse Drive Parramatta NSW 2150 Australia 61 2 891 4944 Fax 61 2 891 5844 Detection Systems Inc 130 Perinton Parkway Fairport New York USA 14450 9199 716 223 4060 800 289 0096 Fax 716 223 9180 Detection Systems Ltd 19 Rue du 19 Mars 78130 Les Mureaux France Phone Fax 33 1 3
266. e Func 8 Alarm Report 0339 System Test Report 1281 Zone 67 amp 68 Part Assign 0266 Zone Func 9 Alarm Report 0340 System Test Restoral Report 1282 Zone 69 amp 70 Part Assign 0267 Zone Func 10 Alarm Report 0494 Phone ARDIS Routing Cntrl 1283 Zone 71 amp 72 Part Assign 0268 Zone Func 11 Alarm Report 0495 Phone ARDIS Routing Cntrl 1284 Zone 73 amp 74 Part Assign 0269 Zone Func 12 Alarm Report 0496 Account Code 1285 Zone 75 8 76 Part Assign 0270 Zone Func 13 Alarm Report 0498 Account Code 1286 Zone 77 amp 78 Part Assign 0271 Zone Func 14 Alarm Report 0500 Account Code 1287 Zone 79 amp 80 Part Assign 0272 Zone Func 15 Alarm Report 0502 Account Code 1288 Zone 81 amp 82 Part Assign 0273 Keypad Emergency Report 0504 Account Code 1289 Zone 83 amp 84 Part Assign 0274 Keypad Panic Report 0506 Account Code 1290 Zone 85 8 86 Part Assign 0275 Zone Func 1 Restoral Rpt 0508 Account Code 1291 Zone 87 amp 88 Part Assign 0276 Zone Func 2 Restoral Rpt 0510 Account Code 1292 Zone 89 amp 90 Part Assign 0277 Zone Func 3 Restoral Rpt 0512 Account Code 1293 Zone 91 amp 92 Part Assign 0278 Zone Func 4 Restoral Rpt 0514 Account Code 1294 Zone 93 amp 94 Part Assign 0279 Zone Func 5 Restoral Rpt 0516 Account Code 1295 Zone 95 amp 96 Part Assign 0280 Zone Func 6 Restoral Rpt 0518 Account Code 1296 Zone 97 amp 98 Part Assign 0281 Zone Func 7 Restoral Rpt 0520 Account Code 1297 Zone 99 amp 100 Part Assign
267. e Guide open Interior Instant 22 Steady alarm output alarm on short and open 24 Hour 23 Steady alarm output alarm on short and open Entry Exit delay 1 Keyswitch on off See Note Fire Zone with verification Fire Zone w out verification Note If Digit 2 is 9 or 0 Keyswitch use this chart for Digit 1 Select Option Keyswitch No Force Arming lol Kevswitch Can Force Arm Copvright O 1995 97 Detection Svstems Inc 10 2 Output Programming Programming Address 008 Example Output programming defines the event and tvpe of alarm fire or burglar To program the Alarm Output as a Burglar Zone that will trigger each of the three phvsical outputs on the control panel And Fite Zone delayed by 20 S 902 MES See Section 3 0 for the location of the phvsical outputs on the control panel Data Digit 1 1 Data Digit 2 5 See Glossary Section 6 2 for further details Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Program Address 0 0 8 Enter Data Digit 1 1 Enter Data Digit 2 5 Enter the Pound button Address Program the next Address Program a different 008 Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode Address Default veh Data Digit Alarm Output 008 1 1 2 Programmed Output 1 008 2 Select Option DD Laten ON tor ary burglar aan 0 C Burglar Zone delayed by 20 sec 7 Fire Zone 8 Fre Zone delayedby 20s fol ZEEE po Latch ON for any burglar alarm ER O
268. e line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Caution Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate Terminal Requirements The Load Number LN assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop which is used by the device to prevent overloading The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100 The Load Number of the DS7420i is 2 RFI Requirements This Class A digital apparatus meets all re
269. e power line frequency 60 Hz required for U L Certificated installation Keypad Mode Commercial Mode requires a PIN number for all functions Residential Mode only requires a PIN number for disarming and silencing alarms Quick Arm If enabled a PIN is not needed to arm Note Used only in conjunction with commercial mode Easy Exit If the system is armed and there have been no zones violated then you can reenter a Quick Arm Command without first disarming the system This allows you to change the arming level or to restart the exit delay so you can exit through an entry exit zone Force Arming If enabled the system can be armed when zones are violated or if an AC power falure has occurred by pressing the Bypass Key after an arming command If bypassing is not allowed a three beep error tone will sound and the panel will return to standby mode Auto Bypass If enabled the system will automatically bypass faulted zones when an arming command is used If bypassing is not allowed on the open zone a three beep error tone will sound and the panel will return to standby mode Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 Reference Guide 8 11 Address 11 Keypad Assignment The keypad type LED or Alpha or no keypad must be programmed No Keypad or Keypad Disabled LED Keypad DEFAULT Alpha Keypad KEYPAD 1 KEYPAD 2 KEYPAD 3 KEYPAD 4 8 12 Address 12 thru 18 Alpha Label Address 12 Private Label The private la
270. e programmed programmable before it fails this test 8 13 4 Event History Readback The History Buffer stores the last 400 events in memory the last 100 in non volitile memory will be kept even if total power loss The DS7447 can display all of these events The DS7445 will only display those zones that have alarmed since the last Event History Read back Type of Test Command What will Happen What to Do Sequence DS7447 The last event to take place will be displayed DS7447 Scroll through the Event History DS7445 The zone LEDs will flash for any Svante by Meng the P16 ane keys See below Readback PIN 8 9 zones that have alarmed since the last Event key History Readback done on a DS7445 keypad To exit from the Event History in that partition Mode press the key For System Fault displays see section 9 20 Note If this is performed from a Master Keypad it must be in Single Partition Mode DS7447 Only Scrolling through the History Events To begin scrolling back through the events press the key The key will scroll you back through the history line by line The 9 key will scroll you back in reverse chronological order by event The 6 key will scroll you back up through the events toward the most recent by event Each event consists of two or three lines or display screens The first line screen will be the event title and user The second line screen will be the date of the event or
271. e sleeping area and on each additional story of the dwelling For added early warning protection it is recommended that detectors be installed in all separated areas including the base ment bedrooms dining room utility room furnace room and hallways Having and Practicing an Escape Plan A fire warning may be wasted unless the family has planned in advance for a rapid and safe exit from the building e Draw a floor plan of the entire house showing two exits from each bedroom and two from the house Since stairwells and hallways may be blocked during a fire the plan should provide exits from bedroom windows Make copies of the plan and practice it with all family members Prearrange a meeting place outside and away from the residence Once out of the building all occupants should immedi ately go to the pre selected location to be accounted for Provide a barricade between family members and fire smoke and toxic gases e g close all bedroom doors before retiring Children should be instructed on opening their bedroom windows and exiting safely from the building If exiting is not possible they should be taught to stay at the open window and shout for help until it arrives In the event of a fire alarm after retiring wake the children by shouting to them from behind your closed door Tell them to keep their bedroom doors closed If the top of your bedroom door is uncomfortably hot do not open it There is most likely fire intolerable
272. e terminated If there is a sudden termination of communications while up loading downloading to the panel investigate for noisy phone lines 6 New Account is generated when the panel calls in WDSRP will create a new account if the panel calling in does not match any existing account Phone number 1 and Re porting ID 1 must match The panel will not create a new account if there is an agency or passcode in the panel calling in Copyright 1994 96 Detection Systems Inc History Commands 16 History Path 27 Abort 13 Account 9 Account ID 12 Add Users Answer ring count 27 K Answering Machine 13 Ardis 19 Key Select 20 Audit File 27 Keypad 17 Authority Levels 8 Keypad Information 21 Auto call all non history panels 26 Auto call all panels 26 L Auto Service 12 AUTOMATIC UPDATE 15 Locate Key 20 23 LOGOUT 26 B Import 23 Insert New Commands 16 9 Installing the Software 4 Backup 26 Backup restore Path 28 Mailing Labels 21 Master Password 7 c Merge 27 Mode 14 Clear all Auto Call 26 Modem 27 Clear all Auto Service 26 Clear all Status 26 e Commercial Fire 19 Communicate 10 12 Operating Guide 4 Cross Matrix Programming 21 Operating Mode 27 Options 15 D Output Assignments 17 Output Programming 21 Data Call 12 13 Database Path 27 P Default Password 6 Delete 20 23 PANEL TIME 15 Direct Connection 28 Partitions 17 DOSDSRP 5 Password Default 6 DOWNLOAD 15 Password Master 7 D
273. ecessary for communication Find Account Acct ID FaA00X1 V34 Template NONE Rept ID 1 4 fo ei Sort key 1 8 Sort key 2 Auto service NONE Auto call NONE 5 6 Name Thomas J Brown Reset Modem Pickup J Zip 14450 Voice Call l Data Call Created 11 17 Fri Aug 16 1996 Manual J Modified ey Cancel l Revision Modify oper 1 11 35 AM Fri Aug 16 1996 Address Detection Systems 130 Perinton Parkway City Fairport Contact T J Brown We 555 1212 Da 555 1212 Notes Sample layout Comm Image Status Call panel using the data phone number 7 Choose the Data Call command from the right hand column command buttons This command will dial the phone num ber to reach this account s control panel This number will call the control panel directly 8 If the control panel answers your call you will be on line with the control panel From here you may upload or download data as needed To end a call to a control panel 1 Choose the End Session command from the right hand col umn command buttons This command will end this commu nications session with the control panel It will bring you off line with the control panel It will call up a verification window asking you if you wish the connection to be dropped After this session is complete you will still be in the Find Account window wi
274. ect both relay commons to ground and connect the N O of each contact to terminal positions 24 and 25 one to terminal 24 one to 25 of the DS7060 Not intended for U L Listed systems Not for use with phone line monitors Ready to Arm System Status This is an output programmed to follow the Status light of the keypad It will activate when the system is ready to arm with no zones violated Follow Burg Alarm This is an output programmed to activate when a zone is in an alarm condition It will remain acti vated until the system is disarmed or the bell cutoff time expires This output is intended to activate bells and sirens This will not activate from Silent or Invisible zones Follow Fire Alarm This is an output programmed to activate when a zone is in an fire alarm condition It will remain activated until the system is disarmed or the bell cutoff time expires This output is intended to activate bells and sirens This will not activate from Silent or Invisible zones Follow Burg and Fire Alarm This programs an output to activate when any zone goes into alarm condition Follow Keypad Sounder This is an output programmed to follow the keypad sounder It activates during the entry pre alert It does not follow momentary keypad beeps such as keystrokes Duress This output activates when the duress code is used to disarm the system Trouble This output activates when a trouble condition is present Copyright 1996 Detection S
275. ection Systems Inc Reporting Extended Digit Digit 1 2 Zone 5 Alarm Restoral A Address 190 Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit 1 2 Zone 6 Alarm Restoral Address 191 Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit 1 2 LILI Zone 7 Alarm Restoral Address 192 Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit 1 2 Zone 8 Alarm Restoral Address 193 Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit 1 2 Zone 1 Trouble A Address 194 Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit 1 2 Zone 2 Trouble A Address 195 Default 00 DS7080i Reference Guide 10 17 Report Programming Continued Reporting Extended Reporting Extended Digit Digit Digit Digit 1 2 1 2 ll Zone 3 Trouble Zone 1 Trbl Restoral Address 196 Address 202 Default 00 Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit Reporting Extended Digit Digit Zone 4 Trouble Zone 2 Trbl Restoral Address 197 Address 203 pane OE Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit Reporting Extended 1 2 Digit Digit EJEA KEE 1 2 fone Trouble Zone 3 Trbl Restoral dress Address 204 petita Default 00 Reporting Extended Reporting Extended Digit Digit Digit Digit 1 Zone 6 Trouble Zone 4 Trbl Restoral Address 199 Address 205 Default 00 Default 00 Reporting Extended A Digit Digit Reporting Extended Digit Digit 1 2 ae Zone 5 Trbl Restoral Address 200 aaqaices ONG Reporting Extended Rep
276. ector is the Detection Systems Inc DS250 in an MB4W base A compatible Listed EOL relay is the Detection Systems Inc EOL200 All zones must be used with the EOL resistor P N 25899 provided Report Programming Fire Zone Report must be programmed Low Battery Report Program Address 0325 must be programmed AC Failure Report Program Address 0327 must be programmed Timer Programming Bell Cutoff Times Program Addresses 0195 and 0196 must be programmed for not less than 4 minutes Zone Function Programming For household fire installations only the output signal may be pulsed or steady For a combination system see the selection below on alarm output programming Alarm Output Programming Program Address 0146 must be programmed as Data Digit 1 6 Data Digit 2 3 General Control Programming Program Address 0185 must be programmed as Data Digit 1 0 Data Digit 2 0 13 3 2 Grade A Household Burglary Alarm using Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter with local bell The control must be installed in accordance with U L Standard UL1641 Required Accessories e Atleast one Wheelock 46T G10 12 bell or 34T 12 horn other Listed compatible devices with a voltage range of 10 2 to 14 0 V may be used is required for this application The standard DS7400 enclosure can be used Report Programming Burglar Zone Reports must be programmed for those zones used Low Battery Report Program Address 0325 must be programmed
277. ed against mechanical injury within 20 feet of the control equipment Note Keypad 15 is not available on Commercial Fire Systems as option bus address 15 is used for the DS7420i module On the 7400xi Rev 3 a maximum of 11 keypads may be used in Commercial Fire mode One on the option bus and up to 10 on the keypad bus Keypads 1 10 should be connected to the keypad bus and may be placed as needed within the wiring limits One of these keypads must be assigned as keypad address 1 Instruction Label and Slide An instruction label is provided and needs to be placed onto the pull out slide The slide may be installed to pull from the left or the right slide it into rear of base Be careful when installing the label place it as close to the pull tab as possible Label Label Slide in either side Label writing on other side In Case of Trouble See the following chart Keypad Notification Possible Causes DS7445 Continuous keypad sounder DS7447 Continuous keypad sounder PLUS System Fault display DS7445 Continuous keypad sounder DS7447 Continuous keypad sounder PLUS Not Programmed See Instal Guide display DS7445 3 beep error tone on all keypads DS7447 3 beep error tone on all keypads PLUS Entry Error Please try again display Copyright 1994 96 Detection Systems
278. ed by Off Detection Systems PTY Ltd Detection Systems PTY Ltd Detection Systems Int l Inc Detection Systems Ltd Unit 21 45 Gilby Road Unit 2 The Riverside Centre 19 Rue du 19 Mars 78130 Unit 13 18 17 F New Commerce Centre Mount Waverley Victoria 3149 Australia 148 James Ruse Drive Les Mureaux France 19 On Sum Street Shatin N T 61 3 9558 8088 Fax 61 3 9558 8089 Parramatta NSW 2150 Australia Phone Fax 33 1 34 74 9576 Hong Kong 61 2 891 4944 Fax 61 2 891 5844 852 2635 2815 Fax 852 2648 7986 Detection Systems Inc 130 Perinton Parkway Fairport New York USA 14450 9199 Copyright 1995 96 716 223 4060 800 289 0096 Fax 716 223 9180 DS7400Xi Installation Instructions P N 28995D 1 Table of Contents Kevpad Quick Reference Guide 1 0 Specifications OMNAORWD Enclosure Housing Temperature Power Outputs Zones Keypads Communicator Partitions Users Lightning Protection Burglar Fire Zone Inputs Fire Signal Initiating Circuit 2 wire mode Multiplex Bus Wiring Requirements Option Bus Wiring Requirements Max Load Currents Backup Battery Calculation Standby Current Load Options ee b h b b b b mk d k b k d l m h 2 0 Enclosure Installation 2 1 Install the Enclosure 2 2 Install the Control Communicator 3 0 Control Terminal Wiring 4 0 Hardware Layout Example 5 0 System Worksheet 6 0 System Overview 6 1 DS7400Xi Description 6 1 1 A C Failure Report Delay 6 1 2
279. ed by the Off key After problems have been remedied a PIN followed by System Reset should be entered to clear the Fire Trouble display 5 16 Remote Program Dial out and Answer Call for Remote Programming This command can only be entered when the control is disarmed Phone numbers 1 and 3 must be programmed along with account code 1 The panel will call phone number 3 and attempt to connect for downloading While programming is under way the Status Armed and Power LEDs will flash If the panel is already using the phone line it will sound the three beep error tone Answer for Remote Programming The panel will automatically pick up the phone line to answer a remote programming call While programming is underway the Status Armed and Power LEDs will flash If the panel is already using the phone line for a report communication it will sound the three beep error tone This command can only be entered when the control is disarmed This chart will help you to call or answer the Remote Programmer TYPE OF FUNCTION COMMAND SEQUENCE WHAT WILL HAPPEN Remote Program Commercial Mode The panel will call the remote Dial out PIN 8 3 programmer Residential Mode 8 3 Remote Program Commercial Mode The panel will answer a call Answer PIN 8 6 from the remote programmer Residential Mode 8 6 Phone numbers 1 and 3 must be programmed Phone 1 Account Code must be programmed 5 17 Error Disp
280. ed or disarmed This chart will guide you through the steps necessary to change a PIN It is recommended that this procedure be performed at a DS7447 keypad No visual cues will be given from a DS7445 keypad Steps to Change a PIN Command Sequence If Accepted the Display Reads Enter the Master Code Pro 0 User Change gramming Mode a Code 0 display will scroll to this 2 Entera0 0 through 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 and or 8 then A 4 Enter the Authority Level the 4 Enter the Authority Level Level 5 Enter the Area s partition s this user has access to 6 Enter the PIN Any 4 digits Do not press Enter User No 001 0XX Enter Authority Level Level 0 6 Enter Area s or for all Enter Next Area End with or Enter PIN Enter PIN Again End with A long beep will sound to signify acceptance of the new PIN 7 Enter the PIN again followed by PIN same 4 digits as above the key then DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 8 2 Arming Disarming Commands For commands to Arm Disarm Bypass or set chime mode see the front cover of this Reference Guide or consult the DS7400Xi Ver 3 Users Guide 8 3 Changing the Date This chart explains the procedure for changing the date at the keypad It is recommended that this procedure be
281. een Cancel will return you to the EDIT ACCOUNTS screen 4 3 11 Delete Choose the Delete command from the right hand column command buttons in the Edit Account Screen This command is used to delete this Account permanently from record Do you want to delete this record CAUTION data will be permanently lost The data can t be recovered YES will delete this record NO keeps the record A confirmation window will appear asking if you really wish to delete this Account Choose YES to permanently delete this Account and all associated history events or NO to keep this Account on record 4 3 12 Locate Key Choose the Locate Key command from the right hand column com mand buttons This command is used to find a specific Account and have it displayed The Locate Account window will appear with the cursor in the blank Account ID field Fill in the Account ID field if known and choose O K The Account with that Account ID will now be displayed Copyright 1994 96 Detection Systems Inc Locate Account Account ID Template Report ID 1 Sort key 1 Sort key 2 Name Address City Voice Status sl Data Cancel Enter up to characters as the Account s ID number If the Account ID is not known one of the following information fields may be filled in to locate a specific Account
282. eiving party When an acknowledge is provided the panel will start sending the next report or hang up if no reports remain To provide an acknowledge press the 1 key of the telephone keypad during the 3 second delay of the report transmission This Acknowledge Feature is an enhancement that will allow the panel to send all reports in one call It is recommended that the Program Address selections for this format be the same as those for the PAGER format Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 Reference Guide Pager Format The Pager format allows the control panel to dial a digital pager and leave a numeric message which includes an account ID and report tvpe The following are recommended programming values when using the Pager format NOTE The Pager format is an open loop format which has no acknowledge tone There is no indication at the control panel that the signal has been received Therefore the Pager format is not recommended as the primarv communication method REPORTS WITH RESTORALS REPORT RESTORAL TROUBLE BYPASS BYPASS RESTORAL LOW BATTERY AC FAIL SYSTEM TROUBLE SYSTEM TEST KEYPAD FIRE FUSE FAULT Teepe Tee re Tee fe Tee pre REPORTS WITHOUT RESTORALS REPORT REPORT REPORT SUCCESSFUL UNSUCCESSFUL PARTIAL CLOSE Fs FIRST OPEN AFTER ALARM AUTOMATIC COMM TEST MANUAL COMM TEST DUREss EXIT ERROR RECENT CLOSING DS7060 Reference Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc 4 2 F
283. eld in the Locate Template screen and select O K The Template with that Template ID will be displayed To be sure of calling up a single specific Template fill in both the Equip ment Type and Template ID fields In order for the program to accept a Template ID field entry you must also enter the Equipment Type field Reports not implemented Choose the Reports command from the right hand column command buttons This command is used to print information on a single Tem plate or a group of Templates Export Export Template Destination ET Cancel Enter the destination file name Choosing the Export command from the right hand column of com mand buttons will allow you to export a template to another drive or directory Import Import Template x Source fo Cancel Enter the source file name Choosing the import command will allow you to import a template from another drive or directory Close Choose the Close command from the right hand column command buttons This command will return you to the WDSRP Log in window 4 5 Users To access Users users of this WDSRP program choose Users from the WDSRP Main window The Find User window will appear It is here where you keep track of the various Users of this WDSRP program Copyright 1994 96 Detection Systems Inc Find User Password Insert new Authority level 15 Operator ID Name Dennis
284. em failure Channel 3 of the System Reports System failure Channel 3 of the System Reports System test end report 55555553 EA Walk Test Channel 8 of the Svstem Reports DS7080i Reference Guide Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc 14 0 Programming Addresses fi 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 028 044 060 076 092 108 124 140 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 Description Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 Zone 7 Zone 8 Output Output General Control Keypad Assignment Alpha for Private Label Alpha for Zone 1 Alpha for Zone 2 Alpha for Zone 3 Alpha for Zone 4 Alpha for Zone 5 Alpha for Zone 6 Alpha for Zone 7 Alpha for Zone 8 Emergency Key Panic Key and Keypad Language Custom Arming Report Control Report Control Report Control Phone Number General Control Phone Answering Entry Delay Time 1 Entry Delay Time 2 Exit Delay Time Fire Bell Cutoff Burglary Bell Cutoff Arming Warning Control and Force Arming Bypassing Allowed Keypad Control and Trouble Zone Mode Keypad Fire Alarm Report Keypad Fire Restoral Report Zone 1 Alarm Report Zone 2 Alarm Report Zone 3 Alarm Report Zone 4 Alarm Report Zone 5 Alarm Report Zone 6 Alarm Report Zone 7 Alarm Report
285. en activated wheth er the system is armed or disarmed It can be silenced but not reset by entering a valid PIN with disarming privileges Off A fire alarm will be displayed on all keypads A fire reset command PIN System Reset must be entered after silencing the alarm to re enable this zone If a fire alarm is not reset within 24 hours of the alarm being silenced Fire Alarm Not Reset will appear on the display with the keypad beeping every 10 seconds If this zone is programmed for trouble and the loop opens the keypads will indicate a Fire Trouble for this zone and the key pad sounders will beep once every ten seconds If the system is a combination fire and burglar alarm the fire alarm has priority over the burglar alarm e Fire Zone with Verification This zone is identical to a fire zone except that after the first alarm it will perform a fire reset and then wait up to two minutes for a second alarm If a second alarm occurs within this two minute period the sys tem will instantly signal a fire alarm lf there is no second alarm within this two minute period the control panel will reset back to its normal condition Note Use of this control s alarm verification feature is not per mitted for applications in the state of California Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc 6 2 Output Programming e Latch ON Any Burglar Alarm This is an output programmed to activate upon any zone alarm
286. ence Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 12 2 Zone Function Programming Program Addresses 0001 0015 A Zone Function is the description of how a zone will behave Up to 15 different Zone Functions mav be programmed Each zone must be assigned a zone function Multiple zones can be programmed to follow the same zone function See section 6 3 and 7 2 for further details Example To program Zone Function 1 as Steadv Alarm Output Alarm on Short Trouble on Open Interior Instant Data Digit 1 6 Data Digit 2 7 Only when disarmed Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 i Enter the Program Address 0 0 0 1 When armed this becomes Enter Data Digit 1 6 an Alarm on Open or Short Enter Data Digit 2 7 for non 24 hour zones Enter the pound key Note Multiplex contacts Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode DS7450 and DS7452 should not be programmed for Trouble on Open Enter the Data Digit as a Select options EEN ENR EAE CHEATER FI l na ter tt See tel TT tel tet SteadyAlarm Oust el lel el METIN FPusingAiam Outpt Jol lel le CI mam on ren __ ees eee ge 60 Alarm on AlarmonOpen JI EF EEEE O OO CENNE Troubieon shot ojo o Envenas 2 5 are Hex values They will display as C F at the keypads Entry Exit Delay 2 Value Zone i Default Interior Entry Exit Foll
287. ences When Quick Arming is used the following shortcuts are available Quick Arming is disabled by default To select the Quick Arming feature see Section 8 10 Address 10 General Control QUICK ARMING COMMAND SEQUENCE TYPE OF ARMING On Normal Arming No Entry Perimeter Only Perimeter Instant Arming no entry delay Perimeter Only Perimeter Arming entry exit delay No Entry On Maximum Security Arming 1 5 Easy Exit If the system is armed and there have been no zones violated then you can reenter a Quick Arm Command without first disarming the system This allows you to change the arming level or to restart the exit delay so you can exit through an entry exit zone Easy Exit is disabled by default To select the Easy Exit feature see Section 8 10 Address 10 1 6 Turning OFF disarming the System Silencing Alarms Please read Section 5 20 Emergency Procedures prior to being confronted with an emergency event If you have entered the building through a perimeter door you may hear a steady pre alert tone from the keypads If so disarm according to the chart below WARNING If the bells and sirens are on and or the red Armed light is flashing then the keypad is signaling that an alarm has occurred sometime before your arrival The DS7447 will display Zone Alarm The DS7443 or DS7445 zone LEDs will be flashing for the corresponding zone that is in alarm e The keypad wil
288. ences for the partitions you have access to exit Single Partition Mode by pressing the key for 2 seconds DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 9 3 Disarming from the Master Kevpad Disarming from the Master Kevpad Disarming all the Partitions vou have access to Enter your PIN followed by the Off key This will disarm all of your partitions even if some are already disarmed You must enter Single Partition Mode to disarm the necessary partitions one at a time Enter your PIN followed by the key twice 1 2 3 4 FI The first partition you have access to will be displayed Armed Cafeteria Disarming only some 3 Complete the disarming command sequence for this partition Off of your Partitions Move to the next partition you have access to by pressing the key twice The next partition you have access to will be displayed Armed Office Complete the disarming command sequence for this partition After you have disarmed all the partitions you have access to exit Single Partition Mode by pressing the key for 2 seconds 9 4 Single Partition Mode Single Partition Mode is used to control partitions on a one at a time one by one basis from the Master keypad To enter the Single Partition Mode enter your PIN then press the key twice This will call up the first partition you have access to Enter the command sequence you
289. er an alarm has occurred Low Battery This report is sent when a low battery condition occurs Low Battery Restoral This report is sent when a low battery condition restores AC Failure This report is sent after an AC failure condition oc curs AC failure reports will only be sent along with other reports AC Failure Restoral This report is sent when an AC failure condition restores Automatic Comm Test This report is sent at the 24 hour check in time Manual Comm Test This report is sent at any time using a keypad command sequence Remote Program Successful This report is sent after a Re mote Program session if the session was terminated properly Remote Program Unsuccessful This report is sent after a Re mote Program session if some error has occurred or the session did not terminate properly Local Program Successful This report is sent when local pro grammer s mode is exited and there is no error associated with the programming Local Program Unsuccessful This report is sent when local programmer s mode is exited and there has been some error as sociated with the programming System Trouble This report is sent when a control trouble con DS7080i Reference Guide dition occurs System Trouble Restoral This report is sent when all system trouble conditions restore Exit Error This report is sent if an exit error occurs An exit error occurs when an entry exit zone is still violated at the end
290. erefore these codes will not be required in the account database for this initial contact The steps to call a control panel are 1 Start up the WDSRP program by double clicking the WD SRP 1 2 3 or 4 icon from the WDSRP window You will be prompted to enter your password Enter the ev eryday password you previously created Choose OK to complete the log in Choose Accounts from the WDSRP Main window Choose the account you wish to communicate with The Find Account window will appear Find Account Acct ID SAMPLE 74001 V3 Template NONE Communicate ReptiD1 1234__ 2 4 TIT Sort key 1 niso l 5 8 f Sort key 2 Auto service NONE Insert New J Name Thomas J Brown Auto call NONE Address Detection Systems Edit Data J 130 Perinton Parkway Delete J City Fairport State NY Zip 14450 Contact T J Brown ve 555 1212 5551212 Locate Key l Notes Sample layout Key Select J Comm Created 11 17 Fri Aug 16 1996 _Bepors l Modified Status Revision Modify oper 1 7 Dawnload Beginning l Previous i EndofFile tequirca Select the NEXT record in the current database key order Choose the Communicate command from the right hand column command buttons The new right hand column com WDSRP User s Guide mand buttons will only show those commands n
291. ering Machine Bypass This feature allows the control panel to answer incoming calls when answering machines are used If the line rings stops ringing then rings again within one minute the panel will seize the phone line on the first ring To disable this feature program the control panel to answer on an even number of rings Dialer Delay A Dialer Delay of 15 seconds can be added when reporting burglar alarms 24 hour burglar alarms and fire alarms This delay will help to prevent false alarm reports by giving the user 15 seconds to disarm the system before a report is sent 8 16 Address 22 Dial Attempts 01 to 10 MT 01 to 03 Australia DEFAULT 10 DIAL ATTEMPTS DS7060 Reference Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc 8 17 Address 23 Time Delays DEFAULT is 060 004 Entry Delay Time 0 to 250 Enter Number of Seconds Exit Delay Time 0 to 250 Enter Number of Seconds Bell Cutoff Time 0 to 099 Enter Number of Minutes REPORTS Program locations 24 through 36 are used differently for the particular Phone Format Chosen see Address 38 39 If a value of 00 is programmed in any of these locations the panel will not send that particular report Pulsed Formats 3 1 3 1E 3 1 with Parity 3 1E with Parity 4 1 and 4 2 will need a unique value placed at each address location As a recommendation for the pulsed formats the table in Section 14 1 Suggested Values gives a baseline from which to program t
292. es Ruse Drive Les Mureaux France 19 On Sum Street Shatin N T 61 3 9558 8088 Parramatta NSW 2150 Australia Phone Fax 33 1 34 74 9576 Hong Kong Fax 61 3 9558 8089 61 2 891 4944 852 2635 2815 Fax 61 2 891 5844 Fax 852 2648 7986 Detection Systems Inc 130 Perinton Parkway Fairport New York USA 14450 9199 Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc 716 223 4060 800 289 0096 Fax 716 223 9180 DS7060 ROM Update Kit Installation Guide P N 32112B Armed Status Detection Systems PTY Ltd Unit 21 45 Gilby Road Mount Waverley Victoria 3149 Australia 61 3 9558 8088 Fax 61 3 9558 8089 Copyright 1995 97 Reference Guide for the DS7080i Control Communicator Normal Arming Perimeter Arming no entry delay Perimeter Arming with entry delay Maximum Security Arming Custom Arming Force Arming Zone Bypass Chime Mode Zone Test Read Event History Battery Test Communicator Test Fire Reset Fire Trouble Remote Program Dial out Remote Program Answer Local Battery Sounder Test Error Display Error Display Reset Clear Zone Bypass Detection Systems PTY Ltd Unit 2 The Riverside Centre 148 James Ruse Drive Parramatta NSW 2150 Australia 61 2 891 4944 Fax 61 2 891 5844 Armed G Status Power 0 Fire Perimeter Supervisory Bell Silenced Trouble Keypad Quick Reference Guide Turning On arming your System PIN On PIN No Entry Perimeter Only PIN Peri
293. eset test Battery Test Residential Mode System Reset e If there is a Low Battery condition the control panel will report a Low Battery e If the battery is now functional the control panel will report a battery restoral 1 13 Communicator Test This test is only available if your system transmits alarms and system information to a monitoring service and has been programmed by the security installing company to permit communicator tests This test may only be used in the disarm mode DS7060 User Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc A long beep will initially sound to acknowledge the start of the test If the test is successful the sounder will again issue one long beep If the test fails the keypad sounder will turn on continuously To silence the sounder enter your PIN followed by the key or press the key TYPE OF TEST COMMAND WHAT WILL WHAT TO DO SEQUENCE HAPPEN Communicator Commercial Mode A long beep will sound If test fails the keypad Test PIN 8 2 sounder will beep 3 times e A Test report is sent to the NOTE Requires Residential Mode monitoring service NOTE This test may take Addresses 36 8 2 several minutes to complete Communicator Test because the control will try Report Address 37 several attempts before it Account Code Phone fails this test A retry will 1 Address 38 Phone 1 occur 30 minutes after failure Format an
294. esidential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or televi sion reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Re orient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help 7 17 FCC Phone Connection Notice To Users This control complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules On the inside of the enclosure is a label that contains among other information the FCC Registration Number and the Ringer Equiva lence Number REN for this equipment You must upon request Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc provide this information to vour local telephone companv The REN is useful to determine the quantitv of devices that mav be connected to vour telephone line and still have all of those devices ring when vour telephone number is called In most but not all areas the sum o
295. esses 0016 0017 Example Zone Bypass programming determines which zone functions can be bv To program zone functions 1 7 so they can not be passed Zone functions that can not be bypassed can not be force armed sags and zone function 8 so it can be by either Fire zones can never be manually bypassed but can be force armed passed The Default of 0 or 8 means those zones can be bypassed Data Digit 1 5 Data Digit 2 7 PA 0016 Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Data Digit Enter the Program Address 0 0 1 6 Enter Data Digit 1 5 Enter Data Digit 2 7 Enter the pound key fi DJ Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode Enter the Data Digit as a MI tesa sjejrjejsjorijejspars Zone Function 1 Can BeBvpassedjej Je e e e e ej e Zone Fontin 2 an Be Bpassed 00 lejej Jee jeje 1 Zone Function 8 Can Be Bvpassedjejejejej jejejeje Zope Function 4 Caribe Byard 6 e 6 e e ele 1 1 tr 0 5 are Hex values They will display as A F at the keypads Enter the Data Digit as a Select Options 2 3 4 5 6 7 QAMEAZIE fanefiaaenz mte5pusojej je je lel Jol lel Tel T Zone Funston 6 Can Be Bwpassedjejej eje Jole je Zone Funcion 7 Gan Be Bwpassedjejejeje jejejeje zone Fnciona canbe Ones lelelejelele T 0 5 are Hex values They will display as A F at the keypads
296. et The operation of this Control may also be affected if events such as accidents or acts of God cause an interruption in telephone service 11 0 Canadian Department of Communications General Installation Requirements Notice The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground c
297. et section 1 21 Emergency Keypad Alarms DS7447 DS7443 DS7445 MOG Off 4 6 6 Cai OGU G OO C 4 GDC est Prt W Help 8 W Help CC e t iUoejb ZI NI The Emergency Alarm Keys A B and C may generate Fire Special Emergency and Panic Alarms if programmed by the installer Ask your installing company to explain the function of these keys When using the Emergency Alarm Keys they must be pressed for two seconds to generate an alarm NOTE If the Emergency Alarm keys are to be used they should be labeled to signify their functions The A key should be labeled as the Fire key This is the only key that may be designated as the Fire key The B key should be labeled as the Help key The C key should be labeled as the Panic key Use the Disarming Command Sequence to cancel or silence these alarms DS7060 User Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc 1 22 Fire Safetv This fire alarm svstem can provide earlv warning of a developing fire Such a svstem however does not ensure protection against property damage or loss of life resulting from a fire Any fire alarm system may fail to warn for any number of reasons e g smoke not reaching a detector that is behind a closed door When considering detectors for residential applications refer to NFPA
298. evice Volume Control DS7445 and DS7447 only The keypad sounder volume can be adjusted using the 1 and 4 keys along with the key Hold the key while pressing the 1 key to increase the volume or the 4 key to decrease the volume The volume adjustment does not affect the volume during an alarm Backlight Control DS7447 only The display backlight intensity can be adjusted using the 3 and 6 keys along with the key Hold the key while pressing the 3 key to increase the brightness or the 6 key to decrease the brightness NOTE After the backlight and volume are adjusted you must arm then disarm the system once to store this information in the control panel If power is disconnected before the panel is armed the backlight and volume levels will return to the default settings Status Power Fire lo Armed DDG Of 4 6 6 C DOWO CLO PIR D DS7447 KEYPAD DS7443 KEYPAD DS7445 KEYPAD This chart will help you understand what each Light LED represents LIGHT FLASHING Armed The control panel is disarmed An exit delay is in progress or an alarm The control panel is armed and no alarms have red has occurred occurred Status One or more zones are not ready One or more zones are bypassed All zones are ready to arm green to arm Power The control panel h
299. f the REN s of all devices connected to one line should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that vou mav connect to vour line vou mav want to contact vour local telephone companv to determine the max REN for vour local calling area This equipment mav not be used on coin service provided bv the telephone companv This control should not be connected to partv lines Should this equipment cause harm to the telephone network the telephone company may discontinue your service temporarily If possible they will notify you in advance But if advanced notice isn t practical you will be notified as soon as possible You will be in formed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the proper functioning of your equip ment If they do you will be notified in advance to give you an op portunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone service If you experience trouble with this equipment please contact the manufacturer for information on obtaining service or repairs The telephone company may ask that you disconnect this equip ment from the network until the problem has been corrected or until you are sure that the equipment is not malfunctioning The repairs to this equipment must be made by the manufacturer and not the user To guard against accidental disconnection there is ample room to mount the
300. faulted while the control is armed and not in exit delay then an entry delay cycle will be started and a continuous entry tone will be sounded at the keypads If the control is not disarmed by the end of the entry delay an alarm will result There are no keypad tones during the exit delay unless the feature Keypad Audible During Exit Delay is selected Refer to Section 8 9 Address 09 If an entry delay is running and another entry delay zone is faulted the entry delay timer is unaffected and will continue timing from the first entry The entry delay time and exit delay time can be set independently If a delayed zone remains faulted at the end of an exit delay the panel will optionally signal an exit error condition The entry delay will be begin as above and the alarm output will activate with the pattern selected for that zone If the control is not disarmed by the end of the entry delay an alarm will result and an exit error report will be sent to the central station following the alarm report if programmed The alarm output will deactivate If the control is disarmed during the delay period started by the exit error condition no reports will be sent to the central station and any outputs on during the exit error will deactivate The exit error report does not follow the dialer delay option Interior Follower This zone is not active when the panel is disarmed or is armed in the perimeter only mode When the zone is active if a delayed zo
301. fferently the two formats Whatever the keys are programmed In Contact ID A Fire for in the panel that is what will be sent B Silent Panic C Audible Panic In SIA A Fire B Emergency C Panic a Entering from a Master keypad a Zone test is not available from a Master keypad b Use a PIN with test authority b Not using a PIN with test authority Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc Kevpad Problems Continued Svmptom Probable Cause Possible Solution Chime Mode 7 does not work when a zone is faulted Some functions won t work on a Mas ter keypad 17 2 Reporting Problems a Not activating for interior zones b The keypad is not assigned to the same partition as the zone being activated Some functions require you to enter single partition mode when using a Master key pad a Chime mode only activates for perimeter zones Chime mode must be programmed Also if the perimeter zone has trouble enabled trouble on open the chime won t work if that zone is open ing Chime mode will only activate the sounder on key pads that are assigned to the same partition as the zone The following commands require that you are in Sin gle Partition Mode when entering from a Master key pad e History read back Chime mode Checking zone status Checking zone trouble status after 87 Master keypad will show only partition name Bypassing zones Symptom Probable Cause Possible Solution
302. firmiv through the Printed Circuit Board so that the Stand off ears can expand outward ie Power idiston LED e Install DS7430 Here li e e Expansion Port N 2 OTTITITTITTI Stand Offs 4 DS7400 Xi CI COCICICICICAICIC Ieee TEACA Potjpozj 1 LP 2 3 LP 4 f s Lp 6 7 LPs 8 CEA CIC z fa supervised Power Bus gga Multiplex Bus Detection Systems Int l Inc Detection Systems Ltd 19 Rue du 19 Mars 78130 Unit 13 18 17 F New Commerce Centre Les Mureaux France 19 On Sum Street Shatin N T Phone Fax 33 1 34 74 9576 Hong Kong 852 2635 2815 Fax 852 2648 7986 Detection Systems Inc 130 Perinton Parkway Fairport New York USA 14450 9199 716 223 4060 800 289 0096 Fax 716 223 9180 Copyright 1993 96 Detection Systems Inc DS7430 Installation Instructions P N26091E Installation Instructions for the DS7432 8 Input Remote Module 1 0 General Information The DS7432 is an 8 Input Remote Module for use with the DS7400 X Xi and Xi Rev 3 series of Control Communica tors It provides a means of addressing up to eight input loops of conventional contacts to the multiplex bus of the control Up to seven DS7432s can be used per DS7400 svstem Up to 15 DS7432 modules are allowed on DS7400X Xi and Xi Rev 3 The recommended wiring to the control is standard 18 or 22 AWG non shielded qua
303. g Program Address 0165 39 12 9 Quick Arm Control Programming Program Address 0169 39 12 10 Keypad Assignment Programming Program Addresses 0173 0180 40 12 11 Keypad Partition Assignment Program Ad dresses 0208 0215 40 12 12 Emergency Key Programming Program Ad dresses 0181 0182 41 12 13 Custom Arming Programming Program Ad dresses 0183 0184 41 12 14 Force Arming and Ground Fault Detect Program ming Program Address 0185 42 12 15 Commercial Fire Mode Programming Program Address 0186 12 16 Open Close Report Control Programming Program Address 0187 44 12 17 Open Close amp Zone Report Control Program ming Program Address 0189 44 12 18 Report Control Programming Program Address 0190 44 12 19 Timer Programming Program Addresses 0191 0196 45 12 20 A C Fail Report Delay Programming Program Address 0197 45 21 21 General Code Arm Only Programming Pro gram Address 0198 0201 46 12 22 Arming Warning Programming Program Ad dresses 0202 0205 46 12 23 DS7412 RS232 Interface Control Programming Program Address 0206 47 12 24 DS7412 RS232 Interface Configuration Program ming Program Address 0207 47 12 25 Report Programming Program Addresses 0256 0304 and 0320 0340 48 12 26 Phone ARDIS Routing Control Program Ad dresses 0494 0495 49 12 27 Account Code Programming Program Ad dresses 0496 0526 50 12 28 Phone Number General Control Programming Program Address 0528 51 12 29 Pho
304. g the exit delay interval Asingle beep will sound The red Armed light will turn on steady after the exit delay interval Exit during the exit delay interval CAUTION Violating any zone after the exit delay interval will cause an instant alarm NOTE In commercial burglar applications for U L Certificated systems a ring back indication and bell test should be heard after arming closing If not heard call for service NOTE Ifthe system has invisible zones that are not ready they will be displayed during the arming sequence The display of invisible zones will remain on until the zone is cleared or bypassed Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 Reference Guide 5 4 Quick Arming the System If Quick Arming is not used a PIN must be entered at the beginning of all arming command sequences When Quick Arming is used the following shortcuts are available Quick Arming is disabled by default To select the Quick Arming feature see Section 8 10 Address 10 General Control QUICK ARMING COMMAND SEQUENCE TYPE OF ARMING On Normal Arming No Entry Perimeter Only Perimeter Instant Arming no entry delay Perimeter Only Perimeter Arming entry exit delay No Entry On Maximum Security Arming 55 Easy Exit If the system is armed and there have been no zones violated then you can reenter a Quick Arm Command without first disarming the system This allows
305. gh 99 only Outputs can be programmed to follow any combination of one or two zones open or closed with the system armed or dis armed If programmed to latch the output will latch until a valid PIN is entered at the keypad 6 1 5 Multiplex Bus Outputs The DS7400Xi supports up to 20 DS7465 Input Output Modules These modules are connected to the multiplex bus and provide one input loop and one Form C output relay The input loop operates the same as all other multiplex inputs The output loop can be programmed to follow Output Func tions Multiplex Bus outputs can be bypassed using the bypass func tion If an output zone is bypassed while it is ON it will turn OFF The bypass will not be removed when the system is armed and then disarmed it must be cancelled by entering the bypass command again or by cancelling all bypasses DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Note DS7465 Module outputs will not pulse even if programmed to do so 6 1 6 Octal Relay Modules DS7488 The DS7400Xi can support two Octal Relay Modules Each relay can be programmed to follow system wide events or Output Functions as described above 6 1 7 Output Functions Output Functions can be programmed to follow system events or to follow one or two specific zones in a cross matrix fashion see Input Output Cross Matrixing These Output Functions can be programmed to control Octal Relay outputs or Multiplex Bus outputs Output Function
306. gram into another computer only for backup pur poses in support of your use of the program on a single com puter You may NOT e Transfer this program or license to any other party without the express written approval of Detection Systems Inc Limited Warranty Detection Systems Inc DS warrants that the program will substantially conform to the published specifications and documentation provided that it is used on the computer hardware and with the operating system for which it was designed DS also warrants that the magnetic media on which the program is distributed and the documentation are free of defects in materials and workmanship No DS dealer distributor agent or employee is authorized to make any modification or addition to this warranty oral or written Except as specifically provided above DS makes no warranty or representation either express or implied with respect to this program or documentation including their quality performance merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Remedy DS will replace defective media or documentation or correct substantial program errors at no charge provided you return the item with proof of purchase to DS within 90 days of the date of delivery If DS is unable to replace defective media or documentation or correct substantial program errors DS will refund the license fee These are your sole remedies for any breach of warranty Because programs are inherently complex
307. grammer s Mode press the Reset button for 2 seconds If the zone is unsuccessfully programmed the keypad will sound a three beep error tone Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 17 0 Troubleshooting Guide 17 1 Kevpad Problems Entrv Error Please Re enter will dis plav on kevpad A three beep error tone will sound continuousiv Kevpad displavs Not Programmed See Instal Guide sounder is on and the kevpad does not operate Keypad displays Ready to arm par tition 1 when using oniv one parti tion Kevpad displavs Svstem Fault sounder is on and the kevpad does not operate Kevpad alpha displav is locked up but the kevs still function Can t read back history with 89 in put In historv the Read back for the A B and C kevs shows A Fire B Emergency C Panic But the Central Station transmissions display B as Silent Panic and C as Audible Panic Can not perform a zone test 81 DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Probable Cause Possible Solution Two or more keypads share the same Install keypad jumper properly in back of keypads address Be sure the DS7430 or DS7433 is installed prop The DS7430 or DS7433 is installed in erly the wrong pins The keypad not addressed properly Install the keypad jumper properly in the back of the keypad The keypad is not programmed proper Check keypad programming addresses 0173 ly 0180 Keypads 11 15 are not properly config
308. gure B Detection Systems PTY Ltd Unit 21 45 Gilby Road Mount Waverley Victoria 3149 Australia 61 3 9558 8088 Fax 61 3 9558 8089 Detection Svstems PTV Ltd Unit 2 The Riverside Centre 148 James Ruse Drive Parramatta NSW 2150 Australia 61 2 891 4944 Fax 61 2 891 5844 The DS7488 is wired to the options bus see figure C of the DS7400 Xi Option Address 5 To the DS7400 Options Bus Q Red Black Green Yellow Contact Output T strip Figure C 4 0 Selecting the Option Address The DS7488 must be selected as an option address 1 15 Use the Option Address Pins to select an option address with the jumper plugs provided see figure D 0000 Cy Cer CIII 15 sA Figure D OCONI eeeeceee 6000006 Codd 00000000 Address Numbers Each optional device connected to the options bus must have a different address When installing the DS7488 on a DS7400Xi Rev 3 using any address between 11 15 will not allow the use of keypads with the same address Addresses 1 10 will not affect keypad operations 5 0 Programming the DS7488 The DS7488 must be programmed through the DS7400 Series Control Communicators See vour DS7400 Xi Reference Guide for output programming information Detection Svstems Int l Inc 19 Rue du 19 Mars 78130 Les Mureaux France Phone Fax 33 1 34 74
309. he BusLoc code to be 54321 Procedure Enter the programmer s mode Enter address 9999 Enter the data digits as 5 4 8 2 and 1 followed by the button Exit the programmer s mode Once the pre programming is done you are ready to program the multiplex devices Perform the following e Disconnect all multiplex devices from the DS7430 e Program the multiplex devices through the control panel Perform the following Enter the programmer s mode Enter the multiplex programming mode Do this by entering 9 9 9 5 followed by the button The control will then take a few seconds to check the multiplex connection to confirm nothing is connected to it The display DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide will show the following Checking Multiplex Bus The display will then call up the first zone you have pre pro grammed to be a multiplex zone To access a different zone press the Reset key then enter the three digit value of the zone you want The display will show the following Sens Contact 009 Press to Prog Before you do anything else re connect the multiplex device that coincides with the displayed zone to the multiplex bus of the DS7430 For DS7465s and Multiple Input devices pressing the button now will program these devices to the control panel Remember these devices take up two addresses When address 009 for ex ample is a DS7465 pressing the button now will
310. he Multiplex Bus is defective or shorted Check wiring for shorts Can t reset to factory default Keypad programming access is setto PAR Change setting to FULL from the Remote program TIAL from Remote programmer mer DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc General Svstem Problems Continued Svmptom Probable Cause Possible Solution 87 display RAM Fault a An EEProm fault can be caused by disconnecting 89 display System Fault 01 power from the control while it is in program mode In this case enter then exit program mode to clear or b Try to clear the error at the keypad by entering a 87 display ROM Fault PIN then Reset 89 display System Fault 02 c Remove AC and battery power then re apply or Remember that event history will be lost and time date will have to be re set 87 display EEProm Fault 89 dis play System Fault 03 d If error persists return the panel to factory default programming by setting program address 4058 to 01 If the error clears re program the panel e If error still persists replace the panel 87 display Communicator Err The control has failed to communicate Check history 89 to determine the source 89 display Report Failure X Report Failure 1 Phone number 1 Report Failure 2 Phone number 2 Report Failure 3 Phone number 3 remote programmer Report Failure 4 ARDIS Network 87 display 2Ph Bell Fault 89 a The du
311. he Pro grammer s Mode Data Digits Phone 1 Account Code Address 0496 Phone 2 Account Code Address 0498 Phone 1 Account Code Address 0500 Phone 2 Account Code Address 0502 Phone 1 Account Code Address 0504 Partition 3 Phone 2 Account Code Address 0506 Phone 1 Account Code Address 0508 Phone 2 Account Code Address 0510 Phone 1 Account Code Address 0512 Phone 2 Account Code Address 0514 Partition 4 Partition 5 Phone 1 Account Code Address 0516 Partition 6 Phone 2 Account Code Address 0518 Phone 1 Account Code Address 0520 Phone 2 Account Code Address 0522 Phone 1 Account Code Address 0524 Phone 2 Account Code Address 0526 Partition 7 Partition 8 JULULLULLU UUULUL JULULLULLU JUL LUL JULULLUULLU UU IL LL The Default for all Account Codes 0000 Notes 1 Account Codes are programmed from left to right If programming a 3 digit Account Code the fourth digit of the address must be 0 For example If the Account Code is 121 program 1210 in the programming address 2 If you wish to send a zero 0 enter it as 70 this does not apply to the added zero in a three digit Account Code For example If the Account Code is 101 program 17010 in the programming address If the Account Code is 3050 program 3 05 0 in the programming address DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 12 28 Phone Number General Control
312. he User Number of the PIN to be canceled and then again User Number 001 can not be canceled See Section 8 9 for special uses for User Number 14 and 15 PINs DS7060 Reference Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc 5 3 Turning ON arming the Svstem The green Status light must be on steadv and no zone lights are displaved on the DS7443 or DS7445 kevpad The DS7447 display must read Ready To Arm in order to arm the system with one of these commands If the green Status light is not on or zone lights are displayed on the DS7443 or DS7445 keypad or if the DS7447 s display is reading Not Ready then see Section 5 7 Force Arming or Section 5 9 Zone Bypass for other ways to arm the system This chart explains the five normal wavs of arming the svstem TVPE OF ARMING DESIRED Normal Arming No one left on the premises An entry exit delay is in effect COMMAND SEQUENCE Commercial Mode PIN On Residential Mode On WHAT WILL HAPPEN The red Armed Light will begin to flash The green Status light will turn off Armed will be displayed DS7447 Exit Now will display DS7447 during the exit delay interval Asingle beep will sound The red Armed light will turn on steady after the exit delay interval WHAT TO DO Exit during the exit delay interval Perimeter Instant Arming Someone still on the premises There is NO entry delay in effect Commercial Mode
313. he arming state of the panel this always remains as a Trouble on Open Trouble on Short This is a zone programmed to activate a trou ble when its loop is shorted and the system is disarmed If the system is armed this zone will activate an alarm if shorted or opened For 24 hour zones regardless of the arming state of the panel this always remains as a Trouble on Short DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide e Perimeter Instant This is a zone programmed to activate an alarm even during the entry exit delay period e 24 Hour This is a zone programmed to activate when its loop is faulted even if the system is disarmed e Entry Exit Delay 1 This is a zone programmed to be ignored during the entry exit delay period If it is violated while the system is armed it will activate a delay for the amount of time programmed for entry delay time 1 ad dress 0191 The keypad pre alert sounders will activate and the system may be disarmed during this delay period lf the system is not disarmed during the entry period this zone will activate an alarm Entry Exit Delay 2 This is a zone programmed to behave iden tical to the Entry Exit Delay 1 zone function except that it uses entry delay time 2 address 0192 Note If both entry delays have been activated the control will use the shorter entry delay s Interior Entry Exit Follower This is a zone programmed to be ignored during an entry exit delay and then become an
314. he system so a Duress code is not inadvertently entered Type of Disarming Disarming System under Duress 8 9 Emergency Procedures 8 9 1 Identifying Alarm Sounds Your alarm system may be programmed for a steady alarm sound or a pulsed alarm sound It is important to learn the difference be tween a fire alarm sound and an intrusion alarm sound before you are confronted with an actual emergency 8 9 2 Silencing Alarms All alarms can be silenced with any PIN that has disarm privileges Entering your PIN Off will silence the alarm and turn off disarm the control 8 9 3 A Cautionary Note How you respond to an alarm will depend mostly on the type and time of the alarm You should seek the advice of your installing com pany as they install your system not later e g after an alarm to develop a response plan 8 9 4 Use Common Sense Above all else common sense should prevail If there is any threat or hint of danger to yourself or others on the premises such as in the event of a fire alarm everyone should be instructed to leave the premises immediately Do not enter the premises unless accompa nied by the appropriate Emergency Services personnel or after they have given the OK to enter 8 9 5 Caution When Entering A Building If the bells and sirens are on and or the red Armed Light is flashing with the DS7447 display reading Zone Alarm or the DS7445 hav ing its zone LEDs flashing then the keypad is signali
315. he system may be Force Armed if programmed at Address 10 by bypassing the faulted zones The green Status light will be off on all keypads when Force Arming is required to arm the system The DS7447 display will read Not Ready or Fire Trouble if a fire zone is open and the DS7443 and DS7445 zone LEDs 1 6 will be on if one of those zones is faulted See Section 8 10 to enable Force Arming Force Arming during an AC power failure Regular arming of the control panel is not permitted during an AC power failure Having to Force Arm serves as a warning that the control panel is operating under backup battery WARNING Bypassing or Force Arming removes some of your building s protection because it excludes the faulted zones from arming Therefore an intrusion may not be detected or the detection may be delayed Always attempt to correct any zone problems close doors and windows etc before using these features If the problem can not be corrected contact your installing company NOTE See Section 5 9 Zone Bypass for an alternate method of arming the system when faults exist Force arming is not available in U L Listed systems TYPE OF ARMING WHAT WILL HAPPEN WHAT TO DO WHAT WILL HAPPEN WHAT TO DO Force A5 second beep occurs Press Bypass The red Armed light will flash Exit during the Arming indicating there are faulted during the during the exit delay interval exit delay zones and that the control 5 second beep The control
316. he system sounders for 2 seconds 8 5 only If the battery voltage is low a battery fault will occur see Error Displays Command z Type of Test What will Happen What to Do yP Sequence PP If test fails the control panel will All keypad Lights will turn on indicate a control problem See Local Error Displays section 7 17 Battery PIN 8 5 Sounder Test e The keypad sounder and all alarm sounding devices will operate for 2 If power in your building has been seconds off recently wait 2 hours for the battery to recharge and then try again e The control panel will perform a battery test Battery Test PIN System Reset e The control panel will report a Low Battery or a Low Battery Restoral If in Residential Mode a PIN is not required for these commands DS7080i Reference Guide Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc 7 9 Communicator Test This chart explains the procedure for performing a Communicator Test This test is available oniv if vour svstem transmits alarms and svstem information to a monitoring service and has been programmed bv the securitv installing companv to permit communicator tests A long beep will initially sound to acknowledge the start of the test If the test is successful the sounder will again issue one long beep If the test fails the keypad sounder will turn ON continuously To silence the sounder enter you PIN followed by the key or press
317. he various addresses Please note that each Central Station receiver differs slightly in the report codes that it expects Therefore it is best to verify the codes you use with the Central Station Some of the reports that can be sent such as OPEN CLOSE PARTIAL CLOSE can send an associated User Number as the second digit To accomplish this program an F 5 as the second digit in the program location When the report is sent the panel will replace the F with the appropriate user number Pulsed formats 3 1 3 1 with Parity and 4 1 need a 0 for the second digit and cannot send user numbers A non zero in the second digit location indicates an extended 3 1E or 4 1E format Fixed Report Formats Contact ID 4 9 have well defined reports that are sent regardless of the value programmed in the report code location Any non zero value programmed in the report code location will send the appropriate report Refer to Section 14 2 Values Sent for a list of reports that are possible to send based on the report program locations Special Formats Personal Dialing Format Pager are not recommended for primary reporting If they are used Personal Dialing Format could use the same report codes as the Pulsed Formats Pager has a limitation in that it can t use the Hex values A 0 B 1 C 2 D 8 E 4 F 5 These values can not be passed on to a Numeric Pager See Section 14 1 Suggested Values for some recommended report values for the P
318. heat or smoke on the other side Shout to all family members to keep their bedroom doors closed and to exit the building via alternate routes If the top of the door is not uncomfortably hot brace the bottom of the door with your foot and the top with one hand then open the door about one inch Be prepared to slam the door shut if there is any pressure against the door or if any hot air rushes in If there is no evidence of excessive heat or pressure leave the room and close the door behind you Shout appropriate instructions to all family members and immediately leave the building via the pre planned routes If heavy smoke is present drop to your hands and knees or crawl to remain below the smoke level Installation Considerations Proper location of detection devices is one of the most critical factors in a fire alarm system The following are some general considerations Smoke detectors should not be installed in dead air spaces or close to ventilating or air conditioning outlets because smoke may be circulated away from the detector Locations near air inlets should be favored Avoid areas subject to normal smoke concentrations such as kitchens garages or near fireplaces Do not install smoke detectors where normal area temperatures are above 100 degrees F 38 degrees C or below 32 degrees F 0 degrees C Areas of high humidity and dust concentrations should be avoided DS7060 Reference Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems I
319. his report is sent when the zone alarm is cleared The zone number will automatically be sent for this re port in SIA or Contact ID format DS7080i Reference Guide Zone Trouble This report is sent when a zone trouble condition occurs The zone number will automaticallv be sent for this report in SIA or Contact ID format Zone Trouble Restoral This report is sent when the zone trou ble condition is cleared The zone number will automatically be sent for this report in SIA or Contact ID format Open This report is sent when the system has been disarmed In SIA or Contact ID formats the user number for the person who disarmed the system will be sent with this report To send the user number along with an Open report in other formats program the extended digit of the report as 5 The Open report will only be sent if a Close report was sent previously Close This report is sent when the system has been armed In SIA or Contact ID formats the user number for the person who armed the system will be sent with this report To send the user number along with a Close report in other formats program the extended digit of the report as 5 Duress This report is sent when the system is disarmed using a duress code The user number will not be sent along with this report Partial Close This report is sent when the system is armed partially or force armed First Open After Alarm This report is sent when the system is disarmed aft
320. hone Connection Notice To Users This control complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules On the top of the PCB is a label that contains among other information the FCC Registration Number and the Ringer Equivalence Number REN for this equipment You must upon request provide this information to your local telephone company The REN is useful to determine the quantity of devices that you may connect to your telephone line and still have all of those devices ring when your telephone number is called In most but not all areas the sum of the REN s of all devices connected to one line should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that you may connect to your line you may want to contact your local telephone company to determine the maximum REN for your local calling area This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company This control should not be connected to party lines Should this equipment cause harm to the telephone network the telephone company may discontinue your service temporarily If possible they will notify you in advance But if advanced notice isn t practical you will be notified as soon as possible You will be informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equip ment operations or procedures that could affect the proper functioning of your equipment If they do you will be notified in advance to gi
321. hould be labeled to signify their functions The A key should be labeled as the Fire key This is the only key that may be designated as the Fire key The B key should be labeled as the Help key The C key should be labeled as the Panic key Use the Disarming Command Sequence to cancel or silence these alarms Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 Reference Guide 5 22 Fire Safetv This fire alarm svstem can provide earlv warning of a developing fire Such a svstem however does not ensure protection against property damage or loss of life resulting from a fire Any fire alarm system may fail to warn for any number of reasons e g smoke not reaching a detector that is behind a closed door When considering detectors for residential applications refer to NFPA Standard 72 The National Fire Alarm Code This standard is available at a nominal cost from The National Fire Protection Association Batterymarch Park Quincy MA 02269 If Installed in Family Residences Adherence to the NFPA Standard 72 can lead to reasonable fire safety when the following items are practiced e Minimize hazards Avoid the three traditional fire killers smoking in bed leaving children home alone and cleaning with flammable liquids Provide a fire warning system Most fire deaths occur in the home the majority during sleeping hours The minimum level of protection requires smoke detectors to be installed outside of each separat
322. iated with the programming Local Program Unsuccessful This report is sent when local programmer s mode is exited and there has been some error as sociated with the programming System Trouble This report is sent when a control trouble con dition occurs System Trouble Restoral This report is sent when all system trouble conditions restore Communicator Test System Off Normal This report is sent at the 24 hour check in time if there is a control trouble an active fire alarm that has not been acknowledged a fire trouble or a supervisory condition Exit Error This report is sent if an exit error occurs An exit error occurs when an entry exit zone is still violated at the end of the exit delay If this happens the entry delay will begin If the system is not disarmed before the entry delay expires an alarm report for the effected zone will be sent and the Exit Error report will be sent If this report is not programmed the control will not sound the exit error warning Recent Closing This report is sent along with any alarm re ports when there is an alarm within the first five minutes after the system has been armed System Test This report is sent when a system test has been started 81 key sequence Zone reports are not sent during a system test System Test Restoral This report is sent when the system test has been completed or has timed out DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide 7 14 Phone Number General Cont
323. icallv arm once per dav To inform occupants that the svstem is about to arm a pre arming period will begin 15 minutes before the svstem arms automaticallv The kevpad sounders and anv outputs programmed to follow the kevpad sounders will pulse five times everv minute During the last five minutes before arming these sounders will be on steady Once per minute the keypad will read Arm in nn min PIN OFF extend If automatic arming is used in Master Keypad mode it will affect all partitions you have access to If used in single partition mode or from a single partition keypad it will affect only the partition you are working in To extend the Automatic Arming of the system during the automatic arming pre arming period 15 minutes enter a valid user code plus OFF PIN OFF For a longer delay perform the following steps Delayed Automatic Arming Enter 9 9 to enter the Delayed Arming programming Enter the number of hours from now The keypad will display the following that you would like the system to arm Arm in nn Hours For example If if is 3 30 now and you would like the system to arm at 9 30 to accept enter 06 To extend the Automatic Arming at any time use the Delayed Arming feature see section 8 6 To program the Automatic Arming Time perform the following steps Setting the Automatic Arming Time Setting the Automatic Arming Time can only be Enter a Master PIN 0 performed in the M
324. icator operation The ringer equivalence is 0 1 B 2 8 Users The system allows up to 15 individual users Each user will have his own PIN number the 4 digit code entered at the keypads Refer to Section 5 2 for PIN programming 2 9 Lightning Protection MOVs and or spark gaps provide protection from lightning surges and static discharges 2 10 Burglar Fire Zone Inputs 6 Circuits on board 2 21k ohms e Number of Circuits e End of Line Resistor NOTE 4 wire type smoke detectors only 2 11 Line Seizure Notice This control panel incorporates a line seizure feature which will disable internal telephone lines when the control panel is sending alarm or supervision reports to the central station Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc 3 0 ENCLOSURE INSTALLATION 3 2 Install the Control Communicator The DS7060 control communicator and the enclosure are CAUTION The control is static sensitive Make sure you shipped together The control however still needs to be touch earth ground before handling the control installed into the enclosure Hardware for mounting the This will discharge any static electricity in your enclosure to a wall and the control to the enclosure is body located in its own hardware pack EXAMPLE Run the ground wire to the enclosure before 3 1 Install the Enclosure handling the control Then keep holding the ground wire while installing the control NOTE This panel is intended for mounting in
325. ifies a problem with the fire system such as a break in the wiring that monitors smoke detectors Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 User Guide A Fire Trouble will be indicated by a short beep from the keypad sounders every 10 seconds The DS7447 will display Fire Trouble followed by the zones in a trouble condition The DS7443 will turn the Fire light on steady and will light the corre sponding zone LEDs The DS7445 will turn the Fire and Trouble lights on steady and will light the corresponding zone LEDs Notify your installing company immediately if the Fire Trouble message is displayed The Fire Trouble beep can be silenced with any PIN followed by the Off key After problems have been remedied a PIN followed by System Reset should be entered to clear the Fire Trouble display 1 16 Remote Program Dial out and Answer Call for Remote Programming This command can only be entered when the control is disarmed Phone numbers 1 and 3 must be programmed along with account code 1 The panel will call phone number 3 and attempt to connect for downloading While programming is under way the Status Armed and Power LEDs will flash If the panel is already using the phone line it will sound the three beep error tone Answer for Remote Programming The panel will automatically pick up the phone line to answer a remote programming call While programming is underway the Status Armed and Power LEDs will flash If
326. including invisible and silent zones It will latch until the system has been disarmed ON during Entry Pre Alert This is an output programmed to activate when an entry exit zone is violated while the system is armed It will remain activated until the system is disarmed or until the entry delay time has expired On for 8 seconds after a PIN System Reset is entered This is an output programmed to activate only for 8 seconds after a PIN System Reset is entered at a keypad or if a fire zone with verification activates This output is intended to be used to power 4 wire smoke de tectors or any other device that requires a power interruption to reset an alarm condition Note When Programmable Output 2 is programmed this way it will normally supply auxiliary power and will turn OFF for 8 seconds when a PIN System Reset is entered e ON when System is Armed This is an output programmed to activate when the system is armed It will remain activated until the system is disarmed Ground Start This is an output programmed to activate for 3 seconds when the phone line is seized It is intended for use with ground start phone systems that require a momentary short to ground to obtain a dial tone Connect a separate 12 VDC DPDT relay Connect both relay commons to ground and connect the N O of each contact to terminal positions 27 and 30 one to terminal 27 one to 30 of the DS7080i Not intended for U L Listed systems
327. ing Off disarming the System under Duress A duress code is used when someone demands by threatening your life or well being that the system be turned off When used the code will both turn off the system and report a silent duress alarm if connected to a monitoring service User code 14 can be optionally configured as a duress code User code 14 will not arm the system or report duress if the system is not armed Extreme care should be used when entering your PIN to turn off the system so a duress code is not inadvertently entered User Code 14 is not a duress code by default You must program the control panel that User Code 14 is the duress code See Section 8 9 Address 09 for more information DS7060 Reference Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc 5 7 Force Arming When one or more zones are faulted the system may be Force Armed if programmed at Address 10 by bypassing the faulted zones The green Status light will be off on all keypads when Force Arming is required to arm the system The DS7447 display will read Not Ready or Fire Trouble if a fire zone is open and the DS7443 and DS7445 zone LEDs 1 6 will be on if one of those zones is faulted See Section 8 10 to enable Force Arming Force Arming during an AC power failure Regular arming of the control panel is not permitted during an AC power failure Having to Force Arm serves as a warning that the control panel is operating under backup battery WARNI
328. ing addresses 1521 1522 1525 and 0329 Program System Off Normal report in address 0336 Possible Solution Enter a valid disarm PIN and press then enter a valid disarm PIN and press again to display the zones Program as a multiple zone input for DS7432 or DS7460 a single zone input for contacts and sen sors or program as a DS7465 Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc Zone Problems Continued Svmptom Probable Cause Possible Solution Zones 9 and above show Not Ready a The multiplex expansion module is not a Make sure the multiplex expansion module is Zone Trouble installed properly seated properly in the upper pins on the DS7400xXi circuit board Multiplex wiring is missing or not in Check wiring and perform a system reset stalled properly 8 Input remote module DIP switches are Correctly set the DIP switches for the 8 Input re not set properly mote modules 8 Input remote module covers are re Replace covers or install the tamper bypass jump moved er The BusLoc code is set incorrectly or BusLoc can not be used with 8 Input remote has not been programmed into modules modules If using 8 Input modules remove the BusLoc code OR If using two input remote modules or the DS7465 be sure to use BusLoc when programming If not using BusLoc be sure to remove the Bus Loc code from address 9999 f Zone Programming is incorrect Program as a multiple zone input for DS74
329. ing down when installed Make sure all the pins are seated correctly in the socket The pins of the chip may be spread too wide to easily fit into the socket If so lay the chip on its side and gently roll it inward to press the pins toward the body of the chip 4 Restore power to the DS7080i Control Communicator 5 Discard the old ROM chip Refer to the DS7080i Reference Guide to complete the installation and or programming Detection Systems PTY Ltd Detection Systems PTY Ltd Detection Systems Int l Inc Detection Systems Ltd Unit 21 45 Gilby Road Unit 2 The Riverside Centre 19 Rue du 19 Mars 78130 Unit 13 18 17 F New Commerce Centre Mount Waverley Victoria 3149 Australia 148 James Ruse Drive Les Mureaux France 19 On Sum Street Shatin N T 61 3 9558 8088 Parramatta NSW 2150 Australia Phone Fax 33 1 34 74 9576 Hong Kong Fax 61 3 9558 8089 61 2 891 4944 852 2635 2815 Fax 61 2 891 5844 Fax 852 2648 7986 Detection Systems Inc 130 Perinton Parkway Fairport New York USA 14450 9199 Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc 716 223 4060 800 289 0096 Fax 716 223 9180 DS7080i ROM Update Kit Installation Guide P N 32113B Reference Guide for the DS7400Xi Version 3 Control Communicator Armed e Armed Perimeter A eeoeeee e Status NTO DT 1 Be Noe Pa a Power Power Bell Silenced Fire Fire Trouble 9 B Aveae Perimeter Perimeter Only nl
330. ing over anv voice announcement When the delav has ended the numeric message is sent This message includes the account number followed by up to 5 reports If a delay time greater than 10 seconds is required increments of 3 seconds can be added by programming the 3 character 3 second delay at the end of the phone number in address 4028 or 4038 For example if you call pager number 123 4567 and it takes 20 seconds after you finished dialing before you are allowed to enter the message the following digits should be programmed in address 4028 1234567 3 73 3 3 This will give you an overall delay of 22 seconds NOTE For Pager format it is not advisable to use the HEX character values 0 A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F in the report programming addresses 0256 through 0340 These characters could cause unpredictable results when sent to a pager system that only expects numeric characters between 0 9 This is the reason that this format will not allow an associated user number with an open and close report CAUTION Pager Format allows the use of the digit 0 as the reporting first digit Using a 0 as the reporting digit will disable the reporting in all other formats The following are recommended programming values for addresses 0256 through 0340 when using the Pager format NOTE The Pager format is an open loop format which has no acknowledge tone There is no indication at the control panel that the signal ha
331. ing the WDSRP Direct DS7412 Disabled Connection option for pro gramming Address 0206 DS7412 Enabled must be set for 1 0 Address 0207 must be set for 2 5 Enter the Data Digit as a Select Options jolijzj3j4 516 E wes eT Hams Trowbes erd Resors fel Jo Jof nsec fojo To moree Tojojojo 12 24 DS7412 RS232 Interface Configuration Programming Program Address 0207 Example DS7412 RS232 Interface Configuration Programming allows you to To program a 1200 Baud printer for No Parity Soft configure the DS7412 for your printer Most printers will operate us ware Flow Control 2 Stop Bits and 8 Data Bits ing the default values for the DS7412 Some printers may operate Data Digit 1 1 Data Digit 2 2 more efficiently using optional program values Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Consult the operating guide provided with your printer to be sure that Enter the Program Address 0 2 0 7 its configuration matches the one programmed here Enter Data Digit 1 1 Enter Data Digit 2 2 Note If using the WDSRP Direct Connection option for program jie Enterithe pound 90 Il ming Address 0206 must be set for 1 0 Address 0207 must Data Digit Program the next Address Program a different Ad be set for 2 5 dress or Exit the Programmer s Mode Select Option D Enter the Data Digit as a 300 Baud Select Options KN 23 4 5 Je 17 1200 Baud jNoparw Jejejeje 2400 Baud A CE 4800 Baud
332. ing the entry pre alert and during any day moni tor alarm It does not follow momentary keypad beeps such as keystrokes chimes etc e Access Output This is an output programmed to activate for 10 seconds when an access control PIN is entered at the keypad Not U L Listed for Access Control UL294 Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc e Panic Duress Output All outputs including the three on board outputs the Octal Relays and the Output Functions support a Panic Duress function To assign an output as a Panic Duress Output program the first data digit as 1 Program data digit two for the appropriate partition s This output will follow Duress acti vations Keypad Emergency Keys B and C and Invisible and Si lent Zone alarms It will reset after acknowledged by a user or after the burglary bell time out expires 7 5 Partition Control Programming e Partition Control Programming Up to eight partitions may be used They are assigned program address 0165 in order For example When using only one partition it is partition one When using three partitions they are partitions one two and three Partitioning allows the system to act as up to 8 different sys tems Zones keypads outputs and other items may be assigned to particular partitions Access to partitions may be through each partition s keypad or through a Master keypad see the operating section for more details Common Area
333. interior instant zone If this zone is violated while the system is armed and no entry exit zones have been violated it will activate an alarm If this zone is violated after an entry exit delay zone is violated it will follow that entry exit delay time This zone is bypassed by Perimeter Instant or Perimeter arm ing Interior Home Away This is a zone programmed to become an interior instant zone if the system is armed and an entry exit delay zone is violated during the exit delay time If the system is armed and an entry exit delay zone is not vio lated this zone will be bypassed This zone is bypassed by Perimeter Instant or Perimeter arm ing Interior Instant This is a zone programmed to activate an alarm even during the entry exit delay periods It is bypassed by Perimeter Instant or Perimeter arming Day Monitor This is a zone programmed to be a perimeter in stant zone when the system is armed When the system is disarmed any violation of this zone will activate the keypad sounders which will sound continuously until a disarm command sequence is entered The alarm outputs for this zone will not activate and there will be no report for this zone when the system is disarmed Keyswitch Input This is a zone programmed to allow the sys tem to be armed or disarmed using a Normally Open momentary keyswitch Outputs for keyswitch LEDs and sounders are available using the programmable outputs or the Oc
334. ion Systems fire security control panels This Users Guide is designed for the person performing a first time exploration of WDSRP This Guide does not assume that you have any knowledge of WDSRP It does assume however that you are familiar with the Microsoft Windows or OS 2 environment and that you are familiar with using menus icons clicking and double clicking It is run through Microsoft Windows version 3 1 or higher for its ease of use and accessibility This User s Guide is divided into 9 sections Section 1 Installing the Software This section will di cuss how to install the WDSRP software onto your computer Section 2 Getting Started This section will discuss procedures you should do as you first begin to use the WDSRP program Section 3 Quick Start Guide This section will orient you with the most basic operations of the WDSRP pro gram Section 4 Operating Guide This section will take you through the step by step operations of the WDSRP pro gram Section 5 History Section 6 Log out This section covers logging out from WDSRP Section 7 Utilities This section describes the various utili ties available in WDSRP Section 8 Direct Connection How to program panels direct ly from your computer without the use of a modem and phone lines Section 9 Quitting WDSRP The ways to exit the program Section 10 Troubleshooting This section covers trouble shooting tips for WDSRP Yo
335. ire Zone Report must be programmed e Low Battery Report Program Address 215 must be programmed e AC Failure Report Program Address 217 must be programmed B Timer Programming Bell Cutoff Times Program Addresses 167 and 168 must be programmed for not less than 4 minutes C Zone Programming e Fire zones must be programmed for alarm on short trouble on open not be crossed zoned or be part of custom arming D Alarm Output Programming e Program Address 008 must be programmed as Data Digit 1 0 For household fire installations only the output signal Program Address 009 may be pulsed or steady E General Control Programming Program Address 169 must be programmed as Data Digit 2 0 do not allow force arming 11 3 2 Grade A Household Burglary Alarm Grade A Household Burglary Alarm using Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter with local bell The control must be installed in accor dance with U L Standard UL1641 Required Accessories e Atleast one Wheelock 46T G10 12 bell or 34T 12 horn other Listed compatible devices with a voltage range of 10 2 to 14 0 V may be used is required for this application e The standard DS7080i enclosure can be used A Report Programming e Burglar Zone Reports must be programmed for those zones used e Low Battery Report Program Address 215 must be programmed e AC Failure Report Program Address 217 must be programmed B Timer Programming Bell Cutoff Times Program A
336. ire warning may be wasted unless the family has planned in ad vance for a rapid and safe exit from the building e Draw a floor plan of the entire house showing two exits from each bedroom and two from the house Since stairwells and hallways may be blocked during a fire the plan should provide exits from bedroom windows Make copies of the plan and practice it with all family members Pre arrange a meeting place outside and away from the resi dence Once out of the building all occupants should immediate ly go to the pre selected location to be accounted for Provide a barricade between family members and fire smoke and toxic gases e g close all bedroom doors before retiring Children should be instructed on opening their bedroom windows and exiting safely from the building If exiting is not possible they should be taught to stay at the open window and shout for help until it arrives In the event of a fire alarm after retiring wake the children by shouting to them from behind your closed door Tell them to keep their bedroom doors closed If the top of your bedroom door is uncomfortably hot do not open it There is most likely fire intolerable heat or smoke on the other DS7080i Reference Guide side Shout to all family members to keep their bedroom doors closed and to exit the building via alternate routes If the top of the door is not uncomfortably hot brace the bottom of the door with your foot and the top
337. isting mark of Underwriters Laboratories Inc The standby battery capacity is 7 AH 12 VDC The total nominal current must not exceed 800 mA when on standby or in alarm The control must be mounted indoors and within the protected area Enclosure tamper switches if used must be connected to a 24 hour zone Grounding must be in accordance with article 250 of the NEC NFPA 70 At least one U L Listed keypad with zone display must be connected Zones must be connected to U L Listed compatible devices Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 Reference Guide 50 Hz AC input cannot be used in U L Certificated installations The ground wire provided with the enclosure must be connected between the Earth GND connection on the control and the enclosure tab The kevpad panic alarm output must follow the corresponding zone s programming e g fire pulsing or steadv if nota combination burglary steady In all cases the special emergency keys must be silent The ground start feature shall not be programmed Compatible keypads are Detection Systems DS7443 DS7445 and DS7447 The Pager format must not be employed The alarm output must not be delayed 9 3 Programming the DS7060 When used in U L Certificated installations the control must conform to certain programming requirements The following is a list of the required program entries and required accessories for specific U L Certificated installations
338. it Delay Ki No Keypad Sounder during Exit Delay i Keypad Sounder during Exit Delay Keypad Sounder during Exit Delay PA 0203 PA 0205 Data Digit Data Digit Partition 3 Partition 7 No Keypad Sounder during Exit Delay i No Keypad Sounder during Exit Delay Keypad Sounder during Exit Delay Keypad Sounder during Exit Delay Partition 4 Partition 8 No Keypad Sounder during Exit Delay o No Keypad Sounder during Exit Delay Keypad Sounder during Exit Delay Keypad Sounder during Exit Delay DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 12 23 DS7412 RS232 Interface Control Programming Program Address 0206 Example DS7412 RS232 Interface Control Programming allows vou to enable or To program to enable the DS7412 and send Open Close Reports to the disable the DS7412 and to select which historv events are sent to the punter printer as they occur Selecting No Events will cause the history to be Data Digit 1 1 Data Digit 2 2 printed only on command To print the History Buffer starting from the most recent event enter the Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 inti Enter the Program Address 0 21 0 6 Master Code followed by 0 8 To stop printing enter Master Code Enter Data Digit 1 1 0 8 again Enter Data Digit 2 2 Enter the pound key Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode Select Option If us
339. it board Disabled Perimeter Instant 24 Hour Perimeter Delayed Interior Follower Interior Home Away Interior Instant Perimeter Homeguard Perimeter Follower Homeguard Silence Audible Keyswitch Toggle Keyswitch On Off 24 Hour Fire w Verify Fire Disabled These zones are not monitored and will not generate alarm or trouble conditions DOWPOMANODUAWDN AO Perimeter Instant These zones arm and disarm with the panel and never have entry or exit delays Violation of this type of zone will cause an intrusion alarm 24 Hour Auxiliary This zone type will cause an auxiliary alarm It is always active An alarm on a 24 hour zone fire or aux will be silenced by entering a disarm code whether the control is armed or not If the 24 hour zone restores and alarms again the alarm will sound again 24 hour zones may generate trouble conditions during armed or disarmed periods All 24 hour zones that have alarmed and are not restored will show as Not Ready They will prevent arming unless the panel is force armed 24 hour zones that have been bypassed manually will remain so until manually unbypassed even if the control is armed and disarmed Bypasses of these zones will be displayed on the keypad Perimeter Delayed These zones have entry or exit delays unless the panel is armed in the No Entry mode A delayed zone is ignored during the programmed times immediately following arming during the exit delay If the zone is
340. itions are disarmed are armed or an alarm has occurred All partitions are armed and no alarms have occurred Not ready to arm if the Armed Light is on all partitions are armed One or more zones are bypassed Status green All partitions are ready to arm Normal Operation exist See Error Displays The control panel is running on AC power with no problems Power The control panel has lost Control panel problems green all power no AC or battery There are no fire alarms A fire zone is in alarm A fire trouble condition exists 9 2 Arming from the Master Keypad Arming from the Master Keypad Arming all the Partitions you have access to Enter your PIN followed by one of the arming sequences This will arm all of your partitions even if some are already armed You must enter Single Partition Mode to arm the necessary partitions one at a time Enter your PIN followed by the key twice 1 2 3 4 IF The first partition you have access to will be displayed Ready to Arm Cafeteria Arming only some of Complete the arming command sequence you wish for this partition On your Partitions Move to the next partition you have access to by pressing the key twice The next partition you have access to will be displayed Ready to Arm Office Complete the arming command sequence you wish for this partition After you have completed all the arming command sequ
341. k Pass word field Locate User Password Authority level Operator ID Name Enter this operator s Password Fill in the Password field Fill in another field if the password is not known and choose O K The User with that Password or information will now be displayed Key Select Choose the Key Select command from the right hand column com mand buttons The Select Search Key window will appear WDSRP User s Guide awl Select Search Key Password Name Authority level Operator ID This command is used to organize the User database The User database may be organized according to the following Pass word Name Authority Level or Operator ID Reports not implemented Choose the Reports command from the right hand column command buttons This command is used to print information on a single User or a group of Users Close Choose the Close command from the right hand column command buttons This command will return you to the WDSRP Log in window 5 0 HISTORY To access History select History from the WDSRP Main window The History for all Accounts window will appear History for All Accounts E Account Day Date Time PH Event BACKLUND Mon 4 15 1996 8 54 AM Open by user 5 BACKLUND Mon 4 15 1996 8 54AM Open by user 5 BACKLUND Mon 4 15 1996 11 50 AM Close by user 4 at level 1 BACKLUND Mon 4 15 1996 11 50 AM Open by user 4 BACKLUND Mon 4 15 1996 1 43PM Close by user 4 at level 1
342. keep holding the ground wire while installing the control Insert the three support posts into the control retainer holes as shown in the diagram Slide the top of the control into the retainer tabs the slots under the top frame Once in the retainer tabs the control will rest on the three support posts Secure the bottom of the enclosure by screwing the bottom three holes through the support posts and through to the control retain er holes CAUTION Once the control is installed be sure to connect its ground wire to the top hinge of the enclosure the un painted tab o M 1X00 ZSA Program 8M Pad LOO COOCOO Control Communicator Ground Tab Retainer Tabs J Control Retainer Holes 3 1 DI Support Posts il P7 NE E JE 0 0 Wire Entrances 6 DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide b Ja gt ZD Enclosure Copvright O 1995 96 Detection Svstems Inc 3 0 Control Terminal Wiring WARNING Before servicing remove all power including the
343. l the sounder will again issue one long beep If the test fails the keypad sounder will turn on continuously To silence the sounder enter your PIN followed by the key or press the key TYPE OF TEST COMMAND WHAT WILL WHAT TO DO SEQUENCE HAPPEN Communicator Commercial Mode A long beep will sound If test fails the keypad Test PIN 8 2 sounder will beep 3 times e A Test report is sent to the NOTE Requires Residential Mode monitoring service NOTE This test may take Addresses 36 8 2 several minutes to complete Communicator Test because the control will try Report Address 37 several attempts before it Account Code Phone fails this test A retry will 1 Address 38 Phone 1 occur 30 minutes after failure Format and Address 40 and then 24 hours thereafter 41 Phone 1 to be programmed 5 14 Read Alarm History This feature will display which zones were in alarm during the last armed period The alarm memory will remain from one armed cycle to the next if no new alarms occur Alarm memory will clear when entering programmers mode TYPE OF TEST COMMAND WHAT WILL HAPPEN WHAT TO DO SEQUENCE Read Alarm Commercial Mode DS7447 The last alarm to take Historv PIN 8 9 place will be displayed To exit from the Alarm History Mode press the Residential Mode key 8 9 DS7443 DS7445 The zone LEDs will flash for any zones that have alarmed To exit the Alar
344. l Box as shown above 3 Program Zone 8 as a 24 hour zone Program Address 007 must be programmed as Data Digit 1 2 Data Digit 2 2 Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc DS7080i Reference Guide 12 0 Report Programming Suggested Values 12 1 4 2 Format For Additional Information see Programming Addresses 174 230 Reports with Restorals Report Restoral Trouble Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 Zone 7 Zone 8 Low Battery AC Failure System Trouble Keypad Fire Keypad Emergency Keypad Panic Reports without Restorals Report Report Report Successful Unsuccessful Open Remote Program Close Local Program KARA Kara Partial Close First Open after Alarm Report Automatic Comm Test no DS7080i Reference Guide Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc 12 2 BFSK Format For Additional Information see Programming Addresses 174 230 Reports with Restorals Report Restoral Trouble Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 Zone 7 Zone 8 Low Battery AC Failure System Trouble No Keypad Fire Keypad Emergency Keypad Panic Reports without Restorals Report Report Report Successful Unsuccessful Open Remote Program Close Local Program Partial Close First Open after Alarm Report Automatic Comm Test falo Page 54 Copvright O 1995 97 Detection Svstems Inc DS7080i Reference Guide 12 3 Pager Format The Pager format allows the control panel to dial a digita
345. l Information 4 4 2 Find Template Window Commands Insert New Locate Kev Reports not implemented 4 5 Users 4 5 1 User General Information 4 5 2 Find User window Commands Locate Kev Kev Select Reports not implemented 5 0 HISTORV 6 0 LOGOUT 7 0 UTILITIES 8 0 DIRECT CONNECTION 9 0 QUITTING WDSRP 10 0 TROUBLESHOOTING WDSRP 10 1 The Status Bar 10 2 Troubleshooting Tips WDSRP Users Guide Copvright O 1994 96 Detection Svstems Inc SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT Detection Svstems Remote Programming Software for Microsoft Windows IMPORTANT This software relates to security Access should be limited to authorized individuals This software contains provisions for setting security passwords Appropriate security levels should be established and passwords should be set before allowing operating personnel access to this software The original disk should be safeguarded against unauthorized use In addition DS security fire controls contain passwords to prevent unauthorized access these passwords must also be set and their identity carefully safeguarded Please read the following license agreement prior to installing and operating the software Part of the software installation procedure consists of entering your company name as an acceptance of this license agreement Do not complete this procedure unless you agree to the following terms You MAY Use the WDSRP program only on a single computer Copy the pro
346. l activate a panic alarm when pressed for 2 seconds nothing will display at the keypad to indicate an alarm 8 14 Address 20 Report Control NOTE Closing Reports and subsequent Open Reports are only sent when the system is fully armed PIN ON Commercial Mode or ON Residential Mode DEFAULT 7 OPENING CLOSING REPORTS 0 Disabled don t send Opening and Closing Reports Always send Opening amp Closing Reports do not send Bypass Reports for any zone bypassed or force armed Always send Opening amp Closing Reports and send Bypass Reports for each zone bypassed or forced armed even if swinger shunted for troubles but not for interior bypass Only Send Opening amp Closing Reports if any zones are bypassed or force armed and send Bypass Reports for each of these zones even if swinger shunted for troubles but not for interior bypass OPEN CLOSE REPORT ROUTING Do Not Report not allowed for alarm report Phone 1 Only Phone 2 Only Both Phones 1 and 2 Phone 1 Phone 2 as backup ONE ALARM RESTORAL BYPASS REPORT ROUTING Do Not Report not allowed for alarm report Phone 1 Only Phone 2 Only Both Phones 1 and 2 Phone 1 Phone 2 as backup LL OTHER REPORT ROUTING SYSTEM ROUTING Do Not Report not allowed for alarm report Phone 1 Only Phone 2 Only Both Phones 1 and 2 Phone 1 Phone 2 as backup N OM O RoNM OOFPIFWN O Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 Reference Guide
347. l also issue a pulsed tone during the entry delay instead of the usual steady tone e If the alarm has not been previously investigated do not enter the building unless accompanied by the appropriate Emer gency Services personnel This chart explains proper procedures for disarming and or silencing alarms TYPE OF DISARMING COMMAND WHAT WILL HAPPEN 01 0 5 e Disarming the System PIN Off The red Armed light will turn off Pre alert sounders will silence Silencing Alarms PIN Off The red Armed light will turn off Zone LEDs on the DS7443 or DS7445 will turn off Alarms in progress will silence Turning Off disarming the System under Duress A duress code is used when someone demands by threatening your life or well being that the system be turned off When used the code will both turn off the system and report a silent duress alarm if connected to a monitoring service User code 14 can be optionally configured as a duress code User code 14 will not arm the system or report duress if the system is not armed Extreme care should be used when entering your PIN to turn off the system so a duress code is not inadvertently entered User Code 14 is not a duress code by default You must program the control panel that User Code 14 is the duress code See Section 8 9 Address 09 for more information Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 User Guide 1 7 Force Arming When one or more zones are faulted t
348. l pager and leave a numeric message which includes an account ID and report type The telephone number is dialed when a report is available At the completion of the telephone dialing a fixed time delay equal to 10 seconds occurs This delav allows time to connect with the pager service while skipping over anv voice announcement When the delav has ended the numeric message is sent This message includes the account number followed by up to 5 reports If a delay time greater than 10 seconds is required increments of 3 seconds can be added by programming the 3 character 3 second delay at the end of the phone number in address 296 or 306 For example if you call pager number 123 4567 and it takes 20 seconds after you finished dialing before you are allowed to enter the message the following digits should be programmed in address 296 123456 7 3 3 3 3 This will give you an overall delay of 22 seconds Note Some paging systems do not have a voice announcement and expect data entry within the first three to five seconds Due to the built in 10 second communicator delay the paging system may hang up before the reports are sent If this problem occurs contact your pager provider about adding a voice announcement or a delay For Pager format it is not advisable to use the HEX character values 0 A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F in the report programming addresses 174 through 230 or as part of the Account Code addresses 233 and 2
349. l send them igit 1 1 Data Digit 2 1 ka a eA dar See Glossary Section 6 7 for further details Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Program Address 1 5 9 PA 159 Enter Data Digit 1 1 rar Enter Data Digit 2 i Data Digit Enter the Pound button Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the 1 2 Programmer s Mode E Select Option DD Disabled a l Send Opening and Closing reports Send Opening and Closing reports and Closing reports Send Opening and Closing reports and Trouble Select Option po reports for each zone bypassed or force armed Do not send reports for Day Monitor Only send Opening and Closing reports for each 3 zones when they are disarmed of these zones Send Trouble reports if bypassed or force armed Send Trouble reports for Day Monitor zones when they alarm while disarmed Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc DS7080i Reference Guide 10 10 Report Control Programming Program Addresses 160 161 PA 160 Data Digit 1 2 Data Digit 1 is for Opening Data Digit 2 is for Zone and Closing reports Alarm Zone Restoral and Zone Trouble re ports Select Option DD 0 raw ipronenuntart Iil L CJ Data Digit 1 2 Data Digit 1 is for all Select Option pp oar teens 0 reste Prenenumbert 1H Report to Phone Number 2 2 f Data Digit 2 0 Report to Phone Number 1 and 2 must be a 0 10 11 Phone Number
350. larm Latch on Any 16 Zone Bypass 1 37 Zone Fire 15 Zone Problems 79 Zone Programming 16 Zone Pulsing Fire 18 Zone Test 1 27 Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc PRODUCT UPDATE CONCERNS U L C Commercial Fire Applications Detection Systems Inc Service 800 374 7454 AFFECTS DS7400Xi Control Panel 130 Perinton Parkway Sales 800 289 0096 l Fairport N Y 14450 716 223 4060 DATED February 16 1996 cts L DS7400Xi Reference Guide Addendum For DS7400Xi Underwriters Laboratories of Canada U L C Commercial Fire Applications the following two modifications are required 1 Do notuse the enclosed transformer instead use a CSA approved Class 2 transformer that is approved for fire monitoring station applications such as the Basler S19591 0028 2 Connect the earth ground terminal of the DS7400Xi control panel and the door and to the threaded ground stud on the base of the enclosure as shown below Also connect the earth ground of the transformer to the threaded ground stud on the base of the enclosure aoe o Ground tab n Control Communicator Iz 6 U OO BOND hreaded ound stud
351. larm sounding devices will operate for 2 seconds If power in your building has been off recently wait 2 hours for the battery to recharge and then try again The control will perform a Battery Test Battery Test PIN System Reset The control will report a Low Battery or a Low Battery Restoral if necessary Note If this test is performed from a Master Keypad it must be in Single Partition Mode DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 8 13 3 Communicator Test This test is available oniv if vour svstem transmits alarms and svstem information to a monitoring service and has been programmed bv the security installing company to permit communicator tests A long beep will initially sound to acknowledge the start of the test If the test is successful the sounder will again issue one long beep If the test fails the keypad sounder will turn ON continuously To silence the sounder enter you PIN followed by the key or press the key Command What will Happen What to Do T fT ype Oh nee Sequence Communicator If test fails the keypad sounder Test will sound continuously To Along beep will sound silence the sounder press the Requires PIN 8 2 System Reset key e A Test report is sent to the monitoring addresses Note This test mav take several service 0329 0504 yi minutes to complete as the 0529 and 1521 to control will try 10 attempts not b
352. larms are transmitted over the PAL200 e Low Battery Report Program Address 32 must be programmed e AC Failure Report Program Address 32 must be programmed Open Report Program Address 31 must be programmed Close Report Program Address 31 must be programmed 24 Hour Check In Reports Program Address 36 must be programmed Timer Programming e Entry Exit Delay Times Program Address 23 must be programmed for not longer than 60 seconds General Control Programming e Must be programmed for Swinger Shunts disabled Closing Ringback disabled and Force Arming disabled Pro gram Address 10 Zone Programming The Burglar alarm output signal Address 04 whether pulsed or steady must be different from the Fire alarm signal Alarm Output Programming e Program Address 08 must be programmed as X X 8 Grade A Installations using Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter with local bell Required Accessories The control must be mounted in the Detection Systems model AE7060CC enclosure with a cover actuated tamper switch installed The Ademco Model AB 12 bell housing see Section 9 4 Report Programming Burglar Zone Reports must be programmed for those zones used Low Batterv Report Program Address 32 must be programmed AC Failure Report Program Address 32 must be programmed Open Report Program Address 31 must be programmed Close Report Program Address 31 must be programmed Automatic Test Reports
353. lays Control panel problems are indicated by a flashing green Power light The DS7447 display will also read Control Trouble Enter 8 7 The DS7443 and DS7445 will only flash the green Power light The error messages may only be read when the control is disarmed Contact your installing company if the problems persist ACTION DESIRED ACTION DESIRED Read the Error Displav when the Green Commercial Mode Power light is flashing PIN 8 7 Residential Mode 8 7 Clear Error Display Commercial Mode Caution Clear the error display only on the PIN System Reset advice of your installing company or if you are Residential Mode certain the problem has been remedied PIN System Reset Battery Trouble and Communicator Err displays must be cleared by the System Reset command sequence even after the problem has been remedied These displays will not self clear All the other error displays will self clear from the keypads once the problem has been remedied Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 Reference Guide DS7447 AC Power Failure DS7443 or DS7445 LED 1 turns on steady There is a power failure and the panel is operating on backup battery DS7447 Battery Trouble DS7443 or DS7445 LED 2 turns on steady If the system has just been through a power failure wait at least two hours for the battery to recharge then enter a PIN System Reset to perform a battery test
354. ll also display the zone that is in the Trouble condition To clear the display Eliminate the cause of the Trouble condition Then enter a valid PIN followed by the Off key 4 4 Supervisory Signal During a Supervisory Signal e g wiring to supervisory zone has been shorted the keypad sounders will pulse once every 10 seconds The keypad display will read Supervisory with a zone number To silence the sounders Enter a valid PIN followed by the Off key If the cause for the Supervisory condition has been elimi nated the sounders will silence and the Supervisory display will be cleared If the cause for the Supervisory condition has not been eliminated the sounders will silence but the Supervisory display will not be cleared Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc To clear the display Eliminate the cause of the Supervisory condition Then enter a valid PIN followed by the Off key 4 5 Control Trouble During a Control Trouble the Power Light will be flashing and the keypad sounders will pulse every ten seconds The keypad display will read Control Trouble Press 87 A Control Trouble can be caused by several conditions e To silence a Control Trouble Enter a valid PIN followed by the Off key To determine the cause of the Control Trouble Enter a valid PIN followed by 8 7 One of the following will be displayed AC Failure AC power has been lost or has gone
355. ll scroll you back through the history line by line The 9 key will scroll you back in reverse chronological order by event A 6 will scroll you back up through the events toward the most recent by event Each event consists of two lines or display screens The first line screen will be the event title and user The second line screen will be the date of the event or the change being made To exit the Event History Mode press the key or wait 20 seconds and the keypad will exit automatically Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc DS7080i Reference Guide 8 0 Programming the DS7080i 8 1 Entering the Programmer s Mode To enter the Programmer s Mode enter the Programmer s Code followed by 0 Shorting the program pads see section 2 0 for location on the control panel will also activate the Program mer s Mode The default Programmer s Code is 9876 8 2 Reading back a Program Address Once you are in the programmer s mode to read back the value of a Program Address enter that Program Address followed by Each data digit is displayed DS7447 only one data digit at a time To view the second data digit enter the key again The display will look like this Prog Mode 1 00 Adr 000 D01 2 i This is the program address prog This is the value of this This is the data digit number data digit 8 3 Entering a value in a Program Address To enter a value in the Program Address enter the
356. m Address 0 5 3 2 Enter Data Digit 1 3 Enter Data Digit 2 4 Enter Data Digit 3 4 Enter Data Digit 4 3 Programmer s Code Enter the pound key Enter as 4 digits Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode It can not be the same as any PIN number The Default for the Programmer s Code 9876 Master Code programming defines what the Master Code will be This code is the highest authority level for a PIN If the Master Code is lost this address may be used to program a new one Program Address 0534 Otherwise the Master Code Programming Mode should be used to create PINs Data Digit that have a Master Code authority level 1 2 3 4 Master Code for User Number 001 has its authority ie fixed at level 0 It will always have access to all par titions Note Master Code PIN Number User Numbers 002 through 090 must be pro Default for this User 001 is 1234 grammed from the Master Code Programming Mode 12 32 Octal Relay Module Output Programming Program Addresses 1456 1471 The Octal Relay Module is the DS7488 See section 1 14 and 6 1 6 for further details Data Digit 1 2 mi Example To program the Octal Relay Module s Output f 9 3 to follow Output Function 1 Select Option Data Digit 1 3 Data Digit 2 1 Latch ON after Zone Alarm Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 ON during Entry Pre Alert E he P A
357. m Address 0320 must be programmed Close Report Program Address 0321 must be programmed 24 Hour Check In Reports Program Addresses 0329 and 0336 must be programmed Timer Programming Bell Cutoff Times Program Addresses 0195 and 0196 must be programmed for not less than 5 minutes Entry Exit Delay Times Program Addresses 0191 0193 must be programmed for not longer than 60 seconds General Control Programming Must be programmed for no swinger shunts Program Address 0000 data digit 2 enter 0 1 or 2 Program Address 0185 must be programmed as Data Digit 1 0 Data Digit 2 0 Commercial Fire Mode Programming Local Program Address 0186 data digit 1 enter as a 1 through 6 Central Station Program Address 0186 data digit 1 enter as a 7 through 2 The keypad panic functions are not intended to be a substitute for Listed manual pull boxes 13 6 Wiring and Programming information for installations using the Ademco AB 12 Bell Housing Ademco AB 12 Bell Housing Control Communicator To control Earth Ground Terminal 1 b z EOL Alternate EOL i not using a Fire car To control Loop Positive 27KQ Botection Bane Terminal 29 P N 28300 To control Zone 8 Input U a leal Terminal 30 8 Bell Tampers To control Alarm Output x
358. m History Mode press the key or wait 5 seconds and the keypad will exit automatically 5 15 Fire Reset Fire Trouble Fire Reset During a fire alarm exit the premises immediately When you have determined there is no fire you may silence the bells sirens before you can initiate the System Reset command PIN Off will silence the sounders This will allow a determination of which smoke detector has alarmed so the monitoring company may verify its operation A PIN followed by the System Reset key will reset any smoke detectors after a fire alarm has occurred See Section 8 8 Address 08 Outputs The System Reset command will perform a fire reset will perform a battery test and will clear all system troubles Fire Trouble A Fire Trouble display signifies a problem with the fire system such as a break in the wiring that monitors smoke detectors DS7060 Reference Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc A Fire Trouble will be indicated by a short beep from the keypad sounders every 10 seconds The DS7447 will display Fire Trouble followed by the zones in a trouble condition The DS7443 will turn the Fire light on steady and will light the corre sponding zone LEDs The DS7445 will turn the Fire and Trouble lights on steady and will light the corresponding zone LEDs Notify your installing company immediately if the Fire Trouble message is displayed The Fire Trouble beep can be silenced with any PIN follow
359. matic report 12 hours after the panel has been powered up and from that point on it will follow the interval selected by Address 48 The time before the first Automatic test report is sent can be adjusted between 1 and 24 hours after the panel has been powered up by setting Address 49 Hours to First Auto Test Report Communicator Test Report This report is sent as a result of initiating a Communicator Test a PIN 8 2 command sequence System Test This report is sent when a system test has been started using the 8 1 key sequence System Test Restoral This report is sent when the system test 8 1 has been completed or has timed out 8 31 Address 37 Account Codes 4 Digits 0000 through FFFF DEFAULT so 0000 ACCOUNT CODE 1 Phone 1 ACCOUNT CODE 2 Phone 2 If the account code is 0000 no reports will be sent If a 3 digit code is required when using pulse formats 3 1 and 3 1 with Parity the fourth digit must be 0 For ex ample If the account code is 121 program 1210 in the account code address If using personal dialing or Pager format an account code is still required even if the system does not report to a central station The account code must use digits 0 9 A F cannot be displayed on a pager DS7060 Reference Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc 8 32 Address 38 Phone 1 Format Address 39 Phone 2 Format PHONE FORMAT 0 Disabled 1 3 1 2 3 1E Extended Reporting 3 3
360. mation If the chart looks like this A combination of features is available to be programmed for that particular address Enter the Data Digit as a F Enter one of these numbers Select Options for the appropriate data digit Burglar Zone jjejjej je The dots represent which Ground Start e jeje options features are included Access Output with each selection Example To select a Burglar Zone only enter the data digit as a 1 To select a Burglar Zone and Identifies the options features Access Output available for this address enter the data digit as a 5 If the chart looks like this Only a single feature is available to be programmed for that particular address Select Option D B Disabled Oi Represents the option feature available for this address Perimeter Instant es To select Disabled Emy Eit Pet enter the data digit as a 0 Entry Exit Delay 2 To select Entry Exit Delay 2 A enter the data digit as a 4 Enter one of these numbers for the appropriate the data digit Some pages may also include a Default chart that looks like this Output Address Default 008 1 6 008 2 3 009 1 2 Page 22 Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc DS7080i Reference Guide 10 0 Programming the DS7080i 10 1 Zone Programming Programming Addresses 000 007 Example To program Zone 1 as Steady Alarm Output Alarm on Short Trouble on Open Interior Instant The DS7080i has 8 hard wired zones that may be p
361. me This is an output programmed to pulse for a fire alarm in the California Time cadence ten 1 2 second pulses followed bv one second of quiet time e Temporal This is an output programmed to pulse for a fire alarm in the Temporal cadence three 1 2 second pulses followed bv one second of quiet time 6 3 General Control Programming Normal Arming PIN On This command arms the entire system while allowing for entry exit delays Perimeter Instant Arming PIN No Entry Perimeter Only If programmed this command arms only the perimeter of the sys tem and does not allow entry delays for entry exit zones Perimeter Arming PIN Perimeter Only If programmed this command arms only the perimeter of the system while allow ing for entry exit delays Custom Arming PIN 4 If programmed this command allows custom arming of the system and bypasses specified zones Maximum Security Arming PIN No Entry On If pro grammed this command arms the entire system and does not allow entry delays for entry exit zones Level 6 Arming This is the report left in the history buffer that shows that the system has been force armed using any of the above Arming commands Closing Ring Back If programmed the keypad sounders and Bell will activate for 2 seconds after the system is armed and the closing report is successfully sent This requires Closing Ring Back and Closing Report to be programmed If a
362. ment You must upon request provide this information to your local telephone company The Ringer Equivalence Number of this device 0 1 B The REN is useful to determine the quantity of devices that you may connect to your telephone line and still have all of those devices ring when your telephone number is called In most but not all areas the sum of the REN s of all devices connected to one line should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that you may connect to your line you may want to contact your local telephone company to determine the maximum REN for your local calling area This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company This control should not be connected to party lines Should this equipment cause harm to the telephone network the telephone company may discontinue your service tempo rarilv If possible they will notify you in advance But if advance notice isn t practical you will be notified as soon as possible You will be informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC The telephone company may make changes in its facili ties equipment operations or procedures that could affect the proper functioning of your equipment If they do you will be notified in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone service Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 Reference Guide If you experience trouble with this equipment please conta
363. meter Only PIN No Entry On PIN 4 PIN Arming Sequence Bypass PIN Bypass followed by the Zone number Turning Off disarming your System PIN Off Commands for other System Features PIN 7 PIN 8 1 PIN 8 9 PIN System Reset PIN 8 2 PIN System Reset PIN Off to silence PIN System Reset to clear PIN 8 3 PIN 8 6 PIN 8 5 PIN 8 7 PIN System Reset PIN Bypass to clear Access Control Access Control PIN Off Detection Systems Ltd Unit 13 18 17 F New Commerce Centre 19 On Sum Street Shatin N T Hong Kong 852 2635 2815 Fax 852 2648 7986 Detection Systems Int l Inc 19 Rue du 19 Mars 78130 Les Mureaux France Phone Fax 33 1 34 74 9576 Detection Systems Inc 130 Perinton Parkway Fairport New York USA 14450 9199 716 223 4060 800 289 0096 Fax 716 223 9180 DS7080i Installation Instructions P N 27968C Table of Contents 1 0 Specifications 1 1 Enclosure Housing 1 2 Temperature 1 3 Power 1 4 Outputs 1 5 Zones 1 6 Keypads 1 6 1 DS7443 Keypad 1 6 2 DS7445 DS7447 Keypads Communicator i Users f Lightning Protection 1 10 Burglar Fire Zone Inputs 1 11 Fire Signal Initiating Circuit 2 wire mode 1 12 Standby Current Load 2 0 Enclosure Installation 2 1 Install the Enclosure 2 2 Install the Control Communicator 3 0 Control Terminal Wiring 4 0 System Worksheet
364. mmer s Mode See Glossary Section 6 5 for further details Data Digit 1 2 Select Option DD w LI Fire Kev Disabled 0 ii Fire Key Disabied 1 H Emergencv Select Option DD Emergency Special Emergency Key Disabled 0 A Key Special Emergency Key Silent Alarm mig B Special Emergency Key Steady Alarm Special Emergency Key Pulsed Alarm 10 7 Panic Key and Keypad Language Programming Program Address 157 Example Keypad Language programming Address 157 Data Digit 2 To program the Panic Key as having a Silent Alarm and the Keypad allows English French or Spanish to be selected for the Language as English keypad display Data Digit 1 1 Data Digit 2 0 Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Note Invalid choices e g numbers greater than 2 default the Enter the Program Address 1 5 7 display to English Enter Data Digit 1 1 Enter Data Digit 2 0 Enter the Pound button Data Digit Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the 1 2 Select Option DD Programmer s Mode Emergency Panic Key Disabled 0 ff Key Panic Key Silent Alarm is English 0 C Panic Key Steady Alarm 2f Panic Key Pulsed Alarm DS7080i Reference Guide Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc 10 8 Custom Arming Programming Program Address 158 Example Custom Arming programming allows the 4 key To program the 4 key sequence to bypass Zone 1 and Zone 7 se
365. mming e Program Address 10 must be programmed for Swinger Shunt disabled e Program Address 10 must be programmed as Force Arming disabled Alarm Output Programming e Program Address 08 must be programmed as X X 8 follow burglar and fire alarm s Program Address 04 must be programmed as and burglar zones 2 steady and fire zones 3 pulsing NOTE In a system that includes both fire alarm and burglar alarm devices the system must produce distinct sounds for fire and burglar alarm conditions either by using different indicating appliances or by using distinct cadences for the same appliance Local Burglary Alarm The control must be installed in accordance with U L Standards UL681 and UL609 for all grades of service Grade A Installations using Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter with local bell Required Accessories e The control must be mounted in the Detection Systems model AE7060CC enclosure with a cover actuated tamper switch installed e The Ademco Model AB 12 bell housing see Section 9 4 1 Report Programming Burglar Zone Reports must be programmed for those zones used Low Battery Report Program Address 32 must be programmed AC Failure Report Program Address 32 must be programmed Open Report Program Address 31 must be programmed Close Report Program Address 31 must be programmed 24 Hour Check In Reports Program Address 36 must be programmed Timer Programming e Bell Cutoff Times Program A
366. mote programming successful 55555535 6 NOT OFFICIALLY assigned Channel 7 of the System Reports report Remote programming failure report 55555515 6 NOT OFFICIALLY assigned Channel 7 of the System Reports Unspecified system trouble 55155555 6 System failure Channel 3 of the System Reports Unspecified system trouble restoral 55355555 6 System failure Channel 3 of the System Reports Recent closing report Acommunicator trouble occurred Acommunicator trouble has restored Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 Reference Guide Contact ID Format REPORTS CID EVENT CID DATA 0670 D FIELD Burglary alarm for a zone 130 Zone Number Fire alarm for a zone 110 Zone Number Keypad fire 110 Keypad fire restoral Keypad emergency 122 None Keypad panic 123 None Burglary restoral for a zone 130 Restoral Zone Number Fire restoral for a zone 110 Restoral Zone Number Burglary trouble for a zone 370 Zone Number Fire trouble for a zone 373 Zone Number Burglary trouble restoral for a zone 370 Restoral Zone Number Fire trouble restoral for a zone 373 Restoral Zone Number Open report 401 PIN Close report 01 Duress report Partial close report First open after alarm cancel report Low battery 302 Low battery restoral 302 Restoral AC failure 301 AC failure restoral System normal test report 602 Communicator test report Remote programming successful report Remote programming failure report Local programming
367. must be programmed 24 Hour Check In Reports Program Addresses 219 and 220 must be programmed Timer Programming Bell Cutoff Times Program Addresses 167 and 168 must be programmed for not less than 15 minutes Entry Exit Delay Times Program Addresses 164 166 must be programmed for not longer than 60 seconds General Control Programming Must be programmed for no swinger shunts and closing ring back Program Address 010 Data Digit 2 enter 0 1 or 2 Program Address 169 must be programmed as Data Digit 2 0 Program Address 171 must be set for Commercial mode Zone Programming The Burglar alarm output signal must be steady Alarm Output Programming Program Address 008 must be programmed as Data Digit 1 0 11 3 4 Police Station Connection The control must be installed in accordance with U L Standards UL611 and UL681 for all grades of service A Grades AA and A Installations using the Applied Spectrum PAL200 and the DACT Required Accessories The control must be a Detection Systems model DS7080iCC with a cover actuated tamper switch installed The Applied Spectrum PAL200 The Spectrum PAL200 must be installed within 3 feet of the control and the wiring control must be in conduit The Applied Spectrum PAL200 inputs should be connected to the alarm outputs the active alarm sounder output may be used Report Programming Programming shall be enabled to allow all alarm signals to be transmitted via the DACT a
368. n Restoral This report is sent when the zone alarm and trouble conditions are cleared The zone number will auto matically be sent for this report in SIA or Contact ID format Zone Function Trouble This report is sent when a zone trouble condition occurs This can be an open circuit if the zone is pro grammed for trouble on open a multiplex tamper switch being activated or a multiplex zone not communicating with the control panel The zone number will automatically be sent for this report in SIA or Contact ID format Open This report is sent when the system has been disarmed In SIA or Contact ID formats the user number for the person who disarmed the system will be sent with this report To send the user number along with an Open report in other formats program the extended digit of the report as 5 In Contact ID format the parti tion number will also be sent along with this report The Open report will only be sent if a Close report was sent previously Close This report is sent when the system has been armed In SIA or Contact ID formats the user number for the person who armed the system will be sent with this report To send the user number along with a Close report in other formats program the extended digit of the report as 5 In Contact ID format the parti tion number will also be sent along with this report Duress This report is sent when the system is disarmed using a duress code The user number will not be
369. n coin service provided bv the telephone companv This control should not be connected to partv lines Should this equipment cause harm to the telephone network the telephone company may discontinue your service temporarily If possible they will notify you in advance But if advanced notice isn t practical you will be notified as soon as possible You will be in formed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the proper functioning of your equipment If they do you will be notified in ad vance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone service If you experience trouble with this equipment please contact the manufacturer for information on obtaining service or repairs The telephone company may ask that you disconnect this equip ment from the network until the problem has been corrected or until you are sure that the equipment is not malfunctioning The repairs to this equipment must be made by manufacturer and not by the user To guard against accidental disconnection there is ample room to mount the Telco jack to the inside of the Control cabinet The operation of this Control may also be affected if events such as accidents or acts of God cause an interruption in telephone service 6 17 Canadian Dept of Communications General Installation Requirements Notice The Canadian Department
370. n exists This light is present on the DS7445 only This light is present on the DS7443 and DS7445 DS7060 User Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc 1 2 Personal Identification Numbers The Personal Identification Number PIN is the 4 digit code users enter at the keypad to gain access to the system A PIN may be assigned to each User Number 001 015 The User Number identifies each person using the system There are 15 possible User Numbers 001 015 Your system may have up to 15 different PINs each 4 digits long Each User Number can have only one PIN Attempting to assign the same PIN to multiple User Numbers will result in the three beep error tone and the change will not be made User Number 001 is designated as a Master Code It can be used to add delete read back or change other PINs User Number 001 is shipped from the factory with the sequence of 1234 This code should be changed to one of your personal preference PINs should never be programmed with common sequences such as 1111 or 2468 because they are easily violated Adding a PIN The following chart will guide you through the steps necessary to add or change a PIN It is recommended that this proce dure be performed at a DS7447 keypad No visual cues will be given from a DS7443 or DS7445 keypad STEPS TO CHANGE COMMAND SEQUENCE IF ACCEPTED A PIN THE DISPLAY READS 1 Enter the Master Code Master Code 0 Enter User No Programming Mode 0
371. nc e The edge of ceiling mounted detectors should be no closer than 4 inches 10 cm from any wall Place the top edge of wall mounted detectors between 4 and 12 inches 10 to 30 cm from the ceiling Dining Kitchen Bedroom Room Bedroom Bedroom Rec Room Bedroom Living Room Living Dining Room Room Basement k Smoke Detector Bedroom amp Smoke Detector Asmoke detector should be located on each Locate smoke detectors between sleeping story including basements but excluding crawl areas and family living areas spaces and unfinished attics For exact mounting information refer to the instructions provided with the smoke detectors Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 Reference Guide 6 0 SYSTEM WORKSHEETS Name Address City State Zip AC Voltage Control Panel Transformer Telephone Jack Account Number Information Telephone On Same Line as Panel Earth Ground Connection Alarm Sounder s DS7060 Reference Guide Keypad 1 Keypad 2 Keypad 3 Keypad 4 Contact Person Voice Phone Number Panel Phone Number Panel Answers Phone LI Armed LI Disarmed Equipment Location and Notes Battery Voltage VDC AUX Current Misc Notes Keypad Location Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc PIN NUMBER Example 710388 User 001 User 002 User 003 User 004 User 005 User 006 User 007 User 008 User 009 User 010 User 01
372. nce e Circuit voltage range e Total detector standby current 8 Circuits on board Class B latching 2 2 KQ P N 25944 provided 5 5 mA 22 mA 60 ohms 8 5 to 14 1 VDC 2 5mA 1 13 Multiplex Bus Wiring Requirements e 22 AWG 0 8 mm Up to 2000 feet 610 m per system e 18 AWG 1 0 mm Up to 5000 feet 1525 m per system 1 14 Option Bus Wiring Requirements e Maximum wire length 1000 feet 305 m per home run 1 15 Max Load Currents Max Load Currents Standby U L Installations 1 5A 25A Non U L Applications 2 0A 2 5A currents listed above per column Aux Power 8 Kevpad Combined Option Power Bell Output Programmable Output 2 Loop Power Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 1 16 Backup Batterv Calculation e The following table is used to calculate the standby battery capacity required by NFPA when using the DS7400Xi Device Quantity Standby Current Per Device Total Standby Current Quantity x Standby Current Per Device Alarm Current Per Device Total Alarm Current Quantity x Alarm Current Per Device DS7447 Keypad 100 mA 100 mA DS7445 Keypad 75 mA 75 mA DS7430 Multiplex Expansion 65 mA 65 mA DS7432 8 Input Remote 10 mA 10 mA DS7433 8 Input Direct 50 mA 65 mA DS7488 Octal Relay 10 mA 40 mA 10 mA 40 mA DS7416 ARDIS Module 127mA 127 mA DS7457 Single Zone Multiplex Input 3
373. nd placed within the enclosure Connect to the Options Bus of the control panel See the DS7420i Installation Instructions for further details e ADS7488 Octal Relay Module may be connected to the control panel and placed within the enclosure Connect to the Options Bus of the control panel This provides an additional 8 Form C relay outputs for the control panel See the DS7488 Installation Instructions for further details e ADS7430 Multiplex Expansion Module may be connected to the control panel via the expansion port This will allow for the connection of additional zones via the Options Bus See the DS7430 Installation Instructions for further details e Up to 15 DS7432s 8 Input Remote Modules may be connected to the DS7430 Connect to the Power and Bus terminals of the DS7430 This allows for a means of addressing up to 120 input loops of conventional contacts to the control panel See the DS7432 Installation Instructions for further details A Communications Module may be connected to the control panel via the Options Bus This allows for connection to the ARDIS radio network e Up to 128 zones are available for the connection of Single Multiple Input Output and Multiplex devices DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 5 0 Svstem Worksheet Account Number Information Name Contact Person Address _ Voice Phone Number Panel Phone Number City State Zip
374. nd PAL200 Burglar Zone Reports are not required since the alarms are transmitted over the PAL200 Low Battery Report Program Address 215 must be programmed AC Failure Report Program Address 217 must be programmed Open Report Program Address 210 must be programmed Close Report Program Address 211 must be programmed 24 Hour Check In Reports Program Addresses 219 and 220 must be programmed Timer Programming Entry Exit Delay Times Program Addresses 164 166 must be programmed for not longer than 60 seconds General Control Programming Must be programmed for no swinger shunts and closing ring back Program Address 010 Data Digit 2 enter 0 1 or 2 Program Address 169 must be programmed as Data Digit 2 0 Program Address 171 must be programmed for Commercial Mode Zone Programming The Burglar alarm output signal must be steady Alarm Output Programming Program Address 008 must be programmed as Data Digit 1 0 B Grade A Installations using Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter with local bell Required Accessories e The control must be a Detection Systems model DS7080iCC with a cover actuated tamper switch installed e The Ademco Model AB 12 bell housing see Section 11 4 1 Report Programming e Burglar Zone Reports must be programmed for those zones used Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc DS7080i Reference Guide Low Batterv Report Program Address 215 must be programmed AC
375. nder Test WHAT WILL HAPPEN DS7443 DS7445 The zone LEDs will flash for any zones that have not been tested DS7447 Test Zone will display followed by the zone number of any zones that have not been tested DS7443 DS7445 The zone LED will turn on steady for the zone that is currently being violated tested DS7447 Now Testing will be displayed followed by the zone number of the zone that is currently being voilated tested It returns to Test Zone after the violation WHAT TO DO Test each detector one at a time as instructed by the installing company To exit the Zone Test mode enter your PIN followed by or press the key This test uses the battery to manually activate all the system sounders for two seconds 8 5 only If the battery voltage is low a battery fault will occur TYPE OF TEST COMMAND SEQUENCE WHAT WILL HAPPEN WHAT TO DO If test fails the control panel will indicate a control problem Commercial Mode PIN 8 5 e All keypad lights will turn on NOTE Zone lights on the DS7443 and DS7445 will not turn on Local Battery Sounder Test Residential Mode 8 5 If power in your building has been off recently wait 2 hours for the battery to recharge and then try again e The keypad sounder and all alarm sounding devices will operate for 2 seconds Commercial Mode 7 The control panel will perform a battery PIN System R
376. nder Test is activated by entering a PIN followed by 8 5 This test activates the sounders using power from the battery thereby testing the battery If the battery is defective the system will go into a Control Trouble condition The system sirens and keypad sounders will activate for two seconds DS7420i Installation Instructions 5 0 FCC Compliance Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communica tions However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help 6 0 FCC P
377. ne Number 78 Alpha for Zone Number 79 Alpha for Zone Number 80 Alpha for Zone Number 81 Alpha for Zone Number 82 Alpha for Zone Number 83 Alpha for Zone Number 84 Alpha for Zone Number 85 Alpha for Zone Number 86 Alpha for Zone Number 87 Address 3046 3062 3078 3094 3110 3126 3142 3158 3174 3190 3206 3222 3238 3254 3270 3286 3302 3318 3334 3350 3366 3382 3398 3414 3430 3446 3462 3478 3494 3510 3526 3542 3558 3574 3590 3606 3622 3638 3654 3670 3686 3725 3726 3727 3728 3729 3730 3731 3732 3733 3734 3735 3736 3737 3738 3739 3740 4028 4038 4048 Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc Description Alpha for Zone Number 88 Alpha for Zone Number 89 Alpha for Zone Number 90 Alpha for Zone Number 91 Alpha for Zone Number 92 Alpha for Zone Number 93 Alpha for Zone Number 94 Alpha for Zone Number 95 Alpha for Zone Number 96 Alpha for Zone Number 97 Alpha for Zone Number 98 Alpha for Zone Number 99 Alpha for Zone Number 100 Alpha for Zone Number 101 Alpha for Zone Number 102 Alpha for Zone Number 103 Alpha for Zone Number 104 Alpha for Zone Number 105 Alpha for Zone Number 106 Alpha for Zone Number 107 Alpha for Zone Number 108 Alpha for Zone Number 109 Alpha for Zone Number 110 Alpha for Zone Number 111 Alpha for Zone Number 112 Alpha for Zone Number 113 Alpha for Zone Number 114 Alpha for Zone Number 115 Alpha for Zone Number 116 Alpha for Zone Number 117 Alpha for Zone N
378. ne Number Format Programming Program Addresses 0529 0530 12 29 1 Compatable Receivers 52 12 30 Phone Answering Programming Program Address 0531 52 12 31 Programmers and Master Code Programming Programming Addresses 0532 0534 53 12 32 Octal Relay Module Output Programming Program Addresses 1456 1471 53 12 32 1 Octal Relay Module Output Partition Assign ment Program Addresses 3725 3732 54 12 33 Output Function Programming Program Ad dresses 1472 1516 55 12 33 1 Output Function Partition Assignment Program Addresses 3733 3740 56 12 34 Dual Phone Line Bell Supervision Module Output Programming Program Address 1520 56 12 35 Call Out Timer Programming Program Ad dresses 1521 1524 57 12 36 Test Report and Remote Programmer Call Out Programming Program Address 1525 57 12 37 Alpha Description Programming Program Addresses 1526 3701 58 12 37 1 Alpha Description Programming A Worksheet 59 12 38 Phone Number Programming Program Ad dresses 4028 4038 4048 13 0 Installation Guide for U L Listed Systems 13 1 DS7400Xi U L Listings 13 1 1 U L Svstem Configurations 13 2 INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS 13 3 PROGRAMMING THE DS7400Xi 13 3 1 Household Fire Alarm using Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter with local bell 13 3 2 Grade A Household Burglarv Alarm using Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter with local bell 13 4 General Svstem Requirements 13 4 1 Local Burglarv Alarm 13 4 2 Police Station Connec
379. ne Reports must be programmed for those zones used Low Battery Report Program Address 215 must be programmed AC Failure Report Program Address 217 must be programmed Open Report Program Address 210 must be programmed Close Report Program Address 211 must be programmed 24 Hour Check In Reports Program Addresses 219 and 220 must be programmed Timer Programming Entry Exit Delay Times Program Addresses 164 166 must be programmed for not longer than 60 seconds General Control Programming Must be programmed for no swinger shunts and closing ring back Program Address 010 Data Digit 2 enter 0 1 or 2 Program Address 169 must be programmed as Data Digit 2 0 Program Address 171 must be set for the Commercial mode Zone Programming The Burglar alarm output signal whether pulsed or steady must be different from the Fire alarm signal Alarm Output Programming Program Address 008 must be programmed as Data Digit 1 0 11 4 Using the Ademco AB 12 Bell Housing Ademco AB 12 Bell Housing To control Earth Ground Terminal 1 Control Communicator To Control Zone Terminal 25 To control Zone 8 Input Terminal 26 8 To control Alarm Output Terminal 5 To control Alarm Output 4 ili _ lt TA Inner Bell Box Lining Luter Bell Box NN eei rov F 10d TAF 1 Disconnect the wire jumper from terminal 4 to the inner housing of the Bell Box 2 Connect wiring between the control and Bel
380. ne is violated first this zone is also delayed If an instant zone or this zone type is violated first this zone is not delayed This zone is not active during the exit delay Interior Home Away This zone becomes interior instant if the system is armed and an entry exit delay zone is violated during the exit delay time If the system is armed and an entry exit zone is not violated these zones will be bypassed These zones are bypassed if armed perimeter only Interior Instant These zones arm and disarm with the panel They are not active if the panel is armed in the perimeter only mode They never have entry or exit delays Violation of this type of zone will cause an intrusion alarm Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 Reference Guide Perimeter Homeguard This zone tvpe is active when the panel is armed When the panel is armed perimeter oniv this is a delaved zone When armed full this is an instant zone Perimeter Follower Homeguard These zones are always delayed when the panel is armed in the perimeter only mode When the panel is fully armed these zones are delayed if a delayed zone is violated first or instant if this zone or an instant zone is violated first Silence Audible A zone configured as Silence Audible will when activated cause the panel to shut off output PO3 and keypad sounders When this zone restores the sounders will reactivate if the timeout has not expired It is used to facilitate voice c
381. ne line should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that you may connect to your line you may want to contact your local telephone company to determine the maximum REN for your local calling area This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company This control should not be connected to party lines Should this equipment cause harm to the telephone network the telephone company may discontinue your service temporarily If possible they will notify you in advance But if advanced notice isn t practical you will be notified as soon as possible You will be informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the proper functioning of your equipment If they do you will be notified in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone service If you experience trouble with this equipment please contact the manufacturer for information on obtaining service or repairs The telephone company may ask that you disconnect this equipment from the network until the problem has been corrected or until you are sure that the equipment is not malfunctioning The repairs to this equipment must be made by manufacturer and not by the user To guard against accidental disconnection there is ample room to mount the Telco jack to the inside of the Control cabin
382. nes to be Force Armed Data Digit 1 1 Data Digit 2 A Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Program Address 1 6 9 Data Digit Enter Data Digit 1 1 Enter Data Digit 2 4 Enter the Pound button Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode Enter the DD asa Select Options 0 P iabieamngwanna fej T Keypad Aude during Ext Delay JO je Force Arming 2 sec alarm at manual arming Select Option PD i E ee Allow up to 1 zone to be Force Armed A El ip nes wo Foes Am 4 f Alon p 8 ones we Face amed 15 fH kerrejja Apr ta Foss Ames 18 l DS7080i Reference Guide Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc Arming Warning Control 10 15 Bvpassing Allowed Programming Program Address 170 Example Bvpassing Allowed programming determines which zones can be To program Zones 1 7 so that bypassing is allowed and Zone 8 so bvpassed Zones that can not be bvpassed can not be force armed Mal bypassing isnot alowed either Fire zones can never be manually bypassed but can be Data Digit 1 5 Data Digit 2 7 force armed Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Program Address 1 7 0 Data Digit Enter Data Digit 1 5 Enter Data Digit 2 7 Enter the Pound button Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode Enter the Data Digit
383. ng System parameters PINs Commercial fire Time windows AS 232 Ardis Save Cancel Accept this dialog box and changes made The Edit Template window will appear see figure above It is here where you choose the categories from which you will edit the system information Delete Choose the Delete command from the right hand column command buttons This command is used to delete this Template permanently from record Do you want to delete this record CAUTION data will be permanently lost Ei The data can t be recovered YES will delete this record i NO keeps the record A confirmation window will appear asking if you really wish to delete this Template Choose YES to permanently delete this Template or NO to keep this Template Account on record Locate Key Choose the Locate Key command from the right hand column com mand buttons This command is used to find a specific Template and have it displayed The Locate template window will appear with the cursor in the blank Equipment Type field Locate Template Select the Equipment Type to search for Fill in the Equipment Type field if known and select O K The Tem plates with that Equipment Type will now be available to scroll through scroll through the Template database by using the commands at the bottom of the window Beginning Previous Next and End of File WDSRP Users Guide If the Template ID is known type it in its fi
384. ng categories e Organize The Organize selection will enable WDSRP to automatically organize Account database settings for ALL Ac counts The categories for organizing are as follows select ing these categories will call up a confirmation window where you decide whether or not to complete the action im IE m z m EL fay 3 references In 3 ku H c Test Times This selection will organize the Account data base s Test Times It will arrange the control panel s test tim ers so they will call the central station at programmed inter Copyright 1994 96 Detection Systems Inc vals This will only update the database The control panels and WDSRP still must get in contact for this transfer of data to take place it will take place automatically upon contact Dump Times This selection will organize the Account da tabase s history dump times It will arrange the control pan els dump timers so they will call WDSRP at programmed intervals This will only update the database The control panels and WDSRP still must get in contact for this transfer of data to take place it will take place automaticallv upon contact Set Panel Time This selection will cause each control pan el timer to match the WDSRP timer taking into account hours from UTC This will only update the database The control panels and WDSRP still must get in contact for this transfer of data to take place it will take place automaticallv u
385. ng that an alarm has occurred The keypad will also issue a pulsed tone during the entry delay instead of the usual steady tone If the alarm has not been previously investigated do not enter the building unless accompanied by the appropriate Emergency Ser vices personnel 8 9 6 Fire Alarms Fire Alarms are silenced using the same procedure as intrusion alarms a PIN with disarm privileges the Off key The Fire Alarm system is not reset until alarms at smoke detectors are cleared by using the System Reset command The Fire Alarm system will not be functional until this procedure has been followed See the Fire Reset section 8 10 1 DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Command Sequence Duress Code Off What will Happen System will appear to disarm normally A Duress code will be sent to the central station 8 10 Fire Reset Fire Trouble 8 10 1 Fire Reset During a fire alarm exit the premises immediately When you have determined there is no fire you must silence the bells sirens before you can initiate the System Reset command PIN System Reset Before the System Reset command is used determine which smoke detector has alarmed so the monitoring company may verify its op eration A PIN followed by the System Reset key will reset any smoke de tectors after a fire alarm has occurred Note To use the System Reset command sequence your PIN must have disarm privileges The System Reset comm
386. ngs when in armed or disarmed states This feature can also be used to call the panel location and determine its arming state Answering Machine Bypass This feature allows the control panel to answer incoming calls when answering machines are used If the line rings stops ringing then rings again within one minute the panel will seize the phone line on the first ring To disable this feature program the control panel to answer on an even number of rings Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc 6 11 System Timers e Entry and Exit delay timers are programmed in 5 second incre ments For example to obtain an exit delay time of 45 seconds the program address must be filled in as a 9 9 x 5 45 Bell Cut off timers are programmed from 0 to 99 minutes Programming a Bell Cut off timer for 0 minutes will result in no time out for that output If the output is activated it will remain activated until it is si lenced from a keypad s The Automatic Test Report Interval may be set from 1 hour to 28 days The Hour that this report is sent is programmed in real time military time see addresses 284 and 285 6 12 Force Arming Programming Force Arming If programmed allows violated zones to be force armed When force arming the user must enter the usual arming com mand followed by the Bypass key This automatically bypass es zones that are violated and programmed as bypassable Fire zones key
387. nterval Asingle beep will sound The red Armed light will turn on steady after the exit delay interval The yellow Perimeter light DS7445 will turn on steady Only exterior protection zones will be armed Move freely around the interior Maximum Security Arming No one left on the premises There is NO entry delay in effect An alarm WILL occur upon entry Commercial Mode PIN No Entry On Residential Mode No Entry On The red Armed Light will begin to flash The green Status light will turn off Armed Instant will be displayed DS7447 Exit Now will display DS7447 during the exit delay interval Asingle beep will sound The red Armed light will turn on steady after the exit delay interval Exit during the exit delay interval CAUTION Violating any zone after the exit delay interval will cause an instant alarm NOTE In commercial burglar applications for U L Certificated systems a ring back indication and bell test should be heard after arming closing If not heard call for service NOTE Ifthe system has invisible zones that are not ready they will be displayed during the arming sequence The display of invisible zones will remain on until the zone is cleared or bypassed DS7060 User Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc 1 4 Quick Arming the System If Quick Arming is not used a PIN must be entered at the beginning of all arming command sequ
388. ntrol Communicator under the method required by Underwriter s Laboratories e 2 wire smoke detectors that are not listed as compatible should not be used with the DS7080i e When mixing different model number detectors manufactured by Detection Systems a maximum of 20 detectors may be used per loop e 2 wire smoke detectors of different manufacturers or detectors of different model numbers not manufactured by Detection Systems may not be mixed on the same circuit e At this time U L does not require compatibility cross listing of smoke detectors when installed in a 4 wire configuration Listed 4 wire smoke detectors must be rated to operate over the range of the panel s output Detection Systems DS200 DS200HD A MB200 2W B 20 Detection Systems DS250 DS250TH AorB MB2W or MB2WL A 20 Detection Systems DS260 A MB2W or MB2WL A 20 Detection Systems DS282 DS282TH B N A N A 20 Electro Signal Lab 425C S10 N A N A 20 Electro Signal Lab 425CT S10 N A N A 20 Electro Signal Lab 611U S10 601U S00 20 Electro Signal Lab 611UT 10 601U S00 20 Electro Signal Lab 612U S10 601U S00 20 System Sensor 1400 A N A N A 20 System Sensor 2300T A N A N A 20 System Sensor 2400 A N A N A 20 System Sensor 2400TH A N A N A 20 System Sensor 1451 A B401 or B401B A 20 System Sensor 1451DH A DH400 A 20 System Sensor 2451TH A B401 or B401B A 20 System Sensor 2451 A B401 B401B A 20 or DH400 Disclaimer Notice Detection Systems Inc makes no claim either written
389. ocedure for bvpassing a faulted zone prior to arming the svstem TYPE OF BYPASSING COMMAND WHAT WILL DESIRED SEQUENCE HAPPEN Bvpass Faulted PIN Bypass Zone The Status light will begin to flash if no Zones other zones are violated Read Bypassed PIN Bypass Bypass will be displayed DS7447 Zones followed by the zone number of any bypassed zones The DS7443 or DS7445 will flash the zone LED of the zone being bypassed Clear Individual PIN Bypass Zone Individual zone bypasses will be cleared Bypassed Zone s Clear all PIN Bypass All bypasses will be cleared Bypasses If in Residential Mode substitute the f key for the PIN NOTE All bypasses are cleared when the system is disarmed unless they are on 24 hour zones To clear a bypass ona 24 hour zone use Clear Individual or Clear All 1 10 Chime Mode Chime Mode causes the keypad sounders to beep each time a Perimeter or Entry Exit zone is violated while the control panel is off disarmed The 7 command is used to both turn Chime Mode off and on This chart explains the procedure for turning ON and turning OFF Chime Mode ACTION DESIRED COMMAND WHAT WILL HAPPEN 21701017 e Turn ON PIN 7 The keypad sounders will beep for 2 seconds each Chime Mode time a perimeter or entry exit zone is violated The DS7447 display will read Chime Mode On for 5 seconds Turn OFF PIN 7 The DS7447 display
390. of Communications label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety require ments The Department does not guarantee the equip ment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is per missible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommuni cations company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any re pairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equip ment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and inter Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc nal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Caution U
391. ogram Addresses 0191 0196 Example A tos To program the Entry Delay Time 1 for 60 seconds Entry and Exit Delay Timers are in Data Digit Poa er a a 5 second intervals the maximum Data Digit 1 1 Data Digit 2 2 l delav time is 255 seconds Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 k Enter the Program Address 0 1 9 1 For example Enter Data Digit 1 1 5 sec 01 Enter Data Digit 2 2 15 sec 03 Exit Delay Time Enter the pound key 20 sec 04 Program the next Address Program a different een Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode 30 sec 06 Address 0193 ee 0 to 51 0 to 255 sec Default 12 60 sec 255 sec 51 5 second intervals Data Digit Data Digit 1 2 1 2 May be forced to a different value when in a Commercial Fire Mode See section 14 13 3 Entry Delay Time 1 Fire Bell Cutoff Address 0191 Address 0195 0 to 51 0 to 255 sec Default 09 45 sec 0 to 99 minutes Default 04 minutes 5 second intervals 1 minute intervals Data Digit Data Digit 1 2 1 2 wE Entry Delay Time 2 i i l Burglarv Bell Cutoff l I l Address 0192 Address 0196 0 to 51 0 to 255 sec Default 09 45 sec 0 to 99 minutes Default 04 minutes 5 second intervals 1 minute intervals 12 20 A C Fail Report Delay Programming Program Address 0197 Example f To program the A C Fail Report Delay Time to be The A C Fail Delay Times are programmed as
392. ogramming defines what the Master Code To programming Master Code t be teen will be This code is the highest authority level for a PIN see Data Digit 1 4 Data Digit 2 5 Data Digit 3 5 Data Digit 4 4 Section 7 16 Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Program Address 2 4 1 Enter Data Digit 1 4 Enter Data Digit 2 5 Enter Data Digit 3 5 Enter Data Digit 4 4 Enter the Pound button iea E Program a different Address or Exit the Prog ram Address 241 Data Digit 1 2 3 4 LILILILI Master Code PIN Number Default for User 001 is 1234 If the Master Code is lost this address mav be used to program a new one Otherwise the Master Code Programming Mode should be used to create PINs that have a Master Code authoritv level Master Code for User Number 001 has its authority fixed at level 0 Note User Numbers 002 through 015 must be programmed from the Master Code Programming Mode DS7080i Reference Guide Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc 10 22 Cross Zoning Control Programming Program Addresses 279 282 Example Cross zoning Control programming determines which zones To program Zone 1 to be cross zoned with ALL zones and Zone 2 to mav be cross zoned to each other be cross zoned with Zone 6 Data Digit 1 1 Data Digit 2 6 Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Program Address 2 7 9 Enter Data Digit 1
393. oke mav be circulated awav from the detector Locations near air inlets should be favored Avoid areas subject to normal smoke concentrations such as kitch The following are some general considerations ens garages or near fireplaces Do not install smoke detectors where normal area temperatures are above 100 degrees F 38 degrees C or below 32 degrees F 0 degrees C Room Bedroom Dining Kitchen Bedroom Rec Room i B Dining 2 eee Bedroom Areas of high humidity and dust concentrations should be avoid ed K xk Smoke Detector Basement Locate smoke detectors between sleeping areas and family living areas Smoke Detector Bedroom The edge of ceiling mounted detectors should be no closer than 4 inches 10 cm from any wall A smoke detector should be located on each story including basements but excluding crawl spaces and unfinished attics Place the top edge of wall mounted detectors between 4 and 12 inches 10 to 30 cm from the ceiling 8 13 Testing 8 13 1 Zone Test The Zone Test is used to confirm that detectors will report alarms Zone Test works on all zones except 24 hour zones and fire zones While the keypad is in Zone Test no reports will be sent and no control panel alarms will activate an alarm except 24 hour zone alarms and fire alarms These will override the Zone Test function Command What to Do Sequence What will Happen DS7447 Test Zone will display f
394. old the key while pressing the 6 key to decrease the brightness Note After the Keypad Sounder Volume or Backlight has been adjusted you must arm then disarm the system once to store this information in the control panel If power is disconnected before you arm the system the settings will be lost Special Emergency Key Labeling Do NOT label if unprogrammed If labeling the unmarked key in the lower left corner of the keypad MUST be labeled as the FIRE key because of its programming values pre set in the control panel The unmarked center key should be labeled as the Special Emergency key The unmarked right key should be labeled as the Panic key See the graphics below Y U Fire Special Panic Emergency Commercial Fire Applications DS7400Xi Controls Only Single Keypad Use in Commercial Fire Systems The keypad must be used on the keypad bus and mounted to the front of the control enclosure OR if within the same room as the control equipment with the wire run in conduit or equivalently protected against mechanical injury within 20 feet of the control equipment The keypad must be assigned as keypad address 1 Multiple Keypad Use in Commercial Fire Systems One keypad only must be used on the options bus and assigned as keypad address 11 14 The keypad must be mounted to the front of the control enclosure OR if within the same room as the control equipment with the wire run in conduit or equivalently protect
395. ollowed by the zone number of any zones that have not been tested DS7445 The Zone LEDs will flash for any zones that have not been tested DS7447 Now Testing will be displayed followed by the zone number of the zone that is currently being violated being tested It returns to Test Zone after the violation DS7445 The Zone LED will turn on steady for the zone that is currently being violated tested Test each detector one at a time as instructed by the Zone Test installing company PIN 8 1 To exit the Zone Test mode enter your PIN the key Note This test can not be performed from a Master Keypad 8 13 2 Battery Sounder Test If a power failure occurs your control panel has a built in battery that will continue to power the control panel for several hours The control panel automatically recharges the battery when power is restored In addition to an automatic battery test performed every 4 hours the battery may also be tested manually This test also uses the battery to manually activate all the system sounders for 2 seconds 8 5 only If the battery voltage is low a battery fault will occur see Error Display Command T fT ype ol test Sequence What will Happen What to Do If test fails the control will indicate a Control Problem See Error Local All keypad Lights will turn on displays section 9 20 Battery PIN 8 5 Sounder Test e The keypad sounder and all a
396. ollows 0 ON when system is armed Disabled jeb Zone alam BurgarAam fe e Zone Alarm delayed by 20 sec FireAlam ele Keypad Sounder output Data Digit 1 6 Data Digit 2 1 Access output 10 560 pulse Data Digit 1 Options 1 1 are used to program an Output Panic Duress output Function to follow status events for individual partitions Data Digit 1 Option 2 is used to program an Output Function to follow status events system wide Follow a single zone Data Digit 1 Options 3 5 are used to program an Output I Follow two zones When EITHER zone changes state Function to follow acone or two o es in an Input Output Follow System Status Event Follow two zones When BOTH zones change state Data Digit Select Option DD DD eSelect Option 2 AC Power Failure 1 7 Radio Receiver Fault tow Baty 2 e Ax Power Fast Communication Faire 3 o Fie Trouble Mutpex Bus Fat e 2 Duress PIN 0 2 are Hex values They will display as A C at the keypads Data Digit Data Digit Data Digit 1 2 1 2 1 2 Enter Data Digit as a few Jojtjejsiejsjezjajs Fo f f2 f zone beat JO I E eee oc When zone is shorted jelelelelele elelelele 01 99 Follow When Zone is opened jel fe je jel je jel oe nenoras l jejejeje lelo Wrens el lele jejejeje mmen 1 l lelelejejeje This is only for DS7465 Outputs DS7488 Outputs will not latch when this is selected Enter
397. om windows and exiting safely from the building If exiting is not possible they should be taught to stay at the open window and shout for help until it arrives In the event of a fire alarm after retiring wake the children by shouting to them from behind your closed door Tell them to keep their bedroom doors closed If the top of your bedroom door is uncomfortably hot do not open it There is most likely fire intolerable heat or smoke on the other side Shout to all family members to keep their bedroom doors closed and to exit the building via alternate routes If the top of the door is not uncomfortably hot brace the bottom of the door with your foot and the top with one hand then open the door about one inch Be prepared to slam the door shut if there is any pressure against the door or if any hot air rushes in If there is no evidence of excessive heat or pressure leave the room and close the door behind you Shout appropriate instruc tions to all family members and immediately leave the building via the pre planned routes If heavy smoke is present drop to your hands and knees or crawl to remain below the smoke level Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 8 12 3 Installation Considerations Proper location of detection devices is one of the most critical fac tors in a fire alarm svstem Smoke detectors should not be installed in dead air spaces or close to ventilating or air conditioning outlets because sm
398. ommunication for listen in modules Keyswitch Toggle Each time this zone is closed it will toggle the armed state of the panel It has a 300 ms response time No alarms or trouble conditions are generated by a zone of this type Optionally to support this feature the panel will generate a single siren beep for arm actions and a double beep for disarm actions Keyswitch On Off When this zone is closed it will arm the panel When it is shunted by an EOL supervised the panel will be disarmed No alarms or trouble conditions will be generated by a zone of this type Opening the zone will not affect the arming state of the control 24 Hour Fire with Verification If a fire zone alarms and it is programmed for verification the control will interrupt the programmable output s set as a switched power return for 10 seconds During the 10 second power interruption and for 5 seconds after power restoral it will ignore all zone status on all fire zones to ignore inrush currents After five seconds it will monitor all fire zones for two minutes If any fire zone returns to alarm within the two minute window it will create a fire alarm condition If a fire zone does not go into alarm within the two minute window it will disregard the initial trip If another alarm occurs on a fire zone with verification after the two minutes it will start the process over After any fire zone is in alarm all subsequent fire zones are treated as instant no verification
399. on the keypads It also determines a silent pulsed or steady alarm Data Digit 1 2 Data Digit 2 2 Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 61 0 See Glossary section 7 7 for further details Enter the Program Address 0 1 8 1 Enter Data Digit 1 2 Enter Data Digit 2 2 Enter the pound key Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode PA 01 81 Data Digit Select Option pp 1 2 Fire Key Fire Key Disabled il 777 _ p A Fire Key Disabled a Fire Key Steady Alarm 2 F Fire Key Pulsed Alarm May be forced to a different value when in Select Option DD Commercial Fire Mode See section 12 15 3 Special Emergency Key Disabled Emergency Key Special Emergency Key Silent Alarm KE B Special Emergency Key Steady Alarm 2 Special Emergency Key Pulsed Alarm PA 0182 Panic Key Data Digit ie Select Option Panic Kev Disabled Panic Key Silent Alarm a Panic Key Steady Alarm 2 0 Panic Key Pulsed Alarm May be forced to a different value when in Commercial Fire Mode See section 12 15 3 12 13 Custom Arming Programming Program Addresses 0183 0184 PA 0183 Data Digit Example To program the 4 to Bypass Zone Function 1 only Data Digit 1 1 Data Digit 2 0 Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Data Digit as a Ener Data Dait p TERI See i 213 141506 7 8 9 Po 1 2 3 4 5
400. on to the DS7400 Series Control Communi cators It connects to the DS7400 Xi via the options bus The outputs are fullv programmable and can be activated bv several svstem events Each output operates individuallv of the other 7 outputs for complete flexibilitv NOTE Requires DS7400 X Xi Xi Rev 3 The control ROM version must be 1 03 or higher Current Draw 10mA 40mA for each energized relay Contacts Rated 5 0A 28VDC maximum for resistive loads 2 0 Installation The DS7488 should be mounted within the DS7400 Xi Enclo sure Install the DS7400 Xi Enclosure as described in its Refer ence Guide Disconnect power from the DS7400 Xi before installing the DS7488 This can be done by unplugging the transformer and removing the red battery lead Mount the DS7488 in the enclosure using the supplied screws 2 and mounting clips 2 see figure A Options Bus DS7400 Xi Enclosure lt gt lt gt Install the DS7488 Here Figure A Installing the DS7488 Non Inherently Power Limited wiring must be routed through a knock out and tied to prevent movement 3 0 Wiring To wire the contacts see figure B DVOOVOOVOVO0O0VOOOWOVODVOL Fi
401. onal Normally Open or Normally Closed contacts It reports their status to the control panel as multiplex addresses e Current Draw 1 mA Standby 1 mA with relay energized e Occupies 2 zones e DS7480 Bell Supervision Module 1 per system The DS7480 provides a means of monitoring bells It provides a supervised polarity reversing output re lay to activate the bell It also provides a Form C Bell Fault Output to be connected to the control pan el e Current Draw 7 mA 12 VDC Standby 50 mA 12 VDC Alarm e DS7481 Single Phone Line Monitor 1 per system The DS7481 provides a means of monitoring a sin gle phone line for fault conditions When a fault is detected the DS7481 automatically closes its Nor mally Open relay contacts to provide a means of sig naling the fault e Current Draw 20 mA Standby 20 mA Alarm e DS7488 Octal Relay Module 2 per system The DS7488 provides 8 Form C relay outputs for addition to the system The outputs are fully pro grammable and can be activated by system events Each output operates individually of the other 7 out puts for complete flexibility e Current Draw 10 mA 40 mA for each relay when energized The control communicator is also available in three package for mats The packages include the following e DS7400XiF DS7400Xi in large red enclosure manufactured from 18 Ga cold rolled steel and measures 15 0 Wide by 20 75 High by 4 25 Deep 38 1 cm
402. onarv Note How you respond to an alarm will depend mostly on the type and time of the alarm You should seek the advice of your installing company as they install your system not later e g after an alarm to develop a response plan Above All Else Common Sense Should Prevail If there is any threat or hint of danger to yourself or others on the premises such as in the event of a fire alarm everyone should be instructed to leave the premises immediately Do not enter the premises unless accompanied by the appropriate Emergency Services personnel or after they have given the OK to enter Caution When Entering A Building If the bells and sirens are on and or the red Armed light is flashing with the DS7447 display reading Zone Alarm or the DS7443 or DS7445 having its zone LEDs flashing then the keypad is signaling that an alarm has occurred The keypad will also issue a pulsed tone during the entry delay instead of the usual steady tone If the alarm has not been previously investigated do not enter the building unless accompanied by the appropriate Emergency Services personnel Fire Alarms Fire Alarms are silenced by using the same procedure as intrusion alarms a PIN with disarm privileges the Off key The Fire Alarm system is not reset until alarms at smoke detectors are cleared by using the System Reset command The Fire Alarm system will not be functional until this procedure has been followed See the Fire Res
403. onnections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Caution Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate Terminal Requirements The Load Number LN assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop which is used by the device to prevent overloading The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100 The Load Number of the DS7080i and the DS7400Xi is 2 RFI Requirements This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations Cet appareil numerique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Reglement sur le material broilleur du Canada Copvright O 1994 95
404. ontinued on next page DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 15 2 Contact ID Format Continued CID CID event data Reports code field Svstem normal test report Communicator test report Remote programming successful report Remote programming failure report Local programming successful report Local programming failure report Communication failure report Communication restoral EEPROM checksum failure or keypad supervision failure report EEPROM checksum restoral or keypad supervision restoral Multiplex bus fault Multiplex bus restoral Radio receiver tamper Radio receiver tamper restoral Aux power fault report Aux power restoral Ground fault report Ground fault restoral System off normal test report Phone line 1 fault report Phone line 1 restoral Phone line 2 fault report Phone line 2 restoral AAGARD fault report Ere ie AAGARD fault restoral enor Displays Bell fault report Bell restoral Aux relay fault report Aux relay restoral Octal relay fault report Octal relay restoral Exit error report Recent closing report System test start report System test end report DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 16 0 Multiplex Zone Addressing Guide e Before installing a multiplex device its address and other infor mation must be programmed into the control panel Perform the following e Program the control
405. or keypad supervision restoral Aux power fault report Aux power restoral Exit error report Recent closing report System test start report System test end report Unspecified system trouble Unspecified system trouble restoral CID event code Restoral Restoral Restoral Restoral Restoral Restoral Restoral Restoral Restoral 2 1 412 Restoral 330 Restoral Fa 0 0 0 0 ee 3 300 Restoral Restoral Restoral CID data field Zone Number Zone Number Zone Number Zone Number Zone Number Zone Number DS7080i Reference Guide Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc 13 3 High Speed 4 9 Format For Additional Information see Programming Addresses 174 230 Reports Event Data Event Note 12345678 Type Zone 1 is reporting a restoral for a trouble Fire trouble restoral for a zone oaeen iae Open report 82222222 eet es honed tees reported at event location Close report 84444444 er f reported at event location Duress report Event data 1 is the only one assigned This report F IS 999 is initiated bv opening using a Duress User PIN Sita alec alarni cancel 82222222 Same as Open report Low battery 51555555 ied en Battery Low Channel 2 of the System System Battery Low Channel 2 of the System Reports Low battery restoral 53555555 MES AG failure 15555555 IE AG Failure Channel 1 of the Svstem Reports AG failure restoral 35555555 ES AC Failure Channel 1 of the System Re
406. oral or implied that any smoke detectors other than the ones listed here will work with the DS7080i Control Communicator Technical Service Note P N30896B Copyright 1995 Page 1 of 1 DS7080i ROM Update Kit Installation Instructions DESCRIPTION This ROM Update Kit is for use with the DS7080i Control Communicator when an update to the system software has been implemented The kit consists of one ROM chip for insertion into the DS7080i Control Communicator CAUTION This ROM chip is static sensitive Be sure to touch the grounded DS7080i enclosure before handling the chip This will discharge any static electricity within your body that could damage the chip Do not touch the pins of the chip when handling it INSTALLATION 1 Remove all power from the DS7080i Control Communicator by unplugging the transformer and removing the red lead from the battery 2 Remove the old ROM chip from the DS7080i Control Communicator see Figure A ROM Chip Ground Wire fa p1080 SG Pi Notch at bottom O 4 Program OCOO6OL0Mww Pads Control Communicator o AE O 12 e o Figure A Locating the ROM chip 3 Insert the new ROM chip into the vacant socket The notch in the chip should be fac
407. ormat suggested values ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ZONE 5 ZONE 6 LOW BATTERV AC FAIL SVSTEM TROUBLE SVSTEM TEST KEVPAD FIRE COMM TROUBLE FUSE FAULT PARTIAL CLOSE FIRST OPEN AFTER ALARM AUTOMATIC COMM TEST MANUAL COMM TEST EXIT ERROR RECENT CLOSING Copvright O 1996 Detection Svstems Inc REPORTS WITH RESTORALS REPORT RESTORAL TROUBLE BYPASS BYPASS RESTORAL gt E 1 E 2 gt gt m H ol REPORTS WITHOUT RESTORALS REPORT REPORT SUCCESSFUL REMOTE PROGRAM oo LOCAL PROGRAM oo KEYPAD EMERGENCY KEYPAD PANIC REPORT UNSUCCESSFUL DS7060 Reference Guide 14 2 Values Sent High Speed 4 9 Format Event Data codes indicate the following 1 new event 3 restoral 5 normal 6 event still exists The placement of these codes in the Event Data column indicates the status of the corresponding zone 1 6 Event Type identifiers indicate the following 1 Panic 2 Opening 3 Bypass 4 Closing 5 Trouble 6 System Info 7 Alarm 9 Communicator Test REPORTS EVENT DATA EVENT 12345678 TYPE Burglary alarm for a zone 15555555 7 Zone 1 has a new alarm Fire alarm for a zone 15555555 7 Zone 1 has a new alarm Keypad fire Event data 1 is the only one assigned Keypad fire restoral 35555555 This may look the same as Duress on some receivers Keypad help 15555555 Event data 1 is the only one assigned Keypad panic 15555555 Event data
408. ort up to twenty 2 wire smoke detectors can also support 4 wire smoke detectors e Current Draw 65 mA Standby 80 mA Alarm Add 15 mA for each additional zone in alarm e DS7445 Control Station The DS7445 is an LED keypad which has LEDs rep resenting the first 8 zones of the system It displays information on various control panel functions A built in sounder is used as an interior warning device and to annunciate keystroke entries e Current Draw 75 mA Standby 75 mA Alarm e DS7447 Control Station The DS7447 is an Alpha Numeric LCD keypad It displays information on various control panel func tions A built in sounder is used as an interior warn ing device and to annunciate keystroke entries e Current Draw 100 mA Standby 100 mA Alarm e Keypad Access Output The DS7447 Alpha Key pad will provide a ten 10 second access relay ouput if equipped with the optional K938 Relay The relay will energize at the keypad if the user has a master unlimited general or access PIN The output will change only if the user has access to the partition assigned to the keypad See the DS7447 Keypad Installation Instructions P N 22235 for wiring information e DS7450 Flush Mount Single Multiplex Contact Point requires a DS7430 Multiplex Expansion Module The DS7450 is intended as a replacement for con ventional dry contacts and to report an actual multi plex address to the control panel e Current Draw 350
409. orting Extended Digit Digit Digit Digit 1 2 fell Zone 8 Trouble 1 1 Zone 6 Trbl Restoral Address 201 Address 207 Default 00 Default 00 DS7080i Reference Guide Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc 10 17 Report Programming Continued Reporting Extended Digit Digit 1 2 Zone 7 Trbl Restoral Address 208 Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit 1 2 Zone 8 Trbl Restoral Address 209 Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit Open Address 210 Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit 1 2 Close Address 211 Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit Duress Address 212 Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit 1 2 Partial Close Address 213 Default 00 Page 40 Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc Reporting Extended Digit Digit 1 2 LJ First Open after Alarm Address 214 Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit Low Battery Address 215 Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit 1 2 Low Battery Restoral Address 216 Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit 1 2 AC Failure Address 217 Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit 1 2 AC Failure Restoral Address 218 Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit 1 2 Automatic Comm Test 4 A Address 219 Default 00 DS7080i Reference Guide 10 17 Report Programming Continued Reporting Extended Digit Digit FIL A Man
410. oss zoning Control Cross zoning Control Cross zoning Trip Window Time Automatic Communicator Test Report Call Out Timer Remote Programmer Call Out Timer Test Report and Remote Programmer Call Out History Event Control AC Failure Report Delay Phone Number 1 Phone Number 2 Phone Number 3 Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc DS7080i Reference Guide Svmbols 24 Hour 9 4 2 Format 53 4 9 Format 58 A AC Failue Report Delay Programming 47 AC Failure 13 AC Power Failure 18 Access Output 10 Access PIN 17 Ademco AB 12 Bell Housing 52 Alarm First Open After 13 Alarm Keypad Emergency 12 Alarm Keypad Fire 12 Alarm on Open 9 Alarm on Short 9 Alarm Zone 12 Alpha Description Programming 27 Alpha Description Programming Worksheet 28 Alternate between both Phone Numbers 11 Answering Machine Bypass 12 Arm Only PIN 17 Arming Custom 11 Arming Force 12 Arming Level 6 11 Arming Maximum Security 11 Arming Normal 11 Arming Perimeter 11 Arming Perimeter Instant 11 Arming Warning Control 35 Authority Level 17 Automatic Comm Test 13 Automatic Test Report Interval 12 Aux Power Fault 18 Battery Sounder Test 19 Battery Low 13 Battery Trouble 18 Bell Cut off timers 12 BFSK Format 54 Bypassing Allowed 9 Bypassing Allowed Programming 36 c California March Time 11 Call out Timer Programming 45 Central Station Burglarv Alarm 51 Close 13 Close Partial 13 Closing Ring Back 11
411. ower fillin Funct Address Will be forced to different values when in Commercial Fire Mode See section 12 15 3 Interior Home Away e i 7 2 Steady alarm output alarm on short and open interior Instant kai 3 Entry exit delay 1 Day Monitor EN 2 Steadv alarm output alarm on short and open 5 4 Entry exit delay 2 Keyswitch See note below 9 2 Steady alarm output alarm on short and open Fire Zone with verification 1 Perimeter Instant 2 Steady alarm output alarm on short and open Fire Zone w out verification 5 Interior entry exit follower Waterfl 2 Steady alarm output alarm on short and open cil oA 2 Steady alarm output alarm on short and open 7 7 eet Instant p P Entry Exit Delay Cancel 1 2 Steady alarm output alarm on short and open Entry Exit Delay Cancel 2 2 24 hour 7 Pulsing alarm output alarm on short trouble on open 0 Fire zone with verification 0 0 Disabled 8 i 0 Disabled 0 0 Disabled Note If digit 2 9 keyswitch use 0 this chart for digit 1 0 Disabled Select Option 0 Single Partition No Force Arm 0 Disabled 0 Single Partition Can Force Arm a eee All Partions No Force Arm 0 0 Disabled All Partitions Can Force Arm DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 12 3 Zone Programming Program Addresses 0018 0145 Example In Zone Programming each zone is defined according to To program a Zon
412. ower output has been short Remove wiring from auxiliary power and check for ed shorts 87 display Keypad Fault a The keypad wiring is defective a Check keypad operation and wiring b A keypad is missing b Install a keypad c A keypad has been programmed but is c Remove from programming 0173 0180 not intended in this system DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc General Svstem Problems Continued Svmptom Probable Cause Possible Solution 87 display Ground Fault There is a short to ground somewhere in Disconnect field wiring from each terminal while 89 display System Fault 04 the system watching the keypad display When the keypad power LED stops flashing you have found the wire that is causing the ground fault Note The LED will not stop flashing if there is an other system fault present If there is no keypad nearby or another control prob lem exists you can use a volt meter to find the ground fault 1 Connect the negative lead of a volt meter to the panel ground terminal 2 Connect the positive terminal to the Aux Power terminal You should read 4 5 to 7 5 Volts DC Areading con siderably higher or lower indicates a ground fault Disconnect field wiring from each terminal while watching the meter When the voltage reading re turns to between 4 5 and 7 5 VDC you have found the wire that is causing the ground fault 87 display AR
413. ownload WDSRP to Panel 26 Phone Control 18 DumpTimes 26 Pickup 13 Pin Numbers 19 E Preferences 27 Program 15 Edit Data 14 AUTOMATIC UPDATE 15 Edit Template 10 DOWNLOAD 15 EEPROM Data 21 UPLOAD 15 End Session 15 Programming functions 15 Equipment Needs 5 Minimum Equipment Requirements 5 Q Recommended Equipment 5 ERROR CLEAR 15 QUICK START 9 Export 23 Quick Start Guide 4 Quitting WDSRP 28 R F factory set defaults 15 README TXT 5 G Remote Access 18 Remote Codes 26 Getting St Rted 4 report filter 21 H Reporting 18 Reporting Codes 21 Reports 21 Account General Information 21 i Cross Matrix Programming 21 MISO i la EEPROM Data 21 FILTER 16 i Filter 25 Keypad Information 21 REPORTS 16 Mailing Labels 21 Reports 25 Output Programming 21 Vi an 14 Reporting Codes 21 User PIN Information 21 DELETE 14 FILTER 14 Zone Functions 21 Zone Programming 7400 Style Panels 21 NEW EVENTS ss 82 Zone Programming non 7400 Style Panel 21 REPORTS 14 g g yle Panels HELP File 8 HISTORY 25 Copyright 1994 96 Detection Systems Inc WDSRP User s Guide RESET 15 Reset Modem 13 Restore 26 RS 232 Interface 19 S Set Panel Time 26 Set panel times 27 Setup Program 5 Sort Key 1and2 12 sound card 27 Status 15 Status Bar 28 Suspend 13 System Parameters 18 T Template 10 16 Edit Data 17 Keypad 17 Output Assignments 17 Partitions 17 Phone Control 18 Remote Access 18 Templates 21 Test Times 26 TIME SET 15 Time
414. ox and changes made It is here where you choose the categories from which to edit the system information The categories are as follows Screens will vary depending on the panel type General Information By choosing this command the general information window will ap pear From here you may edit information as needed The cursor will first appear in the Account ID field Edit Account MIKE Account ID ZI 7400x1 V31 Report ID 1 3 4 Template NONE ki Sort key 1 Sort key 2 5 Auto service JNONE Auto call NONE l Name Address City Zip Contact Notes Cancel Enter up to 8 characters as the Account s ID number When you are finished editing this data choose OK or Cancel OK will return you to the previous screen with your changes saved Cancel will return you to the previous screen with no changes made Keypad By choosing this command the edit keypad window will appear From here you may edit information as needed concerning the keypads WDSRP Users Guide Edit Keypad SAMPLE Thomas J Brown Keypad fire Di di gt Steady alarm gt Pulsing alarm Keypad emergency Disabled gt Silent alarm gt Steady alarm gt Pulsing alarm Keypad panic Disabled gt Silent alarm gt Steady alarm gt Pulsing alarm Keypad assignment Used Alpha Master Pa
415. panel Refer to section 14 3 Zone Programming This section allows vou to define the Multiplex Zone s address zone number its tvpe single or multiple zone input device or a DS7465 which zone or output function it will follow 1 15 and its partition 1 8 For example Program zone 9 to be a single zone input device DS7476 that follows zone function 1 and is in partition 1 Procedure Enter the programmer s mode Enter address 0026 Enter the data digits as 0 and 1 followed by the button Enter address 1252 Enter the data digits as 0 and 0 followed by the button Exit the programmer s mode Program the BusLoc feature At this point you must decide whether or not to use the Bus Loc feature BusLoc is a proprietary method of tying the multiplex zones to the control panel to prevent the system from being taken over Using BusLoc will program an invisible identification code into the multiplex zones Note If using the DS7432 8 Input Remote Module or the DS7433 8 Input Direct Module the BusLoc feature can not used If you choose to use the BusLoc feature program a 5 digit code at programming address 9999 It is very important to save this code under lock and key If you need to replace the control panel you will have to program it with the same BusLoc code as the previous panel or the multiplex devices will not match codes with the new control panel For example Program t
416. panel will arm with interval if Enter any panel needs to be Force the faulted zones bypassed or leaving arming sequence Armed a three beep error tone will occur indicating Force Arming has not been accepted or allowed 1 8 Auto Bypass The system can be armed and will automatically bypass faulted zones See Section 8 10 to enable Auto Bypass TYPE OF ARMING WHAT WILL HAPPEN WHAT WILL HAPPEN WHAT TO DO Auto Bypass A single beep occurs The red Armed light will flash Exit during the indicating that the panel during the exit delay interval exit delay has armed e The control panel will arm with interval if the faulted zones bypassed or leaving a three beep error tone will occur indicating Auto Bypass has not been accepted or allowed 1 9 Zone Bypass There may be occasions when it is desirable or necessary to temporarily bypass one or more zones prior to arming the system Bypass commands only work when the control panel is disarmed For instance an open window may cause the DS7447 display to read Not Ready followed by the zone number The DS7443 or DS7445 may have one of its zone LEDs on steady Only one zone may be bypassed each time the command is used If more than one zone requires bypassing repeat the command for each zone to be bypassed NOTE See Section 5 7 Force Arming for another method of zone bypassing DS7060 User Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc This chart explains the pr
417. pass Zone 1 Bypassing Allowed 15 c California March Time 18 Call Out Timer 57 Change a PIN 21 Changing Date 22 Changing Time 23 Chime Mode 1 Close Reports 18 Closing Ring Back 14 Commercial Fire Mode 18 43 California March Time 18 Multiple Keypad Use 18 Pulsing Fire Zone 18 Single Keypad Use 18 Temporal 18 Water Flow Zone Delay 18 Common Area 17 Communicator Test 1 28 Communicator Test System Normal Report 19 Communicator Test System Off Normal Report 19 Contact I D Format 75 Custom Arming 14 17 41 D Day Monitor 15 Default Factory 32 Defaults 32 Delayed Arming 23 DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Delayed Zone Alarm 16 DS7412 47 DS7420i 56 Duress 25 Duress PIN 21 E Emergency Key 17 41 Emergency Procedures 25 Enable Remote Programmer Callback 19 Entering a Program Address 31 Entering the Programmer s Mode 31 Entry Pre Alert 16 Entry Exit Delay 15 Error Display 1 Error Display Reset 1 Error Displays 29 Exiting Programmer s Mode 32 F Factory Default 32 Fire Key 17 Fire Reset 1 Fire Reset Fire Trouble 25 Fire Safety 26 Fire Zone 15 Fire Zone with Verification 16 Flow Water Zone 16 Force Arming 1 42 G General PIN 21 Ground Fault 17 Ground Fault Detect 42 Ground Start 16 H HEX values 32 History Readback 28 Input Cross Matrix 55 Interior Entry Exit Follower 15 Interior Home Away 15 Interior Instant 15 Invisible Alarms 15 K Keypad Alarms
418. performed at a DS7447 keypad No visual cues will be given from a DS7445 keypad Steps to Change Command the Date Sequence Enter the Master Code 2 Change Date Programming Mode Master Code 0 display will scroll to this Enter Month Gites 01 12 0 1 through 1 2 Enter Day Enter the Month iua EANA oan Enter the Day 0 1 through 3 1 ae cha The last two digits of the year Month Day Year SE he Year too FISS Neal followed by the key A long beep signifies acceptance If Accepted the Display Reads Note Entering the command sequence Master Code 0 2 will cause the DS7447 keypad to read back the date The control panel will exit you from the master code programming mode after about 15 seconds without a keystroke 8 4 Changing the Tempoary PIN Expiration Date This chart explains the procedure for changing the expiration date for temporary PINs at the keypad It is recommended that this procedure be performed at a DS7447 keypad No visual cues will be given from a DS7445 keypad Steps to Change the Exp Command If Accepted the Display Reads Date for Temp PINs Sequence p pay Enter the Master Code Master Code 0 3 Change Date of Code Expiration Programming Mode display will scroll to this ka b Enter the expiration 0 1 through 1 2 Enter Day Month January December 01 31 4 Enter the expiration Day The temporary PIN will
419. pon contact Remote Codes This selection will assign each control panel new account codes This will oniv update the database The control panels and WDSRP still must get in contact for this transfer of data to take place it will take place automaticallv upon contact Upload Panel to WDSRP This selection will have each panel upload to their database to WDSRP upon next con tact Download WDSRP to Panel This selection will have each panel receive a download from WDSRP upon next contact Clear all Auto Service This selection will clear the Auto Service field for all accounts Therefore no auto services will occur at the next contact Clear all Status This selection will clear the Status filed for all accounts upon next contact It will also clear all current control panel status information Clear all Auto Call Not implemented Auto call all non historv panels Not implemented Auto call all panels Not implemented Backup The Backup selection will enable vou to backup the Accounts Templates Users Historv and or Historv Ar chive databases The paths these backups are sent to are set in the Preferences window Backup Which Databases records Templates records Users records History records History archive records Lok Cancel If checked backup the accounts Restore The Restore selection will enable you to restore the Accounts Templates Users History or History Archive databases to the
420. ports Automatic Comm test report 55555555 Communicator Test with zone alarm information Manual Comm test report 55555555 Communicator Test with zone alarm information Page 58 Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc DS7080i Reference Guide 13 3 High Speed 4 9 Format continued Reports Event Data Event Note 12345678 Type Remote programming successful 5535 e NOT OFFICIALLY assigned Channel 7 of the report 5555 System Reports l NOT OFFICIALLY assigned Channel 7 of the Remote programming failure report 55555515 ia System Reports Local programming successful 55555535 Wa NOT OFFICIALLY assigned Channel 7 of the report System Reports Local programming failure report 55555515 RR NOT OFFICIALLY assigned Channel 7 of the System Reports EEPROM checksum failure or keypad supervision failure tenit 55155555 Ea System failure Channel 3 of the System Reports EEPROM checksum jallure or 55355555 e System failure Channel 3 of the System Reports keypad supervision restoral Aux power fault report 55155555 e System failure Channel 3 of the System Reports Aux power restoral 55355555 e System failure Channel 3 of the System Reports Exit error report Format does not support this report Recent closing report N A Format does not support this report System test start report 55555551 Walk Test Channel 8 of the System Reports Unspecified system trouble 55155555 Unspecified system trouble restoral 55355555 Syst
421. programming via the WDSRP programming software e Current Draw 25 mA 35 mA with LEDs on e DS7420i Dual Phone Line Bell Supervision Module 1 per system The DS7420i allows the control to be used in NFPA 72 installations It provides two supervised 12 0 VDC signaling outputs one Class A Style D input zone and dual phone line transmission and supervision e Current Draw 20 mA Standby 140 mA Alarm DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide e DS7430 e DS7432 Multiplex Expansion Module 1 per system The DS7430 provides a two wire multiplex bus for the connection of additional remote zones It also supplies up to 250 mA for 4 wire multiplex devices such as the DS7432 e Current Draw 65 mA Standby 65 mA Alarm 8 Input Remote Module up to 15 per system Re quires a DS7430 Multiplex Expansion Module The DS7432 provides a means of monitoring conventional Normally Open or Normally Closed contacts It reports their status to the control panel as multiplex addresses It occupies eight multiplex zones on the system and can monitor up to eight separate loops It will support 4 wire smoke detec tors e Current Draw 10 mA Standby 10 mA Alarm Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc e DS7433 8 Input Direct Module 1 per system Can not be used with the DS7430 Multiplex Expansion Module The DS7433 provides a means of expanding the svstem to include eight additional hard wired zones Each zone can supp
422. quence on the keypad to be used for custom only arming It determines which zones may be by Data Digit 1 1 Data Digit 2 4 passed during custom arming Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 See Glossary Section 6 6 for further details Enter the Program Address 1 5 8 D Digi Enter Data Digit 1 1 ata Digit Enter Data Digit 2 4 Enter the Pound button 1 2 Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the 7 DI Programmer s Mode Enter the Data Digit as a Select Options 0 ls le 17 le Te Foti ENA BypassZone1 jejje je 6 e jol BypassZone2 le ele jeje jojo BypassZone3 Jejejeje ejo jojo BypassZone4 jejelejejelejeje 0 5 are Hex values They will display as A F at the keypads Enter the Data Digit as a Select Options 0 2 3 2 5 Jo 7 a Jo Pols pea haps BypassZoneS jej je e e JO JO JO BypassZone6 jeje eje eje jejo BypassZone7 l lele jejejeje BypassZone8 jejejejelejejeje 0 5 are Hex values They will display as A F at the keypads 10 9 Report Control Programming Program Address 159 Example Report Control programming allows you to To program to send Opening and Closing reports and to send Trouble determine what reports will be sent and which reports for Day Monitor zones when they alarm while disarmed phone number wil
423. quirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations Cet appareil numerique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Reglement sur le material broilleur du Canada DS7420i Installation Instructions posiMedns SOYOUMS asisedns p s MOJLISJEM iagram D iring 8 0 DS7420i se yons S90IA9P Buyeniul uodo jjeuon 10 p pu u yndjno xnv pesial jadns uou 10 Ajuo IND 4 daduine UOISIM9ANS diy L SUM ODJOL d poumosnoH H diy eurq joquog diy asnoY jouog Bury eur asnoy oc Bury asnoy jouog Bury eumooeL ge Bury eurq joug dit z eur 09 L dit gz eurq esnoy Bury z eur SNOH Bury z eur 00jeL d007 Y SSBID winjey doo7 y SSEJO unay doo7 Y SSe 007 Y SSEJD 1 M0Oqg d007 induj uoz inding Areyxny yndino Areyixny XEWV SZL QCA ZE andino 1194 Auayeg 0 vZSC sng uodo SIJOA ZL INdjno WIE SIJOA G INdINO JEWJON BUISJ9A91 Aysejod aye syndjno Kieljixnv pue jjoq pasisiedns ayy RRS pedA y e ye P919 U9 s h s y wojs Ag Nid J9S9H 9114 jgUN wee uo seyoye 1EJU seduunt ym posimMedns 66852 N d ISA S Ose 101SIS94 103 6685Z N d ISG UE 10 SISSH 103 popIAO1Jd 8 QB9 LLED y sn UONJ8UU09 IXOOP SQ y 0 jojjeJed yOoUUOD s n yeq 10 Asajyeq WAJSAS AIQED LLED N l
424. r 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ret le n Eemi clafl Value 012 1 012 2 013 1 013 2 014 1 014 2 015 1 015 2 016 1 016 2 017 1 017 2 018 1 018 2 019 1 019 2 DS7080i Reference Guide Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc 10 5 1 Alpha Description Programming Worksheet Private Label Page 28 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 012 1 012 2 013 1 013 2 014 1 014 2 015 1 015 2 016 1 016 2 017 1 017 2 018 1 018 2 019 1 019 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 020 1 020 2 021 1 021 2 022 1 022 2 023 1 023 2 024 1 024 2 025 1 025 2 026 1 026 2 027 1 027 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 028 1 028 2 029 1 029 2 030 1 030 2 031 1 031 2 032 1 032 2 033 1 033 2 034 1 034 2 035 1 035 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 036 1 036 2 037 1 037 2 038 1 038 2 039 1 039 2 040 1 040 2 041 1 041 2 042 1 042 2 043 1 043 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 044 1 044 2 045 1 045 2 046 1 046 2 047 1 047 2 048 1 048 2 049 1 049 2 050 1 050 2 051 1 051 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 052 1 052 2 053 1 053 2 054 1 054 2 055 1 055 2 056 1 056 2 057 1 057 2 058 1 058 2 059 1 059 2 Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc DS7080i Reference Guide Worksheet Continued Charac
425. r 7 Modified Notes Enter this operator s Password Enter this operator s Password Replace all the necessary information in this window with the information for yourself Create a new password for yourself The password can be up to 12 characters long Do not use spaces or non alpha characters in your password Keep authority level 15 the highest normal level Supply the rest of the information as needed Some fields are automatically filled in by WDSRP the Operator ID field Created Field Modified Field and the Modify Operator field Choose the OK button to return to the Find User window 8 Replace the information in this window with your own information 9 Give yourself a new Master Password 10 Supply the rest of the information as needed The authority Level and Operator ID fields can not be changed Once this task has been completed log out and log back in as the level 15 password you previously created WDSRP User s Guide Copyright 1994 96 Detection Systems Inc 2 3 Authoritv Levels The authority level you give each user is critical The authority level given to each user will allow certain access privileges throughout the WDSRP program Each field within WDSRP any place a user may interact with has its own authority levels Authority levels affect the user in two ways The fiel
426. r amp Master Codes See Section 5 2 Personal Identification Numbers for more information Four Digits each code 0000 through 9999 User Codes 2 through 15 are programmed from DEFAULT 9876 1234 Master Code Programming Mode PROGRAMMER S CODE MASTER CODE 8 35 Address 47 Default EEPROM NoAction a Load Factory Default DEFAULT 0 DEFAULT PROGRAM CAUTION Entering a 1 in Address 47 will erase all prior programming 8 36 Address 48 Automatic Test Report Interval None o Callout Daily DEFAULT 0 Callout every 7 days TEST REPORT INTERVAL Callout every 28 days 8 37 Address 49 Hours to First Auto Test Report 001 023 hours DEFAULT 012 HOURS TO 1ST REPORT Set this value to the number of hours from the present time for the first report Example If the present time is 2 PM and you want test reports at 3 AM set to 0 1 3 2 PM 13 hours 3 AM If not set the first report will be sent 12 hours after panel power up 8 38 Address 50 AC Failure Report Delay 000 to 250 Enter Number of Minutes DEFAULT 000 AC FAILURE REPORT DELAY e Address 32 must be programmed for this report NOTE IfAC power should restore before the AC Failure Report time no AC Failure Report will be sent DS7060 Reference Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc 9 0 INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR U L LISTED SYSTEMS 9 1 DS7060 U L Listings e Household Fire Alarm U L Standard UL985 e Household Burglary
427. r 2 seconds nothing will display at the keypad to indicate an alarm It may be programmed for a silent steady or pulsed alarm Note The Special Emergency Key and the Panic Key will gener ate the alarm sounders only in the partition of the keypad that activated that Key 7 8 Custom Arming Programming Custom Arming PIN 4 If programmed the PIN 4 command sequence may be used to custom arm the system by arming only certain zone functions For example All interior zones plus some perimeter zones may be bypassed while leaving some of the perimeter armed 7 9 Force Arming e Force Arming If programmed allows violated zones to be force armed When force arming the user must enter the usual arming command followed by the Bypass key This automatically by passes zones that are violated and programmed as bypassable Fire zones supervisory zones keyswitch zones and non by passable zones can not be force armed Not available in U L Listed systems See Program Address 0185 7 10 Ground Fault Detect Programming e Ground Fault If programmed this function will allow the system to detect ground faults This function is required for fire panels and will be forced on when the panel is in the commercial fire mode See Program Address 0185 7 11 Commercial Fire Mode Programming Note In a system that includes both fire alarm and burglar alarm devices the system must produce distinct sounds fo
428. r 90 0189 Open Close Zone Rprt Cntrl 0047 Zone Number 30 0108 Zone Number 91 0190 Report Control 0048 Zone Number 31 0109 Zone Number 92 0191 Entry Delay Time 1 0049 Zone Number 32 0110 Zone Number 93 0192 Entrv Delay Time 2 0050 Zone Number 33 0111 Zone Number 94 0193 Exit Delay Time 0051 Zone Number 34 0112 Zone Number 95 0195 Fire Bell Cutoff 0052 Zone Number 35 0113 Zone Number 96 0196 Burglary Bell Cutoff 0053 Zone Number 36 0114 Zone Number 97 0197 A C Fail Report Delay 0054 Zone Number 37 0115 Zone Number 98 0198 General Code Arm Only 0055 Zone Number 38 0116 Zone Number 99 0199 General Code Arm Only 0056 Zone Number 39 0117 Zone Number 100 0200 General Code Arm Only 0057 Zone Number 40 0118 Zone Number 101 0201 General Code Arm Only 0058 Zone Number 41 0119 Zone Number 102 0202 Arming Warning 0059 Zone Number 42 0120 Zone Number 103 0203 Arming Warning 0060 Zone Number 43 0121 Zone Number 104 0204 Arming Warning DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc Address Description Address Description Address Description 0205 Arming Warning 0321 Close Report 1261 Zone 27 amp 28 Part Assign 0206 DS7412 Interface Control 0322 Duress Report 1262 Zone 29 amp 30 Part Assign 0207 DS7412 Interface Config 0323 Partial Close Report 1263 Zone 31 amp 32 Part Assign 0208 Keypad Partition Assign 0324 First Open After Alarm Rpt 1264 Zone 33 amp 34 Part Assign 0209 Keypad Partition Assign 03
429. r depending on the type of control communicator selected Name This is the name of the residential or business subscriber of this Ac count Address City State ZIP Code This is the address of the residential or business subscriber of this Account Contact This is the name of the individual at the site of the control panel whom you may reach by voice call This person s phone number should be listed in the Voice Call VC field Sort Key 1 and 2 These fields are used to enter another unique number code allowing you another method of sorting the accounts This is an optional entry choice Auto Service This is the selected service that will automatically be performed when ever the control panel is brought on line You may choose from the following ARMM ARMP CLRE DWLD HISA HISC NONE PASS RSET TIME UPLD WRNP WRNT Master Arm System Perimeter Arm System Clear System Errors Perform Complete Program Download Upload New History Events Upload All History Events No Auto Services Default Change Remote Code Reset System After Contact Set System Time Perform Complete Program Upload Set Non resetable Warning Set Keypad Resetable Warning Voice Call VC This is the phone number to reach this Account s subscriber voice contact This phone number will reach the person listed in the Con tact field Copyright 1994 96 Detection Systems Inc Data Call DA This is the phone number to reach this Ac
430. r fire and burglar alarm conditions either by using different indi cating appliances or by using distinct cadences for the same appliance Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc Commercial Fire Mode When in Commercial Fire Mode the control panel will perform some functions e g communications differentiv to conform with commercial fire regulations See Commercial Fire Mode Programming program address 0186 Water Flow Zone Delav This is the amount of time a water flow zone must be violated before the control panel will initiate an alarm The delay is necessary to accommodate normal changes in water pressure If the water flow initiating device incorporates its own time de lay do not program the control panel unit to exceed 120 sec onds combined time delay Pulsing Fire Zone This is a zone programmed to output a pulse for a fire alarm in the normal manner one second ON one sec ond OFF California March Time This is a zone programmed to output a pulse for a fire alarm in the California Time cadence ten 1 2 sec ond pulses followed by one second of quiet time e Temporal This is a zone programmed to output a pulse for a fire alarm in the Temporal cadence three 1 2 second pulses followed by one second of quiet time Single Keypad Use The keypad should be used on the keypad bus and be mounted to the front of the control enclosure OR if within the same room as the control equipment with the wire r
431. ram Addresses 284 287 45 10 25 Test Report and Remote Programmer Call out Programming Program Address 288 46 10 26 Historv Event Control Programming Program Address 289 46 10 27 AG Failue Report Delav Program Address 290 47 10 28 Phone Number Programming Program Addresses 296 306 316 11 0 Installation Guide for U L Listed Systems 11 1 DS7080i U L Listings 11 2 INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS 11 3 PROGRAMMING THE DS7080i 11 3 1 Household Fire Alarm 11 3 2 Grade A Household Burglary Alarm 11 3 3 Local Burglary Alarm 11 3 4 Police Station Connection 11 3 5 Central Station Burglary Alarm 11 4 Using the Ademco AB 12 Bell Housing 12 0 Report Programming Suggested Values 12 1 4 2 Format 12 2 BFSK Format 12 3 Pager Format 13 0 Report Programming Values Sent 13 1 SIA Format 13 2 Contact ID Format 13 3 High Speed 4 9 Format 14 0 Programming Addresses Index DS7080i Reference Guide Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc 1 0 Specifications 1 1 Enclosure Housing The standard enclosure is manufactured from 20 Ga cold rolled steel and measures 12 5 in Wide bv 14 5 in High bv 3 in Deep A keved lock is included and this enclosure has provision for an optional tamper switch required for Commercial Burglarv applica tions for monitoring the door 1 2 Temperature Storage and Operating Temperature 4329 to 120 F 0 to 49 C 1 3 Power Input power 18 VAC 50 VA 50 Hz or 60 Hz
432. rd when inserting the standoffs Be sure the standoff tabs are aligned so that they do not touch any components on the module Be sure that the stand offs are firmly pressed into the board so that the ears can expand out See drawings Install the DS7430 board onto the standoffs noting that the connector pins from the DS7400 Xi are properly aligned to install into the connector on the DS7430 Avoid bending or flexing the boards while pressing them onto the standoffs The DS7400 Xi control board may be installed into the control panel enclosure at this time 3 0 Wiring Connect the multiplex loop to the DS7430 as shown Up to 2000 feet 610 m of 22 AWG 0 8 mm or 5000 feet 1525 m of 18 AWG 1 0 mm wire may be used The Bus Power output is for connection of separately powered multiplex devices such as the DS7432 8 Input Remote Module If using separate powered detectors they should be powered from the auxiliary power terminals of the DS7400 Xi The DS7432 may also be powered from the auxiliary terminals Detection Systems PTY Ltd Unit 21 45 Gilby Road Unit 2 The Riverside Centre Mount Waverley Victoria 3149 Australia 148 James Ruse Drive 61 3 9558 8088 Parramatta NSW 2150 Australia Fax 61 3 9558 8089 61 2 891 4944 Fax 61 2 891 5844 Detection Systems PTY Ltd DS7430 SATA Bis Printed Circuit e off Ears Board PCB aire en Stand off Be sure that the illu off is pressed
433. re before handling the chip This will discharge any static electricity within your body that could damage the chip Do not touch the pins of the chip when handling it INSTALLATION 1 Remove all power from the DS7060 Control Communicator by unplugging the transformer and removing the red lead from the battery 2 Remove the old ROM chip from the DS7060 Control Communicator see Figure A ROM chip E Notch at bottom ekeLeeeeeo o 29 T5 Figure A Locating the ROM chip 3 Insert the new ROM chip into the vacant socket The notch in the chip should be facing down when installed Make sure all the pins are seated correctly in the socket The pins of the chip may be spread too wide to easily fit into the socket If so lay the chip on its side and gently roll it inward to press the pins toward the body of the chip 4 Restore power to the DS7060 Control Communicator 5 Discard the old ROM chip Refer to the DS7060 Reference Guide to complete the installation and or programming Detection Svstems PTV Ltd Detection Svstems PTV Ltd Detection Svstems Int l Inc Detection Svstems Ltd Unit 21 45 Gilbv Road Unit 2 The Riverside Centre 19 Rue du 19 Mars 78130 Unit 13 18 17 F New Commerce Centre Mount Waverlev Victoria 3149 Australia 148 Jam
434. re Reset 8 10 2 Fire Trouble 8 11 Emergency Keypad Alarms 8 12 Fire Safety 8 12 1 If Installed in Family Residences 8 12 2 Having and Practicing an Escape Plan 8 12 3 Installation Considerations 8 13 Testing 8 13 1 Zone Test 8 13 2 Battery Sounder Test 8 13 3 Communicator Test 8 13 4 Event History Readback 8 13 5 Remote Program Dial out and Answer 8 13 6 Error Displays 9 0 The Master Keypad 9 1 Master Keypad Displays 9 2 Arming from the Master Keypad 9 3 Disarming from the Master Keypad 9 4 Single Partition Mode 10 0 How to Program the Control Panel 10 1 Entering the Programmer s Mode 10 2 Reading back a Program Address 10 3 Entering a value in a Program Address 10 4 HEX values 10 5 Defaults 10 6 Setting the Control to the Factory Default 10 7 Exiting the Programmer s Mode 11 0 Understanding the Programming Charts 12 0 Programming 12 1 General Control Programmong Program Address 0000 34 DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide 12 2 Zone Function Programming Program Addresses 0001 0015 35 12 3 Zone Programming Program Addresses 0018 0145 36 12 4 Zone Partition Assignment Program Addresses 1248 1311 36 12 5 Zone Bypass Programming Program Addresses 0016 0017 37 12 6 Output Programming Program Addresses 0146 0148 38 12 7 Output Partition Assignment Program Addresses 0149 0150 38 12 8 Partition Control Programmin
435. re openand coseevens ele Teje Jele Jolo store bypass and unbypass events l l lejejeje jejejeje l Stosiocalremoteprogramevents Llelejejejejejeje 0 5 are Hex values They will display as A F at the keypads Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc DS7080i Reference Guide 10 27AC Failue Report Delav Program Address 290 May be used only if AC Failure Reports Address 217 or AC Restore Reports Address 218 are selected The Report Delay is determined by adding the time programmed into Data Digit 1 and 2 as a Hex number The time of Data Digit 1 is equal to the value x 16 minutes Example If the value of Data Digit 1 is set to 3 the time is 48 minutes 3 x 16 48 The time of Data Digit 2 is equal to the value x 1 minute Example If the value of Data Digit 2 is set to 7 the time is 7 minutes 7 x 1 7 Note Hex numbers 0 thru 5 represent 10 thru 15 minutes The total time delay in the example Data Digit 1 Data Digit 2 is 55 minutes 48 7 55 Other Examples Report Delay Value of address 290 Send only with next report a Zz 120 minutes 240 minutes AC Fail Report Delay a Random Delay 55 Address 290 t least 15 minutes but en 120 MIRUS nee 00 through FF Default 00 Data Digit 10 28 Phone Number Programming Program Addresses 296 306 316 Example To program Phone Number 1 as 555 1234 Notes Data Digit 1 B Data Digit 2 5 Da
436. re servicing this equipment remove all power including the transformer and batterv Also remove the phone line connection A complete functional test is required after anv programming CAUTION Incorrect connections mav result in damage to the unit NOTE Shared cable is not allowed for kevpad tele phone or siren wiring Tvpical Burglar Alarm EARTH GROUND Must be connected to Loop Wiring a good earth ground such as a cold water pipe and also connected to the cabinet cover using the supplied wire jumper A C INPUT Use U L listed 16 5 VAC 20 VA Class 2 transformer Model TR 16 Requires 50 60 Hz unswitched dedicated outlet Do Not Share PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT 1 Shorts to common when activated 500 mA max protected by Fuse 1 PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT 2 Shorts to common when activated 500 mA max protected by Fuse 1 N NA 4 Zone input Common WV AN Fuse 1 1A 250 V Zone 1 6 E E E Fuse 2 Or KAN foto NANZJZNA KEVPADS Up to 4 kevpads mav be used Maximum wire length is 1000 ft 305 m of 22 AWG 0 8 mm Can be home run or daisy chained Protected by Fuse 2 Oo ZN NLA e NA POC The POC terminal is tied to a 12 volt ZONES 1 6 Supervised Zones are fused line and can be used as a second intended for connection of Normally Open or continuous 12 volt terminal provided the Normally Closed alarm contacts 800 mA supply c
437. ress Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode Program Address 0198 Program Address 0200 Data i 1 Data i 2 Data 1 Data i 2 Select Option DD Partition 1 Partition 2 Partition 5 Partition 6 General Code can Arm Disarm and Bypass jU ie Tange Program Address 0199 Program Address 0201 Data Digit1 Data Digit 2 Data Digit1 Data Digit 2 General Code can Arm and Disarm ial DJ General Code can Arm 3 7 General Godecanam 3 Partition 3 Partition 4 Partition 7 Partition 8 12 22 Arming Warning Programming Program Addresses 0202 0205 Example Arming Warning programming defines whether the keypad will be audible To program the keypads in Partition 1 to be audible during exit delay during the exit delay period If programmed the keypad sounder will acti kd kB ve audible durig exit delay vate once every 5 seconds during the exit delay At 10 seconds and 5 sec Data Digit 1 A Data Digit 2 0 onds remaining the keypad sounder will activate 3 times Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 FI 0 Enter the Program Address 0 2 0 2 PA 0202 PA 0204 Enter Data Digit 1 4 ae Mi Enter Data Digit 2 0 Data Digit Data Digit Enter the pound key 1 2 Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode Partition 1 DD No Keypad Sounder during Exit Delay i Keypad Sounder during Exit Delay Partition 2 DD Partition 6 p gt No Keypad Sounder during Ex
438. ress 31 Receivers 52 Remote Program Dial out 28 Remote Program Successful Report 19 Remote Program Unsuccessful Report 19 Report Programming 18 48 Reporting Problems 79 Reports AC Fail 19 AC Restoral 19 Battery Restoral 19 Close 18 Communicator Test System Normal 19 Communicator Test System Off Normal 19 Keypad Fire Alarm 18 Keypad Fire Restoral 18 Local Program Successful 19 Local Program Unsuccessful 19 Low Battery 19 Remote Program Successful 19 DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Remote Program Unsuccessful 19 System Test 19 System Test Restoral 19 System Trouble 19 System Trouble Restoral 19 Restore when Sounders Silence 15 Restore when System Disarms 15 Restore when Zone Restores 15 RS232 Interface 47 S SIA Format 73 Silent Alarms 15 Single Keypad Use 18 Single Partition Mode 31 Single Zone Input 16 Siren on Communication Fail 15 Special Emergency Key 17 Swinger Shunts 15 System Problems 80 System Status ready to arm 16 System Test Report 19 System Test Restoral Report 19 System Trouble Report 19 System Trouble Restoral Report 19 T Temporal 18 Temporary PIN 21 Test Communicator 28 Test Report 57 Test Zone 27 Timer Programming 45 57 Trouble Fire 25 Trouble on Open 15 Trouble on Short 15 Troubleshooting Guide 78 U U L Listings 64 Unlimited PIN 21 User Numbe 21 Ww Water Flow Zone 16 Water Flow Zone Delay 18 WDSRP 47 Z Zone Alarm 16 Zone Alarm Delayed 16 Zone A
439. restoral Bell fault report Bell restoral RAM fault report RAM restoral ROM fault report ROM restoral Serial interface fault report Serial interface restoral Aux relay fault report Aux relay restoral DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide SIA event co a i spa oss alae EBEEBEDEBEELEEBEEEEEEEEELEREEBEEDEEE de Am SIA data field Error Displays See 9 18 Error Displays Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 15 2 Contact I D Format CID CID event data Reports code field Burglary alarm for a zone Fire alarm for a zone Waterflow alarm for a zone Number Supervisorv for a zone Keypad fire A o0 Keypad fire restoral A o0 Keypad emergency 1 3 or B Keypad panic or C Burglary restoral for a zone Fire restoral for a zone Waterflow restoral for a zone Supervisory restoral for a zone Burglary trouble for a zone 370 Fire trouble for a zone 373 Waterflow trouble for a zone Supervisory trouble for a zone Low battery on a radio zone Low battery restoral on a radio zone Open report Close report Duress report 000 Partial close report First open after alarm cancel report Low battery 302 Low battery restoral AC failure AC failure restoral estoral RAM fault report None 303 RAM restora Noe ROM fault report None 304 Serial interface fault report None iali 336 Serial interface restoral None None None None None None None C
440. rity level higher than or equal to your own Operator ID This is the number assigned to each User by WDSRP You may use this number for organizational purpos es Name This is the name of the User Address City State Zip Code This is the address of the User Phone Number This is the phone number to reach this User Notes This field may be used for any additional notes you may have concerning this User The rest of the fields in the Find User window are filled in automatical ly by WDSRP They are Copyright 1994 96 Detection Systems Inc Created This field lists the time and date when this User data was created Modified This field lists the time and date when this User data was last modified Modify op This field lists the operator s number who last modified this User information 4 5 2 Find User window Commands Insert New Choose the Insert New command from the right hand column com mand buttons This command is used to create a new WDSRP pro gram User The Edit User Information window will appear Most the fields will be blank waiting for your in The Operator ID Created Modified and Modify op fields will be filled in by WDSRP Edit User Information Password Authority level Operator ID Name Address City Zip Created Modified Modify oper Notes Cancel Enter this operator s Password Edit Data Choose
441. rmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Re orient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help 10 0 FCC Phone Connection Notice To Users This unit complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules On the top of the PCB is a label that contains among other information the FCC Registration Number and the Ringer Equivalence Number REN for this equipment You must upon request provide this information to your local telephone company The REN is useful to determine the quantity of devices that you may connect to your telephone line and still have all of those devices ring when your telephone number is called In most but not all areas the sum of the REN s of all devices connected to o
442. rogrammed for your specific needs Remember that each zone has a pre programmed default as shown in the default chart below Data Digit 1 6 Data Digit 2 7 Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 1 0 See Glossary Section 6 1 for further details Enter the Program Address 0 0 0 Enter Data Digit 1 6 Enter Data Digit 2 7 Enter the Pound button Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode stent Alarm o Alarm on Open Trouble on Open Trouble on Short l jejejejo 0 1 are Hex values They will display as A B at the keypads Only when disarmed When armed this becomes an Alarm on Short or Open for non 24 hour zones Value Select Option DD fill in Disabled 0 Perimeter Instant 1 24 Hour Entry Exit Delay 1 Entry Exit Delay 2 Interior Entry Exit Follower Interior Home Away Interior Instant Day Monitor 8 Keyswitch toggle See Note 9 Zone Address Default 23 Steady alarm output alarm on short and open Entry Exit delay 1 24 Steady alarm output alarm on short and open Entry Exit delay 2 21 Steady alarm output alarm on short and open Perimeter Instant 25 Steady alarm output alarm on short and open Interior entry exit follower 26 Steady alarm output alarm on short and open Interior home away 27 Steady alarm output alarm on short and DS7080i Referenc
443. rogramming e Burglar Zone Reports must be programmed for those zones used e Low Battery Report Program Address 32 must be programmed e AC Failure Report Program Address 32 must be programmed Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 Reference Guide e Open Report Program Address 31 must be programmed e Close Report Program Address 31 must be programmed e Automatic Test Reports Program Address 36 must be programmed 2 Timer Programming Bell Cutoff Times Program Address 23 must be programmed for not less than 15 minutes Entry Exit Delay Times Program Address 23 must be programmed for not longer than 60 seconds 3 General Control Programming e Must be programmed for Swinger Shunts disabled Closing Ringback disabled and Force Arming disabled Pro gram Address 10 4 Zone Programming e The Burglar alarm output signal Address 04 whether pulsed or steady must be different from the Fire alarm signal 5 Alarm Output Programming Program Address 08 must be programmed as X X 8 Grade C Installations using Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter only Required Accessories e The control must be mounted in the Detection Systems model AE7060CC enclosure with a cover actuated tamper switch installed Report Programming e Burglar Zone Reports must be programmed for those zones used Low Battery Report Program Address 32 must be programmed AC Failure Report Program Address 32 must
444. roilleur du Canada 13 0 FOR INSTALLATIONS IN NEW ZEALAND Two Wire Connection The operation of this equipment on the same line as telephones or other equipment with audible warning devices or automatic ring detectors will give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may cause false tripping of the ring detector Should such problems occur the user is not to contact Telecom Faults Service DS7060 Reference Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc 14 0 REPORT PROGRAMMING 14 1 Suggested Values Personal Dialing Format This is a 2 pulse per second PPS 0 2 account code 2 report event digits format intended for manual reception i e the panel will call a phone number where a person is expected to answer After a call is made the panel will start sending the first report If the report was a Communicator Test and Program Address 33 had a value of 00850000 the person answering the phone will hear 8 pulses followed by a 1 second delay then 5 pulses followed by a 3 second delay This sequence will repeat for 60 seconds per call After 60 seconds the panel will hang up and call again making a total of three calls of 60 seconds duration each After three calls the panel considers this a successful transmission of one report If any reports still remain to be sent they will be sent in the same manner A way to expedite this report process would be to provide an acknowledge to the panel that the report was heard and under stood by the rec
445. rol Program ming Enable Remote Programmer Callback If programmed when the remote programmer tries to initiate a session with the panel the panel will hang up and call the remote programmer phone number This ensures the correct remote programmer is initiating the call Dial Pulse on all Phone Numbers If programmed the panel will dial phone number 1 2 and the remote programmer phone number 3 using the pulse format Dial Tone on all Phone Numbers If programmed the panel will dial phone number 1 2 and the remote programmer phone num ber 3 using the tone format 7 15 Phone Answering Programming e Answering Machine Bypass This feature allows the panel to answer incoming calls when answering machines are used If the line rings stops ringing then rings again within one minute the panel will seize the phone line on the first ring Phone Answering Programming The panel can be programmed to answer the phone after a selected number of rings for remote programming access It can also be programmed to answer the phone after a different number of rings when in armed or dis armed states This can be used to call the panel location and determine its arming state 7 16 FCC Compliance Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a r
446. rrupting a communication For example call waiting can be disabled in many areas by dialing 70 before the phone number for tone dial and 1170 for pulse dial DS7080i Reference Guide Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc 11 0 Installation Guide for U L Listed Svstems 11 1 DS7080i U L Listings Household Fire Alarm U L Standard UL985 Household Burglary Alarm U L Standard UL1023 Police Station Connection Grades AA and A U L Standard UL365 Central Station Burglary Alarm Grades AA A B and C U L Standard UL1610 The control panel should be installed in accordance with U L Standard UL681 Installation and Classification of Mercantile and Bank Burglar Alarm Systems or U L Standard UL1641 Installation and Classification of Residential Burglar Alarm Systems It should also be installed in accordance with NFPA 72 for Household installations This panel has not been investigated to the requirements of UL294 Access Control 11 1 1 The following table shows the DS7080i system configuration for the various types of fire and burglar alarm service for which theproducts are U L Listed U L Application Product CSB B C LB A PSCB D A PSCB DR A HF B DS7080i Standard Enclosure JAE7080CC Attack Enclosure DS7445 DS7447 Spectrum PAL200 AB 12 Bell Housing Key to Application Codes Configuration Codes CSB A Central Station Burglary grades AA andA R Required CSB B C Central Station
447. rt Two Digits 00 through FF e Zone Trouble Restoral This report is sent when the zone trouble condition is cleared 8 23 Address 29 Zone Bypass Report Two Digits 00 through FF e Zone Bypass Reports are sent with the Closing Report Address 20 digit 1 must be set for 2 or 3 for these reports See Section 8 14 Report Control 8 24 Address 30 Zone Bypass Restoral Report Two Digits 00 through FF e Zone Bypass Restoral Reports are only sent with an Opening Report Address 20 digit 1 must be set for 2 or 3 for these reports See Section 8 14 Report Control Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 Reference Guide 8 25 Address 31 Open Close Duress Report Two Digits 00 through FF If second digit is F the user code is substituted NOTE 3 1 3 1 with Parity and 4 1 will not send a user number OPEN REPORT A l CLOSE REPORT NOTE lf Quick Arm or Residential Mode is used User 1 will be reported in closing reports DURESS REPORT PARTIAL CLOSE REPORT FIRST OPEN AFTER ALARM cancel report open reset Open This report is sent when the system has been disarmed In Contact ID or 4 9 formats the user number for the person who disarmed the system will be sent with this report To send the user number along with an Open Report in other formats program the extended digit of the report as F 5 The Open Report will only be sent if a Close Report was sent previously Close This reportis sen
448. rtition Used Alpha Master Partition el l l Is iS IS ke Si I oa oN loo IN fe len a ey In e Command 4 zone function bypass 11 pa I5 IF 19 111 2 14 16 18 10 12 The keypad Fire Alarm key is disabled Output Assignments By choosing this command the Edit Outputs window will appear From here you may edit the selected outputs and accompanying informa tion Edit Outputs SAMPLE Thomas J Brown Select output Alarm output gt Programmed output 1 gt Programmed output 2 Output follows Latch on after alarm gt Entry prealert gt System Reset pulse gt Control is armed gt Ground start gt Zone status Partition assignment Partition 1 gt Partition 2 gt Partition 3 gt Partition 4 gt Partition 5 gt Partition 6 gt Partition 7 gt Partition 8 gt All Partitions Octal output modules 1 2 Output function gt Zone alarm gt Zone alarm delayed gt Keypad sounder gt Access output gt Not Used gt Panic output 21 29 gt 2 gt 10 23 211 gt a gt 12 25 213 26 214 gt F 215 28 gt Sete indication gt gt hep o o gt 4 Disabled gt Follow Burg Alarm EEI 2 Follow Fire Alarm The Alarm Qutput information is displaved gt Follow Burg Fire Alarm Partitions By choosing this command the Edit Partitions window will appear
449. ry is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions PO1 Shorts to Auxiliary when activated Can sink up to 1 A Programmed in Address 008 2 AUXILIARY POWER Provides 12 VDC special application up to 1 A for powering detectors 1 2 3 4 5 6 Q 8 TRBL Trouble Input For the connection of anv accessorv that provides a drv contact trouble output PO2 PO2 supplies 12 12 5 v and up to 500 mA when activated PO2 function programmed in address 009 1 ZONES 1 8 Zones 1 8 are for connection of NO or NC alarm contacts These zones require a 2 21KQ resistor P N 25899 at the end of the loop Power is momentarily removed after a PIN System Reset during a fire verification Only zone 1 may be used for compatible 2 wire smoke detectors up to 20 Zone programming is done in addresses 000 007 KEYPAD Up to 4 keypads may be used Maximum Wire lenght each DS7443 400 ft 122m maximum wire lenght Total in system 1600 ft 488M Each keypad must be a home run Do not daisy chain keypads DS7445 DS7447 1000ft 805m maximum wire length Total in system 4000ft 1220m Keypads may be home run or daisy chained Maximum of 2 keypads per run for 22 AWG 8mm or 3 keypads for 18 AWG 1 0mm Trouble input is non supervised Do not use an
450. ry restoral for a zone Fire restoral for a zone Waterflow restoral for a zone Supervisory restoral for a zone Burglary trouble for a zone Fire trouble for a zone Waterflow trouble for a zone Supervisory trouble for a zone Low battery on a radio zone Low battery restoral on a radio zone Open report Close report Duress report Partial close report First open after alarm cancel report Low battery Low battery restoral AC failure AC failure restoral Octal relay fault report Octal relay restoral Exit error report Recent closing report System test start report System test end report Continued on next page DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 15 1 SIA Format Continued Reports Svstem normal test report Communicator test report Remote programming successful report Remote programming failure report Local programming successful report Local programming failure report Communication failure report Communication restoral EEPROM checksum failure or kevpad supervision failure report EEPROM checksum restoral or kevpad supervision restoral Multiplex bus fault Multiplex bus restoral Radio receiver tamper Radio receiver tamper restoral Aux power fault report Aux power restoral Ground fault report Ground fault restoral Svstem off normal test report Phone line 1 fault report Phone line 1 restoral Phone line 2 fault report Phone line 2 restoral AAGARD fault report AAGARD fault
451. s change time and date bypass arm disarm perform system tests sys tem reset and view history PIN 001 must be a master code and must have authority 0 Any or all PINS may be master codes 1 Unlimited Can enter all commands bypass arm disarm sys tem reset and perform system tests Can not change PINs 2 General Can bypass arm and disarm Can not change PINs system reset or enter the 7 or 8 functions 3 Arm Only Can arm the system with On arming only Can not perform any other functions including disarming DS7080i Reference Guide 4 Temporary Valid only for a limited time Can arm and disarm the system but can not perform any other functions This code will automatically be deleted after 15 days if you have not al ready done so 5 Duress When the system is disarmed using a duress code a silent report is sent to the central station Duress codes are in tended to be used when the user is forced to disarm the system 6 Access When a PIN with Access Code authority is entered any output programmed for Access Output e g door strikes will pulse on for 10 seconds works when the system is armed or disarmed Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc 7 5 Error Displavs This chart explains the procedure for reading Error messages when the green Power Light is flashing Control panel problems are indicated bv a flashing green Power Light The DS7447 display will also read
452. s Fault OI Aux Power Fault tal Binti A POIANA DJ Fire Zone Trouble ral i Select Option pp Zone Trouble Es Follow Output Function 1 Battery Test Follow Output Function 3 Follow Output Function 4 Follow Output Function 5 Follow Output Function 6 The Octal Relay Module is the DS7488 Follow Output Function 7 See section 1 13 for further details Follow Output Function 8 Follow Output Function 9 To have the DS7488 s relays follow the Output Functions Follow Output Function 10 program Data Digit 1 of this address as a 3 then program data digit 2 as shown Follow Output Function 11 Follow Output Function 12 See System Overview section 6 1 6 for further details Follow Output Function 13 Follow Output Function 14 To program the Output Functions see section 12 33 Follow Output Function 15 Up to 15 Output Functions may be programmed 0 5 are Hex values They will display as A F at the keypads 12 32 1 Octal Relay Module Output Partition Assignment Program Addresses 3725 3732 Program Address 3725 Program Address 3726 Program Address 3727 Data Digit1 Data Digit 2 Data Digit 1 Data Digit 2 Data Digit1 Data Digit 2 ee EH E E IES fe Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 3 Relay 4 Relay 5 Relay 6 default 8 default 8 default 8 default 8 default 8 default 8 Select Option DD Belongs to Partition 1 o Program Address 3728 Program Address 3729 Program Address 3730 Bel g to Partition 2 1 Data Digit 1 Data Digit 2 Da
453. s are programmed at addresses 1472 through 1516 6 2 Zone A Zone is an input to the DS7400Xi Control Communicator There are 8 hardwired zones on the main circuit board Additional zones may be added by using the DS7433 8 zone expansion module the DS7430 multiplex loop module and or other modules 6 3 Zone Function A Zone Function is the description of how a particular zone will be have e g steady alarm output bypassing allowed alarm on short trouble on open perimeter instant Zone functions may be custom made but 8 default zone func tions already exist There are many possible zone functions but only up to 15 dif ferent zone functions are allowed per control Each zone must be programmed as a specific zone function Any number and combination of zones may be programmed as particular zone functions 7 0 Glossary 7 1 General Control Programming Normal Arming PIN On If programmed arms the entire system while allowing entry delays for entry exit zones Perimeter Instant Arming PIN No Entry Perimeter Only If programmed arms only the perimeter of the system and does not allow entry delays for entry exit zones Perimeter Arming PIN Perimeter Only If programmed arms only the perimeter of the system while allowing entry delays for entry exit zones Custom Arming PIN 4 If programmed allows custom arming of the system and bypasses the zone functions specified in
454. s been sent Therefore the Pager format is not recommended as the primary communication method Reports with Restorals Report Restoral Trouble Address Value Address Value Address Value Zone Function 1 Zone Function 2 Zone Function 3 Zone Function 4 Zone Function 5 Zone Function 6 Zone Function 7 Zone Function 8 Zone Function 9 Zone Function 10 Zone Function 11 Zone Function 12 Zone Function 13 Zone Function 14 Zone Function 15 e EA E o ke ti K3 e el ka je po Continued on next page DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc Pager Format Continued Reports with Restorals Report Restoral Address Address Low Batterv AC Fail Svstem Trouble Kevpad Fire Svstem Test Reports without Restorals Address Value Open Close Partial Close First Open after Alarm Exit Error Recent Closing Kevpad Emergencv Kevpad Panic Duress Report Successful Report Unsuccessful Address Value Address Value Remote Program F 0331 F Local Program F 0333 DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 15 0 Report Programming Values Sent 15 1 SIA Format SIA SIA event data Reports code field Zone Burglary alarm for a zone Number B Fire alarm for a zone Waterflow alarm for a zone Supervisory for a zone Keypad fire A Keypad fire restoral A Keypad emergency 1 3 or B Keypad panic or C Burgla
455. s new template Edit Template New Template Notes Record created Last modification Operator when modified Cancel Select the Equipment Type that is used for this template Copyright 1994 96 Detection Systems Inc T 3 4 When complete choose OK The Edit Template window for this new template will appear Edit Template 7ADOXI 3 TESTTEMP General Keypad Output assignments Partitions Phone control Remote access one functions Zone programming Reporting System parameters PINs Commercial fire Time windows RS 232 Ardis seve Lew Accept this dialog box and changes made It is here where you complete all the programming informa tion concerning this template See Section 4 0 for complete details concerning this window How to Call a Control Panel In order to call a control panel the following requirements must first be met Note The data phone number field must be filled in for the account you wish to call unless manual connect is used The control panel must either be programmed to answer the phone or someone must be on site to cause it to answer from a keypad command If used you must have the correct agency and remote codes programmed If this is the first time the control panel will be contacted from WDSRRP the agency and remote codes in the panel will be blank th
456. sent along with this report Partial Close This report is sent when the system is armed par tially or force armed First Open After Alarm This report is sent when the system is disarmed after an alarm has occurred It will also be sent if the system is already disarmed and a user number is entered to si Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc lence a 24 hour or fire zone Low Batterv This report is sent when a low batterv condition occurs Battery Restoral This report is sent when a low battery condi tion restores AC Fail This report is sent when an AC failure condition occurs This report may be delayed in address 0197 AC Restoral This report is sent when an AC failure condition restores Communicator Test System Normal This report is sent at the 24 hour check in time if there is not a control trouble an active fire alarm that has not been acknowledged a fire trouble or a supervisory condition Note To send a Communicator Test even if one of these conditions exists program the Communicator Test System Off Normal Remote Program Successful This report is sent after a Re mote Program session if the session was terminated properly Remote Program Unsuccessful This report is sent after a Re mote Program session if some error has occurred or the session did not terminate properly Local Program Successful This report is sent when local pro grammer s mode is exited and there is no error assoc
457. ser Pin Auth Parti Level tions 061 o2 T o3 osa T os Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 5 0 Svstem Worksheet continued Zone Location and Notes Example SZ Single Zone Input Type Zone Output Partition amp Location MZ Multiple Zone Input Function IO DS7465 see section 12 3 Zone 1 SZ Zn Funct 1 2 Kitchen Type Zone Output Partition amp Location Type Zone Output Partition amp Location Function Function Zone 1 Zone 31 Zone 2 Zone 32 Zone 3 Zone 33 Zone 4 Zone 34 Zone 5 Zone 35 Zone 6 Zone 36 Zone 7 Zone 37 Zone 8 Zone 38 Zone 9 Zone 39 Zone 10 Zone 40 Zone 11 Zone 40 Zone 12 Zone 41 Zone 13 Zone 42 Zone 14 Zone 43 Zone 15 Zone 44 Zone 16 Zone 45 Zone 17 Zone 46 Zone 18 Zone 47 Zone 19 Zone 48 Zone 20 Zone 49 Zone 21 Zone 50 Zone 22 Zone 51 Zone 23 Zone 52 Zone 24 Zone 53 Zone 25 Zone 54 Zone 26 Zone 55 Zone 27 Zone 56 Zone 28 Zone 57 Zone 29 Zone 58 Zone 30 Zone 59 Zone 40 Zone 60 DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc Type Zone Output Zone 61 Zone 62 Zone 63 Zone 64 Zone 65 Zone 66 Zone 67 Zone 68 Zone 69 Zone 70 Zone 71 Zone 72 Zone 73 Zone 74 Zone 75 Zone 76 Zone 77 Zone 78 Zone 79 Zone 80
458. sers should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate elec tric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate Terminal Requirements The Load Number LN assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop which is used by the device to prevent overloading The termina tion on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100 The Load Number of the DS7080i is 2 RFI Requirements This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Cana dian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations Cet appareil numerique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Regle ment sur le material broilleur du Canada 6 18 For Installations in New Zealand Two wire Connection The operation of this equipment on the same line as telephones or other equipment with audible warning devices or automatic ring detectors will give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may cause false tripping of the ring detector Should such problems occur the user is not to contact Telecom Faults Service This equipment does not fully meet Telecom s impedance require ments Performance limitations may occur when used in conjunc tion with some parts of the network Telecon will accept no respon sibilty should difficulties arise under such circumstan
459. sired check for opens in the loop Re ure in the building move wiring and place an EOL resistor across the zone to eliminate a problem with the control If the trouble goes away the problem is in the wiring or in a contact connected to the zone 87 display AC Power Failure The transformer is unplugged a Plug the transformer in The wiring from the transformer is de b Check the wiring fective The circuit to the transformer is off or c Check the circuit and circuit breakers defective The transformer is defective d Replace the transformer In some cases the transformer may be e Connect to a circuit that is not controlled this way connected to a circuit controlled by a switch or a circuit breaker that is peri odically turned off Fire Alarm displays 000 The Fire Alarm was caused by the A key Use the System Reset command to clear the dis play Fire Trouble no zone number When in Commercial Fire Mode a ground See 87 Ground Fault display for solution fault causes this display Fire Trouble Fire zone wiring problems If you try to disable the zone by reprogramming it zone number you need to reset the control by either entering then exiting programmer s mode or removing then restor ing power to the control panel DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 18 0 Program Addresses Address Description Address Description Address Description
460. st Restoral 39 System Trouble 38 System Trouble Restoral 38 System Worksheets 21 T Test Reports System Test 39 Tests Communicator Test 14 Local Battery Sounder Test 14 Time Delays 34 Tone with Auto Switch to Pulse 33 Trouble 28 U U L Listings DS7060 U L Listings 42 Installation Considerations 42 Programming the DS7060 43 User Control 29 Users 5 Ww WIRING 7 Wiring and Programming Information for Installatio 48 Z Zone 5 Bypass 12 Response Time 5 Test 13 Type 24 Hour Auxiliary 24 Disabled 24 Fire Zone 25 Fire Zone with Verification 25 Interior Follower 24 Interior Home Away 24 Interior Instant 24 Keyswitch On Off 25 Keyswitch Toggle 25 Perimeter Delayed 24 Perimeter Follower Homeguard 25 Perimeter Homeguard 25 Perimeter Instant 24 Silence Audible 25 Zone Action 26 Zone Alarm 35 Zone Alarm Restoral 35 Zone Bypass 25 Zone Programming 24 Zone Response Time 27 Zone Restoral Options 27 Zone Trouble 35 Zone Trouble Restoral 36 Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc Copvright O 1996 Detection Svstems Inc DS7060 Reference Guide DS7060 ROM Update Kit Installation Instructions DESCRIPTION This ROM Update Kit is for use with the DS7060 Control Communicator when an update to the svstem software has been implemented The kit consists of one ROM chip for insertion into the DS7060 Control Communicator CAUTION This ROM chip is static sensitive Be sure to touch the grounded DS7060 enclosu
461. successful report Local programming failure report 306 Restoral None DS7060 Reference Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc REPORTS CID EVENT CID DATA 610753 FIELD Kevpad supervision failure report 330 Kevpad Number Kevpad supervision restoral 330 Restoral Fuse fault report 300 Fuse restoral Exit error report 457 Recent closing report 459 Svstem test start report 607 Svstem test end report 607 Restoral Unspecified svstem trouble 300 Unspecified svstem trouble restoral 300 Restoral Bvpass for a burglarv zone 573 Zone Number Bvpass for a fire zone 571 Zone Number Bvpass restore for a burglarv zone 573 Restoral Zone Number Bvpass restore for a fire zone 571 Restoral Zone Number Communicator trouble 354 Communicator trouble restore 354 Restoral NOTE If one keypad has failed this value will be 1 2 3 or 4 representing the failed keypad If more than one keypad has failed this value will be higher than 4 Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 Reference Guide 15 0 PROGRAM ADDRESSES QUICK REFERENCE DESCRIPTION ADD PA Duress Code o oS d 9S 89 29 l 89 86 3 i 7 7 7 i 3 3 i 3 a p9 Residential Mode i 813 8 13 89 8 19 4 8 7 8 19 2 A 5 DS7060 Reference Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc Svmbols 3 1 34 3 1 with Paritv 5 34 3 1E 34 3 1E with Paritv 5 34 4 1 5
462. switch zones and non bypassable zones can not be force armed Not available in U L Listed systems 6 13 Report Programming e Reports For pulse formats reports are programmed by entering data in the reporting and extended digits The report will send the data programmed for each event For SIA and Contact ID the report formats are fixed and may be activated by placing a 1 in the reporting digit To disable a report enter a 0 in the reporting digit Exception In Pager Format 0 may be a valid reporting digit See Section 12 3 Pager Format To send the Man Number along with Open and Close reports program an F enter 5 at the keypad in the extended digit Keypad Fire Alarm This report is sent when a fire alarm has been activated using the A emergency key Keypad Fire Restoral This report is sent when a keypad fire alarm has been restored using the System Reset command Zone Alarm An alarm report is sent when a zone alarm occurs Program this report for any zones you wish to send an alarm re port for For local zones no reports do not program an alarm report The zone number will automatically be sent for this report in SIA or Contact ID format Keypad Emergency Alarm This report is sent when an emer gency alarm has been activated using the B emergency key Keypad Panic This report is sent when an emergency alarm has been activated using the C emergency key e Zone Alarm Restoral T
463. sword that is vour safeguard should anvthing happen to the other passwords The Master Password can never be deleted rempiates users L Histonv Ltogout_ and its ae een level can never be changed Once you have changed Version 1 7r14 Feb 20 1996 08 38 59 the Master Password do not use it as a working password use the SerialNumber 0214 1 Level 15 Password you just created see Section 2 1 Write down E EE the Master Password and keep it in a secure place You will NOT be ystems INC Last backup sx NOT BACKED UP xx able to see the Master Password under User Information unless you log in with it Windows Remote Programmer Copyright 1992 1995 F Detection Systems Inc To change the Master Password All Rights Reserved 1 Choose Log out from the WDSRP Main window 2 Enter Master for the password as you Log in 05 23 PM Tue Apr 09 1996 3 Choose Users from the WDSRP Main window 4 The Find User window will appear The Find User window will appear showing User lev15 information Find User Insert new Find User Password MASTER Authority level 16 Operator ID 1 Insert new Edit data Password Name Default change this password a Authority level 15 Operator ID 2 Address Edit data Name Default change this password Address City Zip Phone Locate key City Created
464. t 74001 3 Template NONE Acct ID SAMPLE Rept ID 1 Sort key 1 5 Sort key 2 Auto service Name Thomas J Brown Auto call Address Detection Systems 130 Perinton Parkway City Fairport Contact T J Brown Zip 14450 Da 555 1212 e 555 1212 Notes Sample layout Comm Created 11 17 Fri Aug 16 1996 Modified Revision Modify oper 1 11 38 AM Fri Aug 16 1996 Dialing Image Status Stop communications attempt Answering Machine This command will make WDSRP hang up and redial the phone num ber This will allow control panels with answering machine override programmed to answer this call from WDSRP Abort This command will cancel this attempt to call and hang up immedi ately CAUTION Only use the abort command if communications are locked up or in the event of an emergency The abort command will cause the control panel to remain on line a few minutes before it times out The following commands will show when WDSRP is on line with a control panel Find Account Type 74001 3 Template NONE Acct ID BLANK 32 Rept ID 1 Sort key 1 5 Sort key 2 History Auto service Mode Name Auto call Address Edit Data Status City Zip Contact Da 4214270 Program Notes Options Comm 11 48 Fri Aug 16 1996 End Session Image 16
465. t gt gt gt Partition 1 through 5 gt Partition 1 through 6 Bell output monitor gt Partition 1 through 7 Monitor phone line 1 gt All partitions Maniter phone Hae Z gt First last partition Pulse only gt Tone only J rady alarn an phere Hee felt _ Bypass report Enter the alarm reporting phone number Remote Access By choosing this command the Edit Remote Access window will ap pear From here you may edit the parameters for remote program ming access Edit Remote Access SAMPLE Thomas J Brown Remote phone number Agency code Remote passcode Answer disarmed ring count jNone 4 Armed ring count Automatic history dialout No dialout E at Keypad programmers code _ Tane diei _ Callback on 300 BAUD 6 All keypad programming allowed gt Can t change phone numbers gt No keypad programming allowed Enter the remote programmers phone number Zone Functions By choosing this command the Edit Zone Functions window will ap pear From here you define the zone functions and edit other related information Edit Zone Functions MIKE El Allow Type Output response bypass Trouble on Disabled z Invisible 1 None Disabled Invisible None Disabled Invisible None Disabled Invisible None Disabled Disabled None None z o mm ee we Disabled Invisible None BEEBERBEBEN
466. t Digit 1 2 1 2 L lu Kevpad Fire Alarm __Zone4Alarm Address 174 Address 179 Default 00 Default 40 Reporting Extended Reporting Extended Digit Digit Digit Digit 1 2 Keypad Fire Restoral 7 T Zone 5 Alarm A Address 175 Address 180 Default 00 Default 50 Reporting Extended Reporting Extended Digit Digit Digit Digit 1 2 1 2 Zone 1 Alarm Zone6Alam Address 176 Address 181 Default 10 Default 60 Reporting Extended Reporting Extended Digit Digit Digit Digit 1 2 Zone 2 Alarm Zone 7 Alarm Address 177 Address 182 Default 20 Default 70 Reporting Extended Reporting Extended Digit Digit Digit Digit 1 2 Zone 3 Alarm Zone 8 Alarm Address 178 Address 183 Default 30 Default 80 DS7080i Reference Guide Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc 10 17 Report Programming Continued Reporting Extended Digit Digit 1 2 Kevpad Emergencv Alarm Address 184 Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit 1 2 Kevpad Panic Address 185 Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit 1 2 Zone 1 Alarm Restoral A Address 186 Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit 1 2 LILI Zone 2 Alarm Restoral Address 187 Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit 1 2 Zone 3 Alarm Restoral A Address 188 Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit 1 2 Zone 4 Alarm Restoral A Address 189 Default 00 Page 38 Copyright 1995 97 Det
467. t Programming Values Sent 13 1 SIA Format SIA reporting allows the installer to select the tvpe of event each Se hes report will send to the central station For example if a burglary zone Reports code field is used as a 24 hour panic zone it can now report as a PA panic alarm when using the SIA format Burglary alarm for a zone Fire alarm for a zone The event type is programmed in the extended digit of the report Keypad fire A addresses 174 230 To activate a report when using the SIA format place a 1 in the first reporting digit To select the type of event for Keypad fire restoral A this report place one of the following values in the second digit Keypad emergency 1 3 or B Data Digit 2 value SIA Report Explanation Keypad panic or C PA Panic Alarm Burglary restoral for a zone PR Panic Restore i Zone Fire restoral for a zone EA QA Emergency Alarm Number QR Emergency Restore Burglary trouble for a zone TA Tamper Alarm Fire trouble for a zone TR Tamper Restore Tore UA Untyped Zone Alarm Burglary trouble restoral for a zone UR Untyped Zone Restore Fire trouble restoral for a zone UT Untyped Zone Trouble 0 UJ Untyped Trouble Restore Open report YP Power Supply Trouble Close report ien owes repon Partial close report First open after alarm cancel report Low battery Low battery restoral AC failure AC failure restoral Automatic Comm test report Manual Comm test report
468. t Report Minute Address 285 Default 00 Data Digit Data Digit Remote Programmer Call Out Minute Address 287 Default 00 Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc 10 25 Test Report and Remote Programmer Call out Programming Program Address 288 Example Test Report and Remote Programmer Call Out programming p oD bata hi sate pire gree ooe aa defines the day and frequency for the Communicator Test emote Programmer on Saturdays Report and the Remote Programmer Call Out Data Digit 1 4 Data Digit 2 7 Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Program Address 2 8 8 Enter Data Digit 1 4 Enter Data Digit 2 7 Enter the Pound button Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode Data Digit Select Option jp ml Do not send a Test Report 0 Select Option DD Send a Test Report on Sunday Do not call the Remote Programmer 0 Send a Test Report on Monday Send a Test Report on Tuesday Send a Test Report on Wednesday Send a Test Report on Thursday 1 Send a Test Report on Friday Call the Remote Programmer on Wednesday 4 Call the Remote Programmer on Thursday 15 Send a Test Report on Saturday Call the Remote Programmer on Friday Send a Test Report every day Call the Remote Programmer on Saturday Send a Test Report every 8 days Send a Test Report every 28 days 0 Send a Test Report every hour EREEBPEEB
469. t Telecom Faults Service Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 8 0 Operating Guide 8 1 Personal Identification Numbers 8 1 1 General Information When programming Personal Identification Numbers it is helpful to know the following terms s PIN Personal Identification Number This is the 4 digit code us ers must enter at the kevpad to gain access to the svstem A PIN may be assigned to each User Number 001 through 090 User Number This is the number that identifies each person using the svstem There are 90 possible User Numbers available for use 001 through 090 Authoritv Level This number determines which functions each user will be able to perform Your system has the capability to assign up to 90 PINs each four digits long Each User Number can have only one PIN assigned to it Attempting to assign the same PIN to multiple User Numbers will result in the three beep error tone and the entry will not be made User Number 001 is designated as a Master code It can be used to add delete or change other PINs It will always have access to all partitions regardless of how it is programmed User Number 001 is shipped from the factory with the PIN of 123 4 This PIN should be changed to one of your personal preference and must be programmed as a Master code PINs should never be programmed with common sequences such as 1234 111 1 or 246 8 because they are easily violated 8 1 2 Removing a PIN To disable
470. t have been uploaded to this Account When choosing this com mand the History window will appear with the following commands History 7400XIDEMO Detection Systems Inc Event Keypad restoral Program accessed locally Program accessed locally Program accessed remotely Programmed remotely Date change remotely set to 8 13 96 Time change remotely set to 6 12 PM Tue Program accessed remotely Program accessed locally Date change remotely set to 8 13 96 Time change remotely set to 12 23 PM Tue Programmed locally Date change remotely set to 8 13 96 Time change remotely set to 12 26 PM Tue Date change remotely set to 8 13 96 Time change remotely set to 12 37 PM Tue Programmed remotely Program accessed remotely Date change remotely set to 8 13 96 Time change remotely set to 6 13 PM Tue Print reports from this record or database to paper or disk 8 13 1396 6 13 1996 6 13 1996 8 13 1396 8 13 1396 8 13 1396 8 13 1396 8 13 1396 8 13 1396 8 13 1396 6 13 1996 8 13 1396 8 13 1396 12 23 PM 12 24 PM 12 24 PM 12 24 PM 12 26 PM 12 26 PM 12 26 PM 12 37 PM 12 37 PM 12 37 PM 6 12 PM 6 13 PM 6 13 PM FILTER This command will allow vou to view specific historv events bv select categories and time range REPORTS This command allows vou to print out historv re ports DELETE This command allows vou to move the historv events to the Historv Archive or to delete them completelv CL
471. t kevpad address 11 15 the corresponding kevpad s is are unavailable Select Options o f1 2 f3 disabied fel Apra LGD Keypad fel le PLeD Keypad el Master Keypae o If only using one partition do not program keypads as Master Keypads Only program for a Master Keypad if you need to view multiple partitions from a sin gle keypad 12 11 Keypad Partition Assignment Program Addresses 0208 0215 Program Address 0208 Program Address 0209 Data Digit 1 Data Digit 2 Data Digit 1 Data Digit 2 feo MEI see afeced Keypad 1 Keypad2 Keypad 3 Keypad 4 Program Address 0210 Data Digit 1 Data Digit 2 El ae Keypad 5 Keypad 6 Select Option po Belongs to Partition 1 ET TAN songs to Parttion 2 Belongs to Partion 7 6 Program Address 0211 Program Address 0212 Program Address 0213 Data Digit 1 Data Digit 2 Data Digit1 Data Digit 2 Data Digit1 Data Digit 2 Keypad 7 Keypad 8 Keypad 9 Keypad 10 Keypad 11 Keypad 12 Program Address 0214 Data Digit 1 Data Digit 2 Program Address 0215 Data Digit1 Data Digit 2 Keypad 13 Keypad 14 Keypad 15 Must Be 0 DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 12 12 Emergencv Kev Programming Program Addresses 0181 0182 Example Emergencv Kev and Panic Kev programming disables or activates these To program the Fire Kev and the Special Emergencv Kev as both having a Steady Alarm keys the A B and C keys located
472. t template For a detailed description of a template record see Section 4 4 Start up the WDSRP program by double clicking the WD SRP Edit icon from the WDSRP window You will be prompted to enter your password Enter the ev eryday password you previously created Choose OK to complete the log in Choose Template from the WDSRP Main window The Find Template window will appear Find Template Insert 7090 Template JFACTOR insert new Factorv Default iLocate key Reports Record created Last modification Export Operator when modified Beginning Previous Next End of file Locate a specific record in the data base Also changes the database key 5 Choose the Insert New command from the right hand col umn command buttons The Select Initial Template Data window will appear Select initial template data Select the source for the initial data for this new template record Select BLANK for no initial data Select ACCOUNT to copy the data from the current account Select TEMPLATE to copy the data from the current template Select CANCEL to cancel the Insert New command Account Template Cancel Choose the source from which you will create the new tem plate For now select the Blank command This command will call up a blank Edit Template New Template window From here you will fill in all the necessary general information for thi
473. t tones to be sounded at your PC This will enable you to be alerted to j a incoming phone calls and error messages This selection History Archive should be checked User System has sound card Check this selection if the PC Cancel running WDSRP has a sound card installed Operating Mode Check either the Master Slave or Direct Connect boxes The Slave selection is used if WDSRP is op erating from a portable PC If so the control panel will be in structed to call the Master PC to upload data if programmed from a Slave PC The Direct Connect is for connecting the computer directly without the use of a modem or phone line Modem Setup to a DS7400Xi with ROM Version 2 04 or greater or a Type Port Dialing Monitor Volume DS7400Xi Ver 3 See Section 8 0 Direct Connect gt Hayes 1200 COMI e Tone gt Always off gt Quiet gt Hayes 2400 gt COM2 Normal Medium Others gt COM3 Standard gt Always on gt Loud gt COMA gt Alternate Template Account Enter the source directory Modem The Modem selection will enable you to set the pa rameters needed for proper modem operation Answer ring count It is here where you determine how many rings it will take before WDSRP will answer an incom ing call Command strings Line Reset TR Audit File Check this box if you wish the Audit file function ATZ asil to be in use The Audit file keeps track of User activitv within WDSRP Initialization
474. t when the system has been armed In Contact ID or 4 9 formats the user number for the person who armed the system will be sent with this report To send the user number along with a Close Report in other formats program the extended digit of the report as F 5 Duress This report is sent when the system is disarmed using a duress code The user number will not be sent along with this report Partial Close This report is sent when the system is armed partially or force armed First Open After Alarm This report is sent when the system is disarmed after an alarm has occurred It will also be sent if the system is already disarmed and a user number is entered to silence a 24 hour or fire zone 8 26 Address 32 Battery AC Report Two Digits 00 through FF DEFAULT 00 LOW BATTERY REPORT LOW BATTERY RESTORAL REPORT AC FAILURE REPORT AC FAILURE RESTORAL REPORT Low Battery Report This report is sent when a low battery condition occurs Low Battery Restoral Report This report is sent when a low battery condition restores AC Failure Report This report is sent after an AC failure condition occurs AC failure reports will only be sent along with other reports if Address 50 is set to 000 Otherwise reports will be sent after the delay set in Address 50 AC Failure Restoral Report This report is only sent along with other reports if Address 50 is set to 000 Otherwise reports will be sent after the delay set in Address 5
475. ta Digit 1 Data Digit 2 Data Digit 1 Data Digit 2 C Ongs 10 Faron Belongs to Partition 3 Belongs to Partition 4 Relay 7 Relay 8 Relay 9 Relay 10 Relay 11 Relay 12 Belongs to Partition 5 default 8 default 8 default 0 default 0 default 0 default 0 Belongs to Partition 6 Belongs to Partition 7 Program Address 3731 Program Address 3732 ao 6 Data Digit 1 Data Digit 2 Data Digit 1 Data Digit 2 Belongs to Partition 8 Follows all Partitions is Relay 13 Relay 14 Relay 15 Relay 16 default 0 default 0 default 0 default 0 DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 12 33 Output Function Programming Program Addresses 1472 1516 Example Output programming allows vou to have the Outputs follow status Aa Proa amane ee ee ren A Aone Bata events by partition or system wide or follow zone outputs in an Input Output Cross Matrix See the Programming Addresses Work sheet P N 29802 for a description of each address See System Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Program Address 1 4 7 2 Overview section 6 1 7 for further details Enter Data Digit 1 6 Data Digit Enter Data Digit 2 1 Enter the pound key Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode l 1 DH 0 5 are Hex values They will display as A F at the keypads Select Option Data Digit Latch ON after Zone Alarm ON during Entry Pre Alert F
476. ta Digit 3 5 Data Digit 4 1 TO dial the character enter 1 The character is sent as 1 1 when pulse dialing Data Digit 5 2 Data Digit 6 3 Data Digit 7 4 To dial the character enter 2 The character is only valid when tone dialing Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 f 0 To input a three second delay enter 3 Sieh da Digit oe To wait for the dial tone enter 4 in the first digit Enter Data Digit 2 5 To disable a Phone Number enter 5 in the first digit Enter Data Digit 3 5 Enter Data Digit 4 1 EA Daa DILES 1 5 are hex values They will display as B F at the keypads Enter Data Digit 7 4 Enter the Pound button Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode 10 28 1 Phone Number 1 Programming Program Address 296 3 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 OOOOOOOOULOULIOIO LILI 10 28 2 Phone Number 2 a ae Program Address 306 3 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 HUUOOOOOoooooooooooo 10 28 3 ae Number 3 eae Spas Programming Program Address 316 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 JUULUUUUULUULLUUL UU Recommendation The phone line that the control panel is connected to should not have a Call Waiting feature If it must have call waiting program the code to disable call waiting and add a three second delav before the phone number This will prevent incoming calls from inte
477. tal relay outputs An output is needed for each LED and sounder A keyswitch will only control the partition that these zones are assigned to unless programmed as a master then they will control all at once See Program Address 0001 Data Digit 1 Keyswitches and keypads may be used in the same partition if desired Fire Zone This is a zone programmed to activate if the system is armed or disarmed Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc It can be silenced not reset by entering a valid PIN Off The display will indicate a Fire Alarm for this zone on all key pads in every partition A fire reset command must be entered after silencing the alarm to re enable this zone If this zone is programmed for trouble and the loop opens the DS7447 keypad will display Fire Trouble for this zone and the keypad sounders will beep once every ten seconds If the system is a combination fire and burglar alarm the fire alarm has priority over the burglar alarm Fire Zone with Verification This zone is identical to a Fire Zone except that after the first alarm it will perform a fire reset and then wait up to two minutes for a second alarm If a second alarm occurs within this two minute period the sys tem will indicate a fire alarm If there is no second alarm within this two minute period the control panel will reset back to its normal condition Note Use of this control s alarm verification feature is not per mitted
478. tallation Guide P N 30756B e Bring the cable through the wire cable entrance in the keypad base Secure the base to the mounting surface or box e Make all necessary connections from the field wiring to the keypad wires Red Stripe Green Power Power Data In Data Out Figure C Wiring Yellow Stripe 5 0 Sounder Silence e To set the control station s sounder for silent operation place the shorting jumper over the sounder silence pin shown in Figure D 2 Sounder Silence and Address Pins eooommee if ml X Figure D Rear view of circuit board 6 0 Control Station Address Note Each kevpad must have its address set via the address pins Each kevpad must also be programmed at the control panel Select the keypad address 1 6 by placing the shorting jumpers over the address pins as shown in Figure E For the location of the address pins on the back of the circuit board see Figure D i Keypad 1 Keypad 4 2 4 Keypad 2 i 2 Keypad 5 4 1 2 4 1 2 4 1 Keypad3 2 Keypad 6 4 ooma oomoo 00000 moo Moom Mo000 Keypads 5 and 6 are not valid for use with the DS7080i and DS7060 Figure E Assigning keypad addresses Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc e Each keypad must have a different address One keypad must be assigned as Keypad 1
479. te Entering the command sequence Master Code 0 6 will cause the DS7447 keypad to read back the time The control panel will exit you from the master code programming mode after about 15 seconds without a keystroke 8 6 Delayed Arming This section explains how to cause the system to arm after a specified number of hours Delayed arming is simply causing the system to arm after a specified number of hours To program the system for delayed arming perform the following steps Delaved Automatic Arming Enter 9 9 to enter the Delayed Arming programming Enter the number of hours from now The keypad will display the following Arm in nn Hours to accept that you would like the system to arm For example If if is 3 30 now and you would like the system to arm at 9 30 enter 06 Additional Notes Delayed arming can be used even if there are no automatic arming times programmed If delayed arming is used in Master Keypad mode it will affect all partitions you have access to If delayed arming is used in single partition mode or from a single partition keypad it will affect only the partition you are working in Delayed arming will override automatic arming Delayed arming will also provide a 15 minute pre arm period like the one provided with automatic arming DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 8 7 Automatic Arming Each partition can be programmed to automat
480. ter Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 060 1 060 2 061 1 061 2 062 1 062 2 063 1 063 2 064 1 064 2 065 1 065 2 066 1 066 2 067 1 067 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 068 1 068 2 069 1 069 2 070 1 070 2 071 1 071 2 072 1 072 2 073 1 073 2 074 1 074 2 075 1 075 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 076 1 076 2 077 1 077 2 078 1 078 2 079 1 079 2 080 1 080 2 081 1 081 2 082 1 082 2 083 1 083 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 084 1 084 2 085 1 085 2 086 1 086 2 087 1 087 2 088 1 088 2 089 1 089 2 090 1 090 2 091 1 091 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 092 1 092 2 093 1 093 2 094 1 094 2 095 1 095 2 096 1 096 2 097 1 097 2 098 1 098 2 099 1 099 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 100 1 100 2 101 1 101 2 102 1 102 2 103 1 103 2 104 1 104 2 105 1 105 2 106 1 106 2 107 1 107 2 DS7080i Reference Guide Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc Worksheet Continued Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 108 1 108 2 109 1 109 2 110 1 110 2 111 1 111 2 112 1 112 2 113 1 113 2 114 1 114 2 115 1 115 2 Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Character 116 1 116 2 117 1 117 2 118 1 118 2 119 1 119 2 120 1 120 2 121 1
481. th the communications commands Choose the Cancel command to return to the original Find Account window 3 5 How to Answer a Call from a Control Panel In order to answer a call from a control panel that already has an account created for it the following requirements must first be met 1 The Reporting ID 1 and the Reporting Phone number 1 in the account record must match those of the control panel 2 Phone number 3 programmed in the control panel must be for phone line connected to this WDSRP program If an incoming call from a control panel does not have an existing account it will create its own account therefore the requirements in item 1 above will not have to be met The new unknown account will create an account number starting with a dollar sign generally followed by an 8 digit number To have WDSRP automatically answer an incoming call you must be logged out To access the account calling in perform the following 1 After the call has gone on line Log in 2 Choose Accounts from the WDSRP Main window 3 The Find Accounts window will appear showing the account that is on line with WDSRP WDSRP User s Guide To manually answer an incoming call An incoming call produces a tone through the speaker of your com puter This is your notification that a call is incoming When this tone is heard proceed to the Find Accounts window and select the Communicate command then select the Pickup com mand
482. the key Command y T fT What will Happen What to Do ype SNES Sequence PP Communicator If test fails the keypad sounder Test will sound continuously To ka Mi rabecomiiesg at silence the sounder enter vour a i PIN followed by the key or the Requires PIN 8 2 i MA key addresses 220 A Test report is sent to the monitoring 233 237 and 296 service Note This test may take several to be minutes to complete because the programmed control will try 10 attempts before it fails this test If in Residential Mode a PIN is not required for this command 7 10 Event History Readback This chart explains the procedure for performing an Event History Readback The History Buffer stores the last 30 events in memory The DS7447 can display all of these events The DS7445 will only display those zones 1 8 that have alarmed Command B Tvpe of Test What will Happen What to Do YP Sequence PP DS7447 The last event to take place will be DS7447 Scroll through the events by using the 9 6 and Event History PIN 8 9 displayed keys See below Readback DS7445 The zone LEDs 1 8 will flash for any zones that have alarmed To exit from the Event History Mode press the key If in Residential Mode a PIN is not required for this command DS7447 Only Scrolling through the History Events To begin scrolling back through the events press the key The key wi
483. the Enter the DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 12 33 1 Output Function Partition Assignment Program Addresses 3733 3740 Program Address 3733 Program Address 3734 Program Address 3735 Data Digit1 Data Digit 2 Data Digit1 Data Digit 2 Data Digit 1 Data Digit 2 ai DJ L I DJ DJ ie Select Option D Function 1 Function 2 Function 3 Function 4 Function 5 Function 6 Belongs to Partition 1 0 Belongs to Partition 2 Belongs to Partition 3 Program Address 3736 Program Address 3737 Program Address 3738 Belongs to Partition 4 Data Digit1 Data Digit 2 Data Digit 1 Data Digit 2 Data Digit 1 Data Digit 2 Belongs to Partition 5 CJ CC CO CO LI Eee Function 7 Function 8 Function 9 Function10 Function 11 Function 12 Belongs to Partition 7 6 Belongs to Partition 8 Follows all Partitions 8 Program Address 3739 Program Address 3740 Data Digit1 Data Digit 2 Data Digit 1 Data Digit 2 EA ee Function 13 Function 14 Function 15 Must Be 0 12 34 Dual Phone Line Bell Supervision Module Output Programming Program Address 1520 Example The Dual Phone Line Bell Supervision Module is the DS7420i To program the Dual Phone Line Bell Supervision See section 1 13 for further details Moguls supervise Prone eee ang Phone te When in Central Station or Local Commercial Fire Mode this address will be Data Digit 1 2 Data Digit 2 0 forced to specific values see section 12 15 1 and 12 15 2 Enter the
484. the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Program Address 0 1 6 9 Enter Data Digit 1 3 Enter Data Digit 2 0 Enter the pound key Data Digit Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode 1 2 Enter the Data Digit as a Select Options 1 Je Te a fs Te 7 Te Te fort fapsyars o ME e Parion zaam Erea fo Partons cam Erea f Panton uc Enabed Select Options Panton 5 ue Arm Enabled anion 6 uk Arm Era Panton 7 uk Arm Era Panton uk Arm Era DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 12 10 Kevpad Assignment Programming Program Addresses 0173 0180 Kevpad Assignment Programming is where vou assign the kevpad tvpe and the partition it belongs to Example To program Kevpad 1 as an Alpha Kevpad that is assigned to Partition 1 PA 0173 Data Digit 1 1 Data Digit 2 0 7 PA 0208 Data Digit 1 a Data Digit 2 lok See Glossarv section 7 6 for further details Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Note Enter the Program Address 0 1 7 8 Data Digit 1 Ni Enter Data Digit 1 1 Enter Data Digit 2 OJEnter the pound key Enter the Program Address 0 2 0 8 Enter Data Digit 1 0 Enter Data Digit 2 OJEnter the pound key f Program the next Address Program a different Address or Exit the Programmer s Mode Each keypad must have its own Bus address This m
485. ting Tips Below are some problems you may encounter 1 When starting WDSRP get a General Protection Fault or mo dem not found message e You are running multiple instances for example you have selected the WDSRP 1 icon twice of WDSRP at the same time on the computer Minimize all operating programs and the program manager to find the duplicate instance of WD SRP 2 The panel does not answer The panel is not programmed to auto answer If panel is set to factory default it will not answer The manual line seize command is not issued correctly Use PIN 86 or 86 not 83 to seize the line The answering machine answers Use answering machine override or manually seize the line 3 WDSRP does not answer the phone e _WDSRP is not programmed to answer Go to Utilities Prefer ences and set a valid ring count WDSRP is not logged out It will not answer when you are using the program unless you go to the Account screen and select pickup See Section 3 5 WDSRP User s Guide 4 WDSRP does not communicate with panel e The modem may be incompatible with WDSRP Incompatible modems may appear to work as they will dial out the panel will answer but no communication takes place See the README TXT file for compatible modems 5 Panel answers the phone and then hangs up e Log in rejected because the agency or passcode do not match Observe the Status Bar as it will tell you why commu nications wer
486. tion 13 4 3 Central Station Burglarv Alarm 13 5 Commercial Fire Alarm 13 6 Wiring and Programming information for installa tions using the Ademco AB 12 Bell Housing 68 14 0 Report Programming 14 1 4 2 Format 14 2 BFSK Format 14 3 Pager Format 15 0 Report Programming Values Sent 15 1 SIA Format 15 2 Contact I D Format 16 0 Multiplex Zone Addressing Guide 17 0 Troubleshooting Guide 17 1 Keypad Problems 17 2 Reporting Problems 17 3 Zone Problems 17 4 General System Problems 18 0 Program Addresses Index Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 1 0 Specifications 1 1 Enclosure Housing 1 The standard enclosure is manufactured from 20 Ga cold rolled steel and measures 12 5 Wide bv 14 5 High bv 3 Deep 31 8 cm Wide by 36 8 cm High by 7 6 cm Deep A keyed lock is includ ed and this enclosure has provision for an optional tamper switch required for commercial burglary applications for monitoring the door 1 2 Temperature Storage and Operating Temperature 32 to 120 F 0 to 49 C 1 3 Power NOTE The total current output capacity for all auxiliary devices including keypads and smoke detectors 1 5 A standby 2 5 A alarm The following ratings are maximum values The total combined output cannot exceed the max load current Input power Auxiliary regulated power U L Listed Auxiliary power U L Listed Alarm Power Output Auxiliary power voltage range Optional Standby ba
487. tion 5 Output Function 6 Output Function 7 Output Function 8 Output Function 9 Output Function 10 Output Function 11 Output Function 12 Output Function 13 Output Function 14 Output Function 15 Dual Phone Line Bell Supervision Module Output Comm Test Report Timer Remote Programmer Timer Test Report amp Remote Programmer Call Out Alpha for Partition 1 Alpha for Partition 2 Alpha for Partition 3 Alpha for Partition 4 Alpha for Partition 5 Alpha for Partition 6 Alpha for Partition 7 Alpha for Partition 8 Alpha for Zone Number 1 Alpha for Zone Number 2 Alpha for Zone Number 3 Alpha for Zone Number 4 Alpha for Zone Number 5 Alpha for Zone Number 6 Alpha for Zone Number 7 Alpha for Zone Number 8 Alpha for Zone Number 9 Alpha for Zone Number 10 Alpha for Zone Number 11 Alpha for Zone Number 12 Alpha for Zone Number 13 Alpha for Zone Number 14 Alpha for Zone Number 15 Alpha for Zone Number 16 Alpha for Zone Number 17 Alpha for Zone Number 18 Alpha for Zone Number 19 Alpha for Zone Number 20 Alpha for Zone Number 21 Alpha for Zone Number 22 Alpha for Zone Number 23 Alpha for Zone Number 24 Alpha for Zone Number 25 Alpha for Zone Number 26 DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Address 2070 2086 2102 2118 2134 2150 2166 2182 2198 2214 2230 2246 2262 2278 2294 2310 2326 2342 2358 2374 2390 2406 2422 2438 2454 2470 2486 2502 2518 2534 2550 2566 2582 2598 2614 2630 2646
488. tion of the keypad displays A Master keypad can be assigned to any of the partitions Any number of the 15 allowable keypads can be a Master key pad When using the common area it is suggested that a Master keypad be used and that it is assigned to the common area 7 7 Emergency Key Programming Note Do not label these keys if they are unprogrammed Only the Akey may be programmed and labeled as the Fire key DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Note These keys are not intended to substitute for Listed manu al pull boxes s Fire Key The emergency key key A at the bottom left of the keypad entry area is the Fire Key If programmed the key will activate a fire alarm when pressed for 2 seconds It may be programmed for a steady or pulsed alarm Note The Fire Key will generate the fire alarm sounders in the partition that activated the Fire Key Any other partitions in use will only have their keypad sounders activated All key pad displays will be the same e Special Emergency Key The emergency key key B at the bottom center of the keypad entry area is the Emergency Key If programmed the key will activate a supplementary or an aux iliary type alarm when pressed for 2 seconds It may be programmed for a silent steady or pulsed alarm e Panic Key The emergency key key C at the bottom right of the keypad entry area is the Panic Key If programmed the key will activate a panic alarm when pressed fo
489. to the control panel is standard 22 AWG 0 8 mm non shielded telephone quad 4 wire cable The following is a chart of general wiring guidelines Wall surface A mounting holes n DS7400Xi DS7080i DS7060 f Wire Type oo Max number of Keypads allowed 4 4 per System Max distance alowed ell 1 000 feet 300 m 1 000 feet 300 m 1 000 feet 300 m Sia e Contro mounting slots Wire 2 entrance q and each Keypad Max distance of K Keypad Wiring 6 000 feet 1800 m 6 000 feet 1800 m 1 000 feet 300 m Q per System 3 25 8 3 cm 2 0 Location Figure B Rear view of keypad base Ideally one keypad should be located close to the primary entry exit door of the premises and within 1 000 feet 300 m of the control Wall Surface Mount Using the base as a template mark the panel Because control panels will support more than one keypad location for the 4 mounting holes and the wire cable entrance on the installation of additional keypads is available at secondary entry the mounting surface exit zones or other strategic locations throughout the premises Provide an appropriate opening in the mounting surface for the wiring Note The keypads are not intended for outdoor installations Pre start the mounting screws 3 0 Mounting Do not secure the base at this time e Switch or Outlet Box Mount Use either set of mounting holes for mounting to a single gang box
490. trol communications with the control panel CANCEL This command will return you to the previous screen 4 3 2 Edit Data This command will allow you to edit all Account information It will take you to the Edit Account window From here you may choose the categories information you wish to edit Edit Account BLANKY32 General Keypad Output assignments Partitions Phone control Remote access Zone functions Zone programming Reporting System parameters PINs Commercial fire Time windows R5 232 interface Ardis Save Cancel Accept this dialog box and changes made WDSRP User s Guide 4 3 3 Status The Clear Status command will clear the Status field in the Find Ac count window Current Panel Status Zone status Bypass Status l 8 1 OK gt 9 16 OK 2 IT 24 Disabled gt 25 32 Trouble status Control fault Okay Low battery Okay AC Failure Okay Communicator Okay MPX bus fault Okay Radio fault Okay AUX power Okay Option fault Okay Outputs Zone group Programmable 2 l Resettable beeper Permanent beeper Disabled gt 33 40 OK gt fil 48 Disabled gt 49 56 Disabled gt 57 64 Octal module 2 Octal output _ Octal output2 l er kein kaz Partition state 123 5 8 li l 80 bai uE z Bam alae 2 72 gt 89 Octal output 6 Perimeterarm gt gt gt PoP ae gt 97 Octal output 7 Disarm 4 4 4
491. trol panel will alternate back to phone number one It will alter nate between both phone numbers until successful DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide 7 13 Report Programming e Reports For pulse formats reports are programmed by entering data in the reporting and extended digits The report will send the data programmed for each event For SIA and Contact ID the report formats are fixed and may be activated by placing a 1 in the reporting digit To disable a report enter a 0 in the reporting digit To send the Man No along with Open and Close reports pro gram an F enter 5 at the keypad in the extended digit Keypad Fire Alarm This report is sent when a fire alarm has been activated by the A emergency key Keypad Fire Restoral This report is sent when a keypad fire alarm has been restored using the System Reset command Zone Function Alarm An alarm report is sent when a zone alarm occurs Alarm reports are enabled by zone function Program this report for any zone functions you wish to send an alarm report about For local zones no reports do not program an alarm re port The zone number will automatically be sent for this report in SIA or Contact ID format Keypad Emergency Alarm This report is sent when an emer gency alarm has been activated using the B emergency key Keypad Panic This report is sent when an emergency alarm has been activated using the C emergency key Zone Functio
492. ts the zone parameters for all zones in a control com municator Included is information on Zone number type bypass restore 24 hour response time trouble outputs report code restore code and the zone name Cross Matrix Programming DS7400X DS7400Xi and DS7400Xi Ver 3 only This report lists the Output Functions and the zone and partition the output functions are linked to Reporting Codes This report lists all the reporting codes which are sent in reports to the Central Station 4 4 Templates The purpose of a Template is to create a blueprint of commonly used programming values This will allow you to create new accounts quickly based on the various Templates you have created For example Many systems share the same information such as central station phone numbers reporting formats bell timers etc A Template can be created with these values Subsequent accounts created using the Template would automatically have this informa tion To set up a new account the programmer would have to enter the information that was specific to each new account such as user codes and zone configuration Whenever you modify a Template all those accounts connected to it will be updated as well This allows you to edit multiple account types from a single Template However if you modify data in the accounts to differ from the Tem plate whenever you update that Template it will not update those fields that have been changed in the ac
493. ttery P334 Control panel current draw 18 VAC 50 VA 50 Hz 60 Hz 12 VDC 1 0 Amax 12 VDC 1 0 Amax 12 VDC 1 75 Amax 12 V special application 12 V 7 0 AH 35 AH max 175 mA Standby 250 mA Alarm 1 4 Outputs e Alarm Output 12 VDC 1 75 A output Can be pro grammed for steadv or pulsed out put Solid state current sink 1 0 A max Shorts to ground when activated Connect device to Aux power pos itive Can be used for alarm arm ing state or access control This output is generally programmable Solid state voltage source 500 mA max Can be used for alarm arm ing state or access control This output is generally programma ble For use with such compatible devices as the Listed DS250 with a 4 wire base Current draw should be subtracted from either maximum auxiliary or maximum alarm current draw Not investigated to the requirements of UL294 Programmable Output 1 Programmable Output 2 1 5 Zones 8 on board zones Up to 128 total zones with expansion modules Zone Response Time 300 ms 1 6 Keypads Maximum of keypads Maximum wire length each Maximum wire length total 15 Keypads 1000 feet 305 m 6000 feet 1830 m in system 4 conductor unshielded 22 AWG 0 8 mm Telephone quad or 18 AWG 1 0 mm quad wiring can be home run or daisy chained NOTE No more than 2 keypads 22 AWG or 3 keypads 18 DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Gui
494. u to set up the ARDIS radio functions for the ARDIS communication module Edit ARDIS SAMPLE Thomas J Brown Open f close report routing r Use Phone iise ARDS _ Use Both l Try g and Hist Phone attempts Alarm f trouble report routing Stem report routing el Use Phong iise ARDES _ Use Beth _ Tey phone Hrot r Use Phare _ Use AHDS _ Use Both l Try phone Hrm Check to try ARDIS before the phone line Copyright 1994 96 Detection Systems Inc Once vou have completed the necessarv editing choose one of the three commands to save or cancel these editions Thev are as fol lows O K save changes and EXIT This command will save all the changes and return vou back to the Find Account win dow Save and continue editing This command will save all of the changes and keep vou at the Edit Account screen if more editing is needed Cancel no changes saved This command will delete all the changes you have just made and return you back to the Find Account window If you choose the Cancel command the cancel challenge window will open Do you wich to discard the changes CAUTION Changes have been made YES discards the changes NO saves the changes CANCEL returns to the editor Pix O You must choose to cancel the changes If YES is selected the changes will be discarded If NO is selected the changes are saved and the program will return to the EDIT Account scr
495. ual Comm Test Address 220 Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit Remote Program Successful Address 221 Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit Remote Program Unsuccessful Address 222 Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit Local Program Successful Address 223 Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit 1 2 Local Program Unsuccessful Address 224 Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit 1 2 System Trouble Address 225 Default 00 DS7080i Reference Guide Reporting Extended Digit Digit System Trouble Restoral Address 226 Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit 1 Exit Error Address 227 Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit Recent Closing Address 228 Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit 1 2 System Test l l Address 229 Default 00 Reporting Extended Digit Digit 1 2 System Test Restoral ii i j Address 230 Default 00 Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc 10 18 Account Code Programming Program Addresses 233 and 235 Example To program Phone 1 Account Code to be 2332 Data Digit 1 2 Data Digit 2 3 Data Digit 3 3 Data Digit 4 2 Enter the Programmer s Mode 9 8 7 6 0 Enter the Program Address 2 3 3 Enter Data Digit 1 2 Enter Data Digit 2 3 Enter Data Digit 3 3 Enter Data Digit 4 2 Enter the Pound button Program the next Ad
496. uld be changed to one of your personal prefer ence and must be programmed as a Master Code PINs should never be programmed with common sequences such as 1111 or 2468 because they are easily violated 7 4 2 Removing a PIN To remove a PIN enter a Master Code 0 0 the User Number of the PIN to be canceled and then again User Number 001 can not be canceled in this manner This chart will guide you through the steps necessary to change a PIN It is recommended that this procedure be performed at a DS7447 keypad No visual cues will be given from a DS7445 keypad Steps to Change a PIN Command Sequence If Accepted the Displav Reads TE derine Masten Ode Master Code 0 Q User Change display will scroll to this Programming Mode A 4 Enter the Authority Level the 4 Enter the Authority Level Level 5 Enter the PIN 6 Enter the PIN again followed by the key O through 16 through 6 Any 4 digits Do not press PIN same 4 digits as above then Enter User No 001 0XX Enter Authority Level Level 0 6 Enter PIN Enter PIN Ener PIN Again Erwin End with A anali beep will sound to signifv acceptance of the new PIN The control panel will exit vou from the Master Code Programming Mode after about 15 seconds without a kevstroke 7 4 3 PIN Authority Levels 0 Master Can enter all commands add or change PIN
497. umber 118 Alpha for Zone Number 119 Alpha for Zone Number 120 Alpha for Zone Number 121 Alpha for Zone Number 122 Alpha for Zone Number 123 Alpha for Zone Number 124 Alpha for Zone Number 125 Alpha for Zone Number 126 Alpha for Zone Number 127 Alpha for Zone Number 128 Octal Relay Partition Assign Octal Relay Partition Assign Octal Relay Partition Assign Octal Relay Partition Assign Octal Relay Partition Assign Octal Relay Partition Assign Octal Relay Partition Assign Octal Relay Partition Assign Output Func Part Assign Output Func Part Assign Output Func Part Assign Output Func Part Assign Output Func Part Assign Output Func Part Assign Output Func Part Assign Output Func Part Assign Phone Number 1 Phone Number 2 Phone Number 3 Svmbols 24 Hour Zone 15 4 2 Format 69 A A C Fail Report 45 AC Fail Report 19 AC Restoral Report 19 Access Output 16 Access PIN 21 Account Code Programming 50 Ademco AB 12 Bell 68 Alarm on Open 15 Alarm on Short 15 Alarms Fire 25 Alarms Invisible 15 Alarms Silent 15 Alpha Programming 58 Answering Machine Bypass 19 ARDIS 49 Arm Only 46 Arm Only PIN 21 Arming Custom 1 14 Arming Force 1 Arming Maximum Security 14 Arming Normal 1 14 Arming Perimeter 1 14 Arming Perimeter Instant 14 Arming Warning 46 Authority Leve 21 Automatic Arming 24 Battery Restoral Report 19 Battery Test 1 Battery Sounder Test 27 BFSK Format 70 By
498. un in conduit or equivalently protected against mechanical injury within 20 ft 6 1 m of the control equipment This keypad should be assigned as address 1 Multiple Keypad Use One keypad only must be used on the option bus at any address from 11 14 and must meet the fol lowing requirements The keypad must be mounted to the front of the control enclo sure OR mounted within the same room as the control equip ment and the wire is run in conduit or equivalently protected against mechanical injury within 20 ft 6 1 m of the control equipment All other keypads should be connected to the keypad bus and may be placed as needed within the noted wiring limitations in the installation manual One keypad must be assigned as address 1 7 12 Open Close Report Control Programming e Open and Close Reports If programmed these reports are sent when the system is armed or disarmed They may be sent independently for the opening and closing of each partition or the first partition to open and the last partition to close may send the reports Send Trouble at Close for Bypassed Zones If programmed a trouble report will be sent for each zone bypassed when the sys tem is armed Alternate between both Phone Numbers If programmed open and close reports will be sent to phone number one first If phone number one does not pick up the control panel will alternate to phone number two If phone number two does not pick up the con
499. ur first task will be to install the WDSRP program onto your com puter For directions on this task see Section 1 0 Installing the Soft ware WDSRP User s Guide 1 0 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE The WDSRP Setup program will copv all the necessarv files to vour hard drive and will configure vour svstem bv asking vou a few simple questions A README TXT file is now included on the installation disks which contains valuable information regarding the latest release of the software and modem compatibilitv The README TXT file is copied into the WDSRP directory during setup You may use any text editor to read this file 1 1 Equipment Needs 1 1 1 Recommended Equipment An 80486 DX 33 MHz or faster PC with at least 10 Meg of hard disk space free and at least 8 Meg of RAM A working version of Microsoft Windows 3 1 or higher Win dows 95 or OS 2 Version 2 1 or higher DOS version 6 0 or higher A Hayes Smartmodem 300 1200 1200B 2400 or 2400B Open the README TXT file for the latest informa tion on modem compatibility AVGA or better monitor A mouse or other pointing device 1 1 2 Minimum Equipment Requirements NOTE WDSRP will function with the equipment below however the operation may be slower than desired and some loss of functionality may occur such as the inability to use multiple phone lines and print large reports Single phone line usage is recommended in this configuration 1 An 80386 SX 16 MHz PC
500. ur zone Program Address 01 must be programmed as 2 Programmable Output 3 must be programmed See Address 08 Outputs 10 0 FCC COMPLIANCE NOTICE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installa tion This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interfer ence will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television recep tion which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that of the receiver Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help 11 0 FCC PHONE CONNECTION NOTICE TO USERS This control complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules On the inside of the enclosure is a label that contains among other information the FCC Registration Number and the Ringer Equivalence Number REN for this equip
501. ure Knock out Cover Kit Carriage bolt these pins are facing toward the enclosure Outside of enclosure Plug ring i Plug ring Lock washer Inside of Nut enclosure Step 2 Install Conduit or Knock out Cover Kit as required Carrage bolt Plug ring Lock washer Nut Enclosure PaA 1 ea 2 ea 1 ea 1 ea Peg Install conduit or Knock out Cover Kit here Control Panel AE3 AE4 Enclosure L L LL Step 3 Place Attack Enclosure over Control Panel Step 4 Insert ALL 21 Enclosure Screws Detection Systems PTY Ltd Unit 21 45 Gilby Road Mount Waverley Victoria 3149 Australia 61 3 9558 8088 Fax 61 3 9558 8089 Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc Detection Systems PTY Ltd Detection Systems Int l Inc Unit 2 The Riverside Centre 19 Rue du 19 Mars 78130 148 James Ruse Drive Les Mureaux France Parramatta NSW 2150 Australia Phone Fax 33 1 34 74 9576 61 2 891 4944 Fax 61 2 891 5844 Detection Systems Inc 130 Perinton Parkway Fairport New York USA 14450 9199 716 223 4060 800 289 0096 Fax 716 223 9180 Detection Systems Ltd Unit 13 18 17 F New Commerce Centre 19 On Sum Street Shatin N T Hong Kong 852 2635 2815 Fax 852 2648 7986 AE3CC Installation Guide P N 32348B DS7488 Octal Relav Module Installation Instructions 1 0 Description The DS7488 is an Octal Relav Module that provides 8 form C relav outputs for additi
502. urrent is not exceeded see Section 2 4 PO3 Provides 12 V 800 mA when activated Protected by Fuse 2 POC PO3 2 3 4 5 11 12 13 14 15 ie 17 18 19 20 21 22 KA NANLA D D NA Jo NOTE PO3 output current is 800 mA minus the Eon eho total keypad current Example If four 7447 keypads at 100 mA each are used the current is 400 mA 800 mA 400mA 400mA available keypads at PO3 Battery Panel Grounds are indicated by black areas surrounding the numbers of corresponding RED BLK terminals on the wiring diagram DS7060 Reference Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc T Telco Line GREEN House Phones BROWN Ring House Phones GRAY Typical 4 Wire Smoke Detector Wiring NOTE 2wire smoke detectors cannot be used with this equipment Resistor EOL Relay NOTE EOL Relay shown in de energized power off condition TH RH R eA NNA IN AISA ANA Ring Telco Line RED Is 5 0 OPERATING GUIDE 5 1 Understanding the DS7443 DS7445 and DS7447 Keypads The DS7443 is a 6 zone LED keypad its LEDs represent the zones of the system The DS7445 is an 8 zone LED keypad its LEDs represent the zones of the system LEDs for zones 7 and 8 are not used The DS7447 is an alpha numeric LCD keypad All three keypads display information on various control panel functions A built in sounder is used to annunciate keystroke entries and as an interior warning d
503. used in U L Listed Requirements The ground wire provided with the enclosure must be connected between the Earth GND connection on the control and the enclosure tab The keypad panic alarm output must follow the corresponding zone function s programming e g fire pulsing or steady if not a combination burglary steady In all cases the special emergency keys must be silent The ground start feature shall not be programmed 13 3 PROGRAMMING THE DS7400Xi When used in U L Listed Requirements the control must conform to certain programming requirements The following is a list of the required program entries and required accessories for specific U L Listed Requirements 13 3 1 Household Fire Alarm using Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter with local bell The control must be installed in accordance with NFPA 72 Required Accessories e Atleast one Detection Systems Inc Model DS250 Series smoke detector with an MB Series base or another Listed compatible smoke detector One Wheelock 46T G10 12 bell or 34T 12 horn will provide 85db for UL985 and NFPA 72 requirements other Listed compatible devices with a voltage range of 10 2 to 14 0 V may be used is required for this application and must be installed inside the protected area The standard control enclosure can be used At least one DS7447 or DS7445 Keypad must be used Four wire detectors must be used with Listed power supervision devices A compatible Listed 4 wire det
504. used to arm and disarm the system It remains active until the panel is disarmed with any other valid code Refer to Section 8 9 Address 09 to activate the Guest Code option If PIN 15 is used as a guest code remember to change PIN 15 according to Section 5 2 5 20 Emergency Procedures Identifying Alarm Sounds Your alarm system may be programmed for a steady alarm sound or a pulsed alarm sound It is important to learn the difference between a fire alarm sound and an intrusion alarm sound before you are confronted with an actual emergency Silencing Alarms All alarms can be silenced with any PIN that has disarm privileges Entering your PIN Off will silence the alarm and turn off disarm the control DS7060 Reference Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc A Cautionarv Note How you respond to an alarm will depend mostly on the type and time of the alarm You should seek the advice of your installing company as they install your system not later e g after an alarm to develop a response plan Above All Else Common Sense Should Prevail If there is any threat or hint of danger to yourself or others on the premises such as in the event of a fire alarm everyone should be instructed to leave the premises immediately Do not enter the premises unless accompanied by the appropriate Emergency Services personnel or after they have given the OK to enter Caution When Entering A Building If the bells and sirens are on
505. ust also be selected on the keypad via its address pins See In Guide P N 25902 One keypad must be selected as keypad 1 Defaults The default if using only one keypad is an Alpha keypad belonging to partition one Program Address 0173 Data Digit 1 Data Digit 2 LI Keypad 1 Keypad 2 default 1 default 0 Program Address 0177 Program Address 0174 Data Digit 1 Data Digit 2 LI Keypad 3 Keypad 4 default 0 default 0 Program Address 0178 Program Address 0175 Data Digit 1 Data Digit 2 El Kevpad 5 Kevpad 6 default 0 default 0 Program Address 0179 Program Address 0176 Data Digit1 Data Digit 2 CI LI Kevpad 7 Kevpad 8 default 0 default 0 Program Address 0180 Data Digit 1 Data Digit 2 Data Digit 1 Data Digit 2 Data Digit 1 Data Digit 2 Data Digit1 Data Digit 2 Ea ET ea E Ee a al BI Keypad 9 Keypad 10 Keypad 11 Keypad 12 Keypad 13 Keypad 14 Keypad 15 Must Be 0 default 0 default 0 default 0 default 0 default 0 default 0 default 0 Data Digit When in Commercial Fire Mode certain keypads must have specific assignments see section 8 10 Keypads 11 15 are connected to the Option Bus If the DS7412 is connected to the Option Bus at keypad address 13 or 14 keypad 13 or 14 is unavailable Similarly if the DS7420i is connected to the FILI f Option Bus at kevpad address 15 kevpad 15 is unavailable and if the DS7488 is connected to the Option Bus a
506. v Residences Having and Practicing an Escape Plan Installation Considerations 6 0 SYSTEM WORKSHEETS 7 0 HOW TO PROGRAM THE DS7060 8 0 PROGRAMMING THE DS7060 Address 01 Zone Programming Address 02 Zone Bypass Address 03 Zone Action Address 04 Output Type Address 05 Zone Response Time Address 06 Programmed Response Time Address 07 Zone Restoral Options Address 08 Outputs Address 09 User Control Address 10 General Control Address 11 Keypad Assignment Address 12 thru 18 Alpha Label Address 19 Special Keys Address 20 Report Control Address 21 Phone Number Control Address 22 Dial Attempts Address 23 Time Delays Address 24 Keypad Report Address 25 Zone Alarm Report Address 26 Zone Alarm Restoral Report Address 27 Zone Trouble Report Address 28 Zone Trouble Restoral Report Address 29 Zone Bypass Report Address 30 Zone Bypass Restoral Report Address 31 Open Close Duress Report Address 32 Battery AC Report Address 33 Programming Report Address 34 System Report Address 35 Exit Error Recent Closing Comm Failure Report Address 36 Test Reports System Test Address 37 Account Codes Address 38 Phone 1 Format Address 39 Phone 2 Format Address 40 41 Phone 1 Reporting Address 42 43 Phone 2 Reporting Address 44 45 Phone 3 Remote Programming Address 46 Programmer amp Master Codes 8 35 Address 47 Default EEPROM 8 36 Address 48
507. val if the faulted zones bypassed or leaving a three beep error tone will occur indicating Auto Bypass has not been accepted or allowed 5 9 Zone Bypass There may be occasions when it is desirable or necessary to temporarily bypass one or more zones prior to arming the system Bypass commands only work when the control panel is disarmed For instance an open window may cause the DS7447 display to read Not Ready followed by the zone number The DS7443 or DS7445 may have one of its zone LEDs on steady Only one zone may be bypassed each time the command is used If more than one zone requires bypassing repeat the command for each zone to be bypassed NOTE See Section 5 7 Force Arming for another method of zone bypassing Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc DS7060 Reference Guide This chart explains the procedure for bvpassing a faulted zone prior to arming the svstem TYPE OF BYPASSING COMMAND WHAT WILL DESIRED SEQUENCE HAPPEN Bvpass Faulted PIN Bypass Zone The Status light will begin to flash if no Zones other zones are violated Read Bypassed PIN Bypass Bypass will be displayed DS7447 Zones followed by the zone number of any bypassed zones The DS7443 or DS7445 will flash the zone LED of the zone being bypassed Clear Individual PIN Bypass Zone Individual zone bypasses will be cleared Bypassed Zone s Clear all PIN Bypass All bypasses will be cleared Bypasses
508. ve conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate 12 2 Terminal Requirements The Load Number LN assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop which is used by the device to prevent overloading The termination on a loop may consist of any combina tion of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100 The Load Number of the DS7060 is 2 12 3 RFI Requirements This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations Cet appareil numerique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Reglement sur le material b
509. ve you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone service If you experience trouble with this equipment please contact the manufacturer for information on obtaining service or repairs The telephone company may ask that you disconnect this equipment from the network until the problem has been corrected or until you are sure that the equipment is not malfunctioning The repairs to this equipment must be made by manufacturer and not by the user Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc To guard against accidental disconnection there is ample room to mount the Telco jack to the inside of the Control cabinet The operation of this Control may also be affected if events such as accidents or acts of God cause an interruption in telephone service 7 0 Canadian Department of Communications General Installation Requirements Notice The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecom munications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company s inside wiring associated with a singl
510. w Zone or Output Function 15 Hint Address Zone Number 17 To program Output Functions see section 12 33 0 5 are Hex values They will display as A F at the keypads 12 4 Zone Partition Assignment Program Addresses 1248 1311 In Zone Partition Assignment each zone is assigned to a parti tion By default all zones are assigned to partition 1 Data Digit The partition assignment for odd numbered zones is programmed 3 1 2 in the first data digit of these addresses The partition assign Select Option DD ment for even numbered zones is programmed in the second Belongs to Partition 1 10 _ _ gt data digit of these addresses Belongs to Partition 2 7 Select Option DD For example to assign zone 1 to partition 1 and zone 2 to parti Belongs to Partition 3 P tion 2 program address 1248 as 01 Belongs to Partition 4 Belongs to Partition 1 o Belongs to Partition 5 Belongs to Partition 2 Belongs to Partition 6 Belongs to Partition 3 iti Belongs to Partition 4 3 Partition Assignment Address Belongs to Partition 7 6 Belonas to Partition 5 For Zones 1 and 2 1248 Belongs to Partition 8 B k For Zones 3 and 4 1249 Belongs to Partition 6 For Zones 5 and 6 1250 Belongs to Partition 7 6 For Zones 7 and 8 1251 Belongs to Partition8 7 Zones 9 through 128 1252 1311 E kal DS7400Xi Ver 3 Reference Guide Copyright 1995 96 Detection Systems Inc 12 5 Zone Bvpass Programming Program Addr
511. window Copyright 1994 96 Detection Systems Inc 4 3 7 Historv Commands Choose the History command from the right hand column command buttons This command is used to access the Account s history buff er The History window will appear Your computer s memory will deter mine the total amount of history events you will be able to scroll through History 7400XIDEMO Detection Systems Inc PH Event Keypad restoral Program accessed locally Program accessed locally Program accessed remotely Programmed remotely Date change remotely set to 8 13 96 Time change remotely set to 6 12 PM Tue Program accessed remotely Program accessed locally Date change remotely set to 0 13 96 Time change remotely set to 12 23 PM Tue Programmed locally Date change remotely set to 8 13 96 Time change remotely set to 12 26 PM Tue Date change remotely set to 0 13 96 Time change remotely set to 12 37 PM Tue Programmed remotely Program accessed remotely Date change remotely set to 8 13 96 Time change remotely set to 6 13 PM Tue 8 13 1996 8 13 1996 8 13 1996 8 13 1996 8 13 1986 8 13 1996 8 13 1996 8 13 1996 8 13 1996 8 13 1996 8 13 1996 8 13 1996 8 13 1996 Print reports from this record or database to paper or disk 12 23 PM 12 24 PM 12 24 PM 12 24 PM 12 26 PM 12 26 PM 12 26 PM 12 37 PM 12 37 PM 12 37 PM 6 12 PM 6 13 PM 6 13 PM 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
512. with one hand then open the door about one inch Be prepared to slam the door shut if there is any pressure against the door or if any hot air rushes in If there is no evidence of excessive heat or pressure leave the room and close the door behind you Shout appropriate instruc tions to all family members and immediately leave the building via the pre planned routes If heavy smoke is present drop to your hands and knees or crawl to remain below the smoke level 7 1 3 Installation Considerations Proper location of detection devices is one of the most critical fac tors in a fire alarm system Living Dining Room Room Basement Smoke Detector Asmoke detector should be located on each story including basements but excluding crawl spaces and unfinished attics The following are some general considerations e Smoke detectors should not be installed in dead air spaces or close to ventilating or air conditioning outlets because smoke may be circulated away from the detector Locations near air inlets should be favored e Avoid areas subject to normal smoke concentrations such as kitch ens garages or near fireplaces Do not install smoke detectors where normal area temperatures are above 100 degrees F 38 degrees C or below 32 degrees F 0 degrees C Areas of high humidity and dust concentrations should be avoid ed The edge of ceiling mounted detectors should be no closer than 4 inches 10 cm from any wall
513. xit the Keypad3 leje jejejejel Programmer Mode Keypads lejelojojolo Note For Program Address 011 Data Digit 2 when programmed as a 7 Keypad 3 is LED and Keypad 4 is Alpha When programmed as an 8 Keypad 3 is Alpha Keypad 4 is LED Page 26 Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc DS7080i Reference Guide 10 5 Alpha Description Programming Program Addresses 012 155 The following chart lists the Program Addresses used to program Alpha Numeric characters for each zone Each zone mav contain up to 16 characters see chart Private Label Zone 1 Program Addresses 012 027 Program Addresses 028 043 Program Addresses 044 059 Program Addresses 060 075 Program Addresses 076 091 Program Addresses 092 107 Zone 6 Zone 7 Zone 8 Program Addresses 108 123 Program Addresses 124 139 Program Addresses 140 155 Words are created one character at a time Each character uses two data digits The values are shown below Value Character 86 h 96 06 16 26 Character Value Character Value Character blank space 83 8 05 93 9 15 y 03 25 13 35 23 45 55 65 75 85 95 05 15 25 35 45 55 06 16 26 36 46 56 66 76 SP KONKXKS lt CHHDOV TTT OANS XS KS OFTHITQTDOSB ZT RTO lt gt A B C D E F G H l J K L M N O NOoORWN O Example Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Characte
514. xt letter Enter 2 for the letter a then press the right arrow key for the next letter Enter 7 twice for the letter r then press the right arrow key for the next letter Enter 6 for the letter m Enter Program the next address program a different address or exit the Programmer s Mode DS7060 Reference Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc 8 13 Address 19 Special Keys DEFAULT Disabled FIRE KEY A Invisible Steady Audible HELP KEY B Pulsing Audible PANIC KEY C Disabled Special Key not programmed Invisible Special Key programming for no display of alarm on the keypad or on outputs Not to be used with the Fire Key Steady Audible Special Key programming for steady alarms on outputs and keypad sounders Will turn on steady unless alarms are already pulsing Pulsing Audible Special Key programming for pulsing alarms on output and keypad sounders Fire Key A The emergency key at the bottom left of the keypad entry area is the Fire Key If programmed the key will activate a fire alarm when pressed for 2 seconds May not be programmed as an invisible alarm Help Key B The help key at the bottom center of the keypad entry area is the Help Key If programmed the key will activate a supplementary or an auxiliary type alarm when pressed for 2 seconds Panic Key C The emergency key at the bottom right of the keypad entry area is the Panic Key If programmed the key wil
515. y PIN System 8 7 8 9 only on the advice of your installing nee will display will display company or if you are certain the RAM Fault System Fault 01 problem has been remedied ROM Fault System Fault 02 If in Residential Mode a PIN is not required for these com EEPROM Fault System Fault 03 mands Ground Fault System Fault 04 Battery Trouble and Communicator Err displays must be TRBL Zone Fault System Fault 05 cleared by the System Reset command sequence even after the problem has been remedied These displays will not self clear All the other error displays will self clear from the key pads once the problem has been remedied 7 6 Remote Program Dial out and Answer This chart will help you to call or answer the Remote Programmer Type of Function Command Sequence What will Happen Remote Program The panel will call the remote Dial out PIN 8 3 programmer The panel will answer a call from the remote programmer Remote Program PIN 8 6 Answer If in Residential Mode a PIN is not required for these commands Phone numbers 1 and 3 must be programmed Phone 1 Account Code must be programmed Copyright 1995 97 Detection Systems Inc DS7080i Reference Guide 7 7 Zone Test This chart explains the procedure for performing a Zone Test It is recommended that the system be tested weekly The Zone Test is used to confirm that detectors will report
516. you to change the arming level or to restart the exit delay so you can exit through an entry exit zone Easy Exit is disabled by default To select the Easy Exit feature see Section 8 10 Address 10 5 6 Turning OFF disarming the System Silencing Alarms Please read Section 5 20 Emergency Procedures prior to being confronted with an emergency event If you have entered the building through a perimeter door you may hear a steady pre alert tone from the keypads If so disarm according to the chart below WARNING If the bells and sirens are on and or the red Armed light is flashing then the keypad is signaling that an alarm has occurred sometime before your arrival The DS7447 will display Zone Alarm The DS7443 or DS7445 zone LEDs will be flashing for the corresponding zone that is in alarm e The keypad will also issue a pulsed tone during the entry delay instead of the usual steady tone e If the alarm has not been previously investigated do not enter the building unless accompanied by the appropriate Emer gency Services personnel This chart explains proper procedures for disarming and or silencing alarms TYPE OF DISARMING COMMAND WHAT WILL HAPPEN 01 0 5 e Disarming the System PIN Off The red Armed light will turn off Pre alert sounders will silence Silencing Alarms PIN Off The red Armed light will turn off Zone LEDs on the DS7443 or DS7445 will turn off Alarms in progress will silence Turn
517. you to connect your computer directly to a DS7400Xi control communicator without the need of a modem or phone line All of the WDSRP features are available using Direct Connect Equipment Required DS7400Xi with control ROM version 2 04 or higher DS7400Xi Ver 3 WDSRP version 1 7R6 or higher DS7412 RS232 Interface DS7447 keypad Remove power from the DS7400Xi and install the DS7412 Connect the RS232 cable between the RS232 connector on the DS7412 and the RS232 Com port on your computer Apply power to the control Program panel address 0206 as 10 and 0207 as 25 to en able the RS232 for remote communications Turn on your computer and start WDSRP Establishing Communications 1 From the WDSRP Utilities menu select Preferences 2 Under operating mode select Direct Connect 3 Exit WDSRP and restart the program to enable the change to direct connect If you used direct connect in the previous session with a panel you may skip steps 1 3 If your next session with a panel will Note Copyright 1994 96 Detection Systems Inc be via the modem you will have to go back to the Preferences selection select your modem then exit and restart WDSRP Remember Anytime you change from direct connect to modem or from modem to direct connect it is necessary to exit WDSRP and restart the program From the main menu select Accounts Locate the account for the panel you wish to communicate with Select
518. ypad Current Draw DS7447 Keypad Current Draw Fuse 1 amp Fuse 2 2 4 Outputs Programmable Output 1 Solid state switch to ground 500 mA max Programmable Output 2 Solid state switch to ground 500 mA max Programmable Output 3 Form C relay contacts available Typical Normally Open contacts that switch to 12 V 800 mA Current draw should be subtracted from either maxi mum auxiliary or maximum alarm current draw Refer to Section 8 8 for detailed Output operation DS7060 Reference Guide 2 5 Zones e 6 zones e Zone Response Time All six zones can be programmed to respond at either 300 100 ms or a programmable time common to all zones that can be configured to be between 10 ms and 2 5 seconds Zones are ignored for 5 seconds after power up and for two seconds after a system reset Refer to Sections 8 2 8 7 for detailed zone operation 2 6 Keypads e Total number of keypads e Maximum wire length total in system e Wire type 4 Keypads 1000 ft 305 m 22 AWG 0 8 mm NOTE Keypads may be up to 1000 ft 305 m from the panel when 22 0 8 mm wire is used and only one keypad is connected to a particular wire run 2 7 Communicator Will report to two phone numbers with full single double and backup reporting Communicated in 3 1 3 1E 3 1 with Parity 3 1E with Parity 4 1 4 2 High Speed 4 9 Pager Contact ID and Personal Dialing formats Refer to Sections 8 14 8 33 for commun
519. ystems Inc DS7060 Reference Guide Address 09 User Control Duress Code 0 Code 14 is a User Code 1 Code 14 is the Duress Code Guest Code 0 Code 15 is a User Code 1 Code 15 is the Guest Code Arming Warning 0 No Alarm 1 2 Second Alarm Keypad Audible During Exit Delay 0 No Audible 1 Audible During Dela Keyswitch Arming Warning 0 No Audible 1 Audible Beep w Arming 2 Beeps with Disarming Duress Code If this option is selected and Code 14 is used to disarm the system a duress report will be sent as the system is otherwise disarmed normally User Code 14 will not arm the system or report duress if the system is not armed Guest Code If this option is selected Code 15 is a guest code It can be enabled by pressing PIN HI 8 4 It will remain active until the panel is disarmed with any other valid code Arming Warning If this option is selected the alarm output will turn on for 2 seconds when the panel is armed Keypad Audible During Exit Delay Selection of this option will cause the keypad sounders to beep during the exit delay time Aone second beep will sound at 5 second intervals changing to a 3 beep tone at 10 and 5 seconds prior to the end of the delay Keyswitch Arming Warning Selecting this option will activate any output programmed as Intrusion Follow Burg Alarm or Follow Burg Alarm and Fire Alarm The output will beep once 200 ms ON when a keyswitch toggle zone arms the system
520. ystems PTY Ltd Unit 2 The Riverside Centre 148 James Ruse Drive Parramatta NSW 2150 Australia 61 2 891 4944 Fax 61 2 891 5844 Detection Systems PTY Ltd Unit 21 45 Gilby Road Mount Waverley Victoria 3149 Australia 61 3 9558 8088 Fax 61 3 9558 8089 3 0 DS7400 Series Programming Refer to the Zone Assignment Programming section of the DS7400 Xi Series Reference Guide for Zone programming information 4 0 Dip Switch Settings The dip switches select which zones will be activated by the loop inputs Set the dip switches as shown in figure A Notwo DS7482s should be set the same The DS7432 occupies 8 zones when connected to the DS7400 Xi series The input loops of the DS7432 correspond to the zones of the control as shown in figure C Zones 9 16 Zones 17 24 Zones 25 32 Zones 33 40 Zones 41 48 Zones 49 56 Zones 57 64 Zones 65 72 Zones 105 112 Zones 113 120 Zones 121 128 Figure A Dip Switch Settings Detection Systems Ltd Unit 13 18 17 F New Commerce Centre 19 On Sum Street Shatin N T Hong Kong 852 2635 2815 Fax 852 2648 7986 Detection Systems Int l Inc 19 Rue du 19 Mars 78130 Les Mureaux France Phone Fax 33 1 34 74 9576 Detection Systems Inc 130 Perinton Parkway Fairport New York USA 14450 9199 Copyright 1993 96 Detection Systems Inc 716 223 4060 800 289 0096 Fax 716 223 9180 DS7432Installation Instructions P N 26090E ore Naber DS7432 Input Loop gt gars ta
521. z gt c fe 2 8 3 B a ru D 8 a B kul 2 aa fa wn D G la dia This equipment is to be installed in accordance with NFPA Standard 72 The control panel compatibiltv identifier is C DS7420i Installation Instructions Copvright O 1995 96 Detection Svstems Inc Installation Instructions for the DS7430 Multiplex Expansion Module 1 0 General Information The DS7430 is a Multiplex Expansion Module for use with the DS7400 Xi Series Control Communicator It connects directly to the DS7400 Xi and provides a two wire multiplex bus for the connection of up to 120 remote points e Current Draw 65 mA H Standby or Alarm e Outputs DC Bus 200 mA Mux Bus 75 mA 2 0 Installation Warning Failure to follow the mounting instructions in this manual may result in damage to the DS7400 Xi Control Panel Caution The DS7430 and DS7400 Xi contain static sensitive components and must be handled with care Follow anti static procedures when handling the modules Install the DS7430 board prior to installing the DS7400 Xi board into the control enclosure If the DS7400 Xi board is already installed in the control enclosure remove the 7400 Xi board at this time Place the DS7400 Xi board on a flat surface with the compo nent side of the board facing up Install the four plastic standoffs in the holes provided in the DS7400 Xi board Avoid bending or flexing the DS7400 Xi boa
522. zones must be programmed Address 03 Zone Action for alarm on short trouble on open value 1 Alarm Output Programming e Program fire zone outputs as pulsed burglar zone outputs as steady Address 04 General Control Programming e Program Address 10 must be programmed as 010 X 00 00 X country dependent e Program Address 10 must be programmed for Swinger Shunt disabled e Program Address 10 must be programmed as Force Arming disabled Grade A Household Burglary Alarm using Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter with local bell The control must be installed in accordance with U L Standard UL1641 Required Accessories e At least one Wheelock 46T G10 12 bell or 34T 12 horn other Listed compatible devices with a voltage range of 10 2 to 14 0 V may be used is required for this application DS7060 Reference Guide Copyright 1996 Detection Systems Inc e The standard DS7060 enclosure can be used A Report Programming e Burglar Zone Reports must be programmed for those zones used e Low Battery Report Program Address 32 must be programmed e AC Failure Report Program Address 32 must be programmed Timer Programming Bell Cutoff Time Program Address 23 must be programmed for not less than 4 minutes e Entry Delay Timer Program Address 23 must be programmed for not longer than 60 seconds e Exit Delay Timer Program Address 23 must be programmed for not longer than 45 seconds General Control Progra

DS7060 User Manual 2

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents